《梵网经》的注释显示巴利原文
1. Brahmajālasuttavaṇṇanā
关于游方者讨论的注释显示巴利原文
Paribbājakakathāvaṇṇanā
如此,在显示第一次大结集之后,为以归结的方式说明该结集在此所示的目的,便说出了“imissā”(于此)等语。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassetvā yadatthaṃ sā idha dassitā, idāni taṃ nigamanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘imissā’’tiādimāha.
1 以上,以共通的方式显示了《梵网经》的外缘起,现在为了注释其内缘起,故说“tattha eva”(就在那里)等。或者,另一种方式是,应当以六种方式进行注释:从联系、从词、从词类、从词义、从审察、从避免过失。其中,“联系”是指教法的联系,也就是世间所说的“引出主题”。而这种联系应当依经中的缘起部分来理解,缘起部分的联系又需依结集来理解。由于在展示第一次大结集时,已显示了缘起部分的联系,所以现在从词等方式开始注释,因此说出“「evaṃ」(如此):这是一个不变词”等。在“metiādīni”(即me等词)之中,像“antarā”(中间)、“ca”(和)等词,是否需要说明它们是不变词呢?不必,因为通过先前的例示已经包含它们,而其它像“ā”、“pati”等词,已由“ādi”(等)字所涵盖。“Padavibhāgo”(词类)是指词句之间的差别,而不是词句的分解。或者,也可说词与词类两者合称为padavibhāga,又或者,词句的分解与分类也通过省略的方式显示巴利原文
1. Ettāvatā ca brahmajālassa sādhāraṇato bāhiranidānaṃ dassetvā idāni abbhantaranidānaṃ saṃvaṇṇetuṃ ‘‘tattha eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā chahi ākārehi saṃvaṇṇanā kātabbā sambandhato padato padavibhāgato padatthato anuyogato parihārato cāti. Tattha sambandho nāma desanāsambandho. Yaṃ lokiyā ‘‘ummugghāto’’ti vadanti. So pana pāḷiyā nidānapāḷivasena, nidānapāḷiyā pana saṅgītivasena veditabboti paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassentena nidānapāḷiyā sambandhassa dassitattā padādivasena saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karonto ‘‘evanti nipātapada’’ntiādimāha. ‘‘Metiādīnī’’ti ettha antarā-sadda-ca-saddānaṃ nipātapadabhāvo, vattabbo, na vā vattabbo tesaṃ nayaggahaṇena gahitattā, tadavasiṭṭhānaṃ āpaṭi-saddānaṃ ādi-saddena saṅgaṇhanato. ‘‘Padavibhāgo’’ti padānaṃ viseso, na pana padaviggaho. Atha vā padāni ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgo, padaviggaho ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgoti vā ekasesavasena padapadaviggahāpi padavibhāga saddena vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha padaviggaho ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho’’tiādibhedesu padesu daṭṭhabbo.
“Atthato”是从词义上来说的。在解释词义时,先用析取义理的方式说明“evaṃ”一词的涵义,因此才开示说“且说‘evaṃ’这个词”等等。“决定”等义——其中的“等”字,应知包含了“此事问”“量”等意义。例如,在“evaṃgatāni, evaṃvidho, evamākāro”(已如是去、如是种类、如是行相)等中,“evaṃ”一词正是用在了“idaṃ”(此)的意义上。既然“gata”(去)是“方式”的同义词,“vidha”(种类)、“ākāra”(行相)同样也是如此,世间人也把与“方式”相关的“去”字用在方式的意义上。在“Evaṃ nu kho...”(是这样吗?……)、“evaṃ su te...”(他们是这样吗?……)、“evaṃ āyupariyanto”(寿命的限度就是这样)等句中,“evaṃ”则分别用于询问和度量。难道不是这样吗?因为在“Evaṃ nu kho”等当中,“evaṃ”体现了询问的方式和限量的方式,所以“evaṃ”岂不正是“方式”义?并非如此。显示巴利原文
Atthatoti padatthato. Taṃ pana padatthaṃ atthuddhārakkamena paṭhamaṃ evaṃ-saddassa dassento ‘‘evaṃsaddo tāvā’’tiādimāha. Avadhāraṇādīti ettha ādi-saddena idamatthapucchāparimāṇādiatthānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi ‘‘evaṃgatāni, evaṃvidho, evamākāro’’tiādīsu idaṃ-saddassa atthe evaṃ-saddo. Gata-saddo hi pakārapariyāyo, tathā vidhākāra-saddā ca. Tathā hi vidhayuttagata-sadde lokiyā pakāratthe vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti, ‘‘evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassu, āmuttamālābharaṇā odātavatthavasanā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārenti, seyyathāpi tvaṃ etarahi sācariyakoti? No hidaṃ bho gotamā’’ti ca ādīsu pucchāyaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, evaṃ āyupariyanto’’ti ca ādīsu parimāṇe. Nanu ca ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, evaṃ su te, evaṃ āyupariyanto’’ti ettha evaṃ-saddena pucchanākāraparimāṇākārānaṃ vuttattā ākārattho eva evaṃ-saddo ti? Na, visesasabbhāvato. Ākāramattavācako hettha ākāratthoti adhippeto, yathā ‘‘evaṃ byākhotiādīsu pana na ākāravisesavācako evañca katvā ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccenā’’tiādīni upamādīsu udāharaṇāni upapannāni honti. Tathā hi ‘‘yathāpi…pe… bahu’’nti? Ettha puppharāsiṭṭhāniyato manussupapattisappurisūpanissayasaddhammasavanayonisomanasikārabhogasampattiādidānādipuññakiriyāhetusamudāyato sobhāsugandhatādiguṇayogato mālāguṇasadisiyo pahūtā puññakiriyā maritabbasabhāvatāya maccena sattena kattabbāti joditattā puppharāsimālāguṇāva upamā, tesaṃ upamākāro yathā-saddena aniyamato vuttoti evaṃ-saddo upamākāranigamanatthoti vattuṃ yuttaṃ. So pana upamākāro niyamiyamāno atthato upamāva hotīti āha ‘‘upamāyaṃ āgato’’ti.
同样,在“应前进”等所教导的、合乎沙门身份的威仪成就中,那种教导的方式,从义理上说就是教诫,因此才说“如此……(中略)……于教诫”。同样,在“世尊正是如此,善逝正是如此”这句话里,对于世尊所说真实不颠倒的义理,那些如实了知的人,以多种方式称扬、赞叹其中的功德,令心踊跃,这便是随喜;此处应当理解为随喜的方式。在“这人正是如此”一句中,则应理解为谴责的方式。而且,由于有“贱种”等辱骂之语紧邻出现,可以知道这种谴责的方式正是由“如此”一词所显示的。正如在此处一样,譬喻等方式,也应视为由于有“花堆”等以譬喻形式被叙述出来而紧邻出现。在“你应如此说”之中,说话的方式——“如我所说,你应如此对沙门阿难说”——现在是由“如此”一词指示出来的,因此说(它被用在了)指示义。在“非如此”中也是如此:对于前面提到的那类法能带来不利、带来苦,为了让人产生决断,便以征询同意的方式问道:“它们会导致(不利和苦),还是不会?在这里,是怎样的?”当回答“这里并非如此”时,这种断定方式就是由“如此”来阐明的。而当“那类法导致不利、导致苦”这种方式被确定下来时,它便成了决定义,因此……显示巴利原文
Tathā evaṃ iminā ākārena ‘‘abhikkamitabba’’ntiādinā upadisiyamānāya samaṇasāruppāya ākappasampattiyā yo tattha upadisanākāro, so atthato upadesoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ te…pe… upadese’’ti. Tathā evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatāti ettha ca bhagavatā yathāvuttamatthaṃ aviparītato jānantehi kataṃ tattha saṃvijjamānaguṇānaṃ pakārehi haṃsanaṃ udaggatākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsanaṃ, yo tattha sampahaṃsanākāroti yojetabbaṃ. Evamevaṃ panāyanti ettha garahaṇākāroti yojetabbaṃ. So ca garahaṇākāro ‘‘vasalī’’tiādi khuṃsanasaddasannidhānato idha evaṃ-saddena pakāsitoti viññāyati. Yathā cettha, evaṃ upamākārādayopi upamādivasena vuttānaṃ puppharāsiādisaddānaṃ sannidhānatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañca vadehīti ‘‘yathāhaṃ vadāmi, evaṃ samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ vadehī’’ti vadanākāro idāni vattabbo evaṃ-saddena nidassīyatīti nidassanattho vutto. Evaṃ noti etthāpi tesaṃ yathāvuttadhammānaṃ ahitadukkhāvahabhāve sanniṭṭhānajananatthaṃ anumatiggahaṇavasena ‘‘saṃvattanti, no vā, kathaṃ vā ettha hotī’’ti pucchāya katāya ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotī’’ti vuttattā tadākārasanniṭṭhānaṃ evaṃ-saddena vibhāvitanti viññāyati, so pana tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanākāro niyamiyamāno avadhāraṇattho hotīti āha ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotīti ādīsu avadhāraṇe’’ti. Evaṃ bhanteti pana dhammassa sādhukaṃ savanamanasikāre sanniyojitehi bhikkhūhi attano tattha ṭhitabhāvassa paṭijānanavasena vuttattā ettha evaṃ-saddo vacanasampaṭicchanattho vutto, tena evaṃ bhante, sādhu bhante, suṭṭhu bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti.
“于种种理趣精微”的意思:“理趣”指的是所谓“单一与杂多”“无行”“如是法性”等,或者称为“喜旋”“三莲花”“狮子嬉戏”“钩状”“平视”等的种种门径。这些理趣依所依等的差别而有不同,因此称为“种种理趣”;或者,理趣就是圣典的表述方式,它们依施设与随施设、属于杂染分、属于世间、此二者(世间与出世间)的混合、善等、蕴等、包含、时解脱、安立、善根、三集论等而有多种,所以是“种种理趣”。依这些种种理趣而精微、细密、深妙,所以说“于种种理趣精微”。“源自种种心志向”的意思:“āsaya”就是“ajjhāsaya”(志向),也就是内心的意向。这些意向依常见等差别而有多种,而且在其中又依尘垢少等而有多类。或者,自己内心的意向等正是此经的生起因、起源之因,所以称为“源自种种心志向”。“义理与文句圆满”的意思:义理和文句完全圆满,没有需要补充的地方。或者,也可以说是具足了六种义理之句:宣说、阐明、开显、分别、显了、施设;以及六种文句:字母、词、文、行相、语义解说、解释。显示巴利原文
Nānānayanipuṇanti ekattanānattaabyāpāraevaṃdhammatāsaṅkhātā, nandiyāvaṭṭa tipukkhalasīhavikkīḷitaaṅkusadisālocanasaṅkhātā vā ādhārādibhedavasena nānāvidhā nayā nānānayā, nayā vā pāḷigatiyo, tā ca paññattianupaññattiādivasena saṃkilebhāgiyādilokiyāditadubhayavomissatādivasena kusalādivasena khandhādivasena saṅgahādivasena samayavimuttādivasena ṭhapanādivasena kusalamūlādivasena tikapaṭṭhānādivasena ca nānappakārāti nānānayā, tehi nipuṇaṃ saṇhasukhumanti nānānayanipuṇaṃ. Āsayova ajjhāsayo, te ca sassatādibhedena, tattha ca apparajakkhatādivasena anekā, attajjhāsayādayo eva vā samuṭṭhānaṃ uppattihetu etassāti anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthabyañjanasampannanti atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇaṃ upanetabbābhāvato, saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi, akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatanti vā attho daṭṭhabbo.
关于“种种神变”中的“神变”一词,有人解释:“因为能除去对立面,能遣除贪等烦恼,故称神变。”然而,世尊本身并无需要遣除的贪等对立面。即使是凡夫,在已除随烦恼、具足八种功德的定心中,当对立面已被镇伏时,也会生起神通神变;因此,不可将那种世俗的惯用语,直接套用在这里称为神变。若说由于大悲世尊所化众生具有烦恼这一对立面,为去除它们而说神变,那才是合理的。或者,世尊与其教法的对立面是外道,因驱除了他们,所以称为神变。因为这些外道正是通过神通、记心与教诫三种方式,在破除邪见并使其无法显露自见的情况下,被祛除、被赶走的。“Paṭi”一词,如同在“在他进入之后,另一位婆罗门来了”等句中,表“之后”义。因此,在已得定、已离杂染的心中生起,应由已办所作者之后生起、引发的,便称为神变。或者,当自己的杂染被第四禅与圣道去除之后,再度生起能去除他人杂染的行为,称为神变。显示巴利原文
Vividhapāṭihāriyanti ettha pāṭihāriyapadassa vacanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭipakkhaharaṇato rāgādikilesāpanayanato pāṭihāriya’’nti vadanti. Bhagavato pana paṭipakkhā rāgādayo na santi, ye haritabbā. Puthujjanānampi vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe iddhividhaṃ pavattati, tasmā tattha pavattavohārena ca na sakkā idha ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vattuṃ. Sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatā ca kilesā paṭipakkhā, tesaṃ haraṇato ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ. Atha vā bhagavato ca sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyaṃ. Te hi diṭṭhiharaṇavasena, diṭṭhippakāsane asamatthabhāvena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīhi haritā apanītā hontīti. ‘‘Paṭī’’ti vā ayaṃ saddo ‘‘pacchā’’ti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu viya, tasmā samāhite citte, vigatūpakkilese ca katakiccena pacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti paṭihāriyaṃ, attano vā upakkilesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā haraṇaṃ paṭihāriyaṃ. Iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo ca vigatūpakkilesena, katakiccena ca sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, haritesu ca attano upakkilesesu parasattānaṃ upakkilesaharaṇāni hontīti paṭihāriyāni bhavanti. Paṭihāriyameva pāṭihāriyaṃ. Paṭihāriye vā iddhiādesanānusāsanīsamudāye bhavaṃ ekekaṃ ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vuccati. Paṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato, tattha jātaṃ, tasmiṃ vā nimittabhūte, tato vā āgatanti pāṭihāriyaṃ. Tassa pana iddhiādibhedena visayabhedena ca bahuvidhassa bhagavato desanāya labbhamānattā āha ‘‘vividhapāṭihāriya’’nti.
“无有异”的意思是:并非从世尊面前听闻的方式有异,也不是世尊开示的方式有异。因为世尊的开示具有不可思议的威力。这样成立后,“谁有能力以一切方式了知”这句话便得以成立。而且,这与显示受持之力的说法并不相违,因为这里是就不偏离听闻的方式而言。此处也并非因两种含义不同就必须舍弃其中一种,因为两种含义同以一境为对象;否则,阿难长老对于世尊的开示,就会变成既能完全受持,又不能完全受持了。显示巴利原文
Na aññathāti bhagavato sammukhā sutākārato na aññathāti attho, na pana bhagavato desitākārato. Acinteyyānubhāvā hi bhagavato desanā. Evañca katvā ‘‘sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātu’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Dhāraṇabaladassanañca na virujjhati sutākārāvirajjhanassa adhippetattā. Na hettha atthantaratāparihāro dvinnampi atthānaṃ ekavisayattā, itarathā thero bhagavato desanāya sabbathā paṭiggahaṇe samattho asamattho cāti āpajjeyyāti.
“凡不是其他者,那就是我”——依此所说,在名为自身内在的相续中转起。因此,三种“me”字虽说在某种情况下看似只有一种含义,但依据具格、与格、属格的表述方式,确有差别。正是就此而言,(论师)说:“me字”见于三种含义之中。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yo paro na hoti, so attā’’ti evaṃ vuttāya niyakajjhattasaṅkhātāya sasantatiyaṃ vattanato tividhopi me-saddo kiñcāpi ekasmiṃyeva atthe dissati, karaṇasampadānasāminiddesavasena pana vijjamānabhedaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissatī’’ti.
即使前缀能令动作意义有所差别,然而由于其具有显了的作用,即使有前缀存在,‘闻’这个词本身依然会随顺各自的意义而作解。因此,为了显示在解释无前缀的‘闻’词之义时,引用有前缀的用法也并不相违,便说了‘有前缀的与无前缀的’这一句。其中的‘assa’即指‘闻’这个词。这里,‘闻’可能含有‘业体成就’之义,故说其意义为‘已领受的’或‘领受’。当意义是‘被我’时,即‘我’词以作者义阐释为具格时的意义;当意义是‘我的’时,即以所属关系阐释为属格时的意义。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi upasaggo kiriyaṃ viseseti, jotakabhāvato pana satipi tasmiṃ suta-saddo eva taṃ tamatthaṃ anuvadatīti anupasaggassa suta-saddassa atthuddhāre saupasaggassa gahaṇaṃ na virujjhatīti dassento ‘‘saupasaggo ca anupasaggo cā’’ti āha. Assāti suta-saddassa. Kammabhāvasādhanāni idha suta-sadde sambhavantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upadhāritanti vā upadhāraṇanti vā attho’’ti. Mayāti atthe satīti yadā mesaddassa kattuvasena karaṇaniddeso, tadāti attho. Mamāti atthe satīti yadā sambandhavasena sāminiddeso, tadā.
由于与‘闻’词相配合的‘如是’一词应当能够显示听闻的动作,故说‘“如是”是表示耳识等识的作用’。其中,‘等’字应当理解为包含了领受等五种门识,以及由它们引生的意门识。由于一切语句都含有‘唯有’的意义,‘闻’一词由此可得‘唯是闻’的意味,故说‘由于遮止非闻的状态’,这便显示了藉由这种决定而排除了非闻。再者,由于应当被确定为‘唯是闻’的‘闻’便成为正确的闻,故说‘显示无减、无增、无颠倒的把握’。或者,基于‘词通过遣除其他词的含义而表达自身意义’之理,‘闻’的意思是‘并非不闻’,这也就是‘由于遮止非闻的状态’,以此排除‘见’等。此即:‘这不是我所见,不是以独生智现证的,而是闻,并且仅仅是正确地闻。’正因如此,才说‘显示无减、无增、无颠倒的把握’。又或者,在依据决定义中的‘如是’一词而作义理连接时,与之相关的‘闻’词的意义被说为‘由于遮止非闻的状态’,因此也说‘显示无减、无增、无颠倒的把握’。而此处的‘听闻’一词,应理解为动作对象,即‘被听闻’。显示巴利原文
Sutasaddasannidhāne payuttena evaṃsaddena savanakiriyājotakena bhavitabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassana’’nti. Ādi-saddena sampaṭicchanādīnaṃ pañcadvārikaviññāṇānaṃ tadabhinihaṭānañca manodvārikaviññāṇānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sabbesampi vākyānaṃ evakāratthasahitattā ‘‘suta’’nti etassa sutaṃ evāti ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti, etena avadhāraṇena nirākataṃ dasseti. Yathā ca sutaṃ sutaṃ evāti niyametabbaṃ, taṃ sammā sutaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘anūnādhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘saddantaratthāpohanavasena saddo atthaṃ vadatī’’ti sutanti asutaṃ na hotīti ayametassa atthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti, iminā diṭṭhādivinivattanaṃ karoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Na idaṃ mayā diṭṭhaṃ, na sayambhuñāṇena sacchikataṃ, atha kho sutaṃ, tañca kho sammadevāti. Tenevāha ‘‘anūnādhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Avadhāraṇatthe vā evaṃ-sadde ayaṃ atthayojanā karīyatīti tadapekkhassa suta-saddassa ayamattho vutto ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti. Teneva āha ‘‘anūnādhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Savanasaddo cettha kammattho veditabbo suyyatīti.
如此,依于听闻的诸因、听闻者补特伽罗及听闻的差别,以一种方式显示了三个词组的义理连接之后,现在为了进一步以其他方式显示它,而说了‘同样地……’等。其中,‘tassā’是指那个在世尊面前以闻法的方式生起的意门识路。因为此意门识路能够以种种方式于所缘上生起,故说‘顺着耳门’。‘以种种方式’,即指通过即将说到的各式各样音节与意义的把握之种种方式,以此显示在这一义理连接中,‘如是’一词取的是‘方式’之义。‘生起实有显了’,是指对生起存在的显了。所谓‘“闻”即是法的显了’,是因为在某个所缘上,上述那样的识路以种种方式生起,因此所缘被称为法,而并非‘闻’这个词本身有‘法’的含义。为使已述之义更为明白,便说了‘在此,即……’等。其中,‘以心路’是具格意义的具格词;‘被我’是作者的意义。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ savanahetusuṇantapuggalasavanavisesavasena padattayassa ekena pakārena atthayojanaṃ dassetvā idāni pakārantarehipi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tassāti yā sā bhagavato sammukhā dhammassavanākārena pavattā manodvāraviññāṇavīthi, tassā. Sā hi nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattituṃ samatthā. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘sotadvārānusārenā’’ti. Nānappakārenāti vakkhamānānaṃ anekavihitānaṃ byañjanatthaggahaṇānānākārena, etena imissā yojanāya ākārattho evaṃ-saddo gahitoti dīpeti. Pavattibhāvappakāsananti pavattiyā atthibhāvappakāsanaṃ. ‘‘Sutanti dhammappakāsana’’nti yasmiṃ ārammaṇe vuttappakārā viññāṇavīthi nānappakārena pavattā, tassa dhammattā vuttaṃ, na sutasaddassa dhammatthattā. Vuttassevatthassa pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ ‘‘ayañhetthā’’tiādi. Tattha viññāṇavīthiyāti karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Mayāti katthuatthe.
取了表指示义的“如是”一词,而说“‘如是’是应被指示之义的显示”,这是因为,如果所指示的对象并非应被指示,便没有指示的必要;以此显示,以“如是”一词,整部经典都已被回指。由于“闻”是表示动作的词,而听闻动作又关联着通常的识相续,且此处有“补特伽罗”的称呼,所以说“‘闻’是补特伽罗作用的显示”,因为听闻动作不可能存在于没有补特伽罗称谓的纯粹法相续中。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evanti niddisitabbappakāsana’’nti nidassanatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ nidassetabbassa niddisitabbattābhāvābhāvato, tena evaṃ-saddena sakalampi suttaṃ paccāmaṭṭhanti dasseti. Suta-saddassa kiriyāsaddattā, savanakiriyāya ca sādhāraṇaviññāṇappabandhapaṭibaddhattā tattha ca puggalavohāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘sutanti puggalakiccappakāsana’’nti. Na hi puggalavohārarahite dhammappabandhe savanakiriyā labbhatīti.
“对于心相续……”等,也是取了表方式的“如是”一词,为显示与前一种义理连接不同的义理连接而说的。其中,“方式施设”即是“依取施设”,这是依据诸法的生起方式而如此称说的。“‘闻’是境的指示”,这是将堪为所闻的法,作为听闻动作的作者补特伽罗的听闻动作之所依而说的。虽然从究竟义上说,离开了心相续便没有任何作者,但依于语言的惯用,通过智慧所安立的分别,将离于心相续者当作仿佛具有该法一般,而说“那个具有该法的心相续”。所闻的法作为听闻动作的境,从究竟义上说,能闻的心相续在此处就是作者;或者,正因为有以闻为特质的心生起,听闻动作才存在,所以听闻动作的境也就是该动作的作者之境,由此而说“‘具有该法者’的作者之境”。又由于长老正确确定了所闻的状态,所以说“把握与确定”;或者,这应当被看作是在取了“如是”一词的决定意义之后所作出的这一义理连接。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yassa cittasantānassā’’tiādipi ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā purimayojanāya aññathā atthayojanaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ākārapaññattīti upādāpaññatti eva, dhammānaṃ pavattiākārupādānavasena tathā vuttā. ‘‘Sutanti visayaniddeso’’ti sotabbabhūto dhammo savanakiriyākattupuggalassa savanakiriyāvasena pavattiṭṭhānanti katvā vuttaṃ. Cittasantānavinimuttassa paramatthato kassaci kattu abhāvepi saddavohārena buddhiparikappitabhedavacanicchāya cittasantānato aññaṃ viya taṃsamaṅgiṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘cittasantānena taṃsamaṅgino’’ti. Savanakiriyāvisayopi sotabbadhammo savanakiriyāvasena pavattacittasantānassa idha paramatthato kattubhāvato, savanavasena cittappavattiyā eva vā savanakiriyābhāvato taṃkiriyākattu ca visayo hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃsamaṅgino kattu visaye’’ti. Sutākārassa ca therassa sammānicchitabhāvato āha ‘‘gahaṇasanniṭṭhāna’’nti, etena vā avadhāraṇatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā ayaṃ atthayojanā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
对于先前已闻的、种种不同的、称为经藏的义理与文句,它们具有被领受的状态。“如是”一词的本性,正是显示对该方式的指示、决择或显明。因为对该方式等的领受,是作为补特伽罗施设之所依的法相续的作用,所以说“‘如是’是补特伽罗作用的指示”。然而,即使是补特伽罗论者,听闻动作也不可能与识无关,因此特别而言,听闻动作是识的作用,所以说“‘闻’是识作用的指示”。又因为“我”一词的生起必定以有情的境为所依,而识的作用也正可归于此处,所以说“‘我’是兼具二者作用的补特伽罗的指示”。“如是”词与“闻”词的意义,分别具有非真实施设与真实施设的性质。为了显示它们依于如是类型的施设的取着作用,而说“‘如是’是补特伽罗作用的指示,‘闻’是识作用的指示”。在此,应当看到有四种义理连接被显示:以作用、动作、作者、业的差别来显示的方式;以补特伽罗作用的境与补特伽罗作用的指示来显示的方式;以把握方式、能把握者、所把握境的差别的指示来显示的方式;以及以作者、作用、作用所依、作者的指示来显示的方式。显示巴利原文
Pubbe sutānaṃ nānāvihitānaṃ suttasaṅkhātānaṃ atthabyañjanānaṃ upadhāritarūpassa ākārassa nidassanassa avadhāraṇassa vā pakāsanasabhāvo evaṃ-saddoti tadākārādiupadhāraṇassa puggalapaññattiyā upādānabhūtadhammappabandhabyāpāratāya vuttaṃ ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso’’ti. Savanakiriyā pana puggalavādinopi viññāṇanirapekkhā natthīti visesato viññāṇabyāpāroti āha ‘‘sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. Meti saddappavattiyā ekanteneva sattavisayattā, viññāṇakiccassa ca tattheva samodahitabbato ‘‘meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjamānapaññattivijjamānapaññattisabhāvā yathākkamaṃ evaṃ-sadda suta-saddānaṃ atthāti te tathārūpapaññattiupādānabyāpārabhāvena dassento āha ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso. Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. Ettha ca karaṇakiriyākattukammavisesappakāsanavasena puggalabyāpāvisayapuggalabyāpāranidassanavasena gahaṇākāragāhakatabbisayavisesaniddesavasena kattukaraṇa byāpārakattuniddesavasena ca dutiyādayo catasso atthayojanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
一切可借由言语来通达的义理,都必须经由施设而了知;而一切施设,又都含摄于真实、存在等六种施设的分类之中。因此,从中拣选出“如是”等施设的自性,而说道:“'如是'与'我'等……”。其中,因为被称作“如是”与“我”的义理——即方式等,以及诸法,并没有一个可被确切把握的相状,所以它们属于非真实施设。因此,从真实义、究竟义的角度来说,它们是非真实施设。此中所说的“从真实义、究竟义的角度”,即指从体性真实、义理最胜的角度。意思是:某一义理,若非如幻象、阳焰一般体性不实,亦非如传说等虽为世人所信受却非义理最胜,而是如色等词一般拥有真实的体性,或如被损害等一般具有可经验到的真实体性,方可称为具足真实义与究竟义。而“如是”、“我”等词的义理并非如此。为了让这个意思更为明晰,才又说了“那么,在这里,那到底又是什么呢?”等话语。至于“闻”这个词,则是就声处而说为真实施设。正是因此,才说“因为那确实是在此处由耳所得到的”;若说为“顺着耳门所得到的”,则义理、文句等一切显示巴利原文
Sabbassāpi saddādhigamanīyassa atthassa paññattimukheneva paṭipajjitabbattā, sabbapaññattīnañca vijjamānādivasena chasu paññattibhedesu antogadhattā tesu ‘‘eva’’ntiādīnaṃ paññattīnaṃ sarūpaṃ niddhārento āha ‘‘evanti ca meti cā’’tiādi. Tattha evanti ca meti ca vuccamānassa atthassa ākārādino, dhammānañca asallakkhaṇabhāvato avijjamānapaññattibhāvoti āha ‘‘saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Tattha saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasenāti bhūtatthauttamatthavasena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hotiyo māyāmarīciādayo viya abhūtattho, anussavādīhi gahetabbo viya anuttamattho ca na hoti, so rūpasaddādisabhāvo ruppanānubhavanādisabhāvo vā attho ‘‘saccikaṭṭho, paramattha cā’’ti vuccati, na tathā evaṃ meti padānamatthoti, etamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘kiñhettha ta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sutanti pana saddāyatanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘yañhi tamettha sotena upaladdha’’nti vuttaṃ , ‘‘sotadvārānusārena upaladdha’’nti pana vutte atthabyañjanādisabbaṃ labbhati. Taṃ taṃ upādāya vattabbatoti sotapathaṃ āgate dhamme upādāya tesaṃ upadhāritākārādino paccāmasanavasena ‘‘eva’’nti, sasantatipariyāpanne khandhe upādāya ‘‘me’’ti vattabbattāti attho. Diṭṭhādisabhāvarahite saddāyatane pavattamānopi sutavohāro ‘‘dutiyaṃ tatiya’’ntiādiko viya paṭhamādīni diṭṭhamutaviññāte apekkhitvā pavattoti āha ‘‘diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato’’ti. Asutaṃ na hotīti hi ‘‘suta’’nti pakāsito yamatthoti.
长老以“evaṃ”一词,指称自己现量所通达的这部经的类别殊胜之处,故说“它显明了不迷乱”。说“能够通达种种不同的类别”,则是为了显示接下来所要讲说的这部经,具有众多类别且难以通达。因为正在被显示的,是所闻之事的如实的样态,故说“它显明了对于所闻之事的不忘失”。“以不迷乱”的意思是:由于没有了迷惑,或者说,正是借着听闻之时所生起的智慧,而成就了听闻之后那一刻的智慧;同样地,在这里也应当理解为“以不迷乱”。(对于经典来说,)通达文句的方式并不算甚深;对于它们而言,只要按照所听闻到的去忆持、保存便已足够,此时“念”的作用更为显著,而“慧”在这里仅是辅助性的。因此才说“以慧为先导的……”,也就是指“以慧为先导的念”。在此,“为先导”意为起主导作用、为根本的部分,就如“心为先导”等词句的用法一样;或者,如同眼识等生起时,转向等心所虽非主导,但慧是其先导,“以慧为先导的”也可依此去理解其含义。同样地,在“以念为先导的……”等文句中,也应当依照这里所阐明的道理,恰当地通达其意义。所谓“具足义理与文句的”显示巴利原文
Attanā paṭividdhā suttassa pakāravisesā ‘‘eva’’nti therena paccāmaṭṭhāti āha ‘‘asammohaṃ dīpetī’’ti. ‘‘Nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hotī’’ti etena vakkhamānassa suttassa nānappakārataṃ duppaṭivijjhatañca dasseti. ‘‘Sutassa asammosaṃ dīpetī’’ti sutākārassa yāthāvato dassiyamānattā vuttaṃ. Asammohenāti sammohābhāvena, paññāya eva vā savanakālasambhūtāya taduttarakālapaññāsiddhi, evaṃ asammosenāti etthāpi vattabbaṃ. Byañjanānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro nātigambhīro, yathāsutadhāraṇameva tattha karaṇīyanti satiyā byāpāro adhiko, paññā tattha guṇībhūtāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpubbaṅgamāyā’’tiādi paññāya pubbaṅgamāti katvā. Pubbaṅgamatā cettha padhānabhāvo ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā’’tiādīsu viya, pubbaṅgamatāya vā cakkhuviññāṇādīsu āvajjanādīnaṃ viya appadhānatte paññā pubbaṅgamā etissāti ayampi attho yujjati, evaṃ ‘‘satipubbaṅgamāyā’’ti etthāpi vuttanayānusārena yathāsambhavamattho veditabbo. Atthabyañjanasampannassāti atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇassa, saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi, akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatassāti vā attho daṭṭhabbo.
“它显明了如理作意”,这句话的用意是:以“evaṃ”一词所宣说的方式指示与决定等义,其所缘正是无颠倒的正法。之所以说“它显明了心的不散乱”,是因为当面对诸如“《梵网经》是在哪里宣说的?”这类由著作本身所引发的、即将被讲说的经典时,如果内心没有达到等持的状态,便根本不可能去听闻,所以才这样说。随后所说的“因为心散乱的人……”等语,正是为了证成这一道理。正如以无颠倒的正法为所缘的“方式指示”与“决定”等义,能够成就“如理作意”一样;又正如透过听闻正法,能够成就“不散乱”一样。由作为果的“如理作意”,可以成就“正确的自我誓愿”及“过去生所累积的福行”,因为这两者与它有着不可分的关系。同样地,由作为果的“不散乱”,也应当能够显示作为其因的“听闻正法”与“亲近善士”的成就,因为没有听闻正法的人、没有亲近善士的人,是不可能拥有这种不散乱的。显示巴利原文
Yonisomanasikāraṃ dīpetīti evaṃ-saddena vuccamānānaṃ ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthānaṃ aviparītasaddhammavisayattāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Avikkhepaṃ dīpetī’’ti ‘‘brahmajālaṃ kattha bhāsita’’ntiādi pucchāvasena pakaraṇappattassa vakkhamānassa suttassa savanaṃ samādhānamantarena na sambhavatīti katvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vikkhittacittassā’’tiādi tassevatthassa samatthanavasena vuttaṃ. Sabbasampattiyāti atthabyañjanadesakapayojanādisampattiyā. Aviparītasaddhammavisayehi viya ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthehi yonisomanasikārassa, saddhammassavanena viya ca avikkhepassa yathā yonisomanasikārena phalabhūtena attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatānaṃ siddhi vuttā tadavinābhāvato, evaṃ avikkhepena phalabhūtena kāraṇabhūtānaṃ saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayānaṃ siddhi dassetabbā siyā assutavato, sappurisūpanissayarahitassa ca tadabhāvato.
然而,通过“因为心散乱的人……”等能作论证的语句,是以“不散乱”为因,同时以“亲近善士”为因,来显示作为其果的“听闻正法”如何成就。但此处合理的意趣应为:听闻正法与亲近善士二者,并非“不散乱”唯一的直接因,因为它们属于辅助性的外缘;而“不散乱”则如同“亲近善士”一样,是“听闻正法”的直接因。即便如此,用“不散乱”来显示“亲近善士”的成就,依然成立,因为心散乱者本身即缺失“亲近善士”。此外,这里可以看到两种显示方式:前一种是通过果来显示因的成立,犹如见到河水涨满,便可推断上游地区降了雨;后一种是通过因来显示果的成立,犹如见到必然带来降雨的浓密云层生起,便可推断即将下雨。显示巴利原文
‘‘Nahi vikkhittacitto’’tiādinā samatthanavacanena pana avikkhepena kāraṇabhūtena sappurisūpanissayena ca phalabhūtassa saddhammassavanassa siddhi dassitā. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo yutto siyāsaddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayā na ekantena avikkhepassa kāraṇaṃ bāhiraṅgattā, avikkhepo pana sappurisūpanissayo viya saddhammassavanassa ekantakāraṇanti. Evampi avikkhepena sappurisūpanissayasiddhijotanā na samatthitāva, no na samatthitā vikkhittacittānaṃ sappurisapayirupāsanābhāvassa atthasiddhattā. Ettha ca purimaṃ phalena kāraṇassa siddhidassanaṃ nadīpūrena viya upari vuṭṭhisabbhāvassa, dutiyaṃ kāraṇena phalassa siddhidassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ekantena vassinā viya meghavuṭṭhānena vuṭṭhippavattiyā.
以决断世尊言语的义理与文句分类差别的方式,能无余遍入整个教法的成就,这正是圆满利益一切众生的原因,故说“如此吉祥的方式”。因其不存在,故有前后联结。所谓“后二轮的成就”,是指名为“正确的自我誓愿”与“往昔已作福德”的两种功德。而此处“轮”的意义是,后后辗转地转动,或者众生依这些轮而在种种生命形态中流转。对此,经中说:“比丘们,有此四轮,具足四轮的天与人类,便有这四轮在其生命中运转。”此处的前后次序,应依说法次第来理解。由“后二轮的成就”,即后二轮的存在:一个拥有正确誓愿且往昔曾作福德的人,其内心是清净的,因为能使心不清净的烦恼已被他远远舍离,所以说“内心的清净便得成就”。正如所说:“具足正确誓愿的心,由此变得更加殊胜。”又如说:“阿难!你已累积福德,应策励精进,不久将成为断尽诸漏者。”正因如此,才说“由内心清净,证悟与无碍解便得成就”。所谓的显示巴利原文
Bhagavato vacanassa atthabyañjanapabhedaparicchedavasena sakalasāsanasampattiogāhanākāro niravasesaparahitapāripūrikāraṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhaddako ākāro’’ti. Yasmā na hotīti sambandho. Pacchimacakkadvayasampattinti attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatāsaṅkhātaṃ guṇadvayaṃ. Aparāparaṃ vuttiyā cettha cakkabhāvo, caranti etehi sattā sampattibhavesūti vā. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cattārimāni bhikkhave cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ vattatī’’tiādi . Purimapacchimabhāvo cettha desanākkamavasena daṭṭhabbo. Pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyāti pacchimacakkadvayassa atthitāya. Sammāpaṇihitatto pubbe ca katapuñño suddhāsayo hoti tadasuddhihetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ dūrībhāvatoti āha ‘‘āsayasuddhi siddhā hotī’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sammāpaṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, seyyaso naṃ tato kare’’ti, ‘‘katapuññosi tvaṃ ānanda, padhānaṃ anuyuñja khippaṃ hohisi anāsavoti ca. Tenevāha ‘‘āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhī’’ti. Payogasuddhiyāti yonisomanasikārapubbaṅgamassa dhammassavanapayogassa visadabhāvena. Tathā cāha ‘‘āgamabyattisiddhī’’ti. Sabbassa vā kāyavacīpayogassa niddosabhāvena. Parisuddhakāyavacīpayogo hi vippaṭisārābhāvato avikkhittacitto pariyattiyaṃ visārado hotīti.
“以能照明种种通达为……”等语句,是长老在义理与文句中,就“如是”(evaṃ)一词与“闻”(suta)一词,透过照明其“不迷惑”与“不忘失”的作用,依四种无碍解来显示义理的连结。其中,“以能照明所应闻之种种分类的通达”一句,显示此“闻”字因与“如是”字邻近,或基于即将宣说的内容,而以通名总括性地指向所应闻法的特殊内容。通过思惟、观照而得的教法,其善巧通达特别依于作意,因此教导者将其与能照明“如理作意”的“如是”一词连结;而通过听闻、忆持、口诵来熟悉的教法,其善巧通达则特别依于侧耳倾听,因此便将其与能照明“不散乱”的“闻”一词连结。通过这样的显示,激发人们在听闻佛法上精勤努力,以成就教法。这里的“法”是指教法。“以心观照者”,是指以这样的方式——“此处讲述了戒,此处讲述了定,此处讲述了慧,其中有如此之多的内在脉络连结”——而用心去省察观照者。“以见解善巧通达者”,是指透过已形成的“审察认可之慧”,或透过称为“了知遍知”的智慧,对处处所提及的内容善巧通达者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakenā’’tiādinā atthabyañjanesu therassa evaṃ-sadda suta-saddānaṃ asammohāsammosadīpanato catupaṭisambhidāvasena atthayojanaṃ dasseti. Tattha ‘‘sotabbappabhedapaṭivedhadīpakenā’’ti etena ayaṃ suta-saddo evaṃ-saddasannidhānato, vakkhamānāpekkhāya vā sāmaññeneva sotabbadhammavisesaṃ āmasatīti dasseti. Manodiṭṭhikaraṇāpariyattidhammānaṃ anupekkhanasuppaṭivedhā visesato manasikārapaṭibaddhāti te vuttanayena yonisomanasikāradīpakena evaṃ-saddena yojetvā, savanadhāraṇavacīparicayā pariyattidhammānaṃ visesena sotāvadhānapaṭibaddhāti te avikkhepadīpakena suta-saddena yojetvā dassento sāsanasampattiyā dhammassavane ussāhaṃ janeti. Tattha dhammāti pariyattidhammā. Manasānupekkhitāti ‘‘idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā, ettakā ettha anusandhiyo’’tiādinā nayena manasā anupekkhitā. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti nijjhānakkhantibhūtāya, ñātapariññāsaṅkhātāya vā diṭṭhiyā tattha tattha vuttarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘iti rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā paṭividdhā.
「以完整的话语」,是指前文已分别用三句各自关联而说。所谓「非善士地」,即指不知恩,如经中所说:「在此,有一类恶比丘,学习了如来所开示的法与律后,便当作自己的东西。」而这便是非圣者言说所依的基础。这个「非圣者言说所依的基础」,也就是「非法」。难道阿难长老会对自身有「这是我的教法」的慢心吗?而大迦叶长老等人,难道也会对阿难长老有这样的疑虑吗?既然如此,这里说「超越了非善士地」等话语,岂不毫无意义?并非如此,因为当说「如是我闻」时,此义——即表明自己毫无彼慢心与令人疑虑之处——便同时彰显出来。也有人说:「这是考虑到当时一些天神的内心思绪而说,所以此类对阿难长老的指责根本无从成立。」据说,那时有一些天神心中生起这样的念头:「如来已般涅槃,而这位具寿善于说法,如今他在宣说佛法;他又身为释迦族后裔,是如来叔父之子。他究竟是在宣说自己亲身的教说,还是……显示巴利原文
‘‘Sakalena vacanenā’’ti pubbe tīhi padehi visuṃ visuṃ yojitattā vuttaṃ. Asappurisabhūminti akataññutaṃ ‘‘idhekacco pāpabhikkhu tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ anariyavohārāvatthaṃ. Sā eva anariyavohārāvatthā asaddhammo. Nanu ca ānandattherassa ‘‘mamedaṃ vacana’’nti adhimānassa, mahākassapattherādīnañca tadāsaṅkāya abhāvato asappurisabhūmisamatikkamādivacanaṃ niratthakaṃ ti? Nayidaṃ evaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti vadantena ayampi attho vibhāvitoti dassanato. Keci pana ‘‘devatānaṃ parivitakkāpekkhaṃ tathāvacananti edisī codanā anavakāsā’’ti vadanti. Tasmiṃ kira khaṇe ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi ‘‘tathāgato ca parinibbuto, ayañca āyasmā desanākusalo, idāni dhammaṃ deseti, sakyakulappasuto tathāgatassa bhātā cūḷapituputto, kiṃ nu kho sayaṃ sacchikata dhammaṃ deseti, udāhu bhagavatoyeva vacanaṃ yathāsuta’’nti. Evaṃ tadāsaṅkitappakārato asappurisabhūmisamokkamādito atikkamādi vibhāvitanti. Attano adahantoti ‘‘mameta’’nti attani aṭṭhapento. Appetīti nidasseti. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthesu yathārahaṃ satte netīti netti, dhammoyeva netti dhammanetti.
「困惑」(kaṅkhā),是指一种根深蒂固、坚固住立的疑(vicikicchā)。「犹豫」(vimati),则是指没有陷入过度的思虑流转,而仅仅是一种心智上的分歧。之所以能够「摧毁不信」,一是因为这是世尊所亲自教导的,二是因为当面从世尊那里领受的缘故,三是因为没有口误、恶言等过错的缘故。在这里,应当这样理解:前三层义理的连结,是扣紧那些尚未获得「方式」等特别含义的「如是」(evaṃ)一词而显示的;接下来的三句,则是纯粹扣紧表达「方式」意义的「如是」一词而阐明;而最后的三句,则是依次扣紧表达「方式」意义、「举例」意义和「决定」意义的「如是」一词而连结起来的。显示巴利原文
Daḷhataraniviṭṭhā vicikicchā kaṅkhā. Nātisaṃsappanaṃ matibhedamattaṃ vimati. Assaddhiyaṃ vināseti bhagavato desitattā, sammukhā cassa paṭiggahitattā, khalitaduruttādiggahaṇadosābhāvato ca. Ettha ca paṭhamādayo tisso atthayojanā ākārādiatthesu aggahitavisesameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā dassitā, tato parā tisso ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā vibhāvitā. Pacchimā pana tisso yathākkamaṃ ākāratthaṃ nidassanatthaṃ avadhāraṇatthañca evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā yojitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「一」这个词,用在「其他、最胜、无伴、数目」等意义中。例如,在「我是常、世界是常,这是真理,其他是虚妄」这类句子中,用的是「其他」的意思;在「心一境性」这类句子中,用的是「最胜」的意思;在「独处宴坐」这类句子中,用的是「无伴」的意思;而在「比丘们,唯有一刹那和一时节,为梵行住」这类句子中,用的是「数目」的意思。这里也是指数目,所以解释说:「一」就是计数差别的说明。
「时」与「时节」,就是指适当的时间和诸缘的聚集。
「刹那」,是指机会。诸如来出世等,正是修习道梵行的机会,因为它是获得那个缘的原因。刹那本身就是时节。而被称为「刹那」和「时节」的,其实就是「一个」。
「大集会」,就是指大聚集。
时节也是圆满学处的原因。
「论说时节的」,是指宣扬各自见解的人。坐在那里的外道们,各自宣扬自己的见解。
「义现观」,就是指获得利益。
「现观」,是应当被现观的对象;「现观义」就是指通过逼迫等应当被现观的状态,把它们合在一起说。或者也可以说,现观就是通达的所缘状态,这称为「现观义」,那些内容正是由此以同一性来说明的。其中,逼迫就是苦谛,对具有它的人来说,它是一种伤害、非遍及的状态、破坏。热恼就是苦苦等类的灼热、烧恼。显示巴利原文
Eka-saddo aññaseṭṭhāsahāyasaṅkhyadīsu dissati. Tathāhesa ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca , idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu aññatthe dissati, ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’ntiādīsu seṭṭhatthe, ‘‘eko vūpakaṭṭho’’tiādīsu asahāye, ‘‘ekova kho bhikkhave khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu saṅkhyayaṃ, idhāpi saṅkhyayanti dassento āha ‘‘ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso’’ti. Kālañca samayañcāti yuttakālañca paccayasāmaggiñca. Khaṇoti okāso. Tathāgatuppādādiko hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso tappaccayapaṭilābhahetuttā. Khaṇo eva ca samayo. Yo ‘‘khaṇo’’ti ca ‘‘samayo’’ti ca vuccati, so eko vāti hi attho. Mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Samayopi khoti sikkhāpadapūraṇassa hetupi. Samayappavādaketi diṭṭhippavādake. Tattha hi nisinnā titthiyā attano attano samayaṃ pavadantīti. Atthābhisamayāti hitapaṭilābhā. Abhisametabboti abhisamayo, abhisamayo atthoti abhisamayaṭṭhoti pīḷana ādīni abhisametabbabhāvena ekībhāvaṃ upanetvā vuttāni. Abhisamayassa vā paṭivedhassa visayabhūtabhāvo abhisamayaṭṭhoti tāneva tathā ekattena vuttāni. Tattha pīḷanaṃ dukkhasaccassa taṃ samaṅgīno hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ. Santāpodukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahaṇaṃ.
「samaya」一词有种种意义。指集合,因为助成因缘很好地会和、汇集。指刹那,因为在那时,道与梵行由作为依处的人们而会合、聚集。指时间,因为有情或自性法依于它而与俱生法等会合,或依之而生起等。从究竟意义上说,时间并非真实存在,只是作为法的运转所依,如同工具一样,仅以假立成就的形态而被人们称呼。指聚集,因为各个部分平等地或共同运行、转起、安住,就如‘集合’这个词。各个部分共同安住便是聚集。指因,因为在其余诸缘和合时,果便从此生起、转起,如同‘集起’这个词。指见解,因为依于结缚的性质而有联结,有情依于它而在自己的范围内转起;或者由于牢固的执取,有情与各自的执著相应而依它转起。因见结,有情被极度系缚。指获得,因为它是等至、等合、等入。指断除,因为它是平等的乘、正确的乘,由此得以远离。
「现观」是指以智慧面对而应达到、应现观的,也就是法的无颠倒自性。或者,以面向的方式正确地到来、前去、觉悟,故「现观」是指对法的如实觉知。
应当如此了知「sam显示巴利原文
Tattha sahakārīkāraṇaṃ sannijjha sameti samavetīti samayo, samavāyo. Sameti samāgacchati maggabrahmacariyamettha tadādhārapuggalehīti samayo, khaṇo. Sameti ettha, etenava saṃgacchati satto, sabhāvadhammo vā sahajātādīhi, uppādādīhi vāti samayo, kālo. Dhammappavattimattatāya atthato abhūtopi hi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ, karaṇaṃ viya ca kappanāmattasiddhena rūpena voharīyatīti. Samaṃ, saha vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samayo, samūho, yathā ‘‘samudāyo’’ti. Avayavasahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūhoti. Avasesapaccayānaṃ samāgame eti phalaṃ etasmā uppajjati pavattati cāti samayo, hetu yathā ‘‘samudayo’’ti. Sameti saṃyojanabhāvato sambandho eti attano visaye pavattati, daḷhaggahaṇabhāvato vā saṃyuttā ayanti pavattanti sattā yathābhinivesaṃ etenāti samayo, diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhisaṃyojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhantīti. Samiti saṅgati samodhānanti samayo, paṭilābho. Samassa yānaṃ, sammā vā yānaṃ apagamoti samayo, pahānaṃ. Abhimukhaṃ ñāṇena etabbo abhisametabboti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparīto sabhāvo. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvāvabodho. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samaya-saddassa pavatti veditabbā. Samaya-saddassa atthuddhāre abhisamaya-saddassa udāharaṇaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Assāti samaya-saddassa. Kālo attho samavāyādīnaṃ atthānaṃ idha asambhavato desadesakaparisānaṃ viya suttassa nidānabhāvena kālassa apadisitabbato ca.
为何此处仅以不定方式来指示时间,而不进一步用季节、年等来限定呢?因此说:‘在这里,虽然……’等等。为了显示即使不规定季节、年等而只说‘samaya’一词,也能获得这样的好处,所以说:‘或者这些……’等等。因为一个表示共通之词能够含摄特殊情况。
其中,‘现法安乐时节’是指每日以禅那等至度过的那些时间,特别是七个七天。
‘明显’是指在十千世界当中,因震动、光照的显现等而昭然显著。
为了用其他的分类方式来含摄上述种种时节之一部分,说道:‘还有这个……’等等。因为智作用时节与自利行道时节就是正等觉时节,圣默然时节就是现法安乐时节,悲作用、利他行道、法谈时节就是说法时节。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha aniyāmitavaseneva kālo niddiṭṭho, na utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyametvāti āha ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyamaṃ akatvā samaya-saddassa vacane ayampi guṇo laddho hotīti dassento ‘‘ye vā ime’’tiādimāha. Sāmaññajotanā hi visese avatiṭṭhatīti. Tattha diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo devasikaṃ jhānasamāpattīhi vītināmanakālo, visesato sattasattāhāni. Pakāsāti dasasahassilokadhātuyā pakampanaobhāsapātubhāvādīhi pākaṭā. Yathāvuttappabhedesuyeva samayesu ekadesaṃ pakārantarehi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yo cāya’’ntiādimāha. Tathā hi ñāṇakiccasamayo attahitapaṭipattisamayo ca abhisambodhisamayo. Ariyatuṇhibhāvasamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo. Karuṇākiccaparahitapaṭipattidhammikathāsamayo desanāsamayeva.
现在说明以作格说明的情况,这与前文「以何」相关联。‘在那里’是指在阿毗达摩和律中。‘如此’即指用位格和作格。所依义,就是处格的意义。
所谓‘有’就是指作用;以其他作用来表显作用的特征,即为‘以有表显有’的特征。
其中,就如同时间虽由自性法所限定,在究竟意义上并非真实存在,但以处格的形式而被认知,因为在那刹那转起的法,之前与之后皆不存在,正如‘上午生,傍晚去’等说法;又如聚集,虽离组成部分并非真实存在,仅以假立而成立,却以处格的形式施设于各个组成部分,如‘树上有枝,麦堆里生长’等说法。同样,这里也是如此。为显示此理,故说:‘因为所依……法’。
在那个时间,或在那团法中,当欲界善心生起时,就在那个时间或那团法中,触等也随之存在,这就是此处的意义。
又好比在挤牛奶的时候去,挤完了才来,这是用挤奶的作用来表显去和来的作用;同样,在这里,说‘在那时节,在那时节’时,这一意义自然就被理解了。因为文句的意义并不脱离有情的活动,所以,以显示巴利原文
Karaṇavacanena niddeso kato yathāti sambandho. Tatthāti abhidhammavinayesu. Tathāti bhummakaraṇehi. Adhikaraṇattha ādhārattho. Bhāvo nāma kiriyā, kiriyāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Tattha yathā kālo sabhāvadhammaparicchinno sayaṃ paramatthato avijjamānopi ādhārabhāvena paññāto taṅkhaṇappavattānaṃ tato pubbe parato ca abhāvato ‘‘pubbaṇhe jāto, sāyanhe gacchatī’’ti, ca ādīsu, samūho ca avayavavinimutto avijjamānopi kappanāmattasiddho avayavānaṃ ādhārabhāvena paññāpīyati ‘‘rukkhe sākhā, yavarāsiyaṃ sambhūto’’tiādīsu, evaṃ idhāpīti dassento āha ‘‘adhikaraṇañhi…pe… dhammāna’’nti. Yasmiṃ kāle, dhammapuñje vā kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva kāle, dhammapuñje ca phassādayopi hontīti ayañhi tattha attho. Yathā ca gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgatoti dohanakiriyāya gamanakiriyā lakkhīyati, evaṃ idhāpi ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, tasmiṃ samaye’’ti ca vutte satīti ayamattho viññāyamāno eva hoti padatthassa sattāvirahābhavatoti samayassa sattākiriyāya cittassa uppādakiriyā, phassādīnaṃ bhavanakiriyā ca lakkhīyati. Yasmiṃ samayeti yasmiṃ navame khaṇe, yonisomanasikārādihetumhi, paccayasamavāye vā sati kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe, hetumhi, paccayasamavāye ca sati phassādayopi hontīti ubhayattha samaya-sadde bhummaniddeso kato lakkhaṇabhūtabhāvayuttoti dassento āha ‘‘khaṇa…pe… lakkhīyatī’’ti.
因义与作具义也是成立的,正如“以食物而活,以学习而活,以斧砍伐,以锄挖掘”等例子。因为在听闻有比丘违犯后,世尊召集比丘僧团,讯问那位事涉其中的比丘并加以呵责;随后,不待时过境迁,即于事发之时制定学处。世尊如此安住于以学处制定为缘的状态,并期望以此作为制戒之因,如第三波罗夷等情况所示。显示巴利原文
Hetuatthokaraṇattho ca sambhavati ‘‘annena vasati, ajjhenena vasati, pharasunā chindati, kudālena khaṇatī’’tiādīsu viya. Vītikkamañhi sutvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā otiṇṇavatthukaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā, vigarahitvā ca taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ otiṇṇakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena sikkhāpadāni paññapento bhagavā viharati sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno tatiyapārājikādīsu viyāti.
“绝对”:即从最初直至说法结束,皆以名为利他行道的悲愍住而安住。“为了显示那个意义”,即为了显示绝对相续的意义。此处使用了宾格来说明,正如“学习一个月”的表述那样。显示巴利原文
Accantameva ārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva desanāniṭṭhānaṃ parahitapaṭipattisaṅkhātena karuṇāvihārena. Tadatthajotanatthanti accantasaṃyogatthajotanatthaṃ. Upayogavacananiddeso kato yathā ‘‘māsaṃ ajjhetī’’ti.
“古师们”,是指诸注疏师。“仅言辞之别”,是说差别仅在用词上。由此显示,在经与律中,格与时态的区分已经完成了。显示巴利原文
Porāṇāti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Abhilāpamattabhedoti vacanamattena viseso. Tena suttavinayesu vibhattibyatayo katoti dasseti.
“最胜者”一词是表示“最胜”的语词,称为“最胜者”,是因为与最胜的功德俱行。同样,“无上者”也是如此。“值得恭敬者”即具足应受尊重的状态,这是由于与可恭敬的功德相应,或因堪受恭敬对待,故称值得恭敬者。显示巴利原文
Seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ seṭṭhanti vuttaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato. Tathā uttamanti etthāpi. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato, garukaraṇārahatāya vā gāravayutto.
已经说过的内容,在此不应复述,因为这仅是《清净道论》注释之一部分,此即其意。显示巴利原文
Vuttoyeva na pana idha vattabbo visuddhimaggassa imissā aṭṭhakathāya ekadesabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
复次,“bhaga”(福分)中有“vani”(寻求),或“vami”(舍弃),故称“bhagavā”(世尊)。他于戒等功德中寻求、亲近、修习,故称世尊;或者,为了让这些功德在应调伏者的相续中——“如何才能生起呢?”——而寻求、祈愿、期望,故称世尊。又或者,他舍弃福分,即吉祥、自在、名誉,如同吐弃痰唾一般,故称世尊。的确,世尊对掌中的吉祥、四洲的自在、转轮王的成就及其所依,乃至七宝闪耀的名誉,全无恋着而舍弃了。或说,名为“bhā”的星宿,它们共同运行的形态称为“bhagā”,即位于须弥山、持双山等处的器世间的庄严。世尊由断除对它的欲贪而舍弃了它,因此,在福分中舍弃,故称世尊。显示巴利原文
Apica bhage vani, vamīti vā bhagavā, bhage sīlādiguṇe vani bhaji sevi, te vā vineyyasantānesu ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho uppajjeyyu’’nti vani yāci patthayīti bhagavā, bhagaṃ vā siriṃ, issariyaṃ, yasañca vami khelapiṇḍaṃ viya chaḍḍayīti bhagavā. Tathā hi bhagavā hatthagataṃ siriṃ, catuddīpissariyaṃ, cakkavattisampattisannissayañca sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasaṃ anapekkho pariccajīti. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā, sineruyugandharādigatā bhājanalokasobhā. Te bhagavā vami tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahatīti evampi bhage vamīti bhagavā.
“令现见法身”这句话,是根据“阿难,我为你们所说、所制定的法与律,在我灭度之后,即是你们的导师”这段经文,表明法也具有导师的地位,所以才这样说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karotī’’ti ‘‘yo vo ānanda mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti vacanato dhammassa satthubhāvapariyāyo vijjatīti katvā vuttaṃ.
他的身体犹如金刚杵聚合而成,因为其色身不可被他人破坏。确实,无人能对世尊的色身造成任何障碍。他用“如是”一词,总摄即将开示的整部经,以此彰显说法的成就。又通过“这是我——已证得无碍解、被世尊在五个方面列为第一的大声闻——亲自听闻;是我自己听到,并非传闻或辗转传来”的表达,彰显声闻的成就。此外,“世尊”一词在连用时,其中所含的“时”字,指示了由佛陀出世所庄严的那个时刻,由此彰显时节的成就。佛陀出世确实是最为殊胜的时节成就。因此这样说——显示巴利原文
Vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo parehi abhejjasarīrattā. Na hi bhagavato rūpakāye kenaci antarāyo sakkā kātunti. Desanāsampattiṃ niddisati vakkhamānassa sakalasuttassa ‘‘eva’’nti niddisanato. Sāvakasampattiṃ niddisati paṭisambhidāppattena pañcasu ṭhānesu bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapitena mayā mahāsāvakena sutaṃ, tañca kho mayāva sutaṃ, na anussavitaṃ, na paramparābhatanti imassatthassa dīpanato. Kālasampattiṃ niddisati ‘‘bhagavā’’ti padassa sannidhāne payuttassa samaya-saddassa kālassa buddhuppādapaṭimaṇḍitabhāvadīpanato. Buddhuppādaparamā hi kālasampadā. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“在劫末的浑浊(kappakasāye)、充满争斗的时世(kaliyuge),佛陀的出世(buddhuppādo),啊,真是极为稀有(mahacchariyaṃ);”
生于供奉祭火者之中,犹如盛开莲花,蜜聚其中。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kappakasāye kaliyuge, buddhuppādo aho mahacchariyaṃ; Hutāvahamajjhe jātaṃ, samuditamakarandamaravinda’’nti.
“世尊”(Bhagavā)一词,旨在表明说法者的成就,因为它是对具足殊胜功德、最上之人的崇敬尊称。显示巴利原文
Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ niddisati guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagāravādhivacanato.
“vijjantarikāya”:指闪电发出的刹那。“antaratoti”:指在心中。“antarā”:指生起与成就的中间阶段。“antarikāya”:指中间。在此,应援引作用于原因中间的 antarā 一词,而非作用于心识刹那之空隙的 antara 或 antarikā 一词,例如“此中间谁能了知”、“这些劫的中间”、“从数目上不可计度”、“如何在中间投入”等语句中的用法。因为此处意在阐明 antarā 一词的含义。其用意可能是:凡 antarā 一词所表示的意义,antara 一词也可表示;由于意义相同,故将用于 antarā 义的 antara 一词援引为证。或者,在“yassantarato”这一句中,antarā 仅是为了诗句顺口而被缩略,应如此理解。再者,antarā 加上词缀 ika 扩展为“antarikā”而举出,应知此处的引用与被引之间并无矛盾。若未建立连接,则不会获得业格,因为可能出现属格的情况。显示巴利原文
Vijjantarikāyāti vijjuniccharaṇakkhaṇe. Antaratoti hadaye. Antarāti ārabbha nipphattīnaṃ vemajjhe. Antarikāyāti antarāḷe. Ettha ca ‘‘tadantaraṃ ko jāneyya, etesaṃ antarā kappā, gaṇanāto asaṅkhiyā, antarantarā kathaṃ opātetī’’ti ca ādīsu viya kāraṇavemajjhesu vattamānā antarā-saddā eva udāharitabbā siyuṃ, na pana cittakhaṇavivaresu vattamānā antarantarikā-saddā. Antarā-saddassa hi ayaṃ atthuddhāroti. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo siyā – yesu atthesu antarā-saddo vattati, tesu antarasaddopi vattatīti samānatthattā antarā-saddatthe vattamāno antara-saddo udāhaṭo, antarā-saddo eva vā ‘‘yassantarato’’ti ettha gāthāsukhatthaṃ rassaṃ katvā vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Antarā-saddo eva pana ika-saddena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ‘‘antarikā’’ti vuttoti evamettha udāharaṇodāharitabbānaṃ virodhābhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanassa pasaṅge antarā-saddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Tenevāha ‘‘antarāsaddena yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kata’’nti.
比丘们,一个必定趋向正觉的人,不可能、也绝无机会故意夺取众生的生命,这就是‘无有此处’的意思。由于见与戒本性决定,即使是入流者也因见与戒的共通性而和合,一来者等就更不必说了。‘安住于如是见者,与具如是见者共住于见之共通性;安住于如是戒者,与具如是戒者共住于戒之共通性。’因此,即便是凡夫,也因见与戒的共通性而和合,这同样成立。显示巴利原文
‘‘Niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo, aṭṭhānametaṃ bhikkhave anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, ‘‘netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ tiādivacanato diṭṭhisīlānaṃ niyatasabhāvattā sotāpannāpi aññamaññaṃ diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatā, pageva sakadāgāmiādayo. ‘‘Tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharati, tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti vacanato puthujjanānampi diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatabhāvo labbhatiyeva.
句中‘Suppiyopi kho’的‘kho’字表强调,正如‘assosi kho’等处的用法。由此显明:他确实已踏上路途,途中没有任何障碍。‘tatrā’一词同样指时间,因为前文已提到‘ekaṃ samayaṃ’(一时)。就在世尊从王舍城前往那烂陀的途中,同一时刻,须卑也走上那条路,说着非难的话,梵授则说着称赞的话。
‘pariyāya’一词:由于它回转,故称‘往复’;或由于它令所教导之义得以成立,亦称‘教导’;又或由于它执取自身之果而转起,又称‘原因’。应知‘pariyāya’一词用于往复等义。
‘以理由’(kāraṇena)指似理由之物,因为后面会说到:‘将非理说为理。’
或许有人会问:为何此处描述时用现在时‘说着非难的话’‘说着称赞的话’?从结集的角度看,他们说非难与称赞的时间不是已经过去了吗?的确如此,……显示巴利原文
Suppiyopi khoti ettha kho-saddo avadhāraṇattho ‘‘assosi kho’’tiādīsu viya. Tena addhānamaggapaṭipanno ahosiyeva, nāssa maggapaṭipattiyā koci antarāyo ahosīti ayamattho dīpito hoti. Tatrāti vā kālassa paṭiniddeso. Sopi hi ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti pubbe adhikato. Yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā antarā rājagahañca nāḷandañca addhānamaggapaṭipanno, tasmiṃyeva samaye suppiyopi taṃ maggaṃ paṭipanno avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, brahmadatto ca vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti. Pariyāyati parivattatīti pariyāyo, vāro. Pariyāyeti desetabbamatthaṃ paṭipādetīti pariyāyo, desanā. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ pariggahetvā pavattatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇanti evaṃ pariyāya-saddassa vārādīsu pavatti veditabbā. Kāraṇenāti kāraṇapatirūpakena. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘akāraṇameva kāraṇanti vatvā’’ti. Kasmā panettha ‘‘avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti, ‘‘vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti ca vattamānakālaniddeso kato, nanu saṅgītikālato so avaṇṇavaṇṇānaṃ bhāsitakālo atītoti? Saccametaṃ, ‘‘addhānamaggapaṭipanno hotī’’ti ettha hoti-saddo viya atītakālattho bhāsati-saddo ca daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā yasmiṃ kāle tehi avaṇṇo vaṇṇo ca bhāsīyati, taṃ apekkhitvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘tatrāti kālassa paṭiniddeso’’ti idañca vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti.
‘无理由’(akāraṇaṃ),意为不合理、不当。因为世尊并无无味、无实质之类的过失,法与僧也并没有说恶法、行恶行等问题。
另有解释说,‘无理由’指缺少真实的理由,仅是空口之言——这是它的用意。依此义,‘kāraṇanti vatvā’(说了理由之后)即‘说了“这是理由”’之后。
在这里,对于‘无味’等过失而言,不对高种姓或年长者行问讯等应做之事,便是一种‘理由’;同样,认识到不存在超人法与殊胜的如实知见,对孙陀利咖功德等过患的认知,承认轮回找不到起点,对无记事的解释等,这些也都是‘理由’。对于非一切知者等的渐次觉悟等,也应依此类推。
‘以如此这般的方式’(tathā tathā),即指以不对高种姓、年长者问讯等方式。显示巴利原文
Akāraṇanti ayuttiṃ, anupapattinti attho. Na hi arasarūpatādayo dosā bhagavati saṃvijjanti, dhammasaṅghānañca durakkhātaduppaṭipannatādayoti. Akāraṇanti vā yuttakāraṇarahitaṃ, paṭiññāmattanti adhippāyo . Imasmiñca atthe kāraṇanti vatvāti kāraṇaṃ vāti vatvāti attho. Arasarūpādīnañcettha jātivuḍḍhesu abhivādanādisāmīcikammākaraṇaṃ kāraṇaṃ, tathā uttarimanussadhammālamariyañāṇadassanābhāvassa sundarikāmaguṇādinavabodho, saṃsārassa ādikoṭiyā apaññāyanapaṭiññā, abyākatavatthubyākaraṇanti evamādayo, tathā asabbaññutādīnaṃ kamāvabodhādayo yathārahaṃ niddhāretabbā. Tathā tathāti jātivuḍḍhānaṃ anabhivādanādiākārena.
“说非难”(avaṇṇaṃ bhāsamāno),即“以说非难为因”。此处“māna”一词表因由。由于诽谤三宝罪过极重,他必将遭遇不幸与灾祸。因此,他说:显示巴利原文
Avaṇṇaṃ bhāsamānoti avaṇṇaṃbhāsanahetu. Hetuattho hi ayaṃ māna-saddo. Anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇissati ekantamahāsāvajjattā ratanattayopavādassa. Tenevāha –
称赞当受谴责者,
或谴责当受称赞者;
他以口积集罪过,
由于那罪过,他得不到安乐。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo nindiyaṃ pasaṃsati, Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyo; Vicināti mukhena so kaliṃ, Kalinā tena sukhaṃ na vindatī’’ti.
以“我们的老师……”等语,显示了梵授生起悚惧,也对自己的老师生起悲悯。虽然弟子本应随顺老师,但这弟子生来有智慧,故不在这些事情上随顺他。现在为了显示他那“业为自属”的智,便说“然而,对于老师……”等语。他称赞道,心想:“或许,哪怕凭这一点对三宝的称赞,也能使他免于非难。”这里的“称赞”指所称扬的功德;称赞就是对功德的宣说,也即赞美。“结缚”的意思是缠结、系缚。不能因为他见解肤浅,就指责他作为说法者,因为佛陀等的功德是无量的,唯有圣典注释才能将其完整阐明。这里的“随闻”一词包含了相、遍寻、见、审察、忍等含义。他是凭着自己的能力说称赞,而并非如实地依照佛陀等功德的份量去说——这就是要义所在。因为佛陀等的功德不可计数、无量无边、种类繁多。确实如此说过:显示巴利原文
‘‘Amhākaṃ ācariyo’’tiādinā brahmadattassa saṃveguppattiṃ, attano ācariye kāruññappavattiñca dassetvā kiñcāpi antevāsinā ācariyassa anukūlena bhavitabbaṃ, ayaṃ pana paṇḍitajātikattā na edisesu taṃ anuvattatīti, idāni tassa kammassakataññāṇappavattiṃ dassento ‘‘ācariye kho panā’’tiādimāha. Vaṇṇaṃ bhāsituṃ āraddho ‘‘apināmāyaṃ ettakenāpi ratanattayāvaṇṇato orameyyā’’ti. Vaṇṇīyatīti vaṇṇo, guṇo. Vaṇṇanaṃ guṇasaṅkittananti vaṇṇo, pasaṃsā. Saṃññūḷhāti ganthitā, nibandhitāti attho. Atitthena pakkhando dhammakathikoti na vattabbo aparimāṇaguṇattā buddhādīnaṃ , niravasesānañca tesaṃ idha pakāsanaṃ pāḷisaṃvaṇṇanāyeva sampajjatīti. Anussavādīti ettha ādi-saddena ākāraparivitakkadiṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyo saṅgaṇhāti. Attano thāmena vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, na pana buddhādīnaṃ guṇānurūpanti adhippāyo. Asaṅkhyayyāparimitappabhedā hi buddhādīnaṃ guṇā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
纵使佛陀赞颂佛陀的功德,
纵使以其他言语宣说,经历一劫;
在漫长久远的间隙中,劫亦会耗尽。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno; Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti.
这里也会说到:“但这确实只是些微之事”等等。显示巴利原文
Idhāpi vakkhati ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādi.
在“iti ha te”这一短语中,“iti”用以回指前述的内容;而“ha”仅为小品词,故注解说“evaṃ te”(就这样,他们)。显示巴利原文
Iti ha teti ettha itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ. Ha-kāro nipātamattanti āha ‘‘evaṃ te’’ti.
他们之所以成为随行者,是由于跟随世尊的威仪,而非因为如法行道——这是此句的用意所在。“在那时”指世尊踏上那段长途的那一年、那一季、那一月或那半个月。正是为了显示动作没有间断,才用“正在王舍城托钵乞食”这样的现在时叙述。“他”指如此住在王舍城的世尊,“那一日”则是世尊踏上长途的那一天。他之所以走那段路,是为了在那烂陀为可度化者带来种种利益和安乐,同时也借着这一因缘,宣说《梵网经》——此经以三种戒庄严为体,摧破种种欺诈巧言等邪命,解开六十二邪见之网,震动一万世界。这样,“世尊为什么踏上那段长途”这个问题便弄清楚了。至于“须卑为什么成为随行者”,则通过“他并不知道世尊已在那条路上”这句予以澄清。因为他并非真想见到世尊,所以注解说:“如果他知道的话,就不会跟随了。”显示巴利原文
Iriyāpathānubandhanena anubandhā honti, na pana sammāpaṭipattianubandhanenāti adhippāyo. Tasmiṃ kāleti yasmiṃ saṃvacchare utumhi māse pakkhe vā bhagavā taṃ addhānamaggaṃ paṭipanno, tasmiṃ kāle. Teneva hi kiriyāvicchedadassanavasena ‘‘rājagahe piṇḍāya caratī’’ti vattamānakālaniddeso kato. Soti evaṃ rājagahe vasamāno bhagavā. Taṃ divasanti yaṃ divasaṃ addhānamaggapaṭipanno, taṃ divasaṃ. Taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno nāḷandāyaṃ veneyyānaṃ vividha hitasukhanipphattiṃ ākaṅkhamāno imissā ca aṭṭhuppattiyā tividhasīlālaṅkataṃ nānāvidhakuhanalapanādimicchājīvaviddhaṃsanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhijālaviniveṭhanaṃ dasasahassilokadhātupakampanaṃ brahmajālasuttantaṃ desessāmīti. Ettāvatā ‘‘kasmā pana bhagavā taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno’’ti codanā visodhitā hoti. ‘‘Kasmā ca suppiyo anubandho’’ti ayaṃ pana codanā ‘‘bhagavato taṃ maggaṃ paṭipannabhāvaṃ ajānanto’’ti etena visodhitā hoti. Na hi so bhagavantaṃ daṭṭhumeva icchatīti. Tenevāha ‘‘sace pana jāneyya, nānubandheyyā’’ti.
“六色光芒”是指青、黄、赤、白、深红和光辉这些颜色。“周围各八十肘”是指这些光芒自然照耀的范围。而“据说在那时”这句话,是为了显示世尊在长途行路时,并未隐藏其威光。因为那时并不像他人前来问讯等情形,没有任何需要隐藏佛光的理由。“宝环”即珠宝制成的头饰。“中国粉”就是朱砂粉。显示巴利原文
Nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassaravasena ‘‘chabbaṇṇarasmiyo. ‘‘Samantā asītihatthappamāṇe’’ti tāsaṃ rasmīnaṃ pakatiyā pavattiṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tasmiṃ kira samaye’’ti ca tasmiṃ addhānagamanasamaye buddhasiriyā anigūhitabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Na hi tadā tassā nigūhane pakkusātiabhigamanādīsu viya kiñcipi kāraṇaṃ atthīti. Ratanāveḷaṃ ratanavaṭaṃsakaṃ. Cīnapiṭṭhacuṇṇaṃ sindhanacuṇṇaṃ.
世尊周身一丈光芒所成的庄严,称为“大人相鬘”,这是由于大人的种种相好彼此相连,如同花鬘一般。有人设想:“如果将三十二个明月的光轮串起,排成花鬘”,因而称为“如同串起摆放的三十二个月亮花鬘”。这是说那光辉仿佛能压倒月光。同样,也适用于“如同太阳花鬘”等处。“大长老们”指大弟子们。意思是比丘们看见世尊如此行走,便回看自己的随众。从“然而,由于这个女人……”这一段开始,是在阐明“此人为什么说三宝坏话”的问题。“iti”即“如此”,指前面所说的方式。以“通过这两者”来显示利养和随从的减少,作为结论。另一些人说:他们既说坏话又说好话,是为了试探世尊有没有对立或偏袒。也有人说:“他们是被魔罗附体才这样做的。”显示巴利原文
Byāmappabhāparikkhepavilāsinī ca assa bhagavato lakkhaṇamālāti mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni aññamaññapaṭibaddhattā evamāha. Dvattiṃsāya candamaṇḍalānaṃ mālā kenaci ganthetvā ṭhapitā yadi siyāti parikappanavasenāha ‘‘ganthetvā ṭhapitadvattiṃsacandamālāyā’’ti. Siriṃ abhibhavantī ivāti sambandho. Esa nayo sūriyamālāyātiādīsupi. Mahātherāti mahāsāvake sandhāyāha. Evaṃ gacchantaṃ bhagavantaṃ bhikkhū ca disvā atha attano parisaṃ avalokesīti sambandho. ‘‘Yasmā panesā’’tiādinā ‘‘kasmā ca so ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti codanaṃ visodheti. Itīti evaṃ, vuttappakārenāti attho. Imehi dvīhīti lābhaparivārahāniṃ nigamanavasena dasseti. Bhagavato virodhānunayābhāvavīmaṃsanatthaṃ ete avaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇañca bhāsantīti apare. ‘‘Mārena anvāviṭṭhā evaṃ karontī’’ti ca vadanti.
2 这座园林因临近芒果苗圃而得名「芒果苗圃」,正如称「瓦鲁那城」「高达村」一样。但有些人说:「依前述之说,芒果苗圃本身即是一个村落。」在他们的理解中,「于芒果苗圃」是表附近的处所格。那座王室殿宇,有人说是多闻天王的天神殿。「多灾患」意为多险难。锡兰的注疏中说:「与弟子婆罗门青年梵授一起」。然此仅是随顺圣典的记载,并非那时须卑没有自己的徒众。那么,为何圣典中只记载梵授,而未载须卑的徒众呢?因为没有必要。同样的道理也应明白,其他类似之处,结集者同样因无必要而未收录。而有些人说:「『据说』即是指在圣典中说的」,这并不合理,因为若依圣典的记载而说“在圣典中说”,便成了同语反复。因此,此处应依前文所述之理来解了含义。意思是:被(徒众)围绕着而坐。显示巴利原文
2. Ambalaṭṭhikāya avidūre bhavattā uyyānaṃ ambalaṭṭhikā yathā ‘‘varuṇānagaraṃ, godāgāmo’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikāti yathāvuttanayeneva ekagāmo’’ti vadanti . Tesaṃ mate ambalaṭṭhikāyanti samīpatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Rājāgārakaṃ vessavaṇamahārājadevāyatananti eke. Bahuparissayoti bahupaddavo. ‘‘Saddhiṃ antevāsinā brahmadattena māṇavenā’’ti vuttaṃ sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Tañca kho pāḷi āruḷhavaseneva, na pana tadā suppiyassa parisāya abhāvato. Kasmā panettha brahmadattoyeva pāḷi āruḷho, na suppiyassa parisāti? Payojanābhāvato. Yathā cetaṃ, evaṃ aññampi edisaṃ payojanābhāvato saṅgītikārehi na saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘vuttanti pāḷiyaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yujjati pāḷiāruḷhavasena pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti āpajjanato. Tasmā yathāvuttanayenevettha attho gahetabbo. Parivāretvā nisinno hotīti sambandho.
3 「法谈」是指具足谈论性质的法,有些人说它是一种审察的方式。「理趣」(nayo)即是被推导出来的意义。随顺声明学的理趣,称为「声明理趣」。因为在那里,需用一个不常用且令人惊奇的词。所以他说:「犹如盲人登山」。意指奇特、值得赞叹,这便是「词源理趣」。然而,由于它来自古代的注疏,所以他说:「即注疏的理趣」。「这确实被很好地了知到如此程度」一句,应如此理解:对于那件事,我们能善了知并宣说的,最多也仅止于此,因为我们无法彻底通达或宣说它。所以他接着说:「以此显示,它虽被很好地了知,实不可测量。」显示巴利原文
3.Kathādhammoti kathāsabhāvo, kathādhammo upaparikkhāvidhīti keci. Nīyatīti nayo, attho. Saddasatthaṃ anugato nayo saddanayo. Tattha hi anabhiṇhavuttike acchariya-saddo icchito. Tenevāha ‘‘andhassa pabbatārohaṇaṃ viyā’’ti. Accharāyoggantiacchariyanti niruttinayo , so pana yasmā porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgato, tasmā āha ‘‘aṭṭhakathānayoti. Yāvañcidaṃ suppaṭividitāti sambandho, tassa yattakaṃ suṭṭhu paṭividitā, taṃ ettakanti na sakkā amhehi paṭivijjhituṃ, akkhātuṃ vāti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘tena suppaṭividitatāya appameyyataṃ dassetī’’ti.
关于「明显状态之说明」中「那个词」(taṃ):那个词与「世尊」等词处于同位格,它所指的,正是世尊因已正觉之状态而明显、周知的那一已正觉状态。为连同到达的修行道路来显示其义理,故他说了「那……已正觉」等语。虽然「智」与「见」诸词在此皆是「智慧」的同义词,但为了显示它们依各自差别而在各自境界上转起的差异,他从不共智的差别、从三明、从明与证智的障碍、从一切知智与肉眼,以及从通达智与教说智等角度,将这些词组合以显明含义,故说了「那些、那些」等语。其中,以意向随眠智来了知「众生的意向与随眠」;以一切知无碍智来彻见「一切应知之法」。显示巴利原文
Pakatatthapaṭiniddeso taṃ-saddoti tassa ‘‘bhagavatā’’tiādīhi padehi samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttassa yena abhisambuddhabhāvena bhagavā pakato supākaṭo ca hoti, taṃ abhisambuddhabhāvaṃ saddhiṃ āgamanapaṭipadāya atthabhāvena dassento ‘‘yo so…pe… abhisambuddho’’ti āha. Satipi ñāṇadassana-saddānaṃ idha paññāvevacanabhāve tena tena visesena nesaṃ savisayavisesappavattidassanatthaṃ asādhāraṇañāṇavisesavasena vijjattayavasena vijjābhiññānāvaraṇavasena sabbaññutaññāṇamaṃsacakkhuvasena paṭivedhadesanāñāṇavasena ca tadatthaṃ yojetvā dassento ‘‘tesaṃ tesa’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āsayānusayaṃ jānatāāsayānusayañāṇena. Sabbañeyyadhammaṃ passatā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇehi.
“以宿住等”:指以宿住随念智和漏尽智。“以通达慧”:指以圣道慧。“诸敌”:指烦恼之敌、五种魔,或敌视教法的外道。所谓“杀”敌,即以神通变化降伏他们,令其无言以对,或默然置之。在此,《克制调伏经》可作为例证。显示巴利原文
Pubbenivāsādīhīti pubbenivāsāsavakkhayañāṇehi. Paṭivedhapaññāyāti ariyamaggapaññāya. Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ, pañcavidhamārānaṃ vā, sāsanapaccatthikānaṃ vā aññatitthiyānaṃ, tesaṃ hananaṃ pāṭihāriyehi abhibhavanaṃ, appaṭibhānatākaraṇaṃ, ajjhupekkhanañca. Kesivinayasuttañcettha nidassanaṃ.
同样地,他了知处非处等,故为“知者”;他如实照见有情随业往生,故为“见者”;因连同习气的一切烦恼已断尽,故为“阿拉汉”;对应知等种种法,从应知等角度作无颠倒的觉悟,故为“正自觉者”。或者,也可结合十力与十八不共佛法来理解:于三时中智慧无碍故,是“知者”;观察三种业,由智慧随转、审慎而行故,是“见者”;断除嬉笑等行为,具足无嬉笑等过失的断德成就故,是“阿拉汉”;具足一切知智——那是令欲等心所不退减的因,能成就辩才无竭尽——故是“正自觉者”。可作如是结合理解。显示巴利原文
Tathā ṭhānāṭhānādīni jānatā, yathākammūpage satte passatā, savāsanānaṃ āsavānaṃ khīṇattā arahatā, abhiññeyyādibhede dhamme abhiññeyyādito aviparītāvabodhato sammāsambuddhena. Atha vā tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇatāya jānatā, tiṇṇampi kammānaṃ ñāṇānuparivattito nisammakāritāya passatā, davādīnampi abhāvasādhikāya pahānasampadāya arahatā, chandādīnaṃ ahānihetubhūtāya aparikkhayapaṭibhānasādhikāya sabbaññutāya sammāsambuddhenāti evaṃ dasabalaṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhammehipi yojanā veditabbā.
虽然在圣典中,意乐仅分为下劣和贤善二类,但依其生起的方式,却可分为多种,故说“种种意乐性”。而此意乐即是意乐界,也就是以种种方式显示、容忍与喜好,故说“种种意乐性……乃至……种种好乐性”。此处,“以知种种意乐性的智慧”乃指一切知智,并非十力智,因此说“以一切知智”。在“iti ha me”这一短语中,“iti”意为“如此”(evaṃ),“ha”只是小品词,且发生了省音;为说明此点,他说“evaṃ ime”(如此,这些)。显示巴利原文
Yadipi hīnakalyāṇabhedena duvidhāva adhimutti pāḷiyaṃ vuttā, pavattiākāravasena pana anekabhedabhinnāti āha ‘‘nānādhimuttikatā’’ti. Sā pana adhimutti ajjhāsayadhātu, tadapi tathā tathā dassanaṃ khamanaṃ rocanañcāti āha ‘‘nānājjhāsayatā…pe… rucitā’’ti. Nānādhimuttikatañāṇenāti cettha sabbaññutañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, na dasabalañāṇanti āha ‘‘sabbaññutañāṇenā’’ti. Iti ha meti ettha evaṃ-saddattho iti-saddo, ha-kāro nipātamattaṃ saralopo ca katoti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ ime’’ti.
4 他藉由阿拉汉道彻底断除后,在佛陀的教法中便被称为“无有挂虑者”。他以果等至度过时日,遵照住处轮换的方式安住。“有时独自……”等语句,是显示世尊为随顺各类应调伏者的根机,所作的亲近示现。佛陀放脚时,大地变得平坦,这是脚步安稳落地的等流果报,并非神变所现。“右脚刚刚安放好”的说法,是依诸佛始终以南向为尊而说。应将前面所说的一切,都归到“安立于阿拉汉果”上来理解。显示巴利原文
4.Arahattamaggena samugghātaṃ kataṃ, yato ‘‘natthi abyāvaṭamano’’ti buddhadhammesu vuccati. Vītināmetvā phalasamāpattīhi. Nivāsetvā vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasena. ‘‘Kadāci ekako’’tiādi tesaṃ tesaṃ vineyyānaṃ vinayanānukūlaṃ bhagavato upasaṅkamadassanaṃ. Pādanikkhepasamaye bhūmiyā samabhāvāpatti suppatiṭṭhitapādatāya nissandaphalaṃ, na iddhinimmānaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhapitamatte dakkhiṇapāde’’ti buddhānaṃ sabbadakkhiṇatāya vuttaṃ. Arahatte patiṭṭhahantīti sambandho.
“难得的成就”是指:即使获得了人身,若想住于适宜之处、根门无缺、获得信心等功德,也极其难得——这便是它的含义。“前往四大王天的天宫”意思是:前往四大王天界中那些空闲的天宫。这个道理同样适用于三十三天等天宫。“适时”是说:在此时刻,便应如此说法,也就是顺应种种时机。“契机”是它的同义词,或指随顺事由;又可以指带有因由与譬喻的说法。实际上,世尊是适时而又对所化机者说法。意思是,他只是把握时节而说,并非为了去除尘垢,因为世尊的身体根本不沾染任何尘垢。显示巴利原文
Dullabhā sampattīti satipi manussattapaṭilābhe patirūpadesavāsaindriyāvekallasaddhāpaṭilābhādayo guṇā dullabhāti attho. Cātumahārājikabhavananti cātumahārājikadevaloke suññavimānāni gacchantīti attho. Esa nayo tāvatiṃsabhavanādīsupi. Kālayuttanti imissā velāya imassa evaṃ vattabbanti taṃtaṃkālānurūpaṃ. Samayayuttanti tasseva vevacanaṃ, aṭṭhuppattianurūpaṃ vā. Atha vā samayayuttanti hetūdāharaṇasahitaṃ. Kālena sāpadesañhi bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti. Utuṃ gaṇhapeti, na pana malaṃ pakkhāletīti adhippāyo. Na hi bhagavato kāye rajojallaṃ upalimpatīti.
“疲劳的状态”即劳倦。应如此连接文义:“作狮子卧,是为了解除身体的劳倦状态。”“以佛眼观察世间”这句话,是依世尊在后夜分时常行此事而说。有时,世尊也运用剩余的智力以及一切知智来完成此事。“这些是邪见的立足处”等教说,就是狮子吼。再将那些教说与“以受为缘而有爱”等缘起之理融合起来。“犹如举起须弥山,犹如撞击天空”,这是为了显示《梵网经》的教说是他人所不共的、极为难行。“etam”是指“yena”、“tena”这两个词。而“yena”是表原因的具格,意思是:以此因缘,那座圆堂应被走近;也以此因缘,他走近了。这里的因缘,正是注释书中提到的“这些比丘……”等。“kaṭṭhaṃ”是指适合用来坐的木块。显示巴利原文
Kilāsubhāvo kilamatho. Sīhaseyyaṃ kappeti sarīrassa kilāsubhāvamocanatthanti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ voloketī’’ti idaṃ pacchimayāme bhagavato bahulaāciṇṇavasena vuttaṃ. Appekadā avasiṭṭhabalañāṇehi sabbaññutañāṇena ca bhagavā tamatthaṃ sādhetīti. ‘‘Ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā’’tiādidesanā sīhanādo. Tesaṃ ‘‘vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ tiādinā paccayākāraṃ samodhānetvā. ‘‘Sineruṃ ukkhipanto viya nabhaṃ paharanto viya cā’’ti idaṃ brahmajāladesanāya anaññasādhāraṇattā sudukkaratādassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Etanti ‘‘yena, tenā’’ti etaṃ padadvayaṃ. Yenāti vā hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ, yena kāraṇena so maṇḍalamāḷo upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti attho, kāraṇaṃ pana ‘‘ime bhikkhū’’tiādinā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃeva. Kaṭṭhanti nisīdanayogyaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ.
“前面的”是指像“你们在谈论什么?”这样被说出的内容。而“那你们又是……”这一句中,“ca”字表示别义,藉此显示出,相比于已被问及的话题,将要被说出的内容乃是一个中断而未完成的话题;“pana”字则是一种语言的修饰。因为,比丘们聚集时所谈论的,正是那个变成了中断话题、尚未完成的内容,所以才被特别地再次问起。“别的”(aññā)解释了“中间”(antarā)这个词的意思;因为这个“antarā”一词,也可以用在其他意义上,就像在“地中间”、“时间中间”等词中所用的那样。或者,“antarā”就是“在中间”的意思。(问:)那些比丘不是已经按照心意,以“我们这样听说”等方式结束了那个话题吗?(答:)并未结束,因为它被世尊的来临所截断了。如果世尊在那一时刻没有来,他们还会继续谈论更多与之相关的话题;但正因世尊来临,他们便不再继续谈下去了。因此,他才说:“这个话题……还未达到结束”。(问:)那么,在此进行法与律结集的时候,为什么要说出序分(nidāna)呢?难道不是只应结集世尊的话语吗?(答:)这是为了显示巴利原文
Purimoti ‘‘katamāya nu bhavathā’’ti evaṃ vutto attho. Kā ca pana voti ettha ca-saddo byatireke. Tena yathāpucchitāya kathāya vakkhamānaṃ vippakatabhāvaṃ joteti. Pana-saddo vacanālaṅkāro. Yāya hi kathāya te bhikkhū sannisinnā, sā eva antarākathābhūtā vippakatā visesena puna pucchīyatīti. Aññāti antarāsaddassa atthamāha. Aññatthe hi ayaṃ antarā-saddo ‘‘bhūmantaraṃ samayantara’’ntiādīsu viya. Antarāti vā vemajjheti attho. Nanu ca tehi bhikkhūhi sā kathā yathādhippāyaṃ ‘‘iti ha me’’tiādinā niṭṭhapitā yevāti? Na niṭṭhāpitā bhagavato upasaṅkamanena upacchinnattā. Yadi hi bhagavā tasmiṃ khaṇe na upasaṅkameyya bhiyyopi tappaṭibaddhāyeva kathā pavatteyyuṃ, bhagavato upasaṅkamanena pana na pavattesuṃ. Tenevāha ayaṃ kho…pe… anuppatto’’ti. Kasmā panettha dhammavinayasaṅgahe kariyamāne nidānavacanaṃ, nanu bhagavato vacanameva saṅgahetabbanti? Vuccatedesanāya ṭhitiasammosasaddheyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakavatthudhammapaṭiggāhakapaṭibaddhā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti, asammosadhammā saddheyyā ca. Desakālakattusotunimittehi upanibandho viya vohāravinicchayo, teneva cāyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘brahmajālaṃ āvuso ānanda kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā desādipucchāsu katāsu tāsaṃ vissajjanaṃ karontena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena nidānaṃ bhāsitanti tayidamāha ‘‘kāla…pe… nidānaṃ bhāsita’’nti.
再者,序分之说也是为了成就导师。因为,对于如来世尊而言,没有事先的构思、推测与思量,由此成就了正自觉者的身份。正因为他是一位正自觉者,才能在一切处拥有无所障碍的智慧运行,对于所应知的诸法也无有局限,从而没有事先的构思等。同样地,由于没有秘藏师法的悭吝、不随顺师长的偏见、不迎合声闻的喜好,从而成就了诸漏尽者的身份。正因为一切漏都已断尽,他才没有秘藏师法等过失,并且利益他人的作为是清净的。如此,以表明毁坏正见与正行的烦恼——无明与渴爱——并不存在为特征,以及以智慧与断除的成就为表征的正觉与清净状况,成就了前两种自信;依于此,在障碍法与导出法上由于没有任何迷惑,从而成就了后两种自信。这样,通过序分之说,便彰显了世尊具足四种自信,以及他自利利他的行道。因为序分论述,是顺着在场会众的意乐,以随事发起的辩才来开演教法,并且通过“知者、见者”等语句加以阐明。因此说:“序分之说,是为了成就导师。”显示巴利原文
Apica satthusiddhiyā nidānavacanaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi bhagavato pubbaracanānumānāgamatakkābhāvato sammāsambuddhattasiddhi. Sammāsambuddhabhāvena hissa pubbaracanādīnaṃ abhāvo sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya, ekappamāṇattā ca ñeyyadhammesu. Tathā ācariyamuṭṭhidhammamacchariyasatthusāvakānurodhābhāvato khīṇāsavattasiddhi. Khīṇā savatāya hissa ācariyamuṭṭhiādīnaṃ abhāvo, visuddhā ca parānuggahappavatti. Iti desakadosabhūtānaṃ diṭṭhicārittasampattidūsakānaṃ avijjātaṇhānaṃ abhāvasūcakehi, ñāṇappahānasampadābhi byañjanakehi ca sambuddhavisuddhabhāvehi purimavesārajjadvayasiddhi, tato eva ca antarāyikaniyyānikadhammesu sammohābhāvasiddhito pacchimavesārajjadvayasiddhīti bhagavato catuvesārajjasamannāgamo , attahitaparahitappaṭipatti ca pakāsitā hoti nidānavacanena sampattaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ ṭhānuppattikappaṭibhānena dhammadesanādīpanato, ‘‘jānatā passatā’’tiādi vacanato ca. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthusiddhiyā nidānavacana’’nti.
同样,序分之说也是为了成就导师。因为,那位以智慧与悲悯摄持一切造作的世尊,绝对没有无意义的活动,也不为自己的利益而行事。因此,这位一切所作都纯粹是为了他人利益而开展的正自觉者,他的全部身业、语业、意业,都是纯粹导师的作为,而不是诗词创作等泛泛的教说作为。因此说:“序分之说,是为了成就导师。”再者,序分之说,也是通过阐明导师作为标准者的地位,从而成就“教法是标准”这一事实。因为,“由世尊”这个词语,显示了如来功德超胜、为众生最上等含义;“知者”等词语,则显示了意向随眠智等的运用,从而成立了这个道理。以上,只是对序分作用的粗略展示。毕竟,谁能毫无遗漏地,完全阐明由那位追随佛陀而觉悟、身为法藏者的阿难尊者所宣说的序分的全部作用呢?显示巴利原文
Tathā satthusiddhiyā nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthikā pavatti, attahitatthā vā, tasmā paresaṃyeva atthāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ satthubhūtaṃ, na kabyaracanādisāsanabhūtaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthusiddhiyā nidānavacana’’nti. Apica satthuno pamāṇabhūtatāvibhāvanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvasiddhiyā nidānavacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavatā’’ti hi iminā tathāgatassa guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamādibhāvadīpanena, ‘‘jānatā’’tiādinā āsayānusayañāṇādipayogadīpanena ca ayamattho sādhito hoti. Idamettha nidānavacanapayojanassa mukhamattadassanaṃ. Ko hi samattho buddhānubuddhena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena bhāsitassa nidānassa payojanāni niravasesato vibhāvetunti.
5 「已安置的」意指「已宣说的」。因为宣说本身就是将所应宣说的戒等义理,安置于应调伏者的相续心中,故称为「安置」。于此,正如诸经虽有百千种分类,也不超越以杂染分等教法分类方式所成的十六种;同样地,依「自身意乐」等经的安置方式而有四种,故说为「四种经的安置」。虽然在此处,自身意乐与事缘,由于有意乐与请问的连结,可能与伴随请问的「他人意乐」相混杂,但自身意乐与事缘之间并未彼此混同,因此这里不可能有毫无遗漏的详尽分类,故只说「四种经的安置」。或者,虽然事缘可能与意乐有混合,但由于其余的安置方式都包含在根本的安置方式中,因此依根本的安置方式,应理解为只是开示了这四种。然而,这种经的安置,因其为共通的体性,故应先予审察。审察之后,为便于显示各个连结,对于那些依事缘而展开的经文与经句——例如「诸比丘,若有人毁谤我……」(《长部》1.5-6)、「然而,诸比丘,这是微小的……」(《长部》1.7)、「诸比丘,显示巴利原文
5.Nikkhittassāti desitassa. Desanāpi hi desetabbassa sīlādiatthassa vineyyasantānesu nikkhipanato ‘‘nikkhepo’’ti vuccati. Tattha yathā anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttantāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādisāsanappaṭṭhānanayena soḷasavidhataṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ attajjhāsayādisuttanikkhepavasena catubbidhabhāvanti āha ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’ti. Kāmañcettha attajjhāsayassa, aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāhi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati ajjhāsayapucchānusandhisabbhāvato, attajjhāsayaaṭṭhuppattīnaṃ pana aññamaññaṃ saṃsaggo natthīti nayidha niravaseso vitthāranayo sambhavati, tasmā ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā yadipi aṭṭhuppattiyā ajjhāsayena siyā saṃsaggabhedo, tadantogadhattā pana sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepavasena cattārova dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. So panāyaṃ suttanikkhepo sāmaññabhāvato paṭhamaṃ vicāretabbo, tasmiṃ vicārite yassā aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ suttaṃ nikkhittaṃ, tassā vibhāgavasena ‘‘mamaṃ vā bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.5, 6), ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 1.7), ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.28) ca pavattānaṃ suttānaṃ suttapadesānaṃ vaṇṇanā vuccamānā taṃtaṃanusandhidassanasukhatāya suviññeyyā hotīti āha ‘‘suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hotī’’ti.
在「经的安置」等词中,「安置」即指安置的行为;经的安置,即经的宣说,也就是经的教导,其含义为「经的宣说」。或者,「被安置者」称为安置,经本身即是安置,故称「经的安置」。自己的意乐即是「自身意乐」,他具有此意乐,此意乐是经被宣说的原因,故称「自身意乐者」。或者,此经的宣说以自身意乐为原因,故称「自身意乐者」。于「他人意乐」中,也应以同样的方法理解。以请问之力,称为「请问力」,具有请问力者,称为「请问力者」。应当被执持的是「义」,它是经被宣说的事由。事由的生起称为「事缘」,事缘即是事缘本身,此经具有此事缘,故称「具有事缘者」。或者,经由这些而安置这部经,故称为「经的安置」,也就是指自身意乐等这些内容。而在这种对含义的分辨中:自己的意乐即是「自身意乐」,他人的意乐即是「他人意乐」,被请问的即是「请问」,也就是所应请问的义理。基于应听闻之力而生起的、领受法者的话语,称为「请问力者」,这是为了与「安置」一词的语法性相呼应而采用此称。同样地,显示巴利原文
‘‘Suttanikkhepā’’tiādīsu nikkhipanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttassa kathanaṃ suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Nikkhipīyatīti vā nikkhepo, suttaṃyeva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi suttadesanākāraṇabhūtoti attajjhāsayo. Attano ajjhāsayo etassāti vā attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vaso pucchāvaso, so etassa atthīti pucchavasiko. Araṇīyato attho, suttadesanāya vatthu. Atthassa uppatti atthuppatti, atthuppattiyeva aṭṭhuppatti, sā etassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattiko. Atha vā nikkhipīyati suttaṃ etenāti suttanikkhepo, attajjhāsayādi eva. Etasmiṃ pana atthavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo, pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitabbo attho. Sotabbavasappavattaṃ dhammappaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasikā, tadeva nikkhepasaddāpekkhāya pulliṅgavasena vuttaṃ ‘‘pucchāvasiko’’ti. Tathā aṭṭhuppattiyeva ‘‘aṭṭhuppattiko’’ti evampettha attho veditabbo.
在此,自身意乐不观待他人根器成熟等条件,因此单独作为一种安置方式,是合理的。正因如此,他说:「唯凭自己的意乐而说法」。然而,对于他人意乐和请问力者,当成为说法之因的他人意乐与请问生起时,由此而发生的说法为何不归入事缘?或者,请问力者和具有事缘者,因为是随顺他人意乐而进行的教导,为何不归入他人意乐?不应有此质疑。因为,他人意乐和请问力者之所以被单独列出,是由于事缘被定义为:完全脱离了他人之愿求、遍问等,纯粹作为经被宣说之因而生起的事由。例如,《法嗣经》等,以生起利养等作为说法之因,这就是所谓的「事缘」。脱离他人的请问、只以意乐为因而宣说的,是「他人意乐」;以请问力而宣说的,是「请问力者」,此义甚明。应当了知,「唯凭自己的意乐而说法」是为了确立「法性」。《正勤经》之摄,是指在《相应部》中,按顺序依次被解说的、与正勤相应的诸经汇编;同样地,也有神足之摄等。令解脱得以圆熟的诸法,指的是信根等。愿求,即是希冀。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇanirapekkhatā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ nikkhepabhāvo yutto. Tenevāha ‘‘kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva kathetī’’ti. Parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanānimittabhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ anavarodho, pucchāvasikaaṭṭhuppattikānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattitadesanattā kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodhoti na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinimuttasseva suttadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattibhāvena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi dhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ (ma. ni. 1.29) āmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhuppattī’’ti vuccati. Paresaṃ pucchaṃ vinā ajjhāsayameva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasena desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭo yamatthoti. Attano ajjhāsayeneva kathesi dhammatantiṭhapanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sammappadhānasuttantahārakoti anupubbena niddiṭṭhānaṃ saṃyuttake sammappadhānapaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ suttānaṃ āvaḷi, tathā iddhipādahārakādi.Vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā saddhindriyādayo. Abhinīhāranti paṇidhānaṃ.
在“赞美与毁谤”一词中,也包含了像“贤友,真是稀有啊……”这样由比丘僧团所说的赞美。然而,那是作为事缘而说,之后将在后面依此开始宣说“诸比丘,还有其他法……”等教导。在“诸比丘,若有人赞美我……”这一教导中,梵授王所说的赞美被当作事缘,因此说:“弟子之赞美。如此,以这赞美与毁谤作为事缘后……”。‘vā’这个词,出现在比喻、聚合、疑惑、决定、填充语句、抉择等多种意义中。正如它在“纵使是智者,也以此而……”等语句中出现在比喻义上,意思是“相似的状态”;在“诸贤者、牟尼了知此或彼”等语句中出现在聚合义;在“这些是谁?属于谁?”等语句中出现在疑惑义;在“这个人或许是这些沙门婆罗门中最愚笨、最糊涂的”等语句中出现在决定义;在“这童子并不知量”等语句中出现在填充语句义;在“诸比丘,凡是那些沙门或婆罗门”等语句中出现在抉择义。在这里,为了表明它正是抉择的意义,他说:“‘vā’这个词是抉择义”。‘para’这个词,在“如果我宣说法,而他人却不能理解我”等语句中,有“其他的”含义。显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇāvaṇṇeti ettha ‘‘acchariyaṃ āvuso’’tiādinā bhikkhusaṅghena vutto vaṇṇopi saṅgahito, taṃ pana aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave aññe ca dhammā’’tiādinā upari desanaṃ ārabhissatīti. ‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave pare vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’nti imissā desanāya brahmadattena vuttavaṇṇo aṭṭhuppattīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘antevāsī vaṇṇaṃ. Iti imaṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā’’ti. Vā-saddo upamānasamuccayasaṃsayavavassaggapadapūraṇavikappādīsu bahūsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘paṇḍito vāpi tena so’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 63) upamāne dissati, sadisabhāveti attho. ‘‘Taṃ vāpi dhīrā muni vedayantī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 203) samuccaye, ‘‘ke vā ime, kassa vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 296) saṃsaye, ‘‘ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu vavassagge, ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.154) padapūraṇe, ‘‘ye hi keci bhikkhave samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.170) vikappe, idhāyaṃ vikappeyevāti dassento āha ‘‘vā-saddo vikappanattho’’ti. Para-saddo attheva aññatthe ‘‘ahañceva kho pana dhammaṃ deseyyaṃ, pare ca me na ājāneyyu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.64, 65; ma. ni. 1.281; ma. ni. 2.223; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 4, 8) atthi adhike ‘‘indriyaparopariyattañāṇa’’ntiādīsu (paṭi. ma. mātikā 68, 1.111) atthi pacchābhāge ‘‘parato āgamissatī’’tiādīsu. Atthi paccanīkabhāve ‘‘uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ saha dhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.168). Idhāpi paccanīkabhāveti dassento āha ‘‘pareti paṭiviruddhā’’ti.
在“在这样的情况下也”这句中,‘pi’这个词表示推想。以此显示:即使是以三宝为对象,也不应生起不善心,更何况是以轮回利养、世间利养为对象。为了表明‘伤害’这一行为具有与真实法性不同的作者,他揭示了‘āghāta’一词的主动含义,即源自‘āhanati’。此处,‘āhanati’的意思是伤害、损恼以及折磨。或者,‘以此而伤害’,或者仅仅是伤害的行为本身,这就是‘āghāta’,因此工具格的含义也可以成立。如此通过拆解词素来解释‘āghāta’一词的含义之后,现在为了以同义词来显示其义,他说:“这是愤怒的别称”。这种方法,在“不满”、“不喜”等词上,也应视情况而运用。“他们对此不满足”,这是用明显的同义词来显示‘appaccaya’一词的含义,但应了知,依此方法,“不因此而满足”即是‘不满’。‘abhirādhayati’的意思是成就。由两个词,即‘嗔恨’与‘不喜’。由一个词,即‘不满’。其余的诸法,是指除去想和识之后,剩下的称为行蕴的那些法,或者就是指想蕴和识蕴。‘造作’显示巴利原文
Īdisesupīti ettha pi-saddo sambhāvane, tena ratanattayanimittampi akusalacittappavatti na kātabbā, pageva vaṭṭāmisalokāmisanimittanti dasseti. Sabhāvadhammato aññassa kattuabhāvajotanatthaṃ āhanatīti kattuatthe āghātasaddaṃ dasseti, tattha āhanatīti hiṃsati vibādhati, upatāpeti cāti attho. Āhanati etena, āhananamattaṃ vā āghātoti karaṇabhāvatthāpi sambhavantiyeva. Evaṃ avayavabhedanena āghāta-saddassa atthaṃ vatvā idāni tattha pariyāyenapi atthaṃ dassento ‘‘kopassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti āha. Ayañca nayo ‘‘appaccayo anabhiraddhī’’tiādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vattabbo. Appatītā honti tenāti pākaṭapariyāyena appaccaya-saddassa atthadassanaṃ, taṃmukhena pana na pacceti tenāti appaccayoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Abhirādhayatīti sādhayati. Dvīhīti āghātaanabhiraddhipadehi. Ekenāti appaccayapadena. Sesānanti saññāviññāṇakkhandhānaṃ, saññāviññāṇaavasiṭṭhasaṅkhārakkhandhasaṅkhātānaṃ vā. Karaṇanti uppādanaṃ. Āghātādīnañhi pavattiyā paccayasamavāyanaṃ idha ‘‘karaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ pana atthato uppādanameva. Anuppādanañhi sandhāya bhagavatā ‘‘na karaṇīyā’’ti vuttanti. Paṭikkhittameva ekuppādekavatthukekārammaṇekanirodhabhāvato.
“在那里”,指在那心的嗔恨中。“你等”是一个与“你们的”含义相同的词;正如‘amha’是一个与“我们的”含义相同的词。如所说:“因此,我们的幼童不会死亡”。而“障碍”一词,是说明“为何不应造作心的嗔恨”之原因的语句。因为,对你们自己来说,由那种愤怒等,将成为证得初禅等的障碍,所以不应造作那些称为愤怒等同义词的嗔恨等。这就是它的含义。通过这点,他表明:“我并不是以‘我是全知者’这般权威的身份来阻止你们远离它,而是出于‘以此为原因’的考量。”而那说明原因的话,由于是在阐明过患,所以他说:“是在显示过患”。通过“你们岂能……”等语句,他指出:心的嗔恨并不只是对未来的利乐造成障碍,即使是在它当下生起时,也会对利乐造成障碍,这样就更确切地显示了心的嗔恨中的过患。“对于任何人……”的意思,不像在“他人……”等句子中那样仅指敌对者,而是泛指一切人。因此他说:“愤怒者……”等等。显示巴利原文
Tatthāti tasmiṃ manopadose. Tumhanti ‘‘tumhāka’’nti iminā samānattho eko saddo ‘‘yathā amhāka’’nti iminā samānattho ‘‘amha’’nti ayaṃ saddo. Yathāha, ‘‘tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na miyyare’’ti (jā. 1.9.93, 99). ‘‘Antarāyo’’ti idaṃ manopadosassa akaraṇīyatāya kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā tumhākaṃyeva ca bhaveyya tena kopādinā paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ antarāyo, tasmā te kopādipariyāyena vuttā āghātādayo na karaṇīyāti attho. Tena nāhaṃ ‘‘sabbaññū’’ti issarabhāvena tumhe tato nivāremi, atha kho iminā nāma kāraṇenāti dasseti. Taṃ pana kāraṇavacanaṃ yasmā ādīnavavibhāvanaṃ hoti, tasmā āha ‘‘ādīnavaṃ dassento’’ti. ‘‘Api nu tumhe’’tiādinā manopadoso na kālantarabhāvinoyeva hitasukhassa antarāyakaro, atha kho taṅkhaṇappavattirahassapi hitasukhassa antarāyakaroti manopadose ādīnavaṃ daḷhataraṃ katvā dasseti. Yesaṃ kesañci ‘‘pare’’tiādīsu viya na paṭiviruddhānaṃyevāti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘kupito’’tiādi.
「盲暗」指导致盲目的那种极度黑暗。「那个」指「在哪里」,这是将主格用作处所格的意义。句意为:当愤怒征服一个人时,彼时便生起盲暗。或者,「那个」是表原因的词语,即「由于」:因为愤怒生起时压制此人,故那时便有了盲暗。由于「yaṃ」与「taṃ」二词有必然关联,是故有愤怒时便有盲暗。再者,「那个」是对行为的指称。「愤怒征服」这件事——此征服、压制——其含义即是成为黑暗的状态。或者:那个被愤怒征服、压制的人,于彼时便有盲暗。由此,愤怒者不知利益,愤怒者不见法。「从内部」,即是「从内在」,或「从心上」。显示巴利原文
Andhatamanti andhabhāvakaratamaṃ. Yanti yattha. Bhummatthe hi etaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Yasmiṃ kāle kodho sahate naraṃ, andhatamaṃ tadā hotīti sambandho. Yanti vā kāraṇavacanaṃ, yasmā kodho uppajjamāno naraṃ abhibhavati, tasmā andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yadā kodhoti attho yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ ekantasambandhibhāvato. Atha vā yanti kiriyāya parāmasanaṃ. Kodho sahateti yadetaṃ kodhassa sahanaṃ abhibhavanaṃ, etaṃ andhakāratamabhavananti attho. Atha vā yaṃ naraṃ kodho sahate abhibhavati, tassa andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, tato ca kuddho atthaṃ na jānāti, kuddho dhammaṃ na passatīti. Antaratoti abbhantarato, cittato vā.
以「基于此因及彼因」一语,显示如下意义:「我等导师实为全知者,因其宣说的是无颠倒的法;法为善说,因其能绝对地导引出离;僧伽为善行道者,因其远离了染污。」又以「基于此因及彼因」此语,将诸如「非全知者」等不实、非真的言论予以驳斥。「第二个词」指「非真」;「对于第一个」指对「不实」;「及第四个」指「而这在我们身上并不存在」这句话;「对于第三个」指对「这在我们之中是没有的」这句话。「正是在毁谤上」的意思是:通过说出一个貌似合理的理由来确立过失,这即是进行毁谤。「并非在所有情况下」的意思是:并非仅在谩骂、讥讽、轻蔑等情况下,才不必进行驳斥。他以「如果……」等语引出,将已说的义理加以阐明,令其更加清晰。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idañcidañca kāraṇa’’nti iminā sabbaññū eva amhākaṃ satthā aviparītadhammadesanattā, svākkhāto dhammo ekantaniyyānikattā, suppaṭipanno saṅgho saṃkilesarahitattāti imamatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Idañcidañca kāraṇa’’nti etena ca ‘‘na sabbaññū’’tiādivacanaṃ abhūtaṃ atacchanti nibbeṭhitaṃ hoti. Dutiyaṃ padanti ‘‘ataccha’’nti padaṃ. Paṭhamassāti ‘‘abhūta’’nti padassa. Catutthañcāti ‘‘na ca panetaṃ amhesu saṃvijjatī’’ti padaṃ. Tatiyassāti ‘‘natthi cetaṃ amhesū’’ti padassa. Avaṇṇeyevāti kāraṇapatirūpakaṃ vatvā dosapatiṭṭhāpanavasena nindane eva. Na sabbatthāti kevalaṃ akkosanakhuṃsanavambhanādīsu na ekantena nibbeṭhanaṃ kātabbanti attho. Vuttamevatthaṃ ‘‘yadi hī’’tiādinā pākaṭaṃ katvā dasseti.
6 「喜悦」:以该法使得具备它的有情欢喜愉悦,这是显示「ānanda」一词的工具格含义(即能令喜悦的法)。「有善妙的心」故称「善心者」;或善妙心本身即为善心,其状态即是「喜悦」。若问:「那么,其他与之相应的心所,是否也获得喜悦的状态?」答:「不会,因为这是约定俗成的词,如同「莲花」。」为说明此,他说:「这是心所乐之别名」。「ubbilayati」的意思是「使浮动」,即打破前态而达到别异的状况。「浮动」即是「浮动的状态」,该状态即是「浮动性」。当这种与在家生活相关的踊跃喜悦生起时,身心便如同充满风的皮囊一般呈现膨胀之相,这便是该词的别名。因此他说:「带来掉举的……」等等。在此亦应依上下文已说明的方法来理解,如注释书中所言:「虽诸比丘全无浮动,然世尊为未来故,禁止善男子等在此情境中生起不善心,由此确立法的传承」;「由两个词(指瞋恨与不喜)说行蕴,由一个词(指不满)说受蕴」;「对于那些」显示巴利原文
6.Ānandanti pamodanti etena dhammena taṃsamaṅgino sattāti ānanda-saddassa karaṇatthataṃ dasseti . Sobhanaṃ mano assāti sumano, sobhanaṃ vā mano sumano, tassa bhāvo somanassanti tadaññadhammānampi sampayuttānaṃ somanassabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati ruḷhīsaddattā yathā ‘‘paṅkaja’’nti dassento ‘‘cetasikasukhassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti āha. Ubbilayatīti ubbilaṃ, bhindati purimāvatthāya visesaṃ āpajjatīti attho. Ubbilameva ubbilāvitaṃ, tassa bhāvo ubbilāvitattaṃ. Yāya uppannāya kāyacittaṃ vātapūritabhastā viya uddhumāyanākārappattaṃ hoti, tassā gehassitāya odaggiyapītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘uddhaccāvahāyā’’tiādi. Idhāpi ‘‘kiñcāpi tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ubbilāvitameva natthi, atha kho āyatiṃ kulaputtānaṃ edisesupi ṭhānesu akusaluppattiṃ paṭisedhento dhammanettiṃ ṭhapetī’’ti, ‘‘dvīhi padehi saṅkhārakkhandho, ekena vedanākkhandho vutto’’ti ettha ‘‘tesaṃ vasena sesānampi sampayuttadhammānaṃ karaṇaṃ paṭikkhittamevā’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ, ‘‘pi-saddo sambhāvane’’tiādinā idha ca vuttanayena attho yathāsambhavaṃ veditabbo. ‘‘Tumhaṃyevassatena antarāyo’’ti etthāpi ‘‘antarāyoti ida’’ntiādinā heṭṭhā avaṇṇapakkhe vuttanayena attho veditabbo.
而“为何这样说呢?”这一句,是提问者在心里留意了接下来要解释的义理之后,才提出的质问。导师以“确实称赞了真实”承认了那个义理,然后用“不过那是建立在出离基础上的……”等来作回答。在这里,“此”指的是对阿难等人无有所作那番话的表述。“难道不是被世尊称赞了吗”是连接句。“整个地”指完整性、全体性。不过也有些人说:“‘赡部洲的’这个词,是以具格形式用作属格的意义。”依他们的见解,应当把“整个”和“赡部洲”视作同格关系。“因此”的意思是:因为那种基于家居生活的喜与喜悦,会成为禅那等的障碍,所以这么说。其实世尊也曾这样说过:“天帝,我说喜悦有两种:有应该亲近的,也有不应该亲近的。”(长部·帝释问经)接下来的“因为这种……”等,是为了说明与什么相应的喜会形成障碍。在这段解释里,本来应该表述为“这种与贪俱行的喜与喜悦”,但由于举出了“喜”,自然也就包含了“喜悦”,因为没有脱离喜悦而单独存在的喜,所以应理解为这里只举了“喜”这个词。或者说,由于在世尊对应该亲近和不应该亲近的区分开示中,喜悦的显示巴利原文
Kasmā panetanti ca vakkhamānaṃyeva atthaṃ manasi katvā codeti. Ācariyo ‘‘saccaṃ vaṇṇita’’nti tamatthaṃ paṭijānitvā ‘‘taṃ pana nekkhammanissita’’ntiādinā pariharati. Tattha etanti ānandādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatāvacanaṃ. Nanu bhagavatā vaṇṇitanti sambandho. Kasiṇenāti kasiṇatāya sakalabhāvena. Keci pana ‘‘jambudīpassāti karaṇe sāmivacana’’nti vadanti, tesaṃ matena kasiṇajambudīpa-saddānaṃ samānādhikaraṇabhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Tasmāti yasmā gehassitapītisomanassaṃ jhānādīnaṃ antarāyakaraṃ, tasmā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘somanassaṃ pāhaṃ devānaṃ inda duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi asevitabbampī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.359). ‘‘Ayañhī’’tiādi yena sampayuttā pīti antarāyakarī, taṃ dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘idañhi lobhasahagataṃ pītisomanassa’’nti vattabbaṃ siyā, pītiggahaṇena pana somanassampi gahitameva hoti somanassarahitāya pītiyā abhāvatoti pītiyeva gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā sevitabbāsevitabbavibhāgavacanato somanassassa pākaṭo antarāyakarabhāvo, na tathā pītiyāti pītiyeva lobhasahagatattena visesetvā vuttā. ‘‘Luddho attha’’ntiādigāthānaṃ ‘‘kuddho attha’’ntiādi gāthāsu viya attho daṭṭhabbo.
“诸比丘,若他人称赞我,或称赞法,或称赞僧团,而你们在那时感到欢喜、愉悦、得意忘形,你们还能分辨出他人所说的是善说还是恶说吗?”“不能,尊者。”此是第三轮问答。应如此理解:在说法时,因无堪受此教法之人,故未纳入开示;然从义理上,其实已涵盖其中,就如同《论事》以广说的方式展开一样,这是它的意趣所在。通过说“在义理上已涵盖”,表示在作注释时,可以为了那些能如此领悟的众生,而把这轮问答引进来加以说明。接下来的“正如……”等,就是在阐明那种义理上的存在性。其解释的方式,就是指像“在那里,你们……即是说在那称赞当中,你们……”等这样的方法,以及“第二句是第一句的同义词,第四句是第三句的同义词”等这样的方法。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave pare vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ, dhammassa vā vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ, saṅghassa vā vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ, tatra ce tumhe assatha ānandino sumanā ubbilāvitā, api nu tumhe paresaṃ subhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ ājāneyyāthāti. No hetaṃ bhante’’ti ayaṃ tatiyavāro, so desanākāle nīharitvā desetabbapuggalābhāvato desanāya anāgatopi tadatthasambhavato atthato āgatoyevāti daṭṭhabbo yathā taṃ kathāvatthupakaraṇaṃ vitthāravasenāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Atthato āgato yevā’’ti etena saṃvaṇṇanākāle tathā bujjhanakasattānaṃ vasena so vāro ānetvā vattabboti dasseti. ‘‘Yatheva hī’’tiādinā tamevatthasambhavaṃ vibhāveti. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘tatra tumhehīti tasmiṃ vaṇṇe tumhehī’’tiādinā, ‘‘dutiyaṃ padaṃ paṭhamassa padassa, catutthañca tatiyassa vevacana’’ntiādinā ca vuttanayena.
小戒注释显示巴利原文
Cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā
7 “被排除”,因其无真实根基,且无可遣除之故。“随转”,则因有更应舍弃之法的缘故。他将以“诸比丘,有……”等来显示其中的连结。“低下的”一词,或指后面的部分,如同“从此岸、彼岸”等用法中的“此岸”。或者,“低下”这个词是表示在下、低层次的意思,就如“那些导致再来的诸缘,即是下分结”等用法。因为戒相对于定和慧来说,既属于后面的部分,也处在较低的基础层次。在“唯戒”这个词中,“唯”字或是表示“微小的、仅少的”之意,就像“药的仅少量”等用法一样(长部1.447)。或者,“唯”字是表示“把更殊胜的排除掉”的意思,就像“无寻唯伺法”、“唯意界、意识界”等用法。实际上,通过“微小的、低下的”两个词所总说的意思,在“唯戒”这里是以一种特别的方式来表达的。又或者,在“唯戒”中,此“唯”字是为了将戒中的某一部分也涵摄进来,所以是表示“少”的意思;或者它就只是表示“否定更殊胜的状态”。事实上,依于根律仪防护而产生的那些戒,在当前这段开示中并未纳入教导,因为它在显示巴利原文
7.Nivatto amūlakattā vissajjetabbatābhāvato. Anuvattatiyeva vissajjetabbatāya adhikatabhāvato. Anusandhiṃ dassessati ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādinā. Oranti vā aparabhāgo ‘‘orato bhogaṃ, oraṃ pāra’’ntiādīsu viya. Atha vā heṭṭhāattho ora-saddo ‘‘oraṃ āgamanāya ye paccayā, te orambhāgiyāni saṃyojanānī’’tiādīsu viya. Sīlañhi samādhipaññāyo apekkhitvā aparabhāgo, heṭṭhābhūtañca hotīti. Sīlamattakanti ettha matta-saddo appakattho vā ‘‘bhesajjamattā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.447) viya. Visesanivattiattho vā ‘‘avitakkavicāramattā dhammā (dha. sa. tikamātikā 6), manomattā dhātu manodhātū’’ti ca ādīsu viya. ‘‘Appamattakaṃ, oramattaka’’nti padadvayena sāmaññato vuttoyeva hi attho sīlamattakanti visesavasena vutto. Atha vā sīlenapi tadekadesasseva saṅgahaṇatthaṃ appakatthavācako, visesanivattiattho eva vā ‘‘sīlamattaka’’nti ettha matta-saddo vutto. Tathā hi indriyasaṃvarapaccayasannissitasīlāni idha desanaṃ anāruḷhāni. Na hi tāni pātimokkhaājīvapārisuddhisīlāni viya sabbaputhujjanesu pākaṭānīti. ‘‘Ussāhaṃ katvā’’ti etena ‘‘vadamāno’’ti ettha sattiatthaṃ māna-saddaṃ dasseti.
“装饰”指庄严身相、华美之打扮,即耳环等饰品。“妆饰”指弥补身体不足之处。“为了妆饰”意谓以妆饰为目的。又或可说,能打扮者名为“妆饰者”,指天性喜好妆饰之人。此处是以单数形式表示复数意义,指那些具有妆饰习气的人。在“圆满作者”一词中,“iti”字表示“等”或“如此”之义,由此标示出整部《戒赞叹经》。言“栴檀”者,因香气与栴檀木俱生,故指栴檀香;于多伽罗等香,其理亦同。而“善士之香”中,“香”是譬喻,指由持戒而生之赞叹美誉。因为戒是美名的根源,正如经中所说:“持戒者、戒具足者,美名远扬。”(长部2.150;增支部5.213;律藏大品285)“吹散”即宣扬、令彰显。“如同种种香”指各种不同香料所散发出的香气。显示巴利原文
Alaṅkaraṇaṃ vibhūsanaṃ alaṅkāro, kuṇḍalādipasādhanaṃ vā. Ūnaṭṭhānapūraṇaṃ maṇḍanaṃ. Maṇḍaneti maṇḍanahetu. Atha vā maṇḍatīti maṇḍano, maṇḍanajātiko puriso. Bahuvacanatthe ca idaṃ ekavacanaṃ, maṇḍanasīlesūti attho. Paripūrakārīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, tena sakalampi sīlathomana suttaṃ dasseti. Candananti candanasahacaraṇato candanagandho, tathā tagarādīsupi. Satañca gandhoti ettha gandho viyāti gandhoti vutto sīlanibandhano thutighoso. Sīlañhi kittiyā nimittaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘sīlavato sīlasampannassa kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.150; a. ni. 5.213; mahāva. 285). Pavāyatīti pakāsati. Gandhāva gandhajātā.
“少分与多分”,是将二者互相对比而说,如此岸与彼岸一般,故解释为“与更上的功德相比较”。此中的“确实”一词是表示原因。由此显示如下含义:“因为,戒虽作为定的基础,于定有大助力,然而若与定的神变威力等功德殊胜处相比,戒犹不及十六分之一;同样,定与慧相比,亦是如此。”正因如此,接下来便说“所以……”等。现在,以“怎样”的提问为开端,详细阐明定的神变威力。提及“于……双……树根”,是为了表明双神变极为显而易见;同时亦作为区别标志,以别于菩提树下、与亲族聚会时所展现的神变。实际上,当世尊心中生起欲现双神变之念时,需要一处与之相称的场所。有人说,那宝石殿堂等是帝释天王命毗首羯磨所化现;另一些人则说是世尊自己化现的。“若更有能作如是神变者,便可上前”,此言带有挑战意味,故称为“自担所显”。此处,“自担”即是质问,由于外道们不能如是作,而他们先前又曾起立宣称“我们当能作”,故而此语亦成为对外道的摧破。显示巴利原文
‘‘Appakaṃ bahuka’’nti idaṃ pārāpāraṃ viya aññamaññaṃ upanidhāya vuccatīti āha ‘‘upariguṇe upanidhāyā’’ti. Sīlañhīti ettha hi-saddo hetuattho, tena idaṃ dasseti ‘‘yasmā sīlaṃ kiñcāpi patiṭṭhābhāvena samādhissa bahukāraṃ, pabhāvādiguṇavisese panassa upanidhāya kalampi na upeti, tathā samādhi ca paññāyā’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Idāni ‘‘katha’’nti pucchitvā samādhissa ānubhāvaṃ vitthārato vibhāveti. ‘‘Abhi…pe…mūle’’ti idaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyassa supākaṭabhāvadassanatthaṃ, aññehi bodhimūlañātisamāgamādīsu katapāṭihāriyehi visesanatthañca vuttaṃ. Yamakapāṭihāriyakaraṇatthāya hi bhagavato citte uppanne tadanucchavikaṃ ṭhānaṃ icchitabbanti ratanamaṇḍapādi sakkassa devarañño āṇāya vissakammunā nimmitanti vadanti, bhagavatāva nimmitanti apare. ‘‘Yo koci evarūpaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ kātuṃ samattho atthi ce, āgacchatū’’ti codanāsadisattā vuttaṃ ‘‘attādānaparidīpana’’nti. Tattha attādānaṃ anuyogo, titthiyānaṃ tathā kātuṃ asamatthattā, ‘‘karissāmā’’ti pubbe uṭṭhitattā titthiyaparimaddanaṃ.
关于“从上半身”等详细叙述,可参阅《无碍解道》(无碍解道·大品·双神变论1.116)。显示巴利原文
Uparimakāyatotiādi paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.116).
在此,经文余文如下——显示巴利原文
Tatthāyaṃ pāḷiseso –
从下半身涌出火聚,从上半身倾泻水柱。身前出火,身后出水;身后出火,身前出水。右眼出火,左眼出水;左眼出火,右眼出水。右耳孔出火,左耳孔出水;左耳孔出火,右耳孔出水。右鼻孔出火,左鼻孔出水;左鼻孔出火,右鼻孔出水。右肩峰出火,左肩峰出水;左肩峰出火,右肩峰出水。右手出火,左手出水;左手出火,右手出水。右胁出火,左胁出水;左胁出火,右胁出水。右脚出火,左脚出水;左脚出火,右脚出水。一一指头出火,一一指缝出水;一一指缝出火,一一指头出水。一一汗毛出火,一一汗毛出水。一一毛孔流出火聚,一一毛孔流出水流。(《无碍解道·大品·双神变论》)显示巴利原文
‘‘Heṭṭhimakāyato aggikkhandho pavattati, uparimakāyato udakadhārā pavattati. Puratthimakāyato aggi, pacchimakāyato udakaṃ. Pacchimakāyato aggi, puratthimakāyato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇaakkhito aggi, vāmaakkhito udakaṃ. Vāmaakkhito aggi, dakkhiṇaakkhito udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotato aggi, vāmakaṇṇasotato udakaṃ. Vāmakaṇṇasotato aggi, dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇanāsikāsotato aggi, vāmanāsikāsotato udakaṃ. Vāmanāsikāsotato aggi, dakkhiṇanāsikāsotato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭato aggi, vāmaaṃsakūṭato udakaṃ. Vāmaaṃsakūṭato aggi, dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇahatthato aggi, vāmahatthato udakaṃ. Vāmahatthato aggi, dakkhiṇahatthato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇapassato aggi, vāmapassato udakaṃ. Vāmapassato aggi, dakkhiṇapassato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇapādato aggi , vāmapādato udakaṃ. Vāmapādato aggi, dakkhiṇapādato udakaṃ. Aṅgulaṅgulehi aggi, aṅgulantarikāhi udakaṃ . Aṅgulantarikāhi aggi, aṅgulaṅgulehi udakaṃ. Ekekalomato aggi, ekekalomato udakaṃ. Lomakūpato lomakūpato aggikkhandho pavattati, lomakūpato lomakūpato udakadhārā pavattatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.116).
而在注释书里,则说“从一一毛孔”。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ekekalomakūpato’’ti āgataṃ.
「六种颜色」等以「起源」开头的文句,此处亦然:青色、黄色、红色、白色、深红色、光辉色——此为经文省略的部分。而说「金色光芒」,是约其中的多数而言。在「应详细展开」之处,也应以「导师站立,化身经行、或坐、或卧……」等方式,于四种威仪中,以导师为基础有四种情况,以化身为基础亦有四种情况,如是共八种,皆应详细展开。显示巴利原文
‘‘Channaṃ vaṇṇānanti ādinayappavatta’’nti etthāpi nīlānaṃ pītakānaṃ lohitakānaṃ odātānaṃ mañjiṭṭhānaṃ pabhassarānanti ayaṃ pāḷiseso. ‘‘Suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmiyo’’ti idaṃ tāsaṃ yebhuyyatāya vuttaṃ. Vitthāretabbanti etthāpi ‘‘satthā tiṭṭhati, nimmito caṅkamati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappetī’’tiādinā catūsu iriyāpathesu ekekamūlakā satthuvasena cattāro, nimmitavasena cattāroti sabbeva aṭṭha vāre vitthāretabbaṃ.
「蜜粥」:即浇了蜜的乳粥。我、友、中立者、怨敌:这是通过四种界限的融合而具备四支的慈心业处。而「四支具足」这一句,也应当与“精进决意”等结合起来理解。其中,应依“即使皮与腱……”等经文,来了解四支具足。以“此世间实陷于苦……”等,从老死的角度将智慧导入缘起。在「入出息第四禅」这里,也应当将“一切诸佛所习行”这一句,通过变格的方式结合进来,因为据说那也是一切诸佛所习行的。以三十六万亿之面,令执取大金刚智之藏,增长了观。容量为三十二多那的锅,称为 kolambo。洞穴部分即山涧。在铁围山脚下的大海,就是铁围山大海。显示巴利原文
Madhupāyāsanti madhusittaṃ pāyāsaṃ. Attā mitto majjhatto verīti catūsu sīmasambhedavasena caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Caturaṅgasamannāgata’’nti idaṃ pana ‘‘vīriyādhiṭṭhāna’’nti etenāpi yojetabbaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru cā’’tiādipāḷi (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22; a. ni. 2.5; a. ni. 8.13; mahāni. 196) vasena caturaṅgasamannāgatatā veditabbā. ‘‘Kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4) jarāmaraṇamukhena paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ otāretvā. Ānāpānacatutthajjhānanti etthāpi ‘‘sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇa’’nti padaṃ vibhattivipariṇāmaṃ katvā yojetabbaṃ. Tampi hi sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇamevāti vadanti. Chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena mahāvajirañāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpento vipassanaṃvaḍḍhetvā. Dvattiṃsadoṇagaṇhanappamāṇaṃ kuṇḍaṃ kolambo. Daribhāgo kandaro. Cakkavāḷapādesu mahāsamuddo cakkavāḷamahāsamuddo.
「两种凡夫」等说法,是为了显示凡夫当中所能得到的分类,而不是像《根本法门》注疏那样,为了简择凡夫的特殊类别。因为一切凡夫都无法阐明世尊以上的功德;凡夫且置,就连声闻弟子和独觉佛,佛陀的功德也非其境界。正如后面将说的:「入流者……」等。使文句娴熟背诵,称为「诵习」;对义理遍问,称为「遍问」;依注疏而听受法义,称为「听闻」;对音节与涵义妥善安立并清晰显示,从而受持法,称为「持」;对于如此听闻、受持而熟练者,以心意审察,称为「观察」。因为众多各类烦恼以及有身见未断,所以它们生起(凡夫),或者凡夫由它们所生,因此称为「凡夫」。又或者,“jana”一词只表示“无损害”。在“多师仰面向师”中,其词义是:众多以师自称的人,就是凡夫。在“多……未起”中,应当生起,或于此处出生者,称为「生」,即“趣”;而那众多“生”为这些人所有,故为凡夫。由此之后,由这些所生者,称为「生」,即诸行等;这些在凡夫中众多存在,所以叫凡夫。又或者,“jana”一词应视作“行作”等义。欲贪、有贪、见、无明,是暴流。贪火等为热恼。这些本身就是,或者说一切烦恼就是燃烧。在“多着于五欲”中,「生」即贪、染着等义。众多生属于这些人,便是凡夫;或者,众多人已生、已染着,因此“jana”一词应看作贪等义。被缠缚者,即被完全缠缚,或受到逼迫的人。以“众多、超越计数之路”等,说明「众多人」就是凡夫。显示巴利原文
‘‘Duve puthujjanā’’tiādi puthujjane labbhamānavibhāgadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na mūlapariyāyavaṇṇanādīsu viya puthujjanavisesaniddhāraṇatthaṃ. Sabbopi hi puthujjano bhagavato upari guṇe vibhāvetuṃ na sakkoti, tiṭṭhatu puthujjano, sāvakapaccekabuddhānampi avisayā buddhaguṇā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sotāpannā’’tiādi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.8). Vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho. Atthaparipucchanaṃ paripucchā. Aṭṭhakathāvasena atthassa savanaṃ savanaṃ. Byañjanatthānaṃ sunikkhepasudassanena dhammassa pariharaṇaṃ dhāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sutadhātaparicitānaṃ manasānupekkhanaṃ paccavekkhaṇaṃ. Bahūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā ca avihatattā tā janenti, tāhi vā janitāti puthujjanā. Avighātameva vā jana-saddo vadati. Puthu satthārānaṃ mukhullokikāti ettha puthū janā satthupaṭiññā etesanti puthujjanāti vacanattho. Puthu…pe… avuṭṭhitāti ettha janetabbā, jāyanti vā etthāti janā, gatiyo. Puthū janā etesanti puthujjanā. Ito pare jāyanti etehīti janā, abhisaṅkhārādayo. Te etesaṃ puthū vijjantīti puthujjanā. Abhisaṅkharaṇādi attho eva vā jana-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Kāmarāgabhavarāgadiṭṭhiavijjā oghā. Rāgaggiādayo santāpā. Teyeva, sabbepi vā kilesā pariḷāhā. Puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattāti ettha jāyatīti jano, rāgo gedhoti evaṃ ādiko. Puthu jano etesanti puthujjanā, puthūsu vā janā jātā rattāti evaṃ rāgādiattho eva vā jana-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Palibuddhāti sambuddhā, upaddutā vā. ‘‘Puthūnaṃ gaṇanapathamatītāna’’ntiādinā puthū janā puthujjanāti dasseti.
是哪一些殊胜功德作为因相,令世尊有“如来”之称?为阐明此义,故说“以八种因由,世尊为如来”等句。实则世尊的一切名号,皆是依凭功德为因相而安立。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Yehi guṇavisesehi nimittabhūtehi bhagavati tathāgata-saddo pavatto, taṃdassanatthaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato’’tiādimāha. Guṇanemittakāneva hi bhagavato sabbāni nāmāni. Yathāha –
大牟尼功德具足,其名号不可称计;
纵以千名而论,亦依功德而立名。”(《法集论注》1313;《自说注》53;《无碍解道注》1.1.76)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇena nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāmasahassato’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1313; udā. aṭṭha. 53; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.76);
在“Tathā āgato”(如此而来)这一句中,此处的“tathā”一词,是以确定的方式成立譬喻,表示譬喻的成立。而“āgata”一词,则是通过显示共通性、从殊胜中确立,表示“行道的到来”;它不同于在“tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgato”(以如实相而来)等句中表示“智慧的到来”,也不同于在“āgato kho mahāsamaṇo, māgadhānaṃ giribbaja”(大沙门已来到摩揭陀的山堡)等句中表示“身体的到来”。在这里,当“tathā”一词以确定的方式成立譬喻时,由于它以悲心为殊胜,故从大悲门入手,将先前诸佛所行的行道作为例子,显示其共通性。由于“yaṃ taṃ”(凡是…彼…)等词有着必然的关联性,因此说“如同一切世间……而来”。接着,为了以《大本经》等中通过众多解说而广为人知、且与我们最邻近的毗婆尸等六位正自觉者的例子,来说明那条行道,所以说“如同毗婆尸世尊……”。这里的“以彼伟大誓愿”(yena abhinīhārena),指的是具足人身、显示巴利原文
Tathā āgatoti ettha ākāraniyamanavasena opammasampaṭipādanattho tathā-saddo. Sāmaññajotanāya visesāvaṭṭhānato paṭipadāgamanattho āgata-saddo, na ñāṇagamanattho ‘‘tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.12; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.78; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170; udā. aṭṭha. 18; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.37; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.3; itivu. aṭṭha. 38; mahāni. aṭṭha. 14) viya, nāpi kāyagamanādiattho ‘‘āgato kho mahāsamaṇo, māgadhānaṃ giribbaja’’ntiādīsu (mahāva. 62) viya. Tattha yadākāraniyamanavasena opammasampaṭipādanattho tathā-saddo, taṃ karuṇāpadhānattā mahākaruṇāmukhena purimabuddhānaṃ āgamanapaṭipadaṃ udāharaṇavasena sāmaññato dassento yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ ekantasambandhabhāvato ‘‘yathā sabbaloka…pe… āgatā’’ti āha. Taṃ pana paṭipadaṃ mahāpadānasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 2.4) sambahulaniddesena supākaṭānaṃ āsannānañca vipassīādīnaṃ channaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ vasena nidassento ‘‘yathā vipassī bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yenaabhinīhārenāti manussattaliṅgasampattihetusatthāradassanapabbajjāabhiññādiguṇasampattiadhikārachandānaṃ vasena aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena kāyappaṇidhānamahāpaṇidhānena . Sabbesañhi buddhānaṃ kāyappaṇidhānaṃ imināva abhinīhārena samijjhatīti. Evaṃ mahābhinīhāravasena ‘‘tathāgato’’ti padassa atthaṃ dassetvā idāni pāramīpūraṇavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… kassapo bhagavā dānapāramiṃ pūretvā’’tiādimāha.
在此,为了让经教修行者对通往大菩提的行道生起善巧,而有此番关于波罗蜜的详细阐述:所谓“波罗蜜”,究竟是指什么?以什么意义而称为“波罗蜜”?它们有多少种类?它们的顺序如何?它们的相(特征)、作用(味)、现起(现状)、近因(足处)是什么?什么是它们的缘?什么是它们的染污?什么是它们的清净?什么是它们的对立面?什么是它们的修行方法?什么是它们的分类?什么是它们的摄要?令它们成就的方法是什么?需要多长时间才能成就?它们的功德利益是什么?这些波罗蜜的果报又是什么呢?显示巴利原文
Ettha ca suttantikānaṃ mahābodhiyānapaṭipadāya kosallajananatthaṃ pāramīsu ayaṃ vitthārakathā – kā panetā pāramiyo? Kenaṭṭhena pāramiyo? Katividhā cetā? Ko tāsaṃ kamo? Kāni lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānāni? Ko paccayo? Ko saṃkileso? Kiṃ vodānaṃ? Ko paṭipakkho? Kā paṭipatti? Ko vibhāgo? Ko saṅgaho? Ko sampādanūpāyo? Kittakena kālena sampādanaṃ? Ko ānisaṃso? Kiṃ cetāsaṃ phalanti?
以下是对这些问题的解答:首先,什么是“波罗蜜”?所谓波罗蜜,就是那些不为贪爱、我慢等所毁坏,而为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持的布施等功德。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ vissajjanaṃ – kā panetā pāramiyoti. Taṇhāmānādīhi anupahatā karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā dānādayo guṇā pāramiyo.
第二,以何种意义名为“波罗蜜”?由布施、持戒等殊胜功德之结合,成为众生中的最上者,故大士、菩萨称为“胜”(parama);此诸大士之境界,或其所造之业,即是波罗蜜,亦即是布施等具体行为。或复,能令圆满、能令守护,故称为“胜”(parama),即菩萨是布施等功德的圆满者与守护者。属此“胜者”所有,或“胜者”之境界与业,即是波罗蜜,亦即是布施等行为。或复,以功德殊胜之结合,他将其他有情摄受、系缚于自身;或复,他较他人更为殊胜地净除、清净了烦恼的垢秽;或复,他以殊胜的方式趋向最殊胜的涅槃;或复,他如同对待此方世界,以成为量度的殊胜智慧,去测度、了知他方世界;或复,他将绝妙的戒等功德群投入自身的生命相续流中;或复,他从自身的法身中将造作无义的对立面——烦恼贼群,予以剪除、摧毁:由此诸因,大士称为“胜”(parama)。而“波罗蜜”,则如前所释“此是胜者所有”等义而解。或复,于“彼岸”(pāra),即涅槃中,他自身得以净化和清净,同时也净化众生;或复,他将众生摄受显示巴利原文
Kenaṭṭhena pāramiyoti dānasīlādiguṇavisesayogena sattuttamatāya paramā mahāsattā bodhisattā, tesaṃ bhāvo, kammaṃ vā pāramī, dānādikiriyā. Atha vā paratīti paramo, dānādiguṇānaṃ pūrako pālako ca bodhisatto. Paramassa ayaṃ, paramassa vā bhāvo, kammaṃ vā pāramī, dānādikiriyāva. Atha vā paraṃ sattaṃ attani mavati bandhati guṇavisesayogena, paraṃ vā adhikataraṃ majjati sujjhati saṃkilesamalato, paraṃ vā seṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ visesena mayati gacchati, paraṃ vā lokaṃ pamāṇabhūtena ñāṇavisesena idhalokaṃ viya munāti paricchindati, paraṃ vā ativiya sīlādiguṇagaṇaṃ attano santāne minoti pakkhipati, paraṃ vā attabhūtato dhammakāyato aññaṃ, paṭipakkhaṃ vā tadanatthakaraṃ kilesacoragaṇaṃ mināti hiṃsatīti paramo, mahāsatto. ‘‘Paramassa aya’’ntiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Pāre vā nibbāne majjati sujjhati satte ca sodheti, tattha vā satte mavati bandhati yojeti, taṃ vā mayati gacchati gameti ca, munāti vā taṃ yāthāvato, tattha vā satte minoti pakkhipati, kilesāriṃ vā sattānaṃ tattha mināti hiṃsatīti pāramī, mahāpuriso. Tassa bhāvo, kammaṃ vā pāramitā, dānādikiriyāva. Iminā nayena pāramīnaṃ saddattho veditabbo.
第三,“有多少种类”?简而言之,有十种,而这些种类在经文中已就其自性而揭示。如经所说:显示巴利原文
Katividhāti saṅkhepato dasavidhā, tā pana pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato āgatāyeva. Yathāha –
“彼于抉择时,最初见布施巴拉密……”等。(《佛种姓经》116)显示巴利原文
‘‘Vicinanto tadā dakkhiṃ, paṭhamaṃ dānapārami’’ntiādi (bu. vaṃ. 116).
又如经中所说:显示巴利原文
Yathā cāha –
「尊者,成就佛陀的法究竟有几项?」「舍利弗,成就佛陀的法有十项。哪十项呢?舍利弗,布施是成就佛陀的法,持戒、出离、智慧、精进、忍辱、真实、决意、慈与舍是成就佛陀的法。舍利弗,这便是十项成就佛陀的法。」世尊这样说,善逝这样说后,导师又接着说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Kati nu kho bhante buddhakārakā dhammā? Dasa kho sāriputta buddhakārakā dhammā. Katame dasa? Dānaṃ kho sāriputta buddhakārako dhammo, sīlaṃ nekkhammaṃ paññā vīriyaṃ khanti saccamadhiṭṭhānaṃ mettā upekkhā buddhakārako dhammo, ime kho sāriputta dasa buddhakārakā dhammāti. Idamavoca bhagavā, idaṃ vatvāna sugato athāparaṃ etadavoca satthā –
「布施、持戒与出离,智慧、精进为第五;忍辱、真实、决意,慈与舍——此为十法。」
显示巴利原文 ‘Dānaṃ sīlañca nekkhammaṃ, paññā vīriyena pañcamaṃ; Khanti saccaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, mettupekkhāti te dasā’ti’’.
有人问:「它们的次第是什么?」这里所说的「次第」,指的是说法的顺序。而这个说法的顺序,是以最初的受持为原因的;受持,又是以审察抉择为原因的。因此,最初是如何审察和受持的,就按那个顺序来开示。其中,因为布施对持戒有很大帮助,而且容易实行,所以在最初宣说。由于被持戒所摄持的布施,能带来「大果」与「大利益」,所以在布施之后宣说持戒。持戒被出离所摄持,出离被智慧所摄持,智慧被精进所摄持,精进被忍辱所摄持,忍辱被真实所摄持,真实被决意所摄持,决意被慈爱所摄持,而慈爱则被舍心所摄持,这样能带来大果与大利益,所以在慈爱之后宣说了舍心。然而要知道,舍心又被悲悯所摄持,悲悯也同样被舍心所摄持。但是,具有大悲心的菩萨们,怎么会对众生修习舍心呢?有些人解释说,在面对适合修习舍心的特定情况、某些时刻,他们才会保持舍心,并非在任何地点、任何时间都这样。另一些人则说,他们不是对众生本身修习舍心,而是对众生所做出的那些恶劣行为保持舍心。显示巴利原文
Keci pana ‘‘chabbidhā’’ti vadanti, taṃ etāsaṃ saṅgahavasena vuttaṃ. So pana saṅgaho parato āvibhavissati.
什么是它们的次第?这里所说的次第,是指说法的次第。而说法的次第以最初的受持为因,受持又以审察为因,因此,如同最初所审察、所受持的那样,便那样宣说。其中,布施对持戒有诸多助益,且容易践行,所以最先宣说布施。布施若为持戒所摄持,则得大果报、大利益,因此在布施之后紧接着宣说持戒。持戒若为出离所摄持,出离若为智慧所摄持,智慧若为精进所摄持,精进若为忍辱所摄持,忍辱若为真实所摄持,真实若为决意所摄持,决意若为慈所摄持,慈若为舍所摄持,则得大果报、大利益,所以在慈之后宣说舍。然而应知,舍又为悲所摄持,悲同样也为舍所摄持。但具足大悲的菩萨们,如何能对众生修习舍心呢?有些人说:在适合修习舍心的对象上,他们有时修习舍心,但并非一切时、一切处都如此。另一些人说:他们并非对众生本身修习舍心,而是对众生所做的伤害行为修习舍心。显示巴利原文
Ko tāsaṃ kamoti ettha kamo nāma desanākkamo, so ca paṭhamasamādānahetuko, samādānaṃ pavicayahetukaṃ, iti yathā ādimhi pavicitā samādinnā ca, tathā desitā. Tattha ca dānaṃ sīlassa bahūpakāraṃ sukarañcāti taṃ ādimhi vuttaṃ. Dānaṃ sīlapariggahitaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsanti dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Sīlaṃ nekkhammapariggahitaṃ, nekkhammaṃ paññāpariggahitaṃ, paññā vīriyapariggahitā, vīriyaṃ khantipariggahitaṃ, khanti saccapariggahitā, saccaṃ adhiṭṭhānapariggahitaṃ, adhiṭṭhānaṃ mettāpariggahitaṃ, mettā upekkhāpariggahitā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsāti mettānantaraṃ upekkhā vuttā. Upekkhā pana karuṇāpariggahitā, karuṇā ca upekkhāpariggahitāti veditabbā. Kathaṃ pana mahākāruṇikā bodhisattā sattesu upekkhakā hontīti? Upekkhitabbayuttesu kañci kālaṃ upekkhakā honti, na pana sabbattha, sabbadā cāti keci. Apare pana na sattesu upekkhakā, sattakatesu pana vippakāresu upekkhakā hontīti.
另一种解释方法:布施能在广大人群中生起,是一切众生所共许的善行,果报较小且容易实行,因此最先宣说布施。而持戒,则是因为它通过布施者与受施者双方的清净来体现;在说过利益他人之后,接着宣说停止侵害他人;在说过应当主动造作的善法之后,接着宣说不应造作的禁止事项;在说过财富成就之因后,接着宣说生命趣向成就之因。由于这些缘故,在布施之后紧接着宣说持戒。说到出离:因为持戒的成就能够让出离圆满;在说过身、语的善行之后,接着宣说意的善行;具足清净戒的人能轻易成就禅那;在说过通过断除行为过失而达到加行清净之后,接着宣说通过断除烦恼过失而达到意乐清净;在说过由断除违犯而成就戒清净之后,接着宣说由断除心的缠缚而成就心清净。由于这些缘故,在持戒之后宣说出离。说到智慧:因为出离的成就与清净要靠智慧;在说过没有禅那就不会有智慧之后,因为定是智慧的直接因,而智慧是定的显现;在说过奢摩他的相之后,接着宣说舍的相;在说过能利益他人的禅那之后,接着宣说利益自身。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – pacurajanesupi pavattiyā sabbasattasādhāraṇattā, appaphalattā, sukarattā ca ādimhi dānaṃ vuttaṃ. Sīlenadāyakapaṭiggāhakasuddhito, parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato, kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato, bhogasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānassa anantaraṃ sīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Nekkhammena sīlasampattisiddhito, kāyavacīsucaritaṃ vatvā manosucaritavacanato, visuddhasīlassa sukheneva jhānasamijjhanato, kammāparādhappahānena payogasuddhiṃ vatvā kilesāparādhappahānena āsayasuddhivacanato, vītikkamappahānena cittassa pariyuṭṭhānappahānavacanato ca sīlassa anantaraṃ nekkhammaṃ vuttaṃ. Paññāya nekkhammassa siddhiparisuddhito, jhānābhāve paññābhāvavacanato. Samādhipadaṭṭhānā hi paññā, paññāpaccupaṭṭhāno ca samādhi. Samathanimittaṃ vatvā upekkhānimittavacanato, parahitajjhānena parahitakaraṇūpāyakosallavacanato ca nekkhammassa anantaraṃ paññā vuttā. Vīriyārambhena paññākiccasiddhito, sattasuññatādhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ vatvā sattahitāya ārambhassa acchariyatāvacanato, upekkhānimittaṃ vatvā paggahanimittavacanato, nisammakāritaṃ vatvā uṭṭhānavacanato ca. Nisammakārino hi uṭṭhānaṃ phalavisesamāvahatīti paññāya anantaraṃ vīriyaṃ vuttaṃ.
以精进成就堪忍。精进者由于已发精进,能征服由诸行所带来的苦而安住,这是因为精进具有堪忍庄严的缘故。精进者的堪忍才显得庄严。在说过策励之相后,再说止息之相,是为了说明通过避免过度策励而断除掉举的过失。因为以法审察的堪忍能断除掉举的过失。在说明精进者是恒常造作者之后,再说堪忍深厚者是不掉举的恒常造作者。在说明不放逸者开始利益他人的事业时,没有期待回报的渴爱之后,再说如实审察法时,渴爱便不会存在。在开始利益他人的事业时,对于他人所施加的极重之苦也能忍耐,基于这个意义,在精进之后随即宣说堪忍。以真实,堪忍能长久坚持;在说过对于作恶者的加害能堪忍之后,再说不欺诳而作利益;在说过堪忍不因诽谤言语而动摇、说真实语、不舍弃之后;在说过对于“有情空”等法的审察堪忍之后,再说由此增强的智真实,基于这个意义,在堪忍之后随即宣说真实。以决意成就真实。因为不动摇的决意者的远离能够成就。在说过不欺诳之后,再说在其中不动摇的状态。因为真实连结的人,在布施等善行中,恰如他的誓愿,就是这样不动摇地运作。在说过智真实之后,再说于一切时中依彼智而不动摇地运作。显示巴利原文
Vīriyena titikkhāsiddhito. Vīriyavā hi āraddhavīriyattā sattasaṅkhārehi upanītaṃ dukkhaṃ abhibhuyya viharati vīriyassa titikkhālaṅkārabhāvato. Vīriyavato hi titikkhā sobhati. Paggahanimittaṃ vatvā samathanimittavacanato, accārambhena uddhaccadosappahānavacanato. Dhammanijjhānakkhantiyā hi uddhaccadoso pahīyati. Vīriyavato sātaccakaraṇavacanato. Khantibahulo hi anuddhato sātaccakārī hoti. Appamādavato parahitakiriyārambhe paccupakārataṇhābhāvavacanato. Yāthāvato dhammanijjhāne hi sati taṇhā na hoti. Parahitārambhe paramepi parakatadukkhasahanabhāvavacanato ca vīriyassa anantaraṃ khanti vuttā . Saccena khantiyā cirādhiṭṭhānato, apakārino apakārakhantiṃ vatvā tadupakārakaraṇe avisaṃvādavacanato, khantiyā apavādavācāvikampanena bhūtavāditāya avijahanavacanato, sattasuññatādhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ vatvā tadupabrūhitañāṇasaccavacanato ca khantiyā anantaraṃ saccaṃ vuttaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānena saccasiddhito. Acalādhiṭṭhānassa hi virati sijjhati. Avisaṃvāditaṃ vatvā tattha acalabhāvavacanato. Saccasandho hi dānādīsu paṭiññānurūpaṃ niccalova pavattati. Ñāṇasaccaṃ vatvā sambhāresu pavattiniṭṭhāpanavacanato. Yathābhūtañāṇavā hi bodhisambhāresu adhitiṭṭhati, te ca niṭṭhāpeti paṭipakkhehi akampiyabhāvatoti saccassa anantaraṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Mettāya parahitakaraṇasamādānādhiṭṭhānasiddhito, adhiṭṭhānaṃ vatvā hitūpasaṃhāravacanato. Bodhisambhāre hi adhitiṭṭhamāno mettāvihārī hoti. Acalādhiṭṭhānassa samādānāvikopanato, samādānasambhavato ca adhiṭṭhānassa anantaraṃ mettā vuttā. Upekkhāya mettāvisuddhito, sattesu hitūpasaṃhāraṃ vatvā tadaparādhesu udāsīnatāvacanato, mettābhāvanaṃ vatvā tannissandabhāvanāvacanato, ‘‘hitakāmasattepi upekkhako’’ti acchariyaguṇabhāvavacanato ca mettāya anantaraṃ upekkhā vuttāti evametāsaṃ kamo veditabbo.
问:这些波罗蜜的相、味、现起、足处分别是什么?这里,先作一个总说:一切波罗蜜的共同特点是:以利他为相;以饶益其他众生或毫不动摇为味;以希求利乐或成就佛果为现起;以大悲心或悲悯与方便善巧为足处。显示巴利原文
Kāni lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānīti? Ettha avisesena tāva sabbāpi pāramiyo parānuggahalakkhaṇā, paresaṃ upakārakaraṇarasā, avikampanarasā vā, hitesitāpaccupaṭṭhānā, buddhattapaccupaṭṭhānā vā, mahākaruṇāpadaṭṭhānā, karuṇūpāyakosallapadaṭṭhānā vā.
接着,各别解说:为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持、舍自利而施于他的思心所,即是布施巴拉密。为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持的身、语善行,就究竟义而言,即是远离不应行、行所应行的思心所等,此即持戒巴拉密。为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持、以见患为前导、从欲有出离的心念生起,即是出离巴拉密。为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持、通达诸法共相与别相的觉了,即是智慧巴拉密。为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持、由身心所发的利他行动,即是精进巴拉密。为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持、堪忍众生诸行之过、以无嗔为根而现此态的心念生起,即是忍耐巴拉密。为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持、具远离之思等类别、从不欺诳的品质,即是真实巴拉密。为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持、对所取物坚定确立而现此态的心念生起,即是决意波罗蜜。为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持、对世间施予利益的行为,就究竟义而言即是无嗔,此为慈爱巴拉密。为悲悯与方便善巧所摄持、能摧破爱著与嗔恨、于可意不可意之众生诸行平等而转,即是舍巴拉密。显示巴利原文
Visesena pana yasmā karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā attupakaraṇapariccāgacetanā dānapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitaṃ kāyavacīsucaritaṃ atthato akattabbavirati, kattabbakaraṇacetanādayo ca sīlapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamo kāmabhavehi nikkhamanacittuppādo nekkhammapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito dhammānaṃ sāmaññavisesalakkhaṇāvabodho paññāpāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito kāyacittehi parahitārambho vīriyapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitaṃ sattasaṅkhārāparādhasahanaṃ adosappadhāno tadākārappavatto cittuppādo khantipāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitaṃ viraticetanādibhedaṃ avisaṃvādanaṃ saccapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitaṃ acalasamādānādhiṭṭhānaṃ tadākārappavatto cittuppādo adhiṭṭhānapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito lokassa hitūpasaṃhāro atthato abyāpādo mettāpāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā anunayapaṭighaviddhaṃsinī iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu sattasaṅkhāresu samappavatti upekkhāpāramitā.
由此,布施以舍弃为特相,以破除对所施物的悭吝为作用,以不执著为现起,或以成就‘有’与‘非有’为现起,以应舍之物为近因。戒,以戒德为特相,以等持为特相,以安立为特相,如是说。以破除恶戒为作用,或以无过失为作用;以清净为现起;以惭与愧为近因。出离,以从欲、有出离为特相;以显明其过患为作用;以背离他们为现起;以悚惧为近因。智慧,以通达如实性为特相,或以如善弓手射箭般无失误通达为特相;以如灯照亮所缘为作用;以无迷惑为现起,犹如旷野中的善导者;以定为近因,或以四圣谛为近因。精进,以勤勇为特相;以支持、策励为作用;以不消沉为现起;以激发精勤之事为近因,或以悚惧为近因。忍辱,以忍耐为特相;以承受可意、不可意之境为作用;以容忍为现起,或以无怨为现起;以如实见为近因。真实,以不欺诳为特相;以显明如实为作用;以良善为现起;以正直为近因。决意,以于菩提资粮决断为特相;以克服其对立法为作用;以于彼中决不动摇为现起;以菩提资粮为近因。慈,以利益行相为特相;以奉献利益为作用,或以调伏嗔怒为作用;以柔和为现起;以见众生可爱功德为近因。舍,以中舍行相为特相……显示巴利原文
Tasmā pariccāgalakkhaṇaṃ dānaṃ, deyyadhamme lobhaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, anāsattipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, bhavavibhavasampattipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ vā, pariccajitabbavatthupadaṭṭhānaṃ. Sīlanalakkhaṇaṃ sīlaṃ, samādhānalakkhaṇaṃ, patiṭṭhānalakkhaṇañcāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dussīlyaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, anavajjarasaṃ vā, soceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, hirottappapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Kāmato bhavato ca nikkhamanalakkhaṇaṃ nekkhammaṃ, tadādīnavavibhāvanarasaṃ , tato eva vimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, saṃvegapadaṭṭhānaṃ . Yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā paññā, akkhalitapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā vā kusalissāsakhittausupaṭivedho viya, visayobhāsanarasā padīpo viya, asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā araññagatasudesako viya, samādhipadaṭṭhānā, catusaccapadaṭṭhānā vā. Ussāhalakkhaṇaṃ vīriyaṃ, upatthambhanarasaṃ, asaṃsīdanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, vīriyārambhavatthu (a. ni. 8.80) padaṭṭhānaṃ, saṃvegapadaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Khamanalakkhaṇā khanti, iṭṭhāniṭṭhasahanarasā, adhivāsanapaccupaṭṭhānā, avirodhapaccupaṭṭhānā vā, yathābhūtadassanapadaṭṭhānā. Avisaṃvādanalakkhaṇaṃ saccaṃ, yāthāvavibhāvanarasaṃ [yathāsabhāvavibhāvanarasaṃ (cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathāya)], sādhutāpaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, soraccapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Bodhisambhāresu adhiṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ paṭipakkhābhibhavanarasaṃ, tattha acalatāpaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, bodhisambhārapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Hitākārappavattilakkhaṇā mettā, hitūpasaṃhārarasā, āghātavinayanarasā vā, sommabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā, sattānaṃ manāpabhāvadassanapadaṭṭhānā. Majjhattākārappavattilakkhaṇā upekkhā, samabhāvadassanarasā, paṭighānunayavūpasamapaccupaṭṭhānā, kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇapadaṭṭhānā. Ettha ca karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitatā dānādīnaṃ pariccāgādilakkhaṇassa visesanabhāvena vattabbā, yato tāni pāramīsaṅkhyaṃ labhantīti.
所谓缘者,即发愿也。此发愿由具足人身、性别等八法所成就,并以‘已度者当令度,已脱者当令脱,已觉者当令觉,已净者当令净,已调御者当令调御,已寂静者当令寂静,已安稳者当令安稳,已般涅槃者当令般涅槃’等心生起。总括而言,此即一切波罗蜜之缘。由此发愿生起,诸大人遂有波罗蜜之审择、现起、受持、决定及完成。显示巴利原文
Kopaccayoti abhinīhāro paccayo. Yo hi ayaṃ ‘‘manussattaṃ liṅgasampattī’’tiādi (bu. vaṃ. 2.59) aṭṭhadhammasamodhānasampādito ‘‘tiṇṇo tāreyyaṃ, mutto moceyyaṃ, buddho bodheyyaṃ, suddho sodheyyaṃ, danto dameyyaṃ, santo sameyyaṃ, assattho assāseyyaṃ, parinibbuto parinibbāpeyya’’ntiādinā (cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathāya) pavatto abhinīhāro, so avisesena sabbapāramīnaṃ paccayo. Tappavattiyā hi uddhaṃ pāramīnaṃ pavicayupaṭṭhānasamādānādhiṭṭhānanipphattiyo mahāpurisānaṃ sambhavanti.
正如发愿是缘一样,大悲与方便善巧也是缘。其中,方便善巧是指能将布施等转成觉悟资粮的智慧。正是凭着悲悯与方便善巧,这些大士才不顾自身的安乐,持续不断地致力于利他,纵使行持极难行的菩萨行也不会退怯,并能在见佛、闻法、忆念佛陀等处,成为众生获得利乐之因。的确,是智慧成就了佛的证悟,是悲悯成就了佛的事业。智慧令自己度脱,悲悯令他人度脱。智慧遍知他人的苦,悲悯则着手拔除他人的苦。智慧对苦生起厌离,悲悯却甘受其苦。同样,智慧朝向般涅槃,悲悯却不证入;悲悯朝向轮回,智慧却不耽著其中。智慧于一切事物离欲,但因随顺悲悯而不舍摄受一切众生;悲悯悯念一切众生,但因随顺智慧而不在任何事物上生起欲染。智慧没有我执与我所执,悲悯没有懈怠与怯弱。由此,依着智慧与悲悯的次第,便有:自利与利他、坚忍与英迈、不自苦不苦他、成就自利利他、无畏与可畏相、以法为尊与以世间为尊、知恩先报、断除痴与贪、成就明与行、成就力与自信。由于智慧与悲悯是成就一切波罗蜜果的殊胜方便,因此成为波罗蜜的缘。这两者也正如波显示巴利原文
Yathā ca abhinīhāro, evaṃ mahākaruṇā, upāyakosallañca. Tattha upāyakosallaṃ nāma dānādīnaṃ bodhisambhārabhāvassa nimittabhūtā paññā, yāhi karuṇūpāyakosallatāhi mahāpurisānaṃ attasukhanirapekkhatā, nirantaraṃ parahitakaraṇapasutatā, sudukkarehipi mahābodhisattacaritehi visādābhāvo, pasādasambuddhidassanasavanānussaraṇāvatthāsupi sattānaṃ hitasukhapaṭilābhahetubhāvo ca sampajjati. Tathā hi paññāya buddhabhāvasiddhi, karuṇāya buddhakammasiddhi. Paññāya sayaṃ tarati, karuṇāya pare tāreti. Paññāya paradukkhaṃ parijānāti, karuṇāya paradukkhapaṭikāraṃ ārabhati. Paññāya ca dukkhe nibbindati, karuṇāya dukkhaṃ sampaṭicchati. Tathā paññāya parinibbānābhimukho hoti, karuṇāya taṃ na pāpuṇāti. Tathā karuṇāya saṃsārābhimukho hoti , paññāya tatra nābhiramati. Paññāya ca sabbattha virajjati, karuṇānugatattā na ca na sabbesaṃ anuggahāya pavatto, karuṇāya sabbepi anukampati, paññānugatattā na ca na sabbattha virattacitto. Paññāya ca ahaṃkāramamaṃkārābhāvo, karuṇāya ālasiyadīnatābhāvo. Tathā paññākaruṇāhi yathākkamaṃ attaparanāthatā, dhīravīrabhāvo, anattantapaaparantapatā, attahitaparahitanipphatti, nibbhayābhiṃsanakabhāvo, dhammādhipatilokādhipatitā, kataññupubbakāribhāvo, mohataṇhāvigamo, vijjācaraṇasiddhi, balavesārajjanipphattīti sabbassāpi pāramitāphalassa visesena upāyabhāvato paññākaruṇā pāramīnaṃ paccayo. Idañca dvayaṃ pāramīnaṃ viya paṇidhānassāpi paccayo.
同样地,应当了知,精进、聪慧、安住、利益行也是波罗蜜的缘;由于它们是成佛的生起之处,故被称为‘佛地’。如所说:显示巴利原文
Tathā ussāhaummaṅgaavatthānahitacariyā ca pāramīnaṃ paccayoti veditabbā, yā buddhabhāvassa uppattiṭṭhānatāya ‘‘buddhabhūmiyo’’ti pavuccanti. Yathāha –
‘尊者,佛地有几种?’‘舍利弗,有四种佛地。是哪四种?即:精进与努力、聪慧与修慧、安住与决意、修慈与利益行。舍利弗,这就是四种佛地。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Kati pana bhante buddhabhūmiyo? Catasso kho sāriputta buddhabhūmiyo. Katamā catasso? Ussāho ca hoti vīriyaṃ, umaṅgo ca hoti paññābhāvanā, avatthānañca hoti adhiṭṭhānaṃ, mettābhāvanā ca hoti hitacariyā. Imā kho sāriputta catasso buddhabhūmiyo’’ti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.khaggavisāṇasuttavaṇṇanāyampi).
同样,应知出离、远离、无贪、无嗔、无痴、出离解脱这六种为意乐。对此,经中说:显示巴利原文
Tathā nekkhammapavivekaalobhādosāmohanissaraṇappabhedā cha ajjhāsayā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“菩萨具有出离意乐,是于诸欲见过患;具有远离意乐,是于聚集见过患;具有无贪意乐,是于贪欲见过患;具有无嗔意乐,是于嗔恚见过患;具有无痴意乐,是于愚痴见过患;具有出离解脱意乐,是于一切有见过患。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Nekkhammajjhāsayā ca bodhisattā kāme dosadassāvino, paviveka…pe… saṅgaṇikāya, alobha…pe… lobhe, adosa…pe… dose, amoha…pe… mohe, nissaraṇajjhāsayā ca bodhisattā sabbabhavesu dosadassāvino’’ti (visuddhi. aṭṭha. 1.49 vākyakhandhepi).
因此,应知这六种意乐是菩萨布施等波罗蜜的缘。因为,若不见贪等中的过患,且无无贪等的增上力,布施等波罗蜜便不可能生起。正是由于无贪等获得增上,心倾向于舍弃等,故称为无贪意乐等。如是,这六种意乐如此,布施意乐等也是如此。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Tasmā ete bodhisattānaṃ cha ajjhāsayā dānādīnaṃ paccayāti veditabbā. Na hi lobhādīsu ādīnavadassanena, alobhādiadhikabhāvena ca vinā dānādipāramiyo sambhavanti. Alobhādīnañhi adhikabhāvena pariccāgādininnacittatā alobhajjhāsayāditāti. Yathā cete, evaṃ dānajjhāsayatādayopi. Yathāha –
尊者,菩萨们在行于菩提的过程中,有多少种意乐?舍利弗,行于菩提的菩萨们有十种意乐。哪十种呢?舍利弗,菩萨见到悭吝中的过患,因而有布施意乐;……见到苦乐中的过患,因而有舍意乐。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kati pana bhante bodhāya carantānaṃ bodhisattānaṃ ajjhāsayā? Dasa kho sāriputta bodhāya carantānaṃ bodhisattānaṃ ajjhāsayā. Katame dasa? Dānajjhāsayā sāriputta bodhisattā macchere dosadassāvino, sīla…pe… upekkhajjhāsayā sāriputta bodhisattā sukhadukkhesu dosadassāvino’’ti.
确实,于悭吝、不律仪、欲贪、疑、懈怠、不忍、虚诳、不决意、嗔恚、苦乐这十者中,以见过患为先,心便倾向于布施等;这种心态即称为布施意乐等,它们是布施等波罗蜜生起的原因。同样地,在未舍弃与舍弃等情形中,依次观察其中的过患与功德,也是布施等波罗蜜的缘。显示巴利原文
Etesu hi maccheraasaṃvarakāmavicikicchākosajjaakkhantivisaṃvādaanadhiṭṭhānabyāpāda- sukhadukkhasaṅkhātesu ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamā dānādininnacittatāsaṅkhātā dānajjhāsayatādayo dānādipāramīnaṃ nibbattiyā kāraṇanti . Tathā apariccāgapariccāgādīsu yathākkamaṃ ādīnavānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇā dānādipāramīnaṃ paccayo.
在此,应当这样观察:对于心系著于田地、宅基、金银、牛、水牛、奴仆、婢女、子女等所有物的众生,那些田地等作为所依之欲,为众人所希求,是国王、盗贼等共有的对境,是争论的根源,能引来怨敌;它们并不坚实,在获得与守护的过程中成为恼害他人的原因,以毁灭为相,引来忧愁等种种灾祸。而且,依附于这些的内心被悭吝垢所缠缚,可能投生恶趣。如此,这些事物具有诸多大过患。唯有舍弃它们,才是安稳;于舍弃中,应不放逸。显示巴利原文
Tatthāyaṃ paccavekkhaṇāvidhi – khettavatthuhiraññasuvaṇṇagomahiṃsadāsidāsaputtadārādipariggahabyāsattacittānaṃ sattānaṃ khettādīnaṃ vatthukāmabhāvena bahupatthanīyabhāvato, rājacorādisādhāraṇabhāvato, vivādādhiṭṭhānato, sapattakaraṇato, nissārato, paṭilābhaparipālanesu paraviheṭhanahetuto, vināsanimittañca sokādianekavihitabyasanāvahato, tadāsattinidānañca maccheramalapariyuṭṭhitacittānaṃ apāyūpapattisambhavatoti evaṃ vividhavipulānatthāvahā ete atthā nāma, tesaṃ pariccāgoyeveko sotthibhāvoti pariccāge appamādo karaṇīyo.
再者,应如此观察:‘乞求者向我乞求时,因向我透露他的秘密,故是我的可信者。’‘他取走那本应舍弃、属于自己的财物而往他世,是我前往他世的教导者。’‘如同房屋被死亡之火所烧,在这被死亡之火所烧的世间,他是帮我搬出自己财物的同伴。’‘对于所搬出的财物,他是审察保管之处者。’‘在名为布施的善业中,他既是同伴,又以最上、极难证得的佛地成就为因,故是最胜的善知识。’显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘yācako yācamāno attano guyhassa ācikkhanato mayhaṃ vissāsiko’’ti ca ‘‘pahāya gamanīyaṃ attano santakaṃ gahetvā paralokaṃ yāhīti mayhaṃ upadesako’’ti ca ‘‘āditte viya agāre maraṇagginā āditte loke tato mayhaṃ santakassa apavāhakasahāyo’’ti ca ‘‘apavāhitassa cassa nijjhāyanikkhepaṭṭhānabhūto’’ti ca ‘‘dānasaṅkhāte kalyāṇakammasmiṃ sahāyabhāvato, sabbasampattīnaṃ aggabhūtāya paramadullabhāya buddhabhūmiyā sampattihetubhāvato ca paramo kalyāṇamitto’’ti ca paccavekkhitabbaṃ.
同样,应这样观察:‘他以高尚的行为恭敬我,因此我应令这份恭敬不虚妄。’‘生命必定败坏,纵使无人乞求,我也应当布施,何况有人乞求时。’‘即便是有崇高意乐者,也须经寻求才值得布施,他却自己前来,这是我的福德。’‘借布施乞求者的名义,这实则是他对我的摄受。’‘如同对我一样,世间一切众生皆应被我摄受。’‘如果没有乞求者,我的布施巴拉密如何圆满?’‘正是为了乞求者们,我才应摄受一切所有物。’‘乞求者们何时能不待我请求,便自己取走我的财物?’‘我如何能成为乞求者们喜爱、称心的人?’‘或者他们如何能成为我喜爱、称心的人?’‘我如何能在布施时、布施后,内心欢喜、欣悦、生起喜悦?’‘如何能既有乞求者,又能使我的布施意乐崇高?’‘如何能在未被乞求时,便了知乞求者心意而施与?’‘有财物、有乞求者时,若不弃舍,这是对我巨大的欺骗。’‘我又如何能为乞求者们舍弃自己的肢节乃至生命?’显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘uḷāre kammani anenāhaṃ sambhāvito, tasmā sā sambhāvanā avitathā kātabbā’’ti ca ‘‘ekantabheditāya jīvitassa ayācitenapi mayā dātabbaṃ, pageva yācitenā’’ti ca ‘‘uḷārajjhāsayehi gavesitvāpi dātabbo, sayamevāgato mama puññenā’’ti ca ‘‘yācakassa dānāpadesena mayhamevāyamanuggaho’’ti ca ‘‘ahaṃ viya ayaṃ sabbopi loko mayā anuggahetabbo’’ti ca ‘‘asati yācake kathaṃ mayhaṃ dānapāramī pūreyyā’’ti ca ‘‘yācakānamevatthāya mayā sabbo pariggahetabbo’’ti ca ‘‘ayācitvā mama santakaṃ yācakā sayameva kadā gaṇheyyu’’nti ca ‘‘kathamahaṃ yācakānaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vā te mayhaṃ piyā cassu manāpā’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vāhaṃ dadamāno, datvāpi ca attamano assaṃ pamudito pītisomanassajāto’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vā me yācakā bhaveyyuṃ, uḷāro ca dānajjhāsayo’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vāhamayācitoyeva yācakānaṃ hadayamaññāya dadeyya’’nti ca ‘‘sati dhane yācake ca apariccāgo mahatī mayhaṃ vañcanā’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vāhaṃ attano aṅgāni jīvitaṃ vāpi yācakānaṃ pariccajeyya’’nti ca paccavekkhitabbaṃ.
此外,还应这样观察:‘所谓利益,追随无期望的施主,犹如谷壳追随无期望的抛谷者。’对于利益,应当生起无期望之心。如果乞求者是可爱的人,就应生起喜悦:‘可爱的人向我乞求。’如果是中庸的人,就应生起喜悦:‘此人向我乞求,必定因为这种弃舍而成为朋友。’因为施予者也会成为乞求者喜爱的人。如果是怨敌来乞求,就应特别生起喜悦:‘怨敌向我乞求,他向我乞求,必定因为这种弃舍,怨敌也将变为可爱,成为朋友。’如此,对于可爱者、中庸者和怨敌,皆应先以慈俱行,安住于悲后而行布施。显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘attho nāmāyaṃ nirapekkhaṃ dāyakaṃ anugacchati yathā taṃ nirapekkhaṃ khepakaṃ kiṭako’’ti atthe nirapekkhatāya cittaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Yācamāno pana yadi piyapuggalo hoti, ‘‘piyo maṃ yācatī’’ti somanassaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Atha udāsīnapuggalo hoti, ‘‘ayaṃ maṃ yācamāno addhā iminā pariccāgena mitto hotī’’ti somanassaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Dadantopi hi yācakānaṃ piyo hotīti. Atha pana verīpuggalo yācati, ‘‘paccatthiko maṃ yācati, ayaṃ maṃ yācamāno addhā iminā pariccāgena verīpi piyo mitto hotī’’ti visesato somanassaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Evaṃ piyapuggale viya majjhattaverīpuggalesupi mettāpubbaṅgamaṃ karuṇaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāva dātabbaṃ.
然而,若因长时熏习贪欲,面对所施物时心生贪法,那么这位自许为菩萨的人便应如此反思:‘善男子,你在发愿求证正觉之时,难道不是已将此身舍弃,为利乐一切众生吗?而此舍弃,即是福德。如今你竟对外物生起执著,这就像大象沐浴,徒劳无益。因此,你应对任何事物皆不执著。譬如一棵大药树,若有人需要根便取走它的根,需要皮便取走皮,需要干、枝、心材、嫩枝、叶、花或果便各自取走,那棵树并不会这样想:“他们拿走了属于我的东西。”同样地,我一心致力于饶益一切世间,当这具极为苦痛、不知恩、恒时不净的身体被他人为行饶益而使用时,我不应生起丝毫邪思维。内在与外在的四大种,其本性皆是决定坏灭、消散、破坏之法,此处又有何差别?无非是愚痴心所显现出的“这是我的,这是我,这是我的我”的执取罢了。因此,如同对待外物一般,对于自己内在的手、足、眼等,乃至血肉等,亦应成为无期望者,怀持“若有需要者,尽管取去”的弃舍之心而住。’当他如此反思时,这位为了菩提已舍弃身命、无所期求的人,他的身语意业便会少诸障碍而极为清净。其身语意业清净者,活命亦得清净,安住于正行之道。显示巴利原文
Sace panassa cirakālaparibhāvitattā lobhassa deyyadhammavisayā lobhadhammā uppajjeyyuṃ, tena bodhisattapaṭiññena iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘nanu tayā sappurisa sambodhāya abhinīhāraṃ karontena sabbasattānaṃ upakāratthāya ayaṃ kāyo nissaṭṭho, tappariccāgamayañca puññaṃ, tattha nāma te bāhirepi vatthusmiṃ atisaṅgappavatti hatthisinānasadisī hoti, tasmā tayā na katthaci saṅgo uppādetabbo. Seyyathāpi nāma mahato bhesajjarukkhassa tiṭṭhato mūlaṃ mūlatthikā haranti, papaṭikaṃ, tacaṃ, khandhaṃ, viṭapaṃ, sāraṃ, sākhaṃ, palāsaṃ, pupphaṃ, phalaṃ phalatthikā haranti, na tassa rukkhassa ‘mayhaṃ santakaṃ ete harantī’’ti vitakkasamudācāro hoti, evameva sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpajjantena mayā mahādukkhe akataññuke niccāsucimhi kāye paresaṃ upakārāya viniyujjamāne aṇumattopi micchāvitakko na uppādetabbo, ko vā ettha viseso ajjhattikabāhiresu mahābhūtesu ekantabhedanavikiraṇaviddhaṃsanadhammesu, kevalaṃ pana sammohavijambhitametaṃ, yadidaṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti abhiniveso. Tasmā bāhiresu viya ajjhattikesupi karacaraṇanayanādīsu , maṃsādīsu ca anapekkhena hutvā ‘taṃtadatthikā harantū’ti nissaṭṭhacittena bhavitabba’’nti. Evaṃ paṭisañcikkhato cassa bodhāya pahitattassa kāyajīvitesu nirapekkhassa appakasireneva kāyavacīmanokammāni suvisuddhāni honti. So visuddhakāyavacīmanokammanto visuddhājīvo ñāyapaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhito, āyāpāyupāyakosallasamannāgamena bhiyyoso mattāya deyyadhammapariccāgena, abhayadānasaddhammadānehi ca sabbasatte anuggaṇhituṃ samattho hotīti. Ayaṃ tāva dānapāramiyaṃ paccavekkhaṇānayo.
在持戒巴拉密中,则应当这样省察:所谓戒,正是能洗净恒河之水等所无法涤除的烦恼垢秽的净水;是能除去栴檀妙香等所无法调伏的贪等热恼的对治法;是与项链、宝冠、耳环等众人诸多装饰品不共的,唯善士独有的最上庄严;是遍满一切方所而非造作的,能随顺一切时节的妙香;是能带来被刹帝利豪贵乃至诸天所恭敬礼遇等殊胜果报的、极具调伏力的咒语;是通往四天王天等天界的阶梯;是成就禅那与神通的方法;是进入涅槃大城的正路;是声闻菩提、辟支菩提、无上正等正觉的立足之地。因其能成满一切所愿所求,故胜过了如意宝珠与如意树等。这也正是世尊所说的:‘比丘们,具戒者之心愿,因其清净而得以成就。’又说:‘比丘们,若有比丘希望被同梵行者所喜爱、称心、尊重、恭敬,他便应当圆满诸戒。’等等。同样地,‘阿难,善戒有令人不追悔的义利。’‘在家众,具戒者、戒成就者获得此五种功德。’应当依据这些经文观察持戒的功德,并依照《火堆喻》等经典观察破戒的过患。显示巴利原文
Sīlapāramiyaṃ pana evaṃ paccavekkhitabbaṃ – idañhi sīlaṃ nāma gaṅgodakādīhi visodhetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa dosamalassa vikkhālanajalaṃ, haricandanādīhi vinetuṃ asakkuṇeyyarāgādipariḷāhavinayanaṃ, hāramakuṭakuṇḍalādīhi pacurajanālaṅkārehi asādhāraṇo sādhūnaṃ alaṅkāraviseso, sabbadisāvāyanato akittimo, sabbakālānurūpo ca surabhigandho, khattiyamahāsālādīhi devatāhi ca vandanīyādibhāvāvahanato paramo vasīkaraṇamanto, cātumahārājikādi devalokārohanasopānapanti, jhānābhiññānaṃ adhigamupāyo, nibbānamahānagarassa sampāpakamaggo, sāvakabodhipaccekabodhisammāsambodhīnaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūmi, yaṃ yaṃ vā panicchitaṃ patthitaṃ, tassa tassa samijjhanūpāyabhāvato cintāmaṇikapparukkhādike ca atiseti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ijjhati bhikkhave sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā’’ti (a. ni. 8.35). Aparampi vuttaṃ ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce bhikkhave bhikkhu sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo ca assaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cāti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.61), tathā ‘‘avippaṭisāratthāni kho ānanda kusalāni sīlānī’’ti (a. ni. 10.1; 11.1), ‘‘pañcime gahapatayo ānisaṃsā sīlavato sīlasampadāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.150; udā. 76; mahāva. 185) suttānañca vasena sīlassa guṇā paccavekkhitabbā, tathā aggikkhandhopamasuttādīnaṃ (a. ni. 7.72) vasena sīlavirahe ādīnavā.
应当从这些方面来观察戒:它是喜与悦的生起之因;是免除自我责备、他人责备、刑罚与恶趣怖畏的因由;是得受智者称赞的原因;是心中无悔的根源;是最上的安稳处;其殊胜超越了出身、学识、权势、寿命、地位、亲族与朋友等世间成就。因为具戒者由自身戒德的圆满,会生起大喜悦:‘我确实作了善,作了福,作了防护。’同样,具戒者自己不会责备自己,有智慧的他人也不会责备他,刑罚与恶趣的怖畏根本不会在他心中生起。‘具戒者是有善法之人’,因此受到智者们称赞。与此同时,那些恶戒者心中所生的追悔:‘我确实造了恶,行了暴,犯了罪’,在具戒者那里是绝不存在的。戒又名不放逸的依处,能通过避免财富损失等途径成就广大的利益,是吉祥,所以是最上的安稳处。即使出身低微,具戒之人也会受到刹帝利豪贵等人的礼敬,因此戒德的成就,胜过了家世的成就。如经中所说:‘大王,你对此作何想?假若这有一人,是你的奴仆、为你劳动的人……’等等,可作为明证。戒不为盗贼等所共有,能随人远赴他世,感得广大果报,又是止、观等功德的依处,因此它胜过外在的财富;因为它是最上心自在的依处,所以也胜过了刹帝利等所拥有的权势。依其因,戒在种种有情类中,相较于有权势却寿命长达百……显示巴利原文
Pītisomanassanimittato, attānuvādaparānuvādadaṇḍaduggatibhayābhāvato, viññūhi pāsaṃsabhāvato, avippaṭisārahetuto, sotthiṭṭhānato , abhijanasāpateyyādhipateyyāyurūpaṭṭhānabandhumittasampattīnaṃ atisayanato ca sīlaṃ paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Sīlavato hi attano sīlasampadāhetu mahantaṃ pītisomanassaṃ uppajjati ‘‘kataṃ vata mayā kusalaṃ, kataṃ kalyāṇaṃ, kataṃ bhīruttāṇa’’nti. Tathā sīlavato attā na upavadati, na pare viññū, daṇḍaduggatibhayānaṃ sambhavoyeva natthi, ‘‘sīlavā purisapuggalo kalyāṇadhammo’’ti viññūnaṃ pāsaṃso hoti. Tathā sīlavato yvāyaṃ ‘‘kataṃ vata mayā pāpaṃ, kataṃ luddaṃ, kataṃ kibbisa’’nti dussīlassa vippaṭisāro uppajjati, so na hoti. Sīlañca nāmetaṃ appamādādhiṭṭhānato, bhogabyasanādiparihāramukhena mahato atthassa sādhanato, maṅgalabhāvato ca paramaṃ sotthiṭṭhānaṃ, nihīnajaccopi sīlavā khattiyamahāsālādīnaṃ pūjanīyo hotīti kulasampattiṃ atiseti sīlasampadā, ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasi mahārāja, idha te assa puriso dāso kammakaro’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.183) vacanañcettha sādhakaṃ. Corādīhi asādhāraṇato, paralokānugamanato, mahapphalabhāvato, samathādiguṇādhiṭṭhānato ca bāhiradhanaṃ atiseti sīlaṃ, paramassa cittissariyassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato khattiyādīnaṃ issariyaṃ atiseti sīlaṃ. Sīlanimittañhi taṃtaṃsattanikāyesu sattānaṃ issariyaṃ vassasatadīghappamāṇato jīvitato ekāhampi sīlavato jīvitassa visiṭṭhatāvacanato, sati ca jīvite sikkhānikkhepassa maraṇatāvacanato sīlaṃ jīvitato visiṭṭhataraṃ. Verīnampi manuññabhāvāvahanato, jarārogavipattīhi anabhibhavanīyato ca rūpasampattiṃ atiseti sīlaṃ. Pāsādahammiyādiṭṭhānavisese, rājayuvarājasenāpatiādiṭṭhānavisese ca atiseti sīlaṃ sukhavisesādhiṭṭhānabhāvato . Sabhāvasiniddhe santikāvacarepi bandhujane mittajane ca atiseti ekantahitasampādanato, paralokānugamanato ca. ‘‘Na taṃ mātā pitā kayirā’’tiādi (dha. pa. 43) vacanañcettha sādhakaṃ. Tathā hatthiassarathādibhedehi, mantāgadasotthānappayogehi ca durārakkhaṃ attānaṃ ārakkhabhāvena sīlameva visiṭṭhataraṃ attādhīnato, aparādhīnato, mahāvisayato ca. Tenevāha ‘‘dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’ntiādi (jā. 1.9.102). Evamanekaguṇasamannāgataṃ sīlanti paccavekkhantassa aparipuṇṇā ceva sīlasampadā pāripūriṃ gacchati aparisuddhā ca pārisuddhiṃ.
如果由于长久串习,与戒对立的烦恼——如嗔等——会不时生起,那么这位以菩萨自许者应当如此反思:‘你不是已发愿成就正觉了吗?然而,戒行有缺之人连世间成就都无法获得,更遑论出世间成就。而作为一切成就中最上的正等正觉之所依,戒必须达到极为殊胜的地步。因此,正如“如鸡护卵”等方法(《清净道论》1.19;《长部注》1.7)所说,善护于戒,你要真正成为令众生爱敬的可爱行者。再者,你必须以说法引导众生进入三乘并令其成熟。戒行有缺之人所说的法,无人肯信受,就如同靠不正当方式谋取饮食的医生,其治疗亦无人信受。那么,我如何才能令人信受,从而引导众生、使之成熟呢?’他应当成就本性清净的戒。而且,‘我凭借禅那等殊胜功德的相应,才有能力饶益众生,并圆满慧波罗蜜等;而禅那等功德,若无戒的清净,必定不会生起。’应当如此令戒清净。显示巴利原文
Sace panassa dīgharattaṃ paricayena sīlapaṭipakkhā dhammā dosādayo antarantarā uppajjeyyuṃ, tena bodhisattapaṭiññena evaṃ paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘nanu tayā sambodhāya paṇidhānaṃ kataṃ, sīlavikalena ca na sakkā lokiyāpi sampattiyo pāpuṇituṃ, pageva lokuttarā, sabbasampattīnaṃ pana aggabhūtāya sammāsambodhiyā adhiṭṭhānabhūtena sīlena paramukkaṃsagatena bhavitabbaṃ. Tasmā ‘kikīva aṇḍa’ntiādinā (visuddhi. 1.19; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7) vuttanayena sammā sīlaṃ parirakkhantena suṭṭhu tayā pesalena bhavitabbaṃ. Api ca tayā dhammadesanāya yānattaye sattānaṃ avatāraṇaparipācanāni kātabbāni, sīlavikalassa ca vacanaṃ na paccetabbaṃ hoti asappāyāhāravicārassa viya vejjassa tikicchanaṃ, tasmā kathāhaṃ saddheyyo hutvā sattānaṃ avatāraṇaparipācanāni kareyya’’nti sabhāvaparisuddhasīlena bhavitabbaṃ. Kiñca ‘‘jhānādiguṇavisesayogena me sattānaṃ upakārakaraṇasamatthatā , paññāpāramīādiparipūraṇañca, jhānādayo ca guṇā sīlapārisuddhiṃ vinā na sambhavantī’’ti sammadeva sīlaṃ parisodhetabbaṃ.
同样地,以“居家是狭窄拥挤的,是尘垢之途”等说法,以及在居家中以“诸欲如同骨骶骨架的比喻”等、以“母亲也与孩子争执”等说法,以及在诸欲中以“比如有人借了债去投入事业”等说法,对于爱欲等先显示了过患。与这里所说的相反,依据“出家是空旷露天的”等说法,在出家等之中,通过对功德的审察力,应当知道这是对出离巴拉密的观察。这是此处的略义,而详细的意义,应当依据《苦蕴经》、《审察经》等,以及依据《苦蕴经》、《蛇喻经》等(《行藏注·杂论》)来了知。显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.191; ma. ni. 1.291; saṃ. ni. 2.154; ma. ni. 2.10) gharāvāse ‘‘aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.234; pāci. 417; mahāni. 3, 6;), ‘‘mātāpi puttena vivadatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.168, 178) ca kāmesu ‘‘seyyathāpi puriso iṇaṃ ādāya kammante payojeyyā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.218) kāmacchandādīsu ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamā vuttavipariyāyena ‘‘abbhokāso pabbajjā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.1.91; saṃ. ni. 1.154) pabbajjādīsu ānisaṃsapaṭisaṅkhāvasena nekkhammapāramiyaṃ paccavekkhaṇā veditabbā. Ayamettha saṅkhepattho, vitthāro pana dukkhakkhandha (ma. ni. 1.163) vīmaṃsasuttādi (ma. ni. 1.487) vasena dukkhakkhandhaāsivisopamasuttādivasena (cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathāyaṃ) veditabbo.
同样地,应当作意慧的功德:“没有慧,布施等法便不能清净,也不能如其各自本分地具备作用能力。”正如没有命根,身体的机械便不美妙,也不能在其应作的事情中成为具备行持能力者;又如同眼等诸根,没有识,便不能在其各自的领域中执行作用;同样地,信等诸根,没有慧,在执行各自作用之行持中便不具备能力。因此,在遍舍等行持中,慧是最首要的原因。因为拥有睁开慧眼的大士们,即使施舍了自己的肢节与部分肢节,也不会自我赞美、也不会贬低他人,如同药树般没有分别,在过去现在未来三时中也都生起喜悦。由慧的力量,因为与方便善巧相应,遍舍在利益他人的运作中,达到了布施巴拉密的状态。因为为了自利而作的布施,就如同存款生息一般。显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘paññāya vinā dānādayo dhammā na visujjhanti, yathāsakaṃ byāpārasamatthā ca na hontī’’ti paññāguṇā manasi kātabbā. Yatheva hi jīvitena vinā sarīrayantaṃ na sobhati, na ca attano kiriyāsu paṭipattisamatthaṃ hoti, yathā ca cakkhādīni indriyāni viññāṇena vinā yathāsakaṃ visayesu kiccaṃ kātuṃ nappahonti, evaṃ saddhādīni indriyāni paññāya vinā sakiccapaṭipattiyaṃ asamatthānīti pariccāgādipaṭipattiyaṃ paññā padhānakāraṇaṃ. Ummīlitapaññācakkhukā hi mahāsattā attano aṅgapaccaṅgānipi datvā anattukkaṃsakā, aparavambhakā ca honti, bhesajjarukkhā viya vikapparahitā kālattayepi somanassajātā. Paññāvasena upāyakosallayogato pariccāgo parahitappavattiyā dānapāramibhāvaṃ upeti. Attatthañhi dānaṃ vuḍḍhisadisaṃ hoti.
同样地,若没有慧,便无法脱离渴爱等烦恼,戒的清净本身即不能成立,何况是一切知者功德的所依?唯有具慧之人,善于觉察在家生活、欲乐与轮回中的过患,以及出家、禅那等至与涅槃中的利益,出家之后,修习成就禅那等至,趣向涅槃,并令他人亦安立其中。显示巴利原文
Tathā paññāya abhāvena taṇhādisaṃkilesāviyogato sīlassa visuddhiyeva na sambhavati, kuto sabbaññuguṇādhiṭṭhānabhāvo. Paññavā eva ca gharāvāse kāmaguṇesu saṃsāre ca ādīnavaṃ, pabbajjāya jhānasamāpattiyaṃ nibbāne ca ānisaṃsaṃ suṭṭhu sallakkhento pabbajitvā jhānasamāpattiyo nibbattetvā nibbānaninno, pare ca tattha patiṭṭhapetīti.
离于慧的精进,乃是不善的发起,故不能达成任何所愿的目标。实际上,根本不发起,确实胜过不善的发起。然而,与慧相应的精进,依于善巧方便的行持,便没有什么是难以证得的。同样地,唯有具慧之人,方能承受他人所施加的伤害等事,而无慧者则不能。无慧者面对他人的加害,只会增长堪忍的障碍;而具慧者,却能藉此令堪忍成就增长,使其坚固。唯有具慧之人,能如实了知三种真实、它们的因及其对立面,于他人而言,方为不欺诳之人。同样,他以慧力策励自身,依于坚定的成就,于一切波罗蜜中保持着不动摇的行持与决意;而且,唯有具慧者,不分‘可爱之人、中立之人、怨敌’,善能于一切时处施予利益。同样,以慧力故,面对利得等世间法的聚集时,心无变异而安住中立。如此,对于一切波罗蜜,唯慧能令其彻底清净。应当这样观察慧的功德。显示巴利原文
Vīriyañca paññārahitaṃ yadicchitamatthaṃ na sādheti durārambhabhāvato. Varameva hi anārambho durārambhato, paññāsahitena pana vīriyena na kiñci duradhigamaṃ upāyapaṭipattito. Tathā paññavā eva parāpakārādiadhivāsakajātiyo hoti, na duppañño. Paññāvirahitassa ca parehi upanītā apakārā khantiyā paṭipakkhameva anubrūhenti, paññavato pana te khantisampattiyā paribrūhanavasena assā thirabhāvāya saṃvattanti. Paññavā eva tīṇi saccāni tesaṃ kāraṇāni paṭipakkhe ca yathābhūtaṃ jānitvā paresaṃ avisaṃvādako hoti. Tathā paññābalena attānaṃ upatthambhetvā dhitisampadāya sabbapāramīsu acalasamādānādhiṭṭhāno hoti, paññavā eva ca piyamajjhattaverīvibhāgaṃ akatvā sabbattha hitūpasaṃhārakusalo hoti. Tathā paññāvasena lābhādilokadhammasannipāte nibbikāratāya majjhatto hoti. Evaṃ sabbāsaṃ pāramīnaṃ paññāva pārisuddhihetūti paññāguṇā paccavekkhitabbā.
再者,若无慧,则无见成就;无见成就,则无戒成就;缺乏戒成就与见成就者,便无定成就;未得定者,就连自利尚且不能成办,何况殊胜的利他?因此,为利他而修行的菩萨,应当自我教诫:‘你难道不应恭敬精勤于慧的彻底清净吗?’以慧的力量,大士安住于四种决意,以四摄事摄受世间,引导有情入于解脱之道,并成熟其诸根。同样,他以慧力,于蕴、处等法善加简择,如实遍知流转与还灭,导引布施等功德达至差别与抉择分,成为圆满修习菩萨学处之人。应当如此,以种种行相,确立慧的功德之后,增长慧波罗蜜。显示巴利原文
Apica paññāya vinā na dassanasampatti, antarena ca diṭṭhisampadaṃ na sīlasampadā, sīladiṭṭhisampadārahitassa na samādhisampadā, asamāhitena ca na sakkā attahitamattampi sādhetuṃ, pageva ukkaṃsagataṃ parahitanti parahitāya paṭipannena ‘‘nanu tayā sakkaccaṃ paññāpārisuddhiyaṃ āyogo karaṇīyo’’ti bodhisattena attā ovaditabbo. Paññānubhāvena hi mahāsatto caturadhiṭṭhānādhiṭṭhito catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi (dī. ni. 3.210, 313; a. ni. 10.32) lokaṃ anuggaṇhanto satte niyyānikamagge avatāreti, indriyāni ca nesaṃ paripāceti. Tathā paññābalena khandhāyatanādīsu pavicayabahulo pavattinivattiyo yāthāvato parijānanto dānādayo guṇe visesanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvaṃ nayanto bodhisattasikkhāya paripūrakārī hotīti evamādinā anekākāravokāre paññāguṇe vavatthapetvā paññāpāramī anubrūhetabbā.
同样地,即便是眼前可见的世间事业,缺乏精进的人也无法达成;而对于不计辛劳、已发起精进的人,则没有什么是难以证得的。因为缺乏精进的人,连“我要救度一切有情脱离轮回大洪流”这样的心愿都无法发起。中等精进的人,虽能发起,却中途放弃。唯有最上等精进的人,不顾自身的安乐,方能抵达所发心愿的彼岸。应当这样观察精进的成就。再者,应当这样思惟:“如果只是为了把自己从轮回的泥沼中拔救出来而发起,在精进松懈的情况下,尚且不能期望心愿达成,更何况是为了拔救包含天神在内的世间而发下大誓愿呢?”;“贪等过患犹如醉象般难以阻挡,以它们为因的种种业行,恰如拔刀相向的刽子手;以它们为相的种种恶趣,恒常张口欲噬;将众生投入其中的恶友们,常时围绕在身边。而一个随顺他们教诫的愚痴凡夫,这凡夫状态本身,就应该能让他自己从轮回的痛苦中挣脱出来。”;“邪恶的思惟会因精进的力量而消散远去。”;“如果正觉可以通过自身精进的力量而证得,那么这当中又有什么困难呢?”显示巴利原文
Tathā dissamānapārānipi lokiyāni kammāni nihīnavīriyena pāpuṇituṃ asakkuṇeyyāni, agaṇitakhedena pana āraddhavīriyena duradhigamaṃ nāma natthi. Nihīnavīriyo hi ‘‘saṃsāramahoghato sabbasatte santāressāmī’’ti ārabhitumeva na sakkuṇoti. Majjhimo ārabhitvā antarāvosānamāpajjati. Ukkaṭṭhavīriyo pana attasukhanirapekkho ārambhapāraṃ adhigacchatīti vīriyasampatti paccavekkhitabbā. Apica ‘‘yassa attanoyeva saṃsārapaṅkato samuddharaṇatthamārambho, tassāpi vīriyassa sithilabhāvena manorathānaṃ matthakappatti na sakkā sambhāvetuṃ, pageva sadevakassa lokassa samuddharaṇatthaṃ katābhinīhārenā’’ti ca ‘‘rāgādīnaṃ dosagaṇānaṃ mattamahāgajānaṃ viya dunnivārayabhāvato, tannidānānañca kammasamādānānaṃ ukkhittāsikavadhakasadisabhāvato, tannimittānañca duggatīnaṃ sabbadā vivaṭamukhabhāvato, tattha niyojakānañca pāpamittānaṃ sadā sannihitabhāvato, tadovādakāritāya ca bālassa puthujjanabhāvassa sati sambhave yuttaṃ sayameva saṃsāradukkhato nissaritu’’nti ca ‘‘micchāvitakkā vīriyānubhāvena dūrī bhavantī’’ti ca ‘‘yadi pana sambodhi attādhīnena vīriyena sakkā samadhigantuṃ , kimettha dukkara’’nti ca evamādinā nayena vīriyassa guṇāpaccavekkhitabbā.
同样地,应当这样作意:“名为‘忍’的,由于摧破了功德的对立面——忿怒,于善士们在成就功德时,是不可摧破的武器;于有能力征服烦恼者,是一种庄严;于沙门和婆罗门,是力量的成就;是扑灭忿怒之火的流泉;是善妙名声的生起之处;是平息恶人口中毒液的解毒咒;于安住于防护中的人,是最上智者之本性;因其深不可测的志向,是为海洋;是过失大海洋的岸边;是关闭恶趣之门的门扇;是攀登天界与梵天世界的阶梯;是一切功德的安忍之地;是殊胜的身、语、意清净。”再者,应当这样观察:“这些有情,由于未能具足忍成就,不但在现世受着煎熬,于他世也会因追随那导致炽热苦恼的法而受苦。”;“即使因他人加害的因缘而生起了苦,然而,成为这苦的田地的身体,以及成为种子的业,都是我自己过去所造作的。”;“这是我应还清苦债的原因。”;“如果没有加害的人,我的忍成就又如何能生起呢?”;“即使这个人现在是个加害者,但往昔他曾这样对我有过帮助或恩惠。”;“这加害行为本身,由于成为了我……”显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘khanti nāmāyaṃ niravasesaguṇapaṭipakkhassa kodhassa vidhamanato guṇasampādane sādhūnamappaṭihatamāyudhaṃ, parābhibhavane samatthānaṃ alaṅkāro, samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ balasampadā, kodhaggivinayanī udakadhārā, kalyāṇassa kittisaddassa sañjātideso, pāpapuggalānaṃ vacīvisavūpasamakaro mantāgado, saṃvare ṭhitānaṃ paramā dhīrapakati, gambhīrāsayatāya sāgaro, dosamahāsāgarassa velā, apāyadvārassa pidhānakavāṭaṃ, devabrahmalokānaṃ ārohaṇasopānaṃ, sabbaguṇānaṃ adhivāsanabhūmi, uttamā kāyavacīmanovisuddhī’’ti manasi kātabbaṃ. Api ca ‘‘ete sattā khantisampattiyā abhāvato idha ceva tapanti, paraloke ca tapanīyadhammānuyogato’’ti ca ‘‘yadipi parāpakāranimittaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tassa pana dukkhassa khettabhūto attabhāvo, bījabhūtañca kammaṃ mayāva abhisaṅkhata’’nti ca ‘‘tassa dukkhassa āṇaṇyakāraṇameta’’nti ca ‘‘apakārake asati kathaṃ mayhaṃ khantisampadā sambhavatī’’ti ca ‘‘yadipāyaṃ etarahi apakārako, ayaṃ nāma pubbe anena mayhaṃ upakāro kato’’ti ca ‘‘apakāro eva vā khantinimittatāya upakāro’’ti ca ‘‘sabbepime sattā mayhaṃ puttasadisā, puttakatāparādhesu ca ko kujjhissatī’’ti ca ‘‘yena kodhabhūtāvesena ayaṃ mayhaṃ aparajjhati, so kodhabhūtāveso mayā vinetabbo’’ti ca ‘‘yena apakārena idaṃ mayhaṃ dukkhaṃ uppannaṃ, tassa ahampi nimitta’’nti ca ‘‘yehi dhammehi aparādho kato, yattha ca kato, sabbepi te tasmiṃyeva khaṇe niruddhā, kassidāni kena kodho kātabbo’’ti ca ‘‘anattatāya sabbadhammānaṃ ko kassa aparajjhatī’’ti ca paccavekkhantena khantisampadā brūhetabbā.
然而,如果他的因他人加害而起的忿怒,由于长期串习而占据内心、停留不去,就应该这样审察:‘这个「忍」,对于与加害对立的行为来说,正是带来利益的因。’以及:‘加害,以让我产生苦的方式,依于苦,成为生起信心(saddhā)以及对整个世间产生不乐想(anabhiratisaññā)的缘。’以及:‘这即是感官的自性:就是与合意和不合意对象相遇。那么,不合意对象的相遇对我来说怎么会不存在呢?这怎么可能呢?’以及:‘被忿怒所控制的众生,因忿怒而疯狂、内心散乱,对此我为什么要以牙还牙呢?’以及:‘所有这些有情,都被正自觉者看成自己的儿子一样地守护着,因此,在这件事上我连一丝心的愤怒都不应生起。’以及:‘如果犯过者具有功德,我不可以对有功德者生气。’以及:‘如果他没有功德,那就更应该怜悯。’以及:‘用忿怒,我的功德和名誉就会减损。’以及:‘由于生气,丑陋、卧处恶劣(dukkhaseyyā)等这些仇敌所喜欢的事,就会降临到我身上。’以及:‘这个被称为忿怒的,是一切不利的制造者、一切利益的摧毁者、强有力的冤家。’以及:‘如果有了忍,就没有任何冤家。’以及:‘由犯过者的过失因缘,他在未来应得的苦,如果我有了忍,那种苦就不存在了。’以及:‘通过思虑和生气,我就恰好追随着冤家行动。’以及:‘如果忿怒被我用忍摧伏,那个冤家确实就被彻底征服,成为我的奴仆。’以及:‘以忿怒为因,而舍弃忍的功德,这对我不恰当。’以及:‘如果有忿怒,那违逆功德的东西(guṇavirodhini),我的戒等诸法怎么能达到圆满呢?如果没有了它们,我又怎么能成为广泛利益有情、符合自己誓愿的殊胜成就者呢?’以及:‘如果有忍,因为没有外在的散乱,对于得定者,一切诸行(saṅkhārā)是无常、是苦,一切法(dhammā)是无我,涅槃是无为、不死、寂静、微妙等,这样的审察是堪忍的;而且“佛陀的诸法,其威力不可思议、不可计量”。’从那里,更有:‘住于随顺的忍,这样的审察是堪忍的:“纯属这些无有情、无我所性的诸法,各依各自的缘而生起、坏灭,不从哪里来,也不去往哪里,也不停住在任何地方,在这里没有任何人对任何人有所作用。”以此,对于我、我所的不执持性(anadhiṭṭhānatā)的审察是堪忍的,由此,菩萨成为必定(niyato)于菩提、不还法(anāvattidhammo)者。’应该通过这样的方式来了知对忍波罗蜜的观察。显示巴利原文
Yadi panassa dīgharattaṃ paricayena parāpakāranimittako kodho cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭheyya, iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘khanti nāmesā parāpakārassa paṭipakkhapaṭipattīnaṃ paccupakārakāraṇa’’nti ca ‘‘apakāro ca mayhaṃ dukkhuppādanena dukkhupanisāya saddhāya, sabbaloke anabhiratisaññāya ca paccayo’’ti ca ‘‘indriyapakatiresā, yadidaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhavisayasamāyogo, tattha aniṭṭhavisayasamāyogo mayhaṃ na siyāti taṃ kutettha labbhā’’ti ca ‘‘kodhavasiko satto kodhena ummatto vikkhittacitto, tattha kiṃ paccapakārenā’’ti ca ‘‘sabbe pime sattā sammāsambuddhena orasaputtā viya paripālitā, tasmā na tattha mayā cittakopopi kātabbo’’ti ca ‘‘aparādhake ca sati guṇe guṇavati mayā na kopo kātabbo’’ti ca ‘‘asati guṇe visesena karuṇāyitabbo’’ti ca ‘‘kopena ca mayhaṃ guṇayasā nihīyantī’’ti ca ‘‘kujjhanena mayhaṃ dubbaṇṇadukkhaseyyādayo sapattakantā āgacchantī’’ti ca ‘‘kodho ca nāmāyaṃ sabbāhitakārako sabbahitavināsako balavā paccatthiko’’ti ca ‘‘sati ca khantiyā na koci paccatthiko’’ti ca ‘‘aparādhakena aparādhanimittaṃ yaṃ āyatiṃ laddhabbaṃ dukkhaṃ, sati ca khantiyā mayhaṃ tadabhāvo’’ti ca ‘‘cintanena kujjhantena ca mayā paccatthikoyeva anuvattito hotī’’ti ca ‘‘kodhe ca mayā khantiyā abhibhūte tassa dāsabhūto paccatthiko sammadeva abhibhūto hotī’’ti ca ‘‘kodhanimittaṃ khantiguṇapariccāgo mayhaṃ na yutto’’ti ca ‘‘sati ca kodhe guṇavirodhini (guṇavirodhapaccanīdhamme cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathāyaṃ) kiṃ me sīlādidhammā pāripūriṃ gaccheyyuṃ, asati ca tesu kathāhaṃ sattānaṃ upakārabahulo paṭiññānurūpaṃ uttamaṃ sampattiṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti ca ‘‘khantiyā ca sati bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvato samāhitassa sabbe saṅkhārā aniccato dukkhato sabbe dhammā anattato nibbānañca asaṅkhatāmatasantapaṇītādibhāvato nijjhānaṃ khamanti ‘buddhadhammā ca acinteyyāparimeyyapabhāvā’ti’’, tato ca ‘‘anulomiyaṃ khantiyaṃ ṭhito ‘kevalā ime ca attattaniyabhāvarahitā dhammamattā yathāsakaṃ paccayehi uppajjanti vayanti, na kutoci āgacchanti, na kuhiñci gacchanti, na ca katthaci patiṭṭhitā, na cettha koci kassaci byāpāro’ti ahaṃkāramamaṃkārānadhiṭṭhānatā nijjhānaṃ khamati, yena bodhisatto bodhiyā niyato anāvattidhammo hotī’’ti evamādinā khantipāramiyaṃ paccavekkhaṇā veditabbā.
同样,应当观察真实巴拉密的成就:因为若无真实,戒等便不可能存在;若没有与誓愿相符的行持,便会缺失;而一旦违越了真实法,一切恶法便汇聚其中;对于不真实、不联结者,实不可依靠,且未来会导致他的话无人采纳;对具足真实者而言,真实却是一切功德的依止处。依于真实决意,一切菩提资粮的清净与圆满才得以顺遂;以不违越真实自性的法,方能行持一切菩提资粮的作用;这也是菩萨所行的究竟成就。如这些等。显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘saccena vinā sīlādīnaṃ asambhavato, paṭiññānurūpaṃ paṭipattiyā abhāvato ca saccadhammātikkame ca sabbapāpadhammānaṃ samosaraṇato, asaccasandhassa appaccayikabhāvato, āyatiñca anādeyyavacanatāvahanato, sampannasaccassa ca sabbaguṇādhiṭṭhānabhāvato, saccādhiṭṭhānena sabbabodhisambhārānaṃ pārisuddhipāripūrisamanvāyato, sabhāvadhammāvisaṃvādanena sabbabodhisambhārakiccakaraṇato, bodhisattapaṭipattiyā ca parinipphattito’’tiādinā saccapāramiyā sampattiyo paccavekkhitabbā.
同样,应当观察决意中的功德:若于布施等波罗蜜中没有坚固的受持,当它们的对立面聚集时,这些波罗蜜便不能不动摇地安住,并于其中保持稳固,那么布施等资粮就不会成为生起正觉的因。如这些等。显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘dānādīsu daḷhasamādānaṃ, tampaṭipakkhasannipāte ca nesaṃ acalāvatthānaṃ, tattha ca thirabhāvaṃ vinā na dānādisambhārā sambodhinimittā sambhavantī’’tiādinā adhiṭṭhāne guṇā paccavekkhitabbā.
同样,应如此审察慈的功德:若仅仅安住于自利,而没有对众生的利益之心,就连此世与他世的成就也无法获得,更何况是想要将一切众生安立于涅槃成就的人呢?以及,后来期望一切众生获得出世成就者,现在期望世间成就是合理的。以及,现在仅凭善意,还不能实际给予他人利乐,我何时才能以精勤去成就此事呢?以及,现在由我以利乐所滋养的那些众生,将来会成为我法施的助伴。以及,没有这些众生,我的菩提资粮便不会生起,因此,由于他们是一切佛功德显现的完成之因,对我来说,他们是最上的福田、无上的善处、最高的尊敬对象。以及,应当对一切众生生起特别的利益意乐,而且也要从悲决意的立场上对一切众生修习慈爱。确实,以无界限之心专注于施予众生利乐的人,其欲去除他们不利与痛苦的意愿,会变得强有力且根深蒂固;而悲悯,则是一切成佛之法的开端、行道、立足处、根本、前导、最前沿。以这样的方式,应当审察慈的功德。显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘attahitamatte avatiṭṭhantenāpi sattesu hitacittataṃ vinā na sakkā idhalokaparalokasampattiyo pāpuṇituṃ, pageva sabbasatte nibbānasampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetukāmenā’’ti ca ‘‘pacchā sabbasattānaṃ lokuttarasampattiṃ ākaṅkhantena idāni lokiyasampattiṃ ākaṅkhā yuttarūpā’’ti ca ‘‘idāni āsayamattena paresaṃ hitasukhūpasaṃhāraṃ kātuṃ asakkonto kadā payogena taṃ sādhessāmī’’ti ca ‘‘idāni mayā hitasukhūpasaṃhārena saṃvaddhitā pacchā dhammasaṃvibhāgasahāyā mayhaṃ bhavissantī’’ti ca ‘‘etehi vinā na mayhaṃ bodhisambhārā sambhavanti, tasmā sabbabuddhaguṇavibhūtinipphattikāraṇattā mayhaṃ ete paramaṃ puññakkhettaṃ anuttaraṃ kusalāyatanaṃ uttamaṃ gāravaṭṭhāna’’nti ca ‘‘savisesaṃ sattesu sabbesu hitajjhāsayatā paccupaṭṭhapetabbā, kiñca karuṇādhiṭṭhānatopi sabbasattesu mettā anubrūhetabbā. Vimariyādīkatena hi cetasā sattesu hitasukhūpasaṃhāraniratassa tesaṃ ahitadukkhāpanayanakāmatā balavatī uppajjati daḷhamūlā, karuṇā ca sabbesaṃ buddhakārakadhammānamādi caraṇaṃ patiṭṭhā mūlaṃ mukhaṃ pamukha’’nti evamādinā mettāya guṇā paccavekkhitabbā.
同样,应当这样审察舍巴拉密:‘若没有舍,众生所作出的恼害便会令心变异;心若变异,布施等资粮就根本不会生起。’以及‘当心被慈爱之情所滋润时,若没有舍,资粮便不得清净。’以及‘若对资粮不加以舍置审察,便不能将福德资粮及其果报转向利益众生。’以及‘没有舍,便不能不计较施物与受者而行布施。’以及‘没有舍的人,便不能不顾生命与资具的障碍而修习防护与清净。’以及‘以舍的力量,便能超越喜与不喜而成就出离之力;以观照再生而成就一切资粮的事业;对过度精进不加舍置,则精勤之事无法成就;唯有依于舍,才能生起忍辱与审虑;依于舍,才能不欺骗众生;以平等观待世间法,才能对所持的诸法成就不动摇的决意;对别人的伤害等不加作意,才能成就慈心住。’因此应知:一切菩提资粮的受持、决意、圆满与成就,都是依于舍的威力而实现的。应当以这样的方式审察舍巴拉密。如此,对不舍与舍等,依次审察其过患与功德,当知这便是布施等波罗蜜的缘。显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘upekkhāya abhāve sattehi katā vippakārā cittassa vikāraṃ uppādeyyuṃ, sati ca cittavikāre dānādisambhārānaṃ sambhavoyeva natthī’’ti ca ‘‘mettāsinehena sinehite citte upekkhāya vinā sambhārānaṃ pārisuddhi na hotī’’ti ca ‘‘anupekkhako sambhāresu puññasambhāraṃ tabbipākañca sattahitatthaṃ pariṇāmetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti ca ‘‘upekkhāya abhāve deyyapaṭiggāhakesu vibhāgaṃ akatvā pariccajituṃ na sakkotī’’ti ca ‘‘upekkhārahitena jīvitaparikkhārānaṃ jīvitassa ca antarāyaṃ amanasikaritvā saṃvaravisodhanaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā’’ti ca ‘‘upekkhāvasena aratiratisahasseva nekkhammabalasiddhito, upapattito ikkhanavaseneva sabbasambhārakiccanipphattito, accāraddhassa vīriyassa anupekkhane padhānakiccākaraṇato, upekkhatoyeva titikkhānijjhānasambhavato, upekkhāvasena sattasaṅkhārānaṃ avisaṃvādanato, lokadhammānaṃ ajjhupekkhanena samādinnadhammesu acalādhiṭṭhānasiddhito, parāpakārādīsu anābhogavaseneva mettāvihāranipphattitoti sabbabodhisambhārānaṃ samādānādhiṭṭhānapāripūrinipphattiyo upekkhānubhāvena sampajjantī’’ti evaṃ ādinā nayena upekkhāpāramī paccavekkhitabbā. Evaṃ apariccāgapariccāgādīsu yathākkamaṃ ādīnavānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇā dānādipāramīnaṃ paccayoti veditabbā.
同样,具备资具的十五种行法与五种神通。其中,行法是指:戒防护、守护根门、饮食知量、警寤勤修、七种正法、四种禅那。在这些当中,戒等四种法的资具是十三头陀支,以及少欲等。于正法中,信的资具是:佛、法、僧、戒、施、天、寂止等随念;远离粗俗之人;亲近柔和之人;对能生净信之法加以审察并倾向于彼。惭与愧的资具是:审察不善的过患;审察恶趣的过患;审察善法的支持力量;远离无惭无愧之人;亲近具足惭愧之人并倾向于彼。多闻的资具是:先前的努力;常请问;对正法的专精;对无过失学科的熟悉;根器成熟;烦恼远离;远离寡闻之人;亲近多闻之人并倾向于彼。精进的资具是:审察恶趣的怖畏;审察行道;审察法的伟大;去除昏沉睡眠;远离懈怠之人;亲近精进之人;审察正勤并倾向于彼。念的资具是:念与正知;远离失念之人;亲近念住现前之人并倾向于彼。智慧的资具是:常请问;令事相清净;令根门等持;远离劣慧之人;亲近有慧之人;审察甚深智行并倾向于彼。四种禅那的资具是:以戒等四法为基,在三十八种所缘上作前分修习,以及转向等自在力的修习。其中,由戒等清净修习……显示巴利原文
Tathā saparikkhārā pañcadasa caraṇadhammā pañca ca abhiññāyo. Tattha caraṇadhammā nāma sīlasaṃvaro, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, jāgariyānuyogo, satta saddhammā, cattāri jhānāni ca. Tesu sīlādīnaṃ catunnaṃ terasapi dhutadhammā, appicchatādayo ca parikkhāro. Saddhammesu saddhāya buddhadhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatūpasamānussati- lūkhapuggalaparivajjanasiniddhapuggalasevanapasādanīya- dhammapaccavekkhaṇatadadhimuttatā parikkhāro, hirottappānaṃ akusalādīnavapaccavekkhaṇaapāyādīnavapaccavekkhaṇakusaladhammupatthambhana- bhāvapaccavekkhaṇahirottappa rahitapuggalaparivajjanahirottappasampannapuggalasevanatadadhimuttatā, bāhusaccassa pubbayogaparipucchakabhāvasaddhammābhiyogaanavajjavijjāṭṭhānādi- paricayaparipakkindriyatākilesadūrībhāvaappassutaparivajjanabahussutasevanatadadhimuttatā, vīriyassa apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇagamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇadhammamahattapaccavekkhaṇa- thinamiddhavinodanakusītapuggalaparivajjanaāraddhavīriyapuggala- sevanasammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇatadadhimuttatā, satiyā satisampajaññamuṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanaupaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanatadadhimuttatā, paññāya paripucchakabhāvavatthuvisadakiriyāindriyasamattapaṭipādanaduppañña- puggalaparivajjanapaññavantapuggalasevanagambhīrañāṇacariyapacca- vekkhaṇatadadhimuttatā, catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sīlādicatukkaṃ aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu pubbabhāgabhāvanā, āvajjanādivasībhāvakaraṇañca parikkhāro. Tattha sīlādīhi payogasuddhiyā sattānaṃ abhayadāne, āsayasuddhiyā āmisadāne, ubhayasuddhiyā ca dhammadāne samattho hotītiādinā caraṇādīnaṃ dānādisambhārānaṃ paccayabhāvo yathārahaṃ niddhāretabbo, ativitthārabhayena na niddhārayimha. Evaṃ sampatticakkādayopi dānādīnaṃ paccayoti veditabbā.
什么是杂染?总的来说,波罗蜜的杂染是指被渴爱等所执取的状态。分别而言:对施物与受者作分别,是布施巴拉密的杂染;对有情与时间作分别,是戒波罗蜜的杂染;对欲有及其寂止生起欢喜或不欢喜的分别,是出离巴拉密的杂染;执取“我”与“我所”的分别,是智慧巴拉密的杂染;昏沉与掉举的分别,是精进巴拉密的杂染;自他分别,是忍耐巴拉密的杂染;在未曾见等中执为见等,是真实巴拉密的杂染;在菩提资粮及其对立面中,对过失与功德的分别,是决意波罗蜜的杂染;利益与不利的分别,是慈爱巴拉密的杂染;可爱与不可爱的分别,是舍巴拉密的杂染。应当如此了知。显示巴利原文
Ko saṃkilesoti avisesena taṇhādīhi parāmaṭṭhabhāvo pāramīnaṃ saṃkileso, visesena deyyapaṭiggāhakavikappā dānapāramiyā saṃkileso, sattakālavikappā sīlapāramiyā, kāmabhavatadupasamesu abhiratianabhirativikappā nekkhammapāramiyā, ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti vikappā paññāpāramiyā, līnuddhaccavikappā vīriyapāramiyā, attaparavikappā khantipāramiyā, adiṭṭhādīsu diṭṭhādivikappā saccapāramiyā, bodhisambhāratabbipakkhesu dosaguṇavikappā adhiṭṭhānapāramiyā, hitāhitavikappā mettāpāramiyā, iṭṭhāniṭṭhavikappā upekkhāpāramiyā saṃkilesoti veditabbo.
何为清净?应知,不被渴爱等所损害,且远离了如前所述的分别,即是这些波罗蜜的清净。事实上,不被渴爱、慢、见、嗔、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、诳、谄、刚强、忿、骄、放逸等烦恼所损害,并远离了对施物、受者等的分别,这样的布施等波罗蜜才是清净、光耀的。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ vodānanti taṇhādīhi anupaghāto, yathāvuttavikappaviraho ca etāsaṃ vodānanti veditabbaṃ. Anupahatā hi taṇhāmānadiṭṭhikodhūpanāhamakkhapalāsaissāmacchariyamāyāsāṭheyyathambhasārambha- madapamādādīhi kilesehi deyyapaṭiggāhakavikappādirahitā ca dānādipāramiyo parisuddhā pabhassarā bhavantīti.
何为对立面?总的说来,一切烦恼、一切不善法都是这些波罗蜜的对立面;具体而言,应知就是前面所说的悭吝等。又,布施具足无贪、无嗔、无痴的功德,因而远离贪嗔痴,故为贪等的对治;戒能断除身体等恶行与歪曲,故为贪等的对治;出离避免了沉溺欲乐、伤害他人以及自我折磨这三种恶,故为对治;智慧能令贪等成为盲目,又使智慧不致盲目,故为贪等的对治;精进以不懈怠、不掉举的正确方式策励,故为贪等的对治;忍辱能堪忍可爱、不可爱乃至空无所有的事物,故为贪等的对治;真实面对他人的利益或损害,亦如实而住,故为贪等的对治;决意克服世间法,于所受持的修行资粮中毫不动摇,故为贪等的对治;慈能远离那些障盖,故为贪等的对治;舍摧毁对可爱与不可爱的随顺与违逆,且平等而住,故为贪等的对治。显示巴利原文
Kopaṭipakkhoti avisesena sabbepi kilesā sabbepi akusalā dhammā etāsaṃ paṭipakkho, visesena pana pubbe vuttā maccherādayoti veditabbā. Apica deyyapaṭiggāhakadānaphalesu alobhādosāmohaguṇayogato lobhadosamohapaṭipakkhaṃ dānaṃ, kāyādidosavaṅkāpagamanato lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ sīlaṃ , kāmasukhaparūpaghātaattakilamathaparivajjanato dosattayapaṭipakkhaṃ nekkhammaṃ, lobhādīnaṃ andhīkaraṇato, ñāṇassa ca anandhīkaraṇato lobhādipaṭipakkhā paññā, alīnānuddhatañāyārambhavasena lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ vīriyaṃ, iṭṭhāniṭṭhasuññatānaṃ khamanato lobhādipaṭipakkhā khanti, satipi paresaṃ upakāre apakāre ca yathābhūtappavattiyā lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ saccaṃ, lokadhamme abhibhuyya yathāsamādinnesu sambhāresu acalanato lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, nīvaraṇavivekato lobhādipaṭipakkhā mettā, iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu anunayapaṭighaviddhaṃsanato, samappavattito ca lobhādipaṭipakkhā upekkhāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
何为行道?在布施方面,以施予安乐所需、身体与生命,以除去怖畏,以开示法义,用众多方式护念众生,这便是布施中的行道。其详细方法是:“我以此布施,愿众生成就寿命、容貌、安乐、力量、辩才等诸圆满,成就那令人喜悦的最殊胜果报。”怀着此心,因此施予食物;同样地,为了息灭众生业与烦恼之渴而施予饮品;为了成就金色身及惭愧的庄严而施予衣服;为了成就种种神通与涅槃安乐而施予车乘;为了成就戒香而施予香;为了成就佛功德的光耀而施予花鬘与涂香;为了成就菩提座而施予座位;为了成就如来的卧处而施予床座;为了成就皈依处的体性而施予房舍;为了获得五眼而施予灯明。为了成就一寻身光而施予色施;为了成就梵音而施予声施;为了成为一切世间所喜爱者而施予味施;为了成就佛陀的柔软性而施予触施;为了成就无老死的体性而施予医药;为了解脱烦恼奴仆的束缚而施予仆人自由;为了对正法的喜乐而施予无过失的游戏喜乐之因;为了将一切众生以圣生摄为自己的儿子而施予儿子;为了担负起整个世间的庇护而施予。显示巴利原文
Kā paṭipattīti sukhūpakaraṇasarīrajīvitapariccāgena bhayāpanūdanena dhammopadesena ca bahudhā sattānaṃ anuggahakaraṇaṃ dāne paṭipatti. Tatthāyaṃ vitthāranayo – ‘‘imināhaṃ dānena sattānaṃ āyuvaṇṇasukhabalapaṭibhānādisampattiṃ ramaṇīyaṃ aggaphalasampattiṃ nipphādeyya’’nti annadānaṃ deti, tathā sattānaṃ kammakilesapipāsavūpasamāya pānaṃ deti, tathā suvaṇṇavaṇṇatāya, hirottappālaṅkārassa ca nipphattiyā vatthāni deti, tathā iddhividhassa ceva nibbānasukhassa ca nipphattiyā yānaṃ deti, tathā sīlagandhanipphattiyā gandhaṃ, buddhaguṇasobhānipphattiyā mālāvilepanaṃ, bodhimaṇḍāsananipphattiyā āsanaṃ , tathāgataseyyānipphattiyā seyyaṃ, saraṇabhāvanipphattiyā āvasathaṃ, pañcacakkhupaṭilābhāya padīpeyyaṃ deti. Byāmappabhānipphattiyā rūpadānaṃ, brahmassaranipphattiyā saddadānaṃ, sabbalokassa piyabhāvāya rasadānaṃ, buddhasukhumālabhāvāya phoṭṭhabbadānaṃ, ajarāmaraṇabhāvāya bhesajjadānaṃ, kilesadāsabyavimocanatthaṃ dāsānaṃ bhujissatādānaṃ, saddhammābhiratiyā anavajjakhiḍḍāratihetudānaṃ, sabbepi satte ariyāya jātiyā attano puttabhāvūpanayanāya puttadānaṃ, sakalassa lokassa patibhāvūpagamanāya dāradānaṃ, subhalakkhaṇasampattiyā suvaṇṇamaṇimuttāpavāḷādidānaṃ, anubyañjanasampattiyā nānāvidhavibhūsanadānaṃ, saddhammakosādhigamāya vittakosadānaṃ, dhammarājabhāvāya rajjadānaṃ, jhānādisampattiyā ārāmuyyānādivanadānaṃ, cakkaṅkitehi pādehi bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamanāya caraṇadānaṃ, caturoghanittharaṇāya sattānaṃ saddhammahatthadānatthaṃ hatthadānaṃ, saddhindriyādipaṭilābhāya kaṇṇanāsādidānaṃ, samantacakkhupaṭilābhāya cakkhudānaṃ, ‘‘dassanasavanānussaraṇapāricariyādīsu sabbakālaṃ sabbasattānaṃ hitasukhāvaho, sabbalokena ca upajīvitabbo me kāyo bhaveyyā’’ti maṃsalohitādidānaṃ, ‘‘sabbalokuttamo bhaveyya’’nti uttamaṅgadānaṃ deti.
当他这样布施时,不以邪命的方式施,不以恼害他人的方式施,不因恐惧而施,不因羞惭而施,不因对受施者心怀恼怒而施,不于有胜妙之物时施以粗劣之物,不自我称赞而施,不贬毁他人而施,不期望果报而施,不因厌恶乞者而施,不怀轻慢而施。而是恭敬地施,亲手施,适时而施,心存敬意而施,不怀分别而施,于布施前、布施时、布施后,这三个时段都心怀欢喜而施。布施之后也不追悔,不以受施者为缘而生起慢心或轻蔑,对受施者言语亲切、善于言辞,乐于与乞者结缘,与眷属一同施予。并且,他将那布施的殊胜成就,转而用于利益安乐一切世间,转而用于自身不动摇的解脱,转而用于无尽的意欲、无尽的精进、无尽的定、无尽的智、无尽的正自觉。再者,修习此布施巴拉密的大士,应当对自己的生命和财物作无常想,对众生应作大悲悯想。唯有如此,当他执取财物中的应执取之义时,才会如同从着火的房屋中取出一切财产并带出自身一般,不留下任何东西,完全彻底地舍弃。这就是布施巴拉密行道的次第。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ dadanto ca na anesanāya deti, na paropaghātena, na bhayena, na lajjāya, na dakkhiṇeyyarosanena, na paṇīte sati lūkhaṃ, na attukkaṃsanena, na paravambhanena, na phalābhikaṅkhāya, na yācakajigucchāya, na acittīkārena deti, atha kho sakkaccaṃ deti, sahatthena deti, kālena deti, cittiṃ katvā deti, avibhāgena deti, tīsu kālesu somanassito deti. Tatoyeva datvā na pacchānutāpī hoti, na paṭiggāhakavasena mānāvamānaṃ karoti, paṭiggāhakānaṃ piyasamudācāro hoti vadaññū yācayogo saparivāradāyī. Tañca dānasampattiṃ sakalalokahitasukhāya pariṇāmeti, attano ca akuppāya vimuttiyā, aparikkhayassa chandassa, aparikkhayassa vīriyassa, aparikkhayassa samādhānassa, aparikkhayassa ñāṇassa, aparikkhayāya sammāsambodhiyā pariṇāmeti. Imañca dānapāramiṃ paṭipajjantena mahāsattena jīvite, bhogesu ca aniccasaññā paccupaṭṭhapetabbā, sattesu ca mahākaruṇā. Evañhi bhoge gahetabbasāraṃ gaṇhanto ādittasmā viya agārasmā sabbaṃ sāpateyyaṃ, attānañca bahi nīharanto na kiñci seseti, niravasesato nissajjatiyeva. Ayaṃ tāva dānapāramiyā paṭipattikkamo.
对于戒波罗蜜,因为想要以一切智之戒庄严来庄严有情的菩萨,首先必须令自己的戒清净,所以他应当对众生怀有如此具足悲悯的心,即使在梦中也不会生起嗔怒。由于恒常致力于利益他人,他不应像执取毒蛇那样去执取他人所有之物。他远离非梵行,远离七种淫欲的结合,更遑论与他人之妻交合。他说真实语、有益语、可爱语、有节制语,并在适当时机说与法相应之语。他无贪求、无恶意、无颠倒见,对正自觉者决意深信,生起深厚的爱敬。如此,他已厌离四恶趣轮回的苦道、不善业道与不善法,安住于趋向天界与解脱的善业道中。由于他的意乐和加行都清净,他所期望的利益安乐有情之心愿,便能迅速成就。显示巴利原文
Sīlapāramiyā pana yasmā sabbaññusīlālaṅkārehi satte alaṅkaritukāmena attanoyeva tāva sīlaṃ visodhetabbaṃ, tasmā sattesu tathā dayāpannacittena bhavitabbaṃ, yathā supinantenapi na āghāto uppajjeyya. Parūpakāraniratatāya parasantako alagaddo viya na parāmasitabbo. Abrahmacariyatopi ārācārī, sattavidhamethuna saṃyogavirato, pageva paradāragamanato. Saccaṃ hitaṃ piyaṃ parimitameva ca kālena dhammiṃ kathaṃ bhāsitā hoti, anabhijjhālu abyāpanno aviparītadassano sammāsambuddhe niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo. Iti caturāpāyavaṭṭadukkhapathehi akusalakammapathehi, akusaladhammehi ca oramitvā saggamokkhapathesu kusalakammapathesu patiṭṭhitassa suddhāsayapayogatāya yathābhipatthitā sattānaṃ hitasukhūpasañhitā manorathā sīghaṃ abhinipphajjanti.
其中,由于远离杀生,他施予一切众生无畏施,能毫不费力地成就慈心修习,获得十一种慈心功德:少病、无病、长寿、多乐住,获得殊胜之相,并能彻底断除嗔的习气。同样,由于远离不与取,他获得盗贼等所不能夺的广大财富,成为不令人疑、可爱、可意、可信之人,于财富等成就心无执著,具足恒常舍离的习性,并彻底断除贪的习气。由于远离非梵行,他成为无贪者,身心轻安,成为有情所喜爱、可意、不令人疑者,善美名声远扬,于女人心无恋著,无贪欲的意乐,多乐出离,获得殊胜之相,并彻底断除贪的习气。显示巴利原文
Tattha hiṃsānivattiyā sabbasattānaṃ abhayadānaṃ deti, appakasireneva mettābhāvanaṃ sampādeti, ekādasa mettānisaṃse adhigacchati, appābādho hoti appātaṅko dīghāyuko sukhabahulo, lakkhaṇavisese pāpuṇāti, dosavāsanañca samucchindati. Tathā adinnādānanivattiyā corādiasādhāraṇe uḷāre bhoge adhigacchati, anāsaṅkanīyo piyo manāpo vissasanīyo, vibhavasampattīsu alaggacitto pariccāgasīlo , lobhavāsanañca samucchindati. Abrahmacariyanivattiyā alobho hoti santakāyacitto, sattānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo aparisaṅkanīyo, kalyāṇo cassa kittisaddo abbhuggacchati, alaggacitto hoti mātugāmesu aluddhāsayo, nekkhammabahulo, lakkhaṇavisese adhigacchati, lobhavāsanañca samucchindati.
远离妄语者,成为衡量众生的准绳,可信可靠,言语堪受采纳;诸天喜爱,口中常出芬芳;身语行为受守护,获得殊胜特相,并能断除烦恼习气。远离离间语者,拥有不为外敌所破的身体与和合不破的眷属;于正法得不可坏之信;对多生相识的众生成就坚定友谊;为一切众生恒所喜爱,少有染污。远离粗恶语者,成为众生喜爱、可意、乐善、言语柔和、为人敬重之人,音声具足八支功德。远离杂秽语者,成为众生喜爱、可意、值得尊敬、言语可采、说话有节之人,拥有大威德、大神力,依与生俱来的无碍辩才而善答问难,并于诸佛境界中,能以一言解答无量众生所提的无量问题。显示巴利原文
Musāvādanivattiyā sattānaṃ pamāṇabhūto hoti paccayiko theto ādeyyavacano devatānaṃ piyo manāpo surabhigandhamukho ārakkhiyakāyavacīsamācāro , lakkhaṇavisese ca adhigacchati, kilesavāsanañca samucchindati. Pesuññanivattiyā parūpakkamehi abhejjakāyo hoti abhejjaparivāro, saddhamme ca abhijjanakasaddho, daḷhamitto bhavantaraparicitānampi sattānaṃ ekantapiyo, asaṃkilesabahulo. Pharusavācānivattiyā sattānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo sukhasīlo madhuravacano sambhāvanīyo, aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato cassa saro (ma. ni. 2.387) nibbattati. Samphappalāpanivattiyā ca sattānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo garubhāvanīyo ca ādeyyavacano ca parimitālāpo, mahesakkho ca hoti mahānubhāvo, ṭhānuppattikena paṭibhānena pañhānaṃ byākaraṇakusalo, buddhabhūmiyañca ekāya eva vācāya anekabhāsānaṃ sattānaṃ anekesaṃ pañhānaṃ byākaraṇasamattho hoti.
由不贪求,所求皆得,于广大财富能生受用之意乐,为刹帝利巨富之家等所认同,不为怨敌所胜,不遭诸根残缺,成为无有匹敌者。由无瞋恚,成为众生乐见、堪受敬重之人;因欣乐利他,不费大力即能令众生生起净信;本性温和,住于慈心,拥有大威德、大神力。由不持邪见,获得善友,纵遭断头亦不造恶;由于彻见业之自性,不生好奇与迷信;于正法信心确立、生根;深信如来菩提,犹如白天鹅虽遇粪堆亦不滞留,不乐外学;善能通达三相,最终获得无碍智;在未证菩提之前,于各类众生中恒为最上首,获得种种崇高成就。显示巴利原文
Anabhijjhālutāya icchitalābhī hoti, uḷāresu ca bhogesu ruciṃ paṭilabhati, khattiyamahāsālādīnaṃ sammato hoti, paccatthikehi anabhibhavanīyo, indriyavekallaṃ na pāpuṇāti, appaṭipuggalo ca hoti. Abyāpādena piyadassano hoti sattānaṃ sambhāvanīyo, parahitābhinanditāya ca satte appakasireneva pasādeti, alūkhasabhāvo ca hoti mettāvihārī, mahesakkho ca hoti mahānubhāvo. Micchādassanābhāvena kalyāṇe sahāye paṭilabhati, sīsacchedampi pāpuṇanto pāpakammaṃ na karoti, kammassakatādassanato akotūhalamaṅgaliko ca hoti, saddhamme cassa saddhā patiṭṭhitā hoti mūlajātā, saddahati ca tathāgatānaṃ bodhiṃ , samayantaresu nābhiramati ukkāraṭṭhāne viya rājahaṃso, lakkhaṇattayaparijānanakusalo hoti, ante ca anāvaraṇañāṇalābhī, yāva bodhiṃ na pāpuṇāti, tāva tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sattanikāye ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭho ca hoti, uḷāruḷārasampattiyo pāpuṇāti.
因此,应当生起深切敬重:“这戒,确实是一切成就的基础,是一切佛陀功德的根源,是一切成佛之法的前行、修行、门面与首要。”之后,应依念与正知之力,住于不放逸,如观“以友面而现的敌人”般观察利养、恭敬与名声;并按照“如母鸡护卵”等(《清净道论》1.19;《长部注》1.7)所述的方法,恭敬地圆满成就此戒。这里仅是略说,详细内容当依《清净道论》(《清净道论》1.6)所述而了知。再者,他应将此戒的功德回向,并非为使自己从恶趣与烦恼中解脱,不是为生于善趣,不是为获得王位,不是为转轮王、天王、帝释、魔罗、梵天之成就,也不是为了自己证得三明等,不是为辟支菩提,而仅仅是为了以一切知智,为一切众生成就无上的戒庄严。显示巴利原文
‘‘Iti hidaṃ sīlaṃ nāma sabbasampattīnaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, sabbabuddhaguṇānaṃ pabhavabhūmi, sabbabuddhakaradhammānamādi caraṇaṃ mukhaṃ pamukha’’nti bahumānaṃ uppādetvā kāyavacīsaṃyame, indriyadamane, ājīvasampadāya, paccayaparibhoge ca satisampajaññabalena appamattena lābhasakkārasilokaṃ mittamukhapaccatthikaṃ viya sallakkhetvā ‘‘kikīva aṇḍa’’ntiādinā (visuddhi. 1.19; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7) vuttanayena sakkaccaṃ sīlaṃ sampādetabbaṃ . Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.6) vuttanayena veditabbo. Tañca panetaṃ sīlaṃ na attano duggatiparikilesavimuttiyā, sugatiyampi, na rajjasampattiyā, nacakkavatti-nadeva-nasakka-namāra-nabrahmasampattiyā, nāpi attano tevijjatādihetu, na paccekabodhiyā, atha kho sabbaññubhāvena sabbasattānaṃ anuttarasīlālaṅkārasampādanatthamevāti pariṇāmetabbaṃ.
同样地,由于居家是一切杂染的藏身之所,因儿女妻妾等而极为拥挤,因农耕、经商等种种事业的场所而混乱不堪,以致出离之乐等全无容身之处;对于诸欲,应这样观察其过患:如同沾在剑刃上的蜜滴,舔舐时仅有微少快乐,却会招来大祸;如同闪电的光亮,只能短暂存在;如同狂人的装饰,是以颠倒的认知去受用;如同覆盖粪便的乐处,实际只是对治之物;如同以指沾水舔舐露珠,并不能解渴;如同饥饿的人进食,反带来逼恼;如同钩上的鱼饵,是灾祸聚集之因;如同烈火,在过去、现在、未来三时中都是产生苦的原因;如同猿胶,会成为束缚的因;如同杀手所掩藏的虫蛆,掩盖了不利;如同居住在敌对的村落,是令人恐怖之处;如同养育敌人,会成为烦恼魔等的食饵;如同节日的盛况,终归于变坏之苦;如同空心树中的火,从内部燃烧;如同古井中垂下的芦草蜜团,有着多重的过患;如同饮用盐水,反而增涨渴求;如同酒与麻醉品,为卑劣者所亲近;因为快乐微少,所以被比喻为骨锁等。显示巴利原文
Tathā sakalasaṃkilesanivāsaṭṭhānatāya, puttadārādīhi mahāsambādhatāya, kasivaṇijjādinānāvidhakammantādhiṭṭhānabyākulatāya ca gharāvāsassa nekkhammasukhādīnaṃ anokāsataṃ, kāmānañca ‘‘satthadhārālaggamadhubindu viya ca avaleyhamānā parittassādā vipulānatthānubandhā’’ti ca ‘‘vijjulatobhāsena gahetabbaṃ naccaṃ viya parittakālopalabbhā, ummattakālaṅkāro viya viparītasaññāya anubhavitabbā , karīsāvacchādanasukhaṃ viya paṭikārabhūtā, udakatemitaṅguliyā ussāvakodakapānaṃ viya atittikarā, chātajjhattabhojanaṃ viya sābādhā, balisāmisaṃ viya byasanasannipātakāraṇā, aggisantāpo viya kālattayepi dukkhuppattihetubhūtā, makkaṭālepo viya bandhanimittā ghātakāvacchādanakimilayo viya anatthacchādanā, sapattagāmavāso viya bhayaṭṭhānabhūtā, paccatthikaposako viya kilesamārādīnaṃ āmisabhūtā, chaṇasampattiyo viya vipariṇāmadukkhā, koṭaraggi viya antodāhakā, purāṇakūpāvalambabīraṇamadhupiṇḍaṃ viya anekādīnavā, loṇūdakapānaṃ viya pipāsahetubhūtā, surāmerayaṃ viya nīcajanasevitā, appassādatāya aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā’’tiādinā ca nayena ādīnavaṃ sallakkhetvā tabbipariyāyena nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ passantena nekkhammapavivekaupasamasukhādīsu ninnapoṇapabbhāracittena nekkhammapāramī pūretabbā.
同样地,正如光明不与黑暗共存,慧也不与痴共处。因此,菩萨首先应当远离导致痴的种种原因。这些导致痴的原因是:不喜、懈怠、伸懒腰、懒惰、乐群聚、贪睡、无决断、于慧不好奇、邪慢、不遍问、不善养护身体、心不专注、亲近劣慧者、不侍奉有慧者、自轻、邪思维、颠倒执取、过度强化身体、不易受警策、五盖。简而言之,凡是那些反复造作则令未生之慧不生、已生之慧退失的法,都应当远离;同时应当致力于多闻与禅那等的修习。显示巴利原文
Tathā yasmā paññā āloko viya andhakārena, mohena saha na vattati, tasmā mohakāraṇāni tāva bodhisattena parivajjitabbāni. Tatthimāni mohakāraṇāni – arati tandī vijambhitā ālasiyaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikārāmatā niddāsīlatā anicchayasīlatā ñāṇasmiṃ akutūhalatā micchādhimāno aparipucchakatā kāyassa na sammāparihāro asamāhitacittatā duppaññānaṃ puggalānaṃ sevanā paññavantānaṃ apayirupāsanā attaparibhavo micchāvikappo viparītābhiniveso kāyadaḷhībahulatā asaṃvegasīlatā pañca nīvaraṇāni. Saṅkhepato ye vā pana dhamme āsevato anuppannā paññā na uppajjati, uppannā parihāyati, iti imāni sammohakāraṇāni parivajjantena bāhusacce jhānādīsu ca yogo karaṇīyo.
在此,多闻的范围界限是:五蕴、十二处、十八界、四圣谛、二十二根、十二支的缘起,以及以念处为首的所有善与不善等法的分类差别;世间中所有无过失的知识领域,以及能为众生带来利益安乐的种种殊胜善巧。像这样,应当以方便善巧为先导的慧,以念与精进作为支撑因,通过良好的学习、听闻、忆持、熟习、遍问,深入这整个所闻的范围,并在其中安立他人,从而产生闻所成慧。同样地,以理思惟蕴等自性法的行相,让心审察、认可这些法,从而产生思所成慧。再通过把握这些蕴等本身的自相与共相,令生起世间遍知,修习前行修习慧。如此,他便究竟通达:‘这仅仅是名色,依适当的缘而生、而灭,在这里没有任何作者或令作者。以“有之后变成没有”这个含义,说是无常;以“被生灭所逼恼”这个含义,说是苦;以“不能自主”这个含义,说是无我。’这样对内、外的法无差别地遍知后,他舍弃对它们的执著,也令他人舍弃对它们的执著,纯粹出于悲悯,直到佛陀功德如同放在手掌上一样亲自得到之前,一直以令众生进入、令成熟、令安立于三乘之道的方法,并使自己在禅那、解脱、定、等至方面达到自在,从而在慧方面达到最顶峰。显示巴利原文
Tatthāyaṃ bāhusaccassa visayavibhāgo – pañca khandhā dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo cattāri saccāni bāvīsatindriyāni dvādasapadiko paṭiccasamuppādo, tathā satipaṭṭhānādayo kusalādidhammappakārabhedā ca. Yāni ca loke anavajjāni vijjaṭṭhānāni, ye ca sattānaṃ hitasukhavidhānayogyā byākaraṇavisesā. Iti evaṃ pakāraṃ sakalameva sutavisayaṃ upāyakosallapubbaṅgamāya paññāya sativīriyupatthambhakāraṇāya sādhukaṃ uggahaṇasavanadhāraṇaparicayaparipucchāhi ogāhetvā tattha ca paresaṃ patiṭṭhapanena sutamayā paññā nibbattetabbā, tathā khandhādīnaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ ākāraparivitakkanamukhena te nijjhānaṃ khamāpentena cintāmayā, khandhādīnaṃyeva pana salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇapariggahavasena lokiyaṃ pariññaṃ nibbattentena pubbabhāgabhāvanāpaññā sampādetabbā. Evañhi ‘‘nāmarūpamattamidaṃ yathārahaṃ paccayehi uppajjati ceva nirujjhati ca, na ettha koci kattā vā kāretā vā, hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccaṃ, udayabbayapaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhaṃ, avasavattanaṭṭhena anattā’’ti ajjhattikabāhire dhamme nibbisesaṃ parijānanto tattha āsaṅgaṃ pajahitvā, pare ca tattha taṃ jahāpetvā kevalaṃ karuṇāvaseneva yāva na buddhaguṇā hatthatalaṃ āgacchanti, tāva yānattaye satte avatāraṇaparipācanehi patiṭṭhāpento, jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattiyo ca vasībhāvaṃ pāpento paññāya ativiya matthakaṃ pāpuṇātīti.
同样地,大士为圆满正等觉已发下宏愿,应当日日如是省察:‘今日我积累了什么福德与智慧资粮?我又作了什么利他之事?’他应当为众生的利益而精勤努力;为饶益一切众生,应当舍弃自己的身体与生命;应当以无界限的慈与悲遍满一切众生;凡众生所生起的任何痛苦,这一切都应当愿求于自身中承受;应当随喜一切众生的功德;应当时时省察佛陀的伟大;无论以身或以语造作何业,这一切都应当以趣向菩提的心为上首而作。因为依此方法,菩萨便积集了无量的福德分。再者,为了众生的受用与保护,他应舍弃自己的身体及生命,寻求对治饥渴、寒暑、风热等苦的方法。而由上述对治痛苦所生的快乐、他自身所获得的快乐、在可爱的园林、苑囿、殿堂、楼台等处以及在森林寂静处所体验的身心无热恼的清凉之乐,还有他所听闻的佛陀、随佛而行的弟子、独觉佛、菩萨们现法安乐住于禅那等至的快乐——所有这些快乐,他都应无界限地普施众生。这是未得定地时的修行轨则。显示巴利原文
Tathā sammāsambodhiyā katābhinīhārena mahāsattena ‘‘ko nu ajja puññañāṇasambhāro upacito, kiñca mayā kataṃ parahita’’nti divase divase paccavekkhantena sattahitatthaṃ ussāho karaṇīyo, sabbesampi sattānaṃ upakārāya attano kāyaṃ jīvitañca ossajjitabbaṃ, sabbepi sattā anodhiso mettāya karuṇāya ca pharitabbā, yā kāci sattānaṃ dukkhuppatti, sabbā sā attani pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, sabbesañca sattānaṃ puññaṃ abbhanumoditabbaṃ, buddhamahantatā abhiṇhaṃ paccavekkhitabbā, yañca kiñci kammaṃ karoti kāyena vācāya vā, taṃ sabbaṃ bodhininnacittapubbaṅgamaṃ kātabbaṃ. Iminā hi upāyena bodhisattānaṃ aparimeyyo puññabhāgo upacīyati. Apica sattānaṃ paribhogatthaṃ paripālanatthañca attano sarīraṃ jīvitañca pariccajitvā khuppipāsāsītuṇhavātātapādidukkhapaṭikāro pariyesitabbo. Yañca yathāvuttadukkhapaṭikārajaṃ sukhaṃ attanā paṭilabhati, tathā ramaṇīyesu ārāmuyyānapāsādatalādīsu, araññāyatanesu ca kāyacittasantāpābhāvena abhinibbutattā sukhaṃ vindati, yañca suṇāti buddhānubuddhapaccekabuddhabodhisattānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārabhūtaṃ jhānasamāpattisukhaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ sattesu anodhiso upasaṃharati. Ayaṃ tāva asamāhitabhūmiyaṃ nayo.
得定之后,他则将自己所体验到的、由殊胜证得而生起的喜与轻安之乐,普遍回向一切众生。同样地,当他看见沉没于巨大轮回之苦及其因——烦恼与行作之苦中的众生时:地狱有情持续长久地感受着因切割、裂开、劈砍、碾磨、灼烧等所产生的剧烈、粗涩、刺痛之受;畜生有情因互相瞋恨、灼热、恼害、伤害、依他而活等而感受痛苦;饿鬼有情身体被火光缭绕,高举手臂哀嚎,在炽燃的熔炉口被饥渴等所焚烧,以呕吐物、痰唾等为食,感受着极大的痛苦。他看到人类因以谋生为本而遭遇巨大的不幸与灾祸,因断手等刑罚因缘而变得丑陋、难看、贫穷,因饥渴等因缘而被强者欺凌,为他人负重,依于他人,感受着近乎恶趣的痛苦,与地狱、饿鬼、畜生之苦几乎没有差别。他看到欲界天人心意散乱于享受如同毒物般的感官对象,被贪等烦恼缠缚而焚烧,犹如被风吹起的大火堆,热恼未曾止息,内心躁动,受着未被调伏的烦恼所制之苦。他看到色界与无色界天人,他们虽付出巨大努力,却如同飞入高空深处的鸟,又如被大力士射出的箭,寿显示巴利原文
Samāhito pana attanā yathānubhūtaṃ visesādhigamanibbattaṃ pītipassaddhisukhaṃ sabbasattesu adhimuccati, tathā mahati saṃsāradukkhe, tannimittabhūte ca kilesābhisaṅkhāradukkhe nimuggaṃ sattanikāyaṃ disvā tatthapi chedanabhedanaphālanapisanaggisantāpādijanitā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā nirantaraṃ cirakālaṃ vediyante nārake, aññamaññaṃ kujjhanasantāpanaviheṭhanahiṃsanaparādhīnatādīhi dukkhaṃ anubhavante tiracchāne, jotimālā’kulasarīre uddhabāhuviravante ukkāmukhe khuppipāsādīhi ḍayhamāne ca vantakheḷādiāhāre ca mahādukkhaṃ vedayamāne pete ca pariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ mahantaṃ anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇante hatthacchedādikāraṇayogena dubbaṇṇaduddasikadaliddatādibhāvena khuppipāsādiyogena balavantehi abhibhavanīyato, paresaṃ vahanato, parādhīnato ca nārake pete tiracchāne ca atisayante apāyadukkhanibbisesaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavante manusse ca tathā visayavisaparibhogavikkhittacittatāya rāgādipariyuṭṭhānena ḍayhamāne vāyuvegasamuṭṭhitajālāsamiddhasukkhakaṭṭhasannipāte aggikkhandhe viya anupasantapariḷāhavuttike anihataparādhīne kāmāvacaradeve ca mahatā vāyāmena vidūramākāsaṃ vigāhitasakuntā viya, balavantehi khittasarā viya ca ‘‘satipi cirappavattiyaṃ anaccantikatāya pātapariyosānā anatikkantajātijarāmaraṇā evā’’ti rūpāvacarārūpāvacaradeve ca passantena mettāya karuṇāya ca anodhiso sattā pharitabbā. Evaṃ kāyena vācāya manasā ca bodhisambhāre nirantaraṃ upacinantena ussāho pavattetabbo.
再者,应当这样想:‘佛果的境界,不可思议、无量、广大、纯净、无垢、无与伦比、远离一切烦恼,是功德宝藏的根源;而成就如是佛果所需的精进,其威德力同样不可思议。这种精进,凡俗之人连听闻尚且难以承受,更遑论切实修行。’因为:三类大誓愿心的生起、四佛地、四摄事、大悲所缘的境地、对佛法的审察忍可、于一切法无有执著、视一切众生如己子女、于轮回之苦心无疲厌、舍离一切应施之物而无悔无慢、安立于增上戒学等决意毫不动摇、于一切善行心生欢喜踊跃、心倾向于远离、修习禅那、听闻无有过失的教法而无有满足、以利益他人之愿力来宣说所听闻的法、令众生安立于正道、所发起的精进极为坚固、具足大智大雄之德、面对他人毁骂伤害而心无变异、立于真实决意、于等至得自在、获得神通力、通达三相(诸行无常、有漏皆苦、诸法无我)、以致力于念处等来积集出世间道的资粮、趋向九种出世间法。如是,从发下大愿直至成就大菩提,这其间所有菩提资粮的修行,上面所陈述的这些,无不唯有依靠精进的威德力才能得以成就。因此,不应该舍弃,而显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘acinteyyāparimitavipuloḷāravimalanirupamanirupakkilesaguṇanicayanidānabhūtassa buddhabhāvassa ussakkitvā sampahaṃsanayogyaṃ vīriyaṃ nāma acinteyyānubhāvameva. Yaṃ na pacurajanā sotumpi sakkuṇanti, pageva paṭipajjituṃ. Tathā hi tividhā abhinīhāracittuppatti, catasso buddhabhūmiyo, cattāri saṅgahavatthūni (dī. ni. 3.210, 313; a. ni. 4.32), karuṇokāsatā, buddhadhammesu nijjhānakkhanti, sabbadhammesu nirupalepo, sabbasattesu puttasaññā, saṃsāradukkhehi aparikhedo, sabbadeyyadhammapariccāgo, tena ca niratimānatā, adhisīlasikkhādiadhiṭṭhānaṃ, tattha ca acalatā, kusalakiriyāsu pītipāmojjaṃ, vivekaninnacittatā, jhānānuyogo, anavajjasutena atitti, yathāsutassa dhammassa paresaṃ hitajjhāsayena desanā, sattānaṃ ñāye nivesanaṃ, ārambhadaḷhatā, dhīravīrabhāvo, parāpavādaparāpakāresu vikārābhāvo, saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, samāpattīsu vasībhāvo, abhiññāsu balappatti, lakkhaṇattayāvabodho, satipaṭṭhānādīsu abhiyogena lokuttaramaggasambhārasambharaṇaṃ, navalokuttarāvakkantī’’ti evamādikā sabbā bodhisambhārapaṭipatti vīriyānubhāveneva samijjhatīti abhinīhārato yāva mahābodhi anossajjantena sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ vīriyaṃ sampādetabbaṃ. Sampajjamāne ca vīriye khantiādayo dānādayo ca sabbepi bodhisambhārā tadadhīnavuttitāya sampannā eva hontīti. Khantiādīsupi iminā nayena paṭipatti veditabbā.
如此,以布施施予众生安乐之具而行种种饶益,这便是布施的修行;以戒,保护他们的生命、财产、妻子,令不分离,说爱语、说利益语、行不伤害等,这便是戒的修行;以出离,通过不受取他们的利养、行法布施等,对他们行种种利益,这便是出离的修行;以慧,善于了知利益他们的方便,这便是慧的修行;以精进,对于这些利益行具有不懈的勤奋与推动,这便是精进的修行;以忍辱,忍受他们所生的过失,这便是忍辱的修行;以真实,不欺骗他们,誓愿完成利益他们的行为,言语无有虚妄等,这便是真实的修行;以决意,在利益他们的行为中,即使遭遇不幸也不动摇,这便是决意的修行;以慈,于心意上常思惟他们的利益与安乐,这便是慈的修行;以舍,无论他们带来利益还是损害,内心皆不倾动,这便是舍的修行。如此,当知这便是怜悯一切众生的菩萨,为无量众生所积集的、异于凡夫的无量福德与智慧资粮之修行。对于这些资粮的因缘,应当恭敬地圆满修习。显示巴利原文
Iti sattānaṃ sukhūpakaraṇapariccāgena bahudhā anuggahakaraṇaṃ dānena paṭipatti, sīlena tesaṃ jīvitasāpateyyadārarakkhaabhedapiyahitavacanāvihiṃsādikaraṇāni, nekkhammena nesaṃ āmisapaṭiggahaṇadhammadānādinā anekadhā hitacariyā, paññāya tesaṃ hitakaraṇūpāyakosallaṃ, vīriyena tattha ussāhārambhaasaṃhīrāni, khantiyā tadaparādhasahanaṃ, saccena tesaṃ avañcanatadupakārakiriyāsamādānāvisaṃvādanādi, adhiṭṭhānena tadupakārakaraṇe anatthasampātepi acalanaṃ, mettāya tesaṃ hitasukhānucintanaṃ, upekkhāya tesaṃ upakārāpakāresu vikārānāpattīti evaṃ aparimāṇe satte ārabbha anukampitasabbasattassa bodhisattassa puthujjanehi asādhāraṇo aparimāṇo puññañāṇasambhārūpacayo ettha paṭipattīti veditabbaṃ. Yo cetāsaṃ paccayo vutto, tassa ca sakkaccaṃ sampādanaṃ.
什么是区分?即十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最上波罗蜜,合为三十波罗蜜。对此,有些人说:已发愿的菩萨,其内心倾向与修行皆以利益他人为归趣,他们那些夹杂着黑法的白法,即是波罗蜜;不被黑法所夹杂的白法,即是近波罗蜜;非黑非白的,即是最上波罗蜜。又有些人说:在积累资粮阶段所修的,是波罗蜜;在菩萨阶段达到圆满的,是近波罗蜜;在佛陀阶段于一切方面圆满的,是最上波罗蜜。又或者,在菩萨阶段因致力于利他而称为波罗蜜,因致力于自利而称为近波罗蜜;在佛陀阶段,由于获得了力与无畏,自他二利皆圆满,故称为最上波罗蜜。如此,在初、中、后三个阶段——即发愿、开始、完成之时——形成了这些区分。另有人说:对于以止息嗔害、以悲为本性,已证得生存乐、解脱乐、最上乐者,根据福德积集的差别而有此区分。显示巴利原文
Ko vibhāgoti dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samattiṃsa pāramiyo. Tattha katābhinīhārassa bodhisattassa parahitakaraṇābhininnaāsayappayogassa kaṇhadhammavokiṇṇā sukkadhammā pāramiyo, tehi avokiṇṇā sukkā dhammā upapāramiyo, akaṇhā asukkā paramatthapāramiyoti keci. Samudāgamanakālesu pūriyamānā pāramiyo, bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ puṇṇā upapāramiyo, buddhabhūmiyaṃ sabbākāraparipuṇṇā paramatthapāramiyo. Bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ vā parahitakaraṇato pāramiyo, attahitakaraṇato upapāramiyo, buddhabhūmiyaṃ balavesārajjasamadhigamena ubhayahitaparipūraṇato paramatthapāramiyoti evaṃ ādimajjhapariyosānesu paṇidhānārambhapariniṭṭhānesu tesaṃ vibhāgoti apare. Dosupasamakaruṇāpakatikānaṃ bhavasukhavimuttisukhaparamasukhappattānaṃ puññūpacayabhedato tabbibhāgoti aññe.
另有人说:那些依止惭、愧、念,尊崇出世间法,重视戒、定、慧,已度、正度、当度的随觉者、独觉佛、正自觉者,其波罗蜜、近波罗蜜、最上波罗蜜,即依证得三菩提而有如上所述之差别。又有人说:从内心发愿直至以言语发愿期间所修的资粮,是波罗蜜;从言语发愿直至以身发愿期间所修的,是近波罗蜜;从身发愿开始,是最上波罗蜜。另有人这样说:‘以随喜他人福德而修的资粮,是波罗蜜;以劝令他人修习而修的,是近波罗蜜;以亲自修习而修的,是最上波罗蜜。’又有人说:带来生存乐以及福德与智慧资粮的,是波罗蜜;带来自己涅槃之乐的,是近波罗蜜;带来他人此二乐者,是最上波罗蜜。显示巴利原文
Lajjāsatimānāpassayānaṃ lokuttaradhammādhipatīnaṃ sīlasamādhipaññāgarukānaṃ tāritataritatārayitūnaṃ anubuddhapaccekabuddhasammāsambuddhānaṃ pāramī, upapāramī, paramatthapāramīti bodhittayappattito yathāvuttavibhāgoti keci. Cittapaṇidhito yāva vacīpaṇidhi, tāva pavattā sambhārā pāramiyo, vacīpaṇidhito yāva kāyapaṇidhi, tāva pavattā upapāramiyo, kāyapaṇidhito pabhuti paramatthapāramiyoti apare. Aññe pana ‘‘parapuññānumodanavasena pavattā sambhārā pāramiyo, paresaṃ kārāpanavasena pavattā upapāramiyo, sayaṃ karaṇavasena pavattā paramatthapāramiyo’’ti vadanti. Tathā bhavasukhāvaho puññañāṇasambhāro pāramī, attano nibbānasukhāvaho upapāramī, paresaṃ tadubhayasukhāvaho paramatthapāramīti eke.
另外,布施儿女、财产等资具,即是布施巴拉密;布施自己的肢体,即是布施近波罗蜜;布施自己的生命,即是布施最上波罗蜜。同样地,对于儿女、财产、生命这三种对象,以不违犯戒律的方式,成就三种戒波罗蜜;以断除爱着而出离的方式,成就三种出离巴拉密;以断除对资具、肢体、生命的渴爱,并为众生分辨利害的方式,成就三种智慧巴拉密;为成就上述布施等而精勤,成就三种精进巴拉密;忍耐那些对资具、肢体、生命造成障碍者,成就三种忍耐巴拉密;为了资具、肢体、生命而不放弃真实,成就三种真实巴拉密;布施等波罗蜜唯靠不动摇的决心方能成就,因此在资具等毁坏时内心亦不动摇的决意方式,成就三种决意波罗蜜;对于伤害资具等的众生亦不舍弃慈爱,成就三种慈爱巴拉密;对于前述资具、肢体、生命这三种事,无论对自有利者或损害者,皆以平等、中立的态度对待,成就三种舍巴拉密。如此,应知这些波罗蜜的种种区分。显示巴利原文
Puttadāradhanādiupakaraṇapariccāgo pana dānapāramī, attano aṅgapariccāgo dānaupapāramī, attano jīvitapariccāgo dānaparamatthapāramī. Tathā puttadārādikassa tividhassapi hetu avītikkamanavasena tisso sīlapāramiyo, tesu eva tividhesu vatthūsu ālayaṃ upacchinditvā nikkhamanavasena tisso nekkhammapāramiyo, upakaraṇaṅgajīvitataṇhaṃ samūhanitvā sattānaṃ hitāhitavinicchayakaraṇavasena tisso paññāpāramiyo, yathāvuttabhedānaṃ pariccāgādīnaṃ vāyamanavasena tisso vīriyapāramiyo, upakaraṇaṅgajīvitantarāyakarānaṃ khamanavasena tisso khantipāramiyo, upakaraṇaṅgajīvitahetu saccāpariccāgavasena tisso saccapāramiyo, dānādipāramiyo akuppādhiṭṭhānavaseneva samijjhantīti upakaraṇādivināsepi acalādhiṭṭhānavasena tisso adhiṭṭhānapāramiyo, upakaraṇādiupaghātakesupi sattesu mettāya avijahanavasena tisso mettāpāramiyo, yathāvuttavatthuttayassa upakārāpakāresu sattasaṅkhāresu majjhattatāpaṭilābhavasena tisso upekkhāpāramiyoti evamādinā etāsaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo.
‘摄集’是什么意思?虽然这些波罗蜜从区分上说有三十种,从布施巴拉密等的自性来说有十种,但以布施、戒、忍辱、精进、禅那、智慧这六种自性,也可将它们归为六种。其中,出离巴拉密:当其体现为出家时,被包含在戒波罗蜜中;当其体现为远离五盖时,则被包含在禅那波罗蜜中;而在善法的性质上,它又被这六种波罗蜜共同包含。真实巴拉密仅是戒波罗蜜的一部分:言语真实、远离不真实,属于戒;而智慧真实,则被包含在慧波罗蜜中。慈爱巴拉密唯被禅那波罗蜜所包含;舍巴拉密被禅那与慧波罗蜜所包含;决意波罗蜜则被全部六种波罗蜜所包含。显示巴利原文
Ko saṅgahoti ettha pana yathā etā vibhāgato tiṃsavidhāpi dānapāramīādibhāvato dasavidhā, evaṃ dānasīlakhantivīriyajhānapaññāsabhāvena chabbidhā. Etāsu hi nekkhammapāramī sīlapāramiyā saṅgahitā tassā pabbajjābhāve, nīvaraṇavivekabhāve pana jhānapāramiyā, kusaladhammabhāve chahipi saṅgahitā. Saccapāramī sīlapāramiyā ekadesoyeva vacīsaccaviratisaccapakkhe, ñāṇasaccapakkhe pana paññāpāramiyā saṅgahitā. Mettāpāramī jhānapāramiyā eva, upekkhāpāramī jhānapaññāpāramīhi, adhiṭṭhānapāramī sabbāhipi saṅgahitāti.
而这布施等六种功德是相互关联的,它们有十五对等,能成就十五对等。具体是怎样的呢?由布施与戒这一对,成就作利益与不作不利这一对;由布施与忍辱这一对,成就无贪与无瞋这一对;由布施与精进这一对,成就舍与善巧这一对;由布施与禅那这一对,成就断除贪欲与断除瞋害这一对;由布施与慧这一对,成就圣道与职责这一对。由戒与忍辱这两种,成就修行清净与动机清净这两种;由戒与精进这两种,成就两种修习;由戒与禅那这两种,成就断除恶戒与断除烦恼缠缚这两种;由戒与慧这两种,成就两种布施。由忍辱与精进这一对,成就堪忍与勇猛这一对;由忍辱与禅那这一对,成就断除敌对与随顺这一对;由忍辱与慧这一对,成就通达空性与忍辱这两种;由精进与禅那这两种,成就策励与心不散乱这两种;由精进与慧这两种,成就两种依处;由禅那与慧这两种,成就两种乘。由布施、戒、忍辱这三支,成就断除贪、瞋、痴这三支;由布施、戒、精进这三支,成就获取财物、生命、身体坚实这三支;由布施、戒、禅那这三支,成就三种福德事;由布施、戒、慧这三支,成就财施、无畏施、法施这三种。显示巴利原文
Etesañca dānādīnaṃ channaṃ guṇānaṃ aññamaññaṃ sambandhānaṃ pañcadasayugaḷādīni pañcadasayugaḷādisādhakāni honti – seyyathidaṃ? Dānasīlayugaḷena parahitāhitānaṃ karaṇākaraṇayugaḷasiddhi, dānakhantiyugaḷena alobhādosayugaḷasiddhi, dānavīriyayugaḷena cāgasutayugaḷasiddhi, dānajhānayugaḷena kāmadosappahānayugaḷasiddhi, dānapaññāyugaḷena ariyayānadhurayugaḷasiddhi, sīlakhantidvayena payogāsayasuddhidvayasiddhi, sīlavīriyadvayena bhāvanādvayasiddhi, sīlajhānadvayena dussīlyapariyuṭṭhānappahānadvayasiddhi, sīlapaññādvayena dānadvayasiddhi, khantivīriyayugaḷena khamātejadvayasiddhi, khantijhānayugaḷena virodhānurodhappahānayugaḷasiddhi , khantipaññāyugaḷena suññatākhantipaṭivedhadukasiddhi, vīriyajhānadukena paggāhāvikkhepadukasiddhi, vīriyapaññādukena saraṇadukasiddhi, jhānapaññādukena yānadukasiddhi. Dānasīlakhantittikena lobhadosamohappahānattikasiddhi, dānasīlavīriyattikena bhogajīvitakāyasārādānattikasiddhi, dānasīlajhānattikena puññakiriyavatthuttikasiddhi, dānasīlapaññātikena āmisābhayadhammadānattikasiddhīti evaṃ itarehipi tikehi catukkādīhi ca yathāsambhavaṃ tikāni catukkādīni ca yojetabbāni.
而这六种波罗蜜,应知是以四种决意所统摄的。从摄集一切波罗蜜的角度而言,便有四种决意,即:真实决意、舍弃决意、寂静决意、慧决意。其中,所谓‘决意’,即依此而安住,或安住于此中,或仅指决意本身。而‘真实决意’,既是真实,又是决意;或者说,是真实的决意;或者说,以真实为决意,故称真实决意。其余名词之理亦然。总体而言:对于已发愿成就出世间功德、悲悯一切众生的‘大人’,从遍知的角度,以摄持一切波罗蜜来说,即是真实决意;从舍弃其对立面来说,即是舍弃决意;从依一切波罗蜜的功德而达至寂静来说,即是寂静决意;从善巧运用这些功德利益众生来说,则是慧决意。具体而言:当大士承诺‘我绝不欺诳有需之人,必将布施’时,因不违承诺而行布施,因不违布施而随喜,因舍弃了悭吝等对立面,因在布施物、受者、布施行及应施法穷尽时,止息了贪、嗔、痴与畏惧,且能适时、如法、如理地布施,并以智慧为主导,故布施便成为这四种决意的基础。同样,因守护与受持戒律而不违犯,因舍弃恶显示巴利原文
Evaṃ chabbidhānampi pana imāsaṃ pāramīnaṃ catūhi adhiṭṭhānehi saṅgaho veditabbo. Sabbapāramīnaṃ samūhasaṅgahato hi cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni. Seyyathidaṃ – saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ, paññādhiṭṭhānanti. Tattha adhitiṭṭhati etena, ettha vā adhitiṭṭhati, adhiṭṭhānamattameva vā tanti adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Saccañca taṃ adhiṭṭhānañca, saccassa vā adhiṭṭhānaṃ, saccaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ etassāti vā saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi. Tattha avisesato tāva lokuttaraguṇe katābhinīhārassa anukampitasabbasattassa mahāsattassa pariññānurūpaṃ sabbapāramipariggahato saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ paṭipakkhapariccāgato cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, sabbapāramitāguṇehi upasamato upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ , tehiyeva parahitopāyakosallato paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Visesato pana ‘‘atthikajanaṃ avisaṃvādetvā dassāmī’’ti paṭijānato, paṭiññaṃ avisaṃvādetvā dānato, dānaṃ avisaṃvādetvā anumodanato, macchariyādipaṭipakkhapariccāgato, deyyapaṭiggāhakadānadeyyadhammakkhayesu lobhadosamohabhayavūpasamato, yathārahaṃ yathākālaṃ yathāvidhānañca dānato, paññuttarato ca kusaladhammānaṃ caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ dānaṃ. Tathā saṃvarasamādānassa avītikkamato, dussīlyapariccāgato, duccaritavūpasamato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ sīlaṃ. Yathāpaṭiññaṃ khamanato, parāparādhavikappapariccāgato, kodhapariyuṭṭhānavūpasamato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānā khanti. Paṭiññānurūpaṃ parahitakaraṇato, visādapariccāgato, akusaladhammānaṃ vūpasamato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ vīriyaṃ. Paṭiññānurūpaṃ lokahitānucintanato, nīvaraṇapariccāgato, cittavūpasamato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ jhānaṃ. Yathāpaṭiññaṃ parahitūpāyakosallato, anupāyakiriyāpariccāgato , mohajapariḷāhavūpasamato, sabbaññutāpaṭilābhato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānā paññā.
其中,随顺于所知与所承诺的,是真实决意;舍弃对事欲与烦恼欲执取的,是舍弃决意;止息嗔害与苦的,是寂静决意;随觉与通达的,是慧决意。含摄三种真实、与三嗔心相对立的,是真实决意;含摄三种舍弃、与三嗔心相对立的,是舍弃决意;含摄三种止息、与三嗔心相对立的,是寂静决意;含摄三种智慧、与三嗔心相对立的,是慧决意。被真实决意所含摄的舍弃、寂静、慧决意,因它们不欺诳、随顺承诺的缘故;被舍弃决意所含摄的真实、寂静、慧决意,因它们舍弃对立面,且是诸舍弃之结果的缘故;被寂静决意所含摄的真实、舍弃、慧决意,因它们止息了烦恼的热恼、欲及欲之热恼的缘故;被慧决意所含摄的真实、舍弃、寂静决意,因智慧在前引导、智慧随转的缘故。如是,一切波罗蜜皆由真实所引发,由舍弃所显明,由寂静所增长,由智慧而变得清净。因为真实是它们生起之因,舍弃是执取之因,寂静是增长之因,智慧是清净之因。同样,在初始阶段,是真实决意,因为有真实的承诺;在中间阶段,是舍弃决意,因为已显示巴利原文
Tattha ñeyyapaṭiññānuvidhānehi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, vatthukāmakilesakāmapariccāgehi cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, dosadukkhavūpasamehi upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ, anubodhapaṭivedhehi paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tividhasaccapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tividhacāgapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tividhavūpasamapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tividhañāṇapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Saccādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni cāgūpasamapaññādhiṭṭhānāni avisaṃvādanato , paṭiññānuvidhānato ca. Cāgādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni saccūpasamapaññādhiṭṭhānāni paṭipakkhapariccāgato, sabbapariccāgaphalattā ca. Upasamādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni saccacāgapaññādhiṭṭhānāni kilesapariḷāhūpasamato, kāmūpasamato, kāmapariḷāhūpasamato ca. Paññādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni saccacāgūpasamādhiṭṭhānāni ñāṇapubbaṅgamato, ñāṇānuparivattanato cāti evaṃ sabbāpi pāramiyo saccappabhāvitā cāgaparibyañjitā upasamopabrūhitā paññāparisuddhā. Saccañhi etāsaṃ janakahetu, cāgo pariggāhakahetu, upasamo parivuḍḍhihetu, paññā pārisuddhihetu. Tathā ādimhi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccapaṭiññattā, majjhe cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ katapaṇidhānassa parahitāya attapariccāgato, ante upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ sabbūpasamapariyosānattā, ādimajjhapariyosānesu paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ tasmiṃ sati sambhavato, asati abhāvato, yathāpaṭiññañca bhāvato.
其中,大人以能成办自他利益、能令人生起尊重与敬爱的真实决意与舍弃决意,在居家时,以财物布施摄受他人。同样,以能成办自他利益、能令人生起尊重与敬爱的寂静决意与慧决意,在出家后,以法布施摄受他人。显示巴利原文
Tattha mahāpurisā attahitaparahitakarehi garupiyabhāvakarehi saccacāgādhiṭṭhānehi gihibhūtā āmisadānena pare anuggaṇhanti. Tathā attahitaparahitakarehi garupiyabhāvakarehi upasamapaññādhiṭṭhānehi ca pabbajitabhūtā dhammadānena pare anuggaṇhanti.
其中,在最后一生,菩萨圆满了四种决意。有人说,唯有圆满四种决意者,才投生于最后一生。于彼生中,入胎、住胎、出胎时,以慧决意现行,他具念正知;以真实决意圆满,一出生便向北迈出七步,环视诸方,并以与真实相应的言语,三度作狮子吼:“我是世间之最上者、最胜者……我是世间之最尊者”;以寂静决意现行,他见老人、病人、死人及出家人,作为通达四种法要者,对青春、健康、寿命与成就的骄慢便止息了;以舍弃决意现行,他对庞大的亲属眷属和已到手的转轮王权,毫无留恋地尽数舍弃。显示巴利原文
Tattha antimabhave bodhisattassa caturadhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ. Paripuṇṇacaturadhiṭṭhānassa hi carimakabhavūpapattīti eke. Tatra hi gabbhokkantiṭhitiabhinikkhamanesu paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena sato sampajāno saccādhiṭṭhānapāripūriyā sampatijāto uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gantvā sabbā disā oloketvā saccānuparivattinā vacasā ‘‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭho…pe… seṭṭhohamasmi lokassā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) tikkhattuṃ sīhanādaṃ nadi, upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena jiṇṇāturamatapabbajitadassāvino catudhammapadesakovidassa yobbanārogyajīvitasampattimadānaṃ upasamo, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena mahato ñātiparivaṭṭassa hatthagatassa ca cakkavattirajjassa anapekkhapariccāgoti.
有些人说:在第二处——正等觉时,四种决意才得圆满。因为在彼时,以依所承诺而起的真实决意现行,证悟了四圣谛,由此真实决意圆满;以舍弃决意现行,舍离了一切烦恼与随烦恼,由此舍弃决意圆满;以寂静决意现行,获得了最上寂静的成就,由此寂静决意圆满;以慧决意现行,获得了无碍智,由此慧决意圆满。但这种说法并不成立,因为即使在正等觉时,这些决意也仍然具有究竟的涵义。显示巴利原文
Dutiye ṭhāne abhisambodhiyaṃ caturadhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti keci. Tattha hi yathāpaṭiññaṃ saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ abhisamayo, tato hi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena sabbakilesopakkilesapariccāgo, tato hi cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena paramūpasamasampatti, tato hi upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena anāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābho, tato hi paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti, taṃ asiddhaṃ abhisambodhiyāpi paramatthabhāvato.
还有人说:在第三处——转法轮时,四种决意才得圆满。因为在彼时,以真实决意现行,以十二种方式开示圣谛,故真实决意圆满;以舍弃决意现行,作正法大布施,故舍弃决意圆满;以寂静决意现行,自身寂静且令他人寂静,故寂静决意圆满;以慧决意现行,了知所应调伏众生的意乐等,故慧决意圆满。但这种说法也不成立,因为佛陀的事业尚未完成。显示巴利原文
Tatiye ṭhāne dhammacakkappavattane (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) caturadhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti aññe. Tattha hi saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa dvādasahi ākārehi ariyasaccadesanāya saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saddhammamahāyāgakaraṇena cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa sayaṃ upasantassa paresaṃ upasamanena upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa vineyyānaṃ āsayādiparijānanena paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti, tadapi asiddhaṃ apariyositattā buddhakiccassa.
另有一说:在第四处——般涅槃时,四种决意方为圆满。因为在般涅槃中,他证得了究竟真实,故真实决意圆满;因舍离一切依着,故舍弃决意圆满;因一切行止息,故寂静决意圆满;因智慧的作用臻于究竟,故慧决意圆满。显示巴利原文
Catutthe ṭhāne parinibbāne caturadhiṭṭhānaparipuṇṇanti apare. Tatra hi parinibbutattā paramatthasaccasampattiyā saccādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggena cāgādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, sabbasaṅkhārūpasamena upasamādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, paññāpayojanapariniṭṭhānena paññādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇanti.
于此,应这样理解:对于大人,在他特别属于慈的领域——诞生之时,以真实决意的现行,真实决意的圆满得以显现;在他特别属于悲的领域——正等觉之时,以慧决意的现行,慧决意的圆满得以显现;在他特别属于喜的领域——转法轮之时,以舍弃决意的现行,舍弃决意的圆满得以显现;在他特别属于舍的领域——般涅槃之时,以寂静决意的现行,寂静决意的圆满得以显现。显示巴利原文
Tatra mahāpurisassa visesena mettākhette abhijātiyaṃ saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saccādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattaṃ, visesena karuṇākhette abhisambodhiyaṃ paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa paññādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattaṃ, visesena muditākhette dhammacakkappavattane (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa cāgādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattaṃ, visesena upekkhākhette parinibbāne upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa upasamādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
对此,由真实决意现行而生者,应通过与他共住来了解其戒;由舍弃决意现行而生者,应通过与他交往来了解其清净;由寂静决意现行而生者,应通过危难来了解其坚固;由慧决意现行而生者,应通过法义讨论来了解其智慧。如此,便可了知戒清净、活命清净、心清净与见清净。显示巴利原文
Tatrapi saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saṃvāsena sīlaṃ veditabbaṃ, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saṃvohārena soceyyaṃ veditabbaṃ, upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa āpadāsu thāmo veditabbo, paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa sākacchāya paññā veditabbā. Evaṃ sīlājīvacittadiṭṭhivisuddhiyo veditabbā.
同样地,依真实决意之现行,他不因嗔而行非道,因为他不欺诳;依舍弃决意之现行,他不因贪而行非道,因为他无耽着;依寂静决意之现行,他不因怖而行非道,因为他无过咎;依慧决意之现行,他不因痴而行非道,因为他如实觉了。显示巴利原文
Tathā saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena dosā agatiṃ na gacchati avisaṃvādanato, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena lobhā agatiṃ na gacchati anabhisaṅgato, upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena bhayā agatiṃ na gacchati anaparādhato, paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena mohā agatiṃ na gacchati yathābhūtāvabodhato.
同样地,依第一种决意,他以无嗔而能忍;依第二种决意,他以无贪而能受用;依第三种决意,他以无怖而能回避;依第四种决意,他以不痴而能断除。应知:由第一种决意,获得出离乐;由其余决意,获得远离乐、寂静乐、正觉乐。同样地,藉由这四种决意,依次获得远离生喜乐、定生喜乐、无喜身乐、念清净及舍乐。如此,当知这四种决意具有众多功德相随,摄受了一切波罗蜜的集合。又,如同四种决意能摄受一切波罗蜜,同样,也应知由悲与慧而摄受。因为一切菩提资粮皆由悲与慧所摄受。由悲与慧所护持的布施等功德,便成为大菩提资粮,最终以成就佛性为究竟。如此,应知其摄受。显示巴利原文
Tathā paṭhamena aduṭṭho adhivāseti, dutiyena aluddho paṭisevati, tatiyena abhīto parivajjeti, catutthena asammūḷho vinodeti. Paṭhamena nekkhammasukhappatti, itarehi pavivekaupasamasambodhisukhappattiyo hontīti daṭṭhabbā. Tathā vivekajapītisukhasamādhijapītisukhaappītijakāyasukhasatipārisuddhijaupekkhāsukhappattiyo etehi catūhi yathākkamaṃ hontīti. Evamanekaguṇānubandhehi catūhi adhiṭṭhānehi sabbapāramisamūhasaṅgaho veditabbo. Yathā ca catūhi adhiṭṭhānehi sabbapāramisaṅgaho, evaṃ karuṇāpaññāhipīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbopi hi bodhisambhāro karuṇāpaññāhi saṅgahito. Karuṇāpaññāpariggahitā hi dānādiguṇā mahābodhisambhārā bhavanti buddhattasiddhipariyosānāti evametāsaṃ saṅgaho veditabbo.
成就的方法是什么呢?对于一切福德等资粮,为了正自觉,以无余累积、无缺实践,以恭敬尊重,以不间断精勤,以及长期坚持、中间不半途而废——这四种支分的精勤,便是这些资粮的成就方法。另外,简要地说,对于已发愿者,灭尽对自己的爱,并增长对他人的爱,是这些资粮的成就方法。因为,为证正自觉而发大誓愿的菩萨,如实了知一切法而不染着,对自己的爱便彻底灭尽;而当他以大悲心相应,视一切众生如爱子时,对众生的慈爱便不断增长。由此,这位大士适时恰当地去除他人相续中的贪、嗔、痴,使悭吝等与菩提资粮对立的敌法远离,并以布施、爱语、利行、同事四种摄事,依四种依止,彻底摄受众生,引导他们进入三乘,并令其成熟。因为,大士的大智慧和大悲心,由布施所庄严;布施由爱语所庄严;爱语由利行所庄严;利行由同事所庄严和摄受。因为菩萨于一切生存状态、一切处所,皆与一切众生同甘共苦,故成就同事。当他成佛以后,仍以这些摄事——由四种依止所圆满、所增进——对众生作最极的摄受。显示巴利原文
Ko sampādanūpāyoti sakalassāpi puññādisambhārassa sammāsambodhiṃ, uddissa anavasesasambharaṇaṃ avekallakāritāyogena, tattha ca sakkaccakāritā ādarabahumānayogena, sātaccakāritā nirantarapayogena, cirakālādiyogo ca antarā avosānāpajjanenāti caturaṅgayogo etāsaṃ sampādanūpāyo. Apica samāsato katābhinīhārassa attani sinehassa pariyādānaṃ, paresu ca sinehassa parivaḍḍhanaṃ etāsaṃ sampādanūpāyo. Sammāsambodhisamadhigamāya hi katamahāpaṇidhānassa mahāsattassa yāthāvato parijānanena sabbesu dhammesu anupalittassa attani sineho parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ gacchati, mahākaruṇāsamāyogavasena pana piye putte viya sabbasatte sampassamānassa tesu mettāsineho parivaḍḍhati. Tato ca taṃtadāvatthānurūpamattaparasantānesu lobhadosamohavigamena vidūrīkatamacchariyādibodhisambhārapaṭipakkho mahāpuriso dānapiyavacanaatthacariyāsamānattatāsaṅkhātehi catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi (dī. ni. 3.210; a. ni. 4.32) caturadhiṭṭhānānugatehi accantaṃ janassa saṅgahakaraṇavasena upari yānattaye avatāraṇaṃ paripācanañca karoti. Mahāsattānañhi mahāpaññā mahākaruṇā ca dānena alaṅkatā; dānaṃ piyavacanena; piyavacanaṃ atthacariyāya; atthacariyā samānattatāya alaṅkatā saṅgahitā ca. Sabbabhūtattabhūtassa hi bodhisattassa sabbattha samānasukhadukkhatāya samānattatāsiddhi. Buddhabhūto pana teheva saṅgahavatthūhi caturadhiṭṭhānaparipūritābhibuddhehi janassa accantikasaṅgahakaraṇena abhivinayanaṃ karoti. Dānañhi sammāsambuddhānaṃ cāgādhiṭṭhānena paripūritābhibuddhaṃ ; piyavacanaṃ saccādhiṭṭhānena; atthacariyā paññādhiṭṭhānena; samānattatā upasamādhiṭṭhānena paripūritābhibuddhā. Tathāgatānañhi sabbasāvakapaccekabuddhehi samānattatā parinibbāne. Tatra hi tesaṃ avisesato ekībhāvo. Tenevāha ‘‘natthi vimuttiyā nānatta’’nti.
于此有偈颂言:显示巴利原文
Honti cettha –
真实者,乐舍者,寂静者,具慧者,悲悯者,
已具足一切资粮者,何事不能成就?
大悲之导师,利益寻求者,亦为中舍者,
于一切处无所期求,啊,胜者何其殊胜!
于一切法离染,于诸众生中舍,
时时刻刻都致力于众生的利益,啊!这胜者,真是殊胜啊!
于一切时中,为利益一切众生、安乐一切众生,
精勤不懈,不厌疲倦,啊!这胜者,真是殊胜啊!——《行藏》注疏·杂说320
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sacco cāgī upasanto, paññavā anukampako, Sambhatasabbasambhāro, kaṃ nāmatthaṃ na sādhaye. Mahākāruṇiko satthā, hitesī ca upekkhako, Nirapekkho ca sabbattha, aho acchariyo jino. Viratto sabbadhammesu, sattesu ca upekkhako, Sadā sattahite yutto, aho acchariyo jino. Sabbadā sabbasattānaṃ, hitāya ca sukhāya ca, Uyyutto akilāsū ca, aho acchariyo jino’’ti. (cariyā. aṭṭha. 320 pakiṇṇakakathā);
需要多长时间才能成就呢?依下等界限而言,是四不可数劫加上十万劫;依中等界限而言,是八不可数劫加上十万劫;依上等界限而言,是十六不可数劫加上十万劫。这些差别,应依次理解为慧增上、信增上、精进增上所致。因为慧增上者,信力较弱而智慧锋利;信增上者,智慧中等;精进增上者,智慧较为薄弱。注疏中说:‘应以智慧之力证得正自觉。’然而,他们表示,由于令解脱成熟的诸法有锐利、中等、微弱的差别,这三种分类也是恰当的。因为在发愿那一刹那,菩萨有三种类型:略说即知者、广说方知者和可引导者。其中,略说即知者在正自觉者面前听闻一首四句偈,当第三句尚未结束时,便已具足能证得六神通与无碍解俱的阿罗汉果的亲依止缘;第二类者在导师面前听闻一首四句偈,当第四句尚未结束时,便已具足能证得六神通俱的阿罗汉果的亲依止缘;第三类者在世尊面前听闻一首四句偈,直到整首偈颂全部结束,方才具足能证得六神通俱的阿罗汉果的亲依止缘。这三类菩萨,在已发愿、得到授记之后,即按照如前所述的时间差别,依次圆显示巴利原文
Kittakena kālena sampādananti heṭṭhimena tāva paricchedena cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca, majjhimena aṭṭhāsaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca, uparimena soḷasāsaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca, ete ca bhedā yathākkamaṃ paññādhikasaddhādhikavīriyādhikavasena ñātabbā. Paññādhikānañhi saddhā mandā hoti, paññā tikkhā. Saddhādhikānaṃ paññā majjhimā hoti, vīriyādhikānaṃ paññā mandā. Paññānubhāvena ca sammāsambodhi abhigantabbāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Avisesena pana vimuttiparipācanīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ tikkhamajjhimamudubhāvena tayopete bhedā yuttāti vadanti. Tividhā hi bodhisattā abhinīhārakkhaṇe bhavanti ugghaṭitaññūvipañcitaññūneyyabhedena. Tesu ugghaṭitaññū sammāsambuddhassa sammukhā catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ suṇanto tatiyapade apariyositeyeva chaabhiññāhi saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pattuṃ samatthupanissayo hoti, dutiyo satthu sammukhā catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ suṇanto apariyositeyeva catutthapade chahi abhiññāhi arahattaṃ pattuṃ samatthupanissayo hoti, itaro bhagavato sammukhā catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā pariyositāya gāthāya chahi abhiññāhi arahattaṃ pattuṃ samatthupanissayo bhavati. Tayopete vinā kālabhedena katābhinīhāraladdhabyākaraṇā pāramiyo pūrentā yathākkamaṃ yathāvuttabhedena kālena sammāsambodhiṃ pāpuṇanti. Tesu tesu pana kālabhedesu aparipuṇṇesu te te mahāsattā divase divase vessantaradānasadisaṃ dānaṃ dentāpi tadanurūpe sīlādisabbapāramidhamme ācinantāpi antarā buddhā bhavissantīti akāraṇametaṃ. Kasmā? Ñāṇassa aparipaccanato. Paricchinnakālanipphāditaṃ viya hi sassaṃ paricchinnakāle parinipphāditā sammāsambodhi. Tadantarā pana sabbussāhena vāyamantenāpi na sakkā pāpuṇitunti pāramipāripūrī yathāvuttakālavisesaṃ vinā na sampajjatīti veditabbaṃ.
有何利益?即那些已发愿的菩萨们——显示巴利原文
Ko ānisaṃsoti ye te katābhinīhārānaṃ bodhisattānaṃ –
如此具足一切支分的人,已决定趣向菩提;
纵使长劫流转于轮回之中,历经百千万亿劫,
他们不生于无间地狱,也不生于世界中间地狱——正如所说
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Evaṃ sabbaṅgasampannā, bodhiyā niyatā narā; Saṃsaraṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ, kappakoṭisatehipi; Avīcimhi nuppajjanti, tathā lokantaresu cā’’ti. ādinā (abhi. aṭṭha. 1.nidānakathā; apa. aṭṭha. 1.dūrenidānakathā; jā. aṭṭha. 1.dūrenidānakathā; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 27.dūrenidānakathā; cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā) –
如此阐明了不入十八种不应之处的功德类别。又如“阿难,菩萨正念正知,从兜率天身没而入母胎”等(《中部·三·199》)所说的十六种稀有未曾有法的类别;以及“寒冷消退,酷热止息”等(《佛种姓·83》)所说;以及“舍利弗,当菩萨诞生时,此十千世界震动、极震动、遍震动”等所说的三十二种前兆的类别;乃至“菩萨所愿成就,于业等处得自在”等在《本生》《佛种姓》等各处所示的功德类别——这一切都应了知为这些波罗蜜的功德。同样,如所示的差别,无贪、无瞋等功德的配对等,也应了知。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhārasa abhabbaṭṭhānānupagamanappakārā ānisaṃsā saṃvaṇṇitā. Ye ca ‘‘sato sampajāno ānanda bodhisatto tusitākāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṃ okkamī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.199) soḷasa acchariyabbhutadhammappakārā, ye ca ‘‘sītaṃ byapagataṃ hoti, uṇhañca upasammatī’’tiādinā (bu. vaṃ. 83), ‘‘jāyamāne kho sāriputta bodhisatte ayaṃ dasasahassilokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhatī’’tiādinā ca dvattiṃsa pubbanimittappakārā, ye vā panaññepi ‘‘bodhisattānaṃ adhippāyasamijjhanaṃ kammādīsu vasībhāvo’’ti evamādayo tattha tattha jātakabuddhavaṃsādīsu dassitappakārā ānisaṃsā, te sabbepi etāsaṃ ānisaṃsā, tathā yathānidassitabhedā alobhādosādiguṇayugaḷādayo cāti veditabbā.
若问“什么果?”——简而言之,这些波罗蜜的果即是正自觉者的状态;详而言之,则以三十二大人相(《长部》2.24等;3.168等;《中部》2.385)、八十随形好、身光一寻等无量功德聚所庄严的色身成就为依止,以及以十力、四无畏、六不共智、十八不共佛法(《长部注》3.305;《根本疏·经分别注释》2)等为首、由数百千无量功德聚所辉耀的法身荣光。然而,佛陀的功德,即便正自觉者历经多劫以言语宣说,亦无法穷尽;这便是它们的果。此为略说,广解当依《佛种姓》《行藏》《本生》《大譬喻经》等了知。显示巴利原文
Kiṃphalanti samāsato tāva sammāsambuddhabhāvo etāsaṃ phalaṃ, vitthārato pana dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇa- (dī. ni. 2.24 ādayo; 3.168 ādayo; ma. ni. 2.385) asītianubyañjanabyāmappabhādianekaguṇagaṇasamujjalarūpakāyasampattiadhiṭṭhānā dasabalacatuvesārajjachaasādhāraṇañāṇaaṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhamma- (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305; mūlaṭī. 2.suttantabhājanīyavaṇṇanā) -pabhutianekasatasahassaguṇasamudayopasobhinī dhammakāyasirī, yāvatā pana buddhaguṇā ye anekehipi kappehi sammāsambuddhenāpi vācāya pariyosāpetuṃ na sakkā, idaṃ etāsaṃ phalanti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana buddhavaṃsacariyāpiṭakajātakamahāpadānasuttādīnaṃ vasena veditabbo.
“圆满三十波罗蜜”,是就前述行道与前述波罗蜜分类的圆满状态而说。虽有许多大舍离属于布施巴拉密,但为显示其特别殊胜的状态以及极难行的状态,故别立“五种大舍离”;也正因如此,在肢节等舍离之外,别取眼目舍离;虽与所执取之物的舍离总相相同,但在财富、国位等舍离之外,也另取妻儿舍离。连同称为“去还业处”的前行道,成就神通、等至的前分加行,称为前行。在布施等中成就特别殊胜的行道,称为前业行,收录于《行藏》。或者有说:发愿是前行,布施等行道是前业行;或者以身远离而独住是前业行。为显示布施等、少欲等,以及轮回和涅槃中的过患与功德,令众生于三菩提中建立、成熟而说的法,即是说法。为了亲属的利益而行,是亲族利行,这也是基于悲悯而行。“等”字包含世间利行等。依业自性智、依无过失的业处明处等之熟悉、依蕴处界等之熟悉、依审察三相,此智行即是慧行,其本质即是般若波罗蜜,但为显示智资粮而别立。“边际”(koṭi)指究竟、最上。修习、广修四念住等,是为连结。其中,“修习”指令生起,“广修”指令……显示巴利原文
Yathāvuttāya paṭipadāya yathāvuttavibhāgānaṃ pāramīnaṃ pūritabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā’’ti. Satipi mahāpariccāgānaṃ dānapāramibhāve pariccāgavisesabhāvadassanatthañceva sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca ‘‘pañca mahāpariccāge’’ti visuṃ gahaṇaṃ, tatoyeva ca aṅgapariccāgato visuṃ nayanapariccāgaggahaṇaṃ, pariggahapariccāgabhāvasāmaññepi dhanarajjapariccāgato puttadārapariccāgaggahaṇañca kataṃ. Gatapaccāgatikavattasaṅkhātāya pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya saddhiṃ abhiññāsamāpattinipphādanaṃ pubbayogo. Dānādīsuyeva sātisayapaṭipattinipphādanaṃ pubbacariyā, yā cariyāpiṭakasaṅgahitā. Abhinīhāro pubbayogo, dānādipaṭipatti, kāyavivekavasena ekacariyā vā pubbacariyāti keci. Dānādīnañceva appicchatādīnañca saṃsāranibbānesu ādīnavānisaṃsādīnañca vibhāvanavasena sattānaṃ bodhittaye patiṭṭhāpanaparipācanavasena pavattā kathā dhammakkhānaṃ. Ñātīnaṃ atthacariyā ñātatthacariyā, sāpi karuṇāyanavaseneva. Ādi-saddena lokatthacariyādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Kammassakatāñāṇavasena, anavajjakammāyatanavijjāṭṭhānaparicayavasena, khandhāyatanādiparicayavasena, lakkhaṇattayatīraṇavasena ca ñāṇacāro buddhicariyā, sā pana atthato paññāpāramīyeva, ñāṇasambhāradassanatthaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Koṭinti pariyanto, ukkaṃsoti attho. Cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāvetvā brūhetvāti sambandho. Tattha bhāvetvāti uppādetvā. Brūhetvāti vaḍḍhetvā. Satipaṭṭhānādiggahaṇena āgamanapaṭipadaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dasseti, vipassanāsahagatā eva vā satipaṭṭhānādayo daṭṭhabbā. Ettha ca ‘‘yena abhinīhārenā’’tiādinā āgamanapaṭipadāya ādiṃ dasseti, ‘‘dānapāramī’’tiādinā majjhaṃ, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhāne’’tiādinā pariyosānanti veditabbaṃ.
“刚诞生”指从手中脱出、须臾即生,并非刚从母胎出来。因为刚出母胎的大士,最初由梵天以金网承接;从他们手中,四大天王以羚羊皮席承接;从他们手中,人们以细布垫承接;脱离人手立于地上,正如世尊在《大本经》开示中所说。“白伞”指天界的白伞盖。“被持”指被擎举。这里应知,提到伞盖,也就提到了宝剑等五种王权器杖。因为那时,宝剑、羽扇、拂子、白伞盖、头巾同时与伞盖一起出现。当时只显现伞盖等物品,却不见持伞盖的人。“一切方”指十方。这遍观一切方,并非在踏行七步之后才发生。因为大士从人们手中脱出后,先观东方,那里的天人们以香花等供养,说:“大人,此处没有任何人与你相类,何况更殊胜的呢?”这样遍观了四方、四维、下方、上方等一切方,不见有任何与自己相类的人,于是说“这是北方”,便朝彼方踏行七步。“āsabha”意为最高。“agga”意为最第一。“jeṭṭho seṭṭho”也是同义。他宣告:“这是最后一生,再不会有后有。”即于今生应证的阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
Sampatijātoti hatthato muccitvā muhuttajāto, na mātukucchito nikkhantamatto. Nikkhantamattañhi mahāsattaṃ paṭhamaṃ brahmāno suvaṇṇajālena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tesaṃ hatthato cattāro mahārājāno ajinappaveṇiyā, tesaṃ hatthato manussā dukūlacumbaṭakena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, manussānaṃ hatthato muñcitvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitoti yathāha bhagavā mahāpadānadesanāyaṃ. Setamhi chatteti dibbasetacchatte. Anuhīramāneti dhāriyamāne. Ettha ca chattaggahaṇeneva khaggādīni pañca kakudhabhaṇḍānipi (jā. 2.19.72) vuttānevāti veditabbaṃ. Khaggatālavaṇṭamorahatthakavāḷabījanīuṇhīsapaṭṭāpi hi chattena saha tadā upaṭṭhitā ahesuṃ. Chattādīniyeva ca tadā paññāyiṃsu, na chattādigāhakā. Sabbā ca disāti dasapi disā. Nayidaṃ sabbadisāvilokanaṃ sattapadavītihāruttarakālaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahāsatto hi manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā puratthimadisaṃ olokesi, tattha devamanussā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā ‘‘mahāpurisa idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Evaṃ catasso disā, catasso anudisā, heṭṭhā, uparīti sabbā disā anuviloketvā sabbattha attanā sadisaṃ adisvā ‘‘ayaṃ uttarā disā’’ti tattha sattapadavītihārena agamāsi. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ. Aggoti sabbapaṭhamo. Jeṭṭho seṭṭhoti ca tasseva vevacanaṃ. Ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavoti imasmiṃ attabhāve pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ byākāsi.
以简略方式所说的“作为许多殊胜证得的先行征兆”之义,现在由“因为那种……”等文详细显示。此处,“这”是指——显示巴利原文
‘‘Anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvenā’’ti saṅkhittena vuttamatthaṃ ‘‘yañhī’’tiādinā vitthārato dasseti. Tattha etthāti –
具无数枝条与千辐轮相,
众天神于虚空中执持伞盖;
金柄拂尘飘舞闪动。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Anekasākhañca sahassamaṇḍalaṃ, Chattaṃ marū dhārayumantalikkhe; Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā, Na dissare cāmarachattagāhakā’’ti. (su. ni. 693);
对此偈颂,一切知智依于一切处无碍而行,故称无障智;因此说“证得一切知无障智”。“同然,此世尊亦已达……以为前兆”——以此指出,于殊胜降生中,依于法性自然现起的诸般殊胜,乃一切菩萨所共具。因为他们正是波罗蜜的果报。显示巴利原文
Imissā gāthāya. Sabbaññutaññāṇameva sabbattha appaṭihatacāratāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti āha ‘‘sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassā’’ti. ‘‘Tathā ayaṃ bhagavāpi gato…pe… pubbanimittabhāvenā’’ti etena abhijātiyaṃ dhammatāvasena uppajjanavisesā sabbabodhisattānaṃ sādhāraṇāti dasseti. Pāramitānissandā hi teti.
“Vikkamī”指行进。“Marū”指众天神。“Samā”指因遍观时的平等性而等同、相似。因为大人在观察一方时,其余诸方也同样遍观,在任何地方的观察都无障碍。或者,“Samā”意指适合观察。因为那时,菩萨在诸方所见的,并非丑陋、恐怖、不平等的、不适合观察之相。显示巴利原文
Vikkamīti agamāsi. Marūti devā. Samāti vilokanasamatāya samā sadisiyo. Mahāpuriso hi yathā ekaṃ disaṃ vilokesi, evaṃ sesā disāpi, na katthaci vilokane vibandho tassa ahosīti. Samāti vā viloketuṃ yuttāti attho. Na hi tadā bodhisattassa virūpabībhacchavisamarūpāni viloketuṃ ayuttāni disāsu upaṭṭhahantīti.
“如此,如来”——先以身体行走的意义,用“gata”这个词来解释“如来”;现在再以智慧行走的意义来显示它,因此说“或者”等。其中,“以出离”指以无贪为主的善心生起。在这里,善法本身即是出离,并非指出家之类,也有人说是“以初禅”。“舍断”即断除。“已达”指已经证得、向上修行达到更殊胜的境界。或者,“舍断”是以断除为原因,或具有断除的特征,因为“pahāya”一词兼有原因和特征的含义。此处所说的“行”,也就是通达或修行之道,是指“以舍断爱欲等为原因而到达”,同时也以舍断爱欲等为其标志。对“破”等词,也应同样理解。“以无嗔”即通过慈爱。“以光明想”指通过令所缘鲜明的作意而生起的光明想。“以无散乱”即通过定。“以法决定”指通过对善等诸法的如实确定,或者说“通过对有因缘的名色的确定”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ tathāgato’’ti kāyagamanaṭṭhena gata-saddena tathāgata-saddaṃ niddisitvā idāni ñāṇagamanaṭṭhena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha nekkhammenāti alobhappadhānena kusalacittuppādena. Kusalā hi dhammā idha nekkhammaṃ, na pabbajjādayo, ‘‘paṭhamajjhānenā’’ti ca vadanti. Pahāyāti pajahitvā. Gato adhigato, paṭipanno uttarivisesanti attho. Pahāyāti vā pahānahetu, pahānalakkhaṇaṃ vā. Hetulakkhaṇattho hi ayaṃ pahāya-saddo. ‘‘Kāmacchandādippahānahetukaṃ gato’’ti hettha vuttaṃ gamanaṃ avabodho, paṭipatti eva vā. Kāmacchandādippahānena ca taṃ lakkhīyati. Esa nayo ‘‘padāletvā’’tiādīsupi. Abyāpādenāti mettāya. Ālokasaññāyāti vibhūtaṃ katvā manasikaraṇena upaṭṭhitaālokasañjānanena . Avikkhepenāti samādhinā. Dhammavavatthānenāti kusalādidhammānaṃ yāthāvavinicchayena, ‘‘sappaccayanāmarūpavavatthānenā’’tipi vadanti.
如此,通过断除欲贪等盖——如《分别论》第508句所说的“在世中断除贪求”等——显示了世尊在初禅前行道中的如来状态。现在,为了借助方便,进一步通过八等至和十八种大观来显示这一状态,所以说“以智”等。因为正确把握名色并超越了疑惑的人,由于去除了成为障碍的痴,便安住于遍知智中,无常想等便能成就。同样地,在禅那等至中,以欢喜为特征的喜悦,当其中对禅那的不喜被一一除遣时,便证得禅那等;因此,对于等至与观来说,除去不喜、破除无明等即是方便。然而,就解说次第而言,应理解为:为了显示与盖本质相同的无明也被包摄在下分盖之中。因为盖如同门闩,是进入等至住的障碍,所以说“打开了盖之门闩”。正如“夜里寻思伺察后,白天从事诸业”这句话所说,寻与伺犹如冒烟,所以说“寻与伺之烟”。虽然在初禅近行处才断除苦,在第四禅近行处才断除乐,但为了说明殊胜的断除,故说“以第四禅断除了苦和乐”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kāmacchandādinīvaraṇappahānena ‘‘abhijjhaṃ loke pahāyā’’tiādinā (vibha. 508) vuttāya paṭhamajjhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya bhagavato tathāgatabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni saha upāyena aṭṭhahi samāpattīhi, aṭṭhārasahi ca mahāvipassanāhi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ñāṇenā’’tiādimāha. Nāmarūpapariggahakaṅkhāvitaraṇānañhi vibandhabhūtassa mohassa dūrīkaraṇena ñātapariññāyaṃ ṭhitassa aniccasaññādayo sijjhanti, tathā jhānasamāpattīsu abhiratinimittena pāmojjena, tattha anabhiratiyā vinoditāya jhānādi samadhigamoti samāpattivipassanānaṃ arativinodanaavijjāpadālanādi upāyo, uppaṭipāṭiniddeso pana nīvaraṇasabhāvāya avijjāya heṭṭhā nīvaraṇesupi saṅgahadassanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Samāpattivihārappavesavibandhanena nīvaraṇāni kavāṭasadisānīti āha ‘‘nīvaraṇakavāṭaṃ ugghāṭetvā’’ti. ‘‘Rattiṃ vitakketvā vicāretvā divā kammante payojetī’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne viya vitakkavicārā dhūmāyanāti adhippetāti āha ‘‘vitakkavicāradhūma’’nti. Kiñcāpi paṭhamajjhānūpacāreyeva ca dukkhaṃ, catutthajjhānūpacāreyeva sukhaṃ pahīyati, atisayappahānaṃ pana sandhāyāha ‘‘catutthajjhānena sukhadukkhaṃ pahāyā’’ti.
“无常”即是观无常,名为“无常随观”——这是缘于执取三界诸法无常性而生起的观之名。“常想”,是指对于有为法生起的“这些是常、恒的”邪想,这里以想为首,也包含了邪见与心,应如此了知。此理亦适用于此后诸门。“厌离随观”,是以对诸行产生厌离的方式而转起的随观。“喜”,是与喜俱起的渴爱。“离贪随观”,同样是以离染的方式转起的随观。“寂灭随观”,是对诸行寂灭的随观;或者这样随观:“那些诸行确实会灭尽,未来不会由于集起而再生”,这就是寂灭随观。因此说“以寂灭而随观寂灭,而不集起”,因为此时欲求解脱的意乐已极为强盛。“舍遣随观”,是以舍遣的方式转起的随观,因为这是依审察而安住。“执取”,是以常等想而执取。“密集之想”,是根据相续、聚集、作用及所缘的密集,而执取为单一整体的想。“积集”,即是造作。“变易”,是殊胜分位差异的转起。“恒常想”,是执取为坚实、牢固的想。“相”,是指依聚集等密集,以及依作用的界限,而将诸行执取为有形相。“依止”,是贪等依止,其本质是依于渴爱而倾向于诸行。显示巴利原文
Aniccassa, aniccanti anupassanā aniccānupassanā, tebhūmakadhammānaṃ aniccataṃ gahetvā pavattāya vipassanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Niccasaññanti saṅkhatadhamme ‘‘niccā, sassatā’’ti evaṃ pavattamicchāsaññaṃ , saññāsīsena diṭṭhicittānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Nibbidānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu nibbijjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nandinti sappītikataṇhaṃ. Tathā virāgānupassanāyāti virajjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nirodhānupassanāyāti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhassa anupassanāya. ‘‘Te saṅkhārā nirujjhantiyeva, āyatiṃ samudayavasena na uppajjantī’’ti evaṃ vā anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Tenevāha ‘‘nirodhānupassanāya nirodheti, no samudetī’’ti. Muñcitukamyatā hi ayaṃ balappattāti. Paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā hi ayaṃ. Ādānanti niccādivasena gahaṇaṃ. Santatisamūhakiccārammaṇānaṃ vasena ekattaggahaṇaṃ ghanasaññā. Āyūhanaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ. Avatthāvisesāpatti vipariṇāmo. Dhuvasaññanti thirabhāvaggahaṇaṃ. Nimittanti samūhādighanavasena, sakiccaparicchedatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ saviggahaggahaṇaṃ. Paṇidhinti rāgādipaṇidhiṃ, sā panatthato taṇhānaṃ vasena saṅkhāresu ninnatā.
“执取”,即执取我见。以无常、苦等简择一切法,名为“增上慧法观”。“执取坚实之执取”,是在非坚实中执取为坚实的颠倒。“认为世界由自在天所造等而生起”的执取,是“痴迷执取”。然而也有人认为:“例如‘过去世我是否存在’等生起的疑惑,即是痴迷执取”。于诸行中执取它们为避难所、救护所,是“阿赖耶执取”。依据“乐阿赖耶,欣阿赖耶”的说法,阿赖耶即是渴爱,正是这个渴爱以对眼等、色等执取的方式转起,因此有些人称之为“阿赖耶执取”。“审察随观”,是像“如是诸行被舍遣”这般转起的智慧。“还灭随观”,因为舍离了流转,还灭即是涅槃,而于彼作所缘转起随观,是种姓地的还灭随观。“系缚执取”,是以结缚的方式执取诸行。“与见俱”,即与见同生、同存、同断、同一处。所谓“粗”,是相对于上分道所断的烦恼而言;否则,相对于第二道所断来说,那些可见而应断的也可称为粗。“与细俱行”,即是微细,这是相对于下分道所断而言。“一切烦恼”,指其余一切烦恼,因为初道等已断的烦恼,不再被断除。显示巴利原文
Abhinivesanti attānudiṭṭhiṃ. Aniccadukkhādivasena sabbadhammatīraṇaṃ adhipaññādhammavipassanā. Sārādānābhinivesanti asāre sāraggahaṇavipallāsaṃ. ‘‘Issarakuttādivasena loko samuppanno’’ti abhiniveso sammohābhiniveso. Keci pana ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhānantiādinā pavattasaṃsayāpatti sammohābhiniveso’’ti vadanti. Saṅkhāresu leṇatāṇabhāvaggahaṇaṃ ālayābhiniveso. ‘‘Ālayaratā ālayasamuditā’’ti vacanato ālayo taṇhā, sāyeva cakkhādīsu rūpādīsu ca abhinivisanavasena pavattiyā ālayābhinivesoti keci. ‘‘Evaṃvidhā saṅkhārā paṭinissajjīyantī’’ti pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanā. Vaṭṭato vigatattā vivaṭṭaṃ nibbānaṃ, tattha ārammaṇakaraṇasaṅkhātena anupassanena pavattiyā vivaṭṭānupassanā gotrabhu. Saṃyogābhinivesanti saṃyujjanavasena saṅkhāresu abhinivisanaṃ. Diṭṭhekaṭṭheti diṭṭhiyā sahajātekaṭṭhe, pahānekaṭṭhe ca. ‘‘Oḷārike’’ti uparimaggavajjhe kilese apekkhitvā vuttaṃ, aññathā dassanapahātabbāpi dutiyamaggavajjhehi oḷārikāti. Aṇusahagateti aṇubhūte, idaṃ heṭṭhimamaggavajjhe apekkhitvā vuttaṃ. Sabbakileseti avasiṭṭhasabbakilese. Na hi paṭhamādimaggehi pahīnā kilesā puna pahīyantīti.
“硬性”,即坚硬的状态。“流溢”,即流动的状态。“支持”,如同用世间风使气囊膨胀,某一聚中的各个聚因此而膨胀,或因之得以安立的状态,即是支持。虽然存在不同的聚,而此聚与彼聚互不相触,各个聚彼此别异,色的边际便是虚空。对于成为它们界限的那个虚空,它与它们确实不相触。若非如此,诸大种的界限自性便无法成立,因为会变成周遍。不周遍即是不相触。在一聚中,诸大种的界限与它们自己也不相触,这便称为“不相触之相”。因此,世尊在界差别的解说中说:“为四大种所不触”。显示巴利原文
Kakkhaḷattaṃ kaṭhinabhāvo. Paggharaṇaṃ dravabhāvo. Lokiyavāyunā bhastassa viya yena taṃtaṃkalāpassa uddhumāyanaṃ, thambhabhāvo vā, taṃ vitthambhanaṃ. Vijjamānepi kalāpantarabhūtānaṃ kalāpantarabhūtehi asamphuṭṭhabhāve, taṃtaṃbhūtavivittatā rūpapariyanto ākāsoti yesaṃ yo paricchedo, tehi so asamphuṭṭhova, aññathā bhūtānaṃ paricchedasabhāvo na siyā byāpībhāvāpattito . Abyāpitā hi asamphuṭṭhatāti. Yasmiṃ kalāpe bhūtānaṃ paricchedo, tehi asamphuṭṭhabhāvo asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ākāsadhātuniddese ‘‘asamphuṭṭhaṃ catūhi mahābhūtehī’’ti (dha. sa. 637).
所谓“坏灭”,是指违逆的因缘聚合时,生起相异的结果。因为以思为增上,所以对于行蕴的诸法,是依于思而说,即“诸行有造作之相”。事实上,在经教分别的行蕴分别中,如“眼触所生思”等(《分别论》92),只对思作了分别,具有造作之相的正是思。正如所说:“其中,什么是福行?即属于欲界的善思”(《分别论》226)等。“遍满”,是令其广大的状态。“于不信”,是出于不信之因,此处为处格表原因。这一道理也适用于“懈怠”等处。“寂止之相”,是身与心热恼止息的相状。当安住于远离昏沉、掉举的增上心时,在策励、抑制与令心喜悦的修习中,由于断除了偏执,而能保持平等中舍。显示巴利原文
Virodhipaccayasannipāte visadisuppatti ruppanaṃ. Cetanāpadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhadhammānaṃ cetanāvasenetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇa’’nti. Tathā hi suttantabhājanīye saṅkhārakkhandhavibhaṅge ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā cetanā’’tiādinā (vibha. 92) cetanāva vibhattā, abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇā ca cetanā. Yathāha ‘‘tattha katamo puññābhisaṅkhāro? Kusalā cetanā kāmāvacarā’’tiādi (vibha. 226). Pharaṇaṃ savipphārikatā. Assaddhiyeti assaddhiyahetu, nimittatthe bhummaṃ. Esa nayo ‘‘kosajje’’tiādīsu. Vūpasamalakkhaṇanti kāyacittapariḷāhūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Līnuddhaccarahite adhicitte pavattamāne paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāvaṭatāya ajjhupekkhanaṃ paṭisaṅkhānaṃ pakkhapātupacchedato.
妄语等的作用是欺诳等,它们粗恶而不摄受。与此相反,正语能作摄受。因其润泽之故,既能摄受诸相应法,也能摄受听闻由正语为缘所生善说之人。因此,正语有“摄受之相”。身业能发起应作的身体行为;而其自身的发起与策励,即是“策励”。因此,名为正业的离,应当视为有“策励之相”;或者说,在诸相应法中,如同提起重担般,提起身行,即为策励。对于活命的有情,或对于相应法的命根延续,或就活命本身而言,清净即是澄净。对于自己相应之心,不令其落入染污分,而正确地策励它,这就是“策励”。显示巴利原文
Musāvādādīnaṃ visaṃvādanādikiccatāya lūkhānaṃ apariggāhakānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvato pariggāhikā sammāvācā siniddhabhāvato sampayuttadhamme, sammāvācāpaccayasubhāsitānaṃ sotārañca puggalaṃ pariggaṇhātīti sā pariggahalakkhaṇā sammāvācā. Kāyikakiriyā kiñci kattabbaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Sayañca samuṭṭhahanaṃ ghaṭanaṃ hotīti sammākammantasaṅkhātā virati samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇā daṭṭhabbā, sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā ukkhipanaṃ samuṭṭhāpanaṃ kāyikakiriyāya bhārukkhipanaṃ viya. Jīvamānassa sattassa, sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā jīvitindriyavuttiyā, ājīvasseva vā suddhi vodānaṃ. Sasampayuttadhammassa cittassa saṃkilesapakkhe patituṃ adatvā sammadeva paggaṇhanaṃ paggaho.
此处,“诸行”意指“思”,因此说“诸行以思为相”。“弯曲”,是朝向所缘的状态。“于处转起”,是指依于诸处,而有被称为“寿”的心与心所的转起。所谓“以渴爱为因相”,是指成为轮回生因;而道则是能令到达涅槃,这便是它们之间的差别。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saṅkhārā’’ti idha cetanā adhippetāti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇa’’nti. Namanaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhabhāvo. Āyatanaṃpavattanaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ vasena hi āyasaṅkhātānaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ pavatti. Taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇanti vaṭṭassa janakahetubhāvo, maggassa pana nibbānasampāpakattanti ayameva tesaṃ viseso.
“如性相”:不颠倒的自性。“一味”:不相逾越、无增无减的状态。“双运”:即止与观,或说为“信与慧、策励与安住”。显示巴利原文
Tathalakkhaṇaṃ aviparītasabhāvo. Ekaraso aññamaññānativattanaṃ anūnādhikabhāvo. Yuganaddhā samathavipassanāva, ‘‘saddhāpaññā paggahāvikkhepā’’tipi vadanti.
“尽”:能灭尽烦恼,故称为尽,即道。“不生”:以不生为究竟,故称为不生,即果。“轻安”:烦恼的止息。显示巴利原文
Khiṇoti kileseti khayo, maggo. Anuppādapariyosānatāya anuppādo, phalaṃ. Passaddhi kilesavūpasamo.
“欲的”:指想要造作的欲。“根相”:作为根本的特相。“生起相”:由于令所缘呈现,而成为相应法生起之因。“和合”:由境等聚集而应被了知的形态,亦即“集会”;或者说,因与相应法平等地同置于此,故为“和合”,即触。“集起”:因为它们一起流入、聚集于此,故为集起。即是说:离开受便不能转起的相应法,仿佛以体验受为因由而聚集于此。“首领相”:如同椽子聚集于栋梁,在相应法中成为首领的状态。“从此更上”:指从彼之后,或是那些相应法中更为殊胜者,因为善法以慧为最上。“解脱的”:指果的。因为此果在戒等功德精髓中,以最为殊胜的状态而为精髓。应知这些相的分别,是依六界、五禅支等,随顺诸经句,并依古注所传的方法而作。同样地,有些法虽已说过,为显示另一方面的含义而再次指出;也正是因此,随顺“善法以欲为根,以作意为生起,以触为和合,以受为集起”、“善法以慧为最上”、“此梵行以解脱为精髓”、“贤友,梵行是以涅槃为深入、以涅槃为究竟”等经句,而说了“欲的根相”等。显示巴利原文
Chandassāti kattukamyatāchandassa. Mūlalakkhaṇaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvo. Samuṭṭhāpanalakkhaṇaṃ ārammaṇapaṭipādakatāya sampayuttadhammānaṃ uppattihetutā. Samodhānaṃ visayādisannipātena gahetabbākāro, yā ‘‘saṅgatī’’ti vuccati. Samaṃ saha odahanti anena sampayuttadhammāti vā samodhānaṃ, phasso. Samosaranti sannipatanti etthāti samosaraṇaṃ. Vedanāya vinā appavattamānā sampayuttadhammā vedanānubhavananimittaṃ samosaṭā viya hontīti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Gopānasīnaṃ kūṭaṃ viya sampayuttānaṃ pāmokkhabhāvo pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ. Tato, tesaṃ vā sampayuttadhammānaṃ uttari padhānanti taduttari. Paññuttarā hi kusalā dhammā. Vimuttiyāti phalassa. Tañhi sīlādiguṇasārassa paramukkaṃsabhāvena sāraṃ. Ayañca lakkhaṇavibhāgo chadhātupañcajhānaṅgādivasena taṃtaṃsuttapadānusārena, porāṇaṭṭhakathāya āgatanayena ca katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttopi koci dhammo pariyāyantarappakāsanatthaṃ puna dassito, tato eva ca ‘‘chandamūlakā kusalā dhammā manasikārasamuṭṭhānā, phassasamodhānā, vedanāsamosaraṇā’’ti, ‘‘paññuttarā kusalā dhammā’’ti, ‘‘vimuttisāramidaṃ brahmacariya’’nti, ‘‘nibbānogadhañhi āvuso brahmacariyaṃ nibbānapariyosāna’’nti ca suttapadānaṃ vasena ‘‘chandassa mūlalakkhaṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
「如法」:即四圣谛,以其自性不颠倒故。「如」:以其具有如是自性故。「不虚妄」:以其无虚诳自性故。「不异」:以其无有其他状态故。显示巴利原文
Tathadhammānāma cattāri ariyasaccāni aviparītasabhāvattā. Tathāni taṃsabhāvattā. Avitathāni amusāsabhāvattā. Anaññathāni aññākārarahitattā.
「生缘所生、所集起之义」:即由生为缘而生起已,依相应之缘而次第生起的状态,亦即随转之义。或谓「所生义」与「所集起义」合为「所生所集起义」。老死并非无生而能生起,亦非离生而从他处生起,此即「生缘所生义」。于此,由生而如是集起,即是「生缘所集起义」。意思是,怎样的生、如何作缘,便会有如其事的显现。 「无明对诸行之缘义」:于此,无明确为诸行之缘,离无明则诸行不生。怎样的无明、对怎样的诸行、以如何的方式而为缘,即此「无明对诸行之缘义」,亦即缘的状态。显示巴利原文
Jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭhoti jātipaccayā sambhūtaṃ hutvā sahitassa attano paccayānurūpassa uddhaṃ uddhaṃ āgatabhāvo, anupavattatthoti attho. Atha vā sambhūtaṭṭho ca samudāgataṭṭho ca sambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho, na jātito jarāmaraṇaṃ na hoti, na ca jātiṃ vinā aññato hotīti jātipaccayasambhūtaṭṭho. Itthañca jātito samudāgacchatīti jātipaccayasamudāgataṭṭho. Yā yā jāti yathā yathā paccayo hoti, tadanurūpaṃ pātubhāvoti attho. Avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭhoti etthāpi na avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo na hoti, na ca avijjaṃ vinā saṅkhārā uppajjanti. Yā yā avijjā yesaṃ yesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ yathā yathā paccayo hoti, ayaṃ avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho, paccayabhāvoti attho.
义理关联:「世尊知见彼」。应接续为「由彼世尊所分别解说的那个」。「那个」指色处。「可爱、不可意等」的「等」,含摄中等,以及过去、未来、现在、小、内、外、彼二等种种差别。依可得之语词:如说「色处为所见,声处为所闻,香处、味处、触处为所觉,一切色为意所识」,故「所见」与「所识」二词于色所缘中可得。即如「色所缘为可爱、不可意、中等、小、过去、未来、现在、内、外、所见、所识、色、色处、色界、颜色、有对、有见、青、黄」等众多名称。「以十三种转起」:指《色品》中所出现的十三解说转起,于每一转起中,依四类四类之安立,故说「以五十二种方式」。「如实」:由不颠倒见及宣说不退转法故。「知」、「遍知」:由显示现在与过去时之智生起而说,应知未来时之智生起亦已说示。「了知」一词,应知是离于时间的特殊用法,如「所见、所闻、所觉」等之中。「不现起」:不以我、我所而执取。「如来」之构词,当如此了知:于色所缘等诸法,其有怎样的自性,是怎样的……显示巴利原文
Bhagavā taṃ jānāti passatīti sambandho. Tenāti bhagavatā. Taṃ vibhajjamānanti yojetabbaṃ. Tanti rūpāyatanaṃ. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīti ādi-saddena majjhattaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, tathā atītānāgatapaccuppannaparittaajjhattabahiddhātadubhayādibhedaṃ. Labbhamānakapadavasenāti ‘‘rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ saddāyatanaṃ sutaṃ gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ mutaṃ, sabbaṃ rūpaṃ manasā viññāta’’nti (dha. sa. 966) vacanato diṭṭhapadañca viññātapadañca rūpārammaṇe labbhati. ‘‘Rūpārammaṇaṃ iṭṭhaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ majjhattaṃ parittaṃ atītaṃ anāgataṃ paccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā diṭṭhaṃ viññātaṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ rūpadhātu vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’nti evamādīhi anekehi nāmehi. ‘‘Terasahi vārehī’’ti rūpakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 614 ādayo) āgate terasa niddesavāre sandhāyāha. Ekekasmiñca vāre catunnaṃ catunnaṃ vavatthāpananayānaṃ vasena ‘‘dvipaññāsāyanayehī’’ti āha. Tathameva aviparītadassitāya, appaṭivattiyadesanatāya ca. Jānāmi abbhaññāsinti vattamānātītakālesu ñāṇappavattidassanena anāgatepi ñāṇappavatti vuttāyevāti daṭṭhabbā. Vidita-saddo anāmaṭṭhakālaviseso veditabbo, ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (dha. sa. 966) viya. Na upaṭṭhāsīti attattaniyavasena na upagacchi. Yathā rūpārammaṇādayo dhammā yaṃsabhāvā yaṃpakārā ca, tathā ne passati jānāti gacchatīti tathāgatoti evaṃ padasambhavo veditabbo. Keci pana ‘‘niruttinayena pisodarādipakkhepena vā dassī-saddassa lopaṃ, āgata-saddassa cāgamaṃ katvā tathāgato’’ti vaṇṇenti.
因全无过失,故称“无可呵责”。因无须增添,故称“无不足”。因无可删除,故称“无多余”。在义理、文句等方面悉皆圆满成就,故称“一切行相完全圆满”。“非其他”是通过遮遣成立“正是如此”之义。由此显示:如来为了某个目的宣说,必能成就彼目的;如此,如来完全如所说而行,正是这样,表明如来的教法不颠倒。“说义”:由词显示,因如实说而为如来,此处依语法将‘达’转作‘塔’(tathā+gata→tathāgata)。显示巴利原文
Niddosatāya anupavajjaṃ. Pakkhipitabbābhāvena anūnaṃ. Apanetabbābhāvena anadhikaṃ. Atthabyañjanādisampattiyā sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ. No aññathāti ‘‘tathevā’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ byatirekena sampādeti. Tena yadatthaṃ bhāsitaṃ, ekantena tadatthanipphādanato yathā bhāsitaṃ bhagavatā, tathevāti aviparītadesanataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Gadattho’’ti etena tathaṃ gadatīti tathāgatoti da-kārassa ta-kāro kato niruttinayenāti dasseti.
“他已如此去”故为如来,而“去”指身体或语言的活动。当说“如此”时,由于“那”“此”等词之间具有不可分离的关联,“如同”之义便自然成立。而身语行为相互随顺,当有说话意愿时,身体与语言便以相关联的方式呈现。为显此义,故说“因为世尊”等。然而,此义中“因如实说而为如来”的含义也已成立,但此义前已通过另一种方式显示,故说“如是,因如此行而为如来”。显示巴利原文
Tathā gatamassāti tathāgato, gatanti ca kāyassa vācāya vā pavattīti attho. Tathāti ca vutte yaṃtaṃ-saddānaṃ abyabhicārisambandhitāya ‘‘yathā’’ti ayamattho upaṭṭhitoyeva hoti. Kāyavacīkiriyānañca aññamaññānulomena vacanicchāyaṃ, kāyassa vācā, vācāya ca kāyo sambandhībhāvena upatiṭṭhatīti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ pana atthe tathāvāditāya tathāgatoti ayampi attho siddho hoti. So pana pubbe pakārantarena dassitoti āha ‘‘evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato’’ti.
“在横向无量的世界界域中”——以此遮破某些人所说的“如同横向一样,上下也存在世界界域”之论。说法之庄严即是说法庄严时,如“福德所成、布施所成”等语。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tiriyaṃaparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsū’’ti etena yadeke ‘‘tiriyaṃ viya upari adho ca santi lokadhātuyo’’ti vadanti, taṃ paṭisedheti. Desanāvilāsoyeva desanāvilāsamayo yathā ‘‘puññamayaṃ, dānamaya’’ntiādīsu.
前缀与不变化词在相应表义词共置时,能依阐明其义的方式而转起,因此“去”这个词本身,即同时阐述了“已了知”与“已过去”之义,故有此说:“‘去’即已了知、已过去。”或者,从发愿开始直至正觉,于此期间修习大菩提乘行中,既无退转、住著与杂染的过失,得以如其誓愿而行——即随顺发愿而行,故名如来。或者,由于具大神力,以无碍解最为殊胜的证得及无障故,于一切处皆无滞碍,因此,其身、语、意的一切去、行、转起,皆如其意欲而行,故名如来。又因世间中,“种类”、“相应”、“去”、“行相”等词被视作同义,故如毗婆尸等诸佛世尊为如是种类,今此世尊亦为如是种类,故名如来;又如诸佛世尊为如是相应,今此世尊亦为如是相应,故名如来。或者,因“谛”、“真实”、“如”皆是智的同义语,故以如智而来,是为如来。应如此了知“如来”一词之义——显示巴利原文
Upasagganipātānaṃ vācakasaddasannidhāne tadatthajotanabhāvena pavattanato gata-saddoyeva avagatatthaṃ atītatthañca vadatīti āha ‘‘gatoti avagato atīto’’ti. Atha vā abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya yāva sambodhi, etthantare mahābodhiyānapaṭipattiyā hānaṭhānasaṃkilesanivattīnaṃ abhāvato yathā paṇidhānaṃ, tathā gato abhinīhārānurūpaṃ paṭipannoti tathāgato. Atha vā mahiddhikatāya, paṭisambhidānaṃ ukkaṃsādhigamena anāvaraṇatāya ca katthaci paṭighātābhāvato yathā ruci, tathā kāyavacīcittānaṃ gatāni gamanāni pavattiyo etassāti tathāgato. Yasmā ca loke vidhayuttagatapakāra-saddā samānatthā dissanti, tasmā yathā vidhā vipassīādayo bhagavanto, ayampi bhagavā tathā vidhoti tathāgato. Yathā yuttā ca te bhagavanto ayampi bhagavā tathā yuttoti tathāgato. Atha vā yasmā saccaṃ tacchaṃ tathanti ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā tathena ñāṇena āgatoti tathāgatoti. Evampi tathāgata-saddassa attho veditabbo –
舍弃了贪欲等种种垢秽,如实地到达;
依止定与慧,毗婆尸等诸佛如是而来。
这位大仙、释迦牟尼、光辉的持有者,
是如来,因此被称为如来。
且如实了知界、处等相,
由自性、共相、区分与差别而了知;
胜者以自生智而通达,
这位释迦族牛王即称为如来。
“如”即是诸谛,以周遍眼——一切知眼而如实照见;
及此缘性,于一切处如实照见;
由于以不从他引之智,如实地阐明,
因此,那位如实者、胜者名为如来。
纵使处在种种差别的世间界中,
胜者于色处等行境中,
他的如实见有种种差别,
因此,如来是普眼者。
又因他如实说法,
他的言语与自身相符顺,
以功德胜伏世间而行,
因此,如来也是世间导师。
随其发愿,随其意乐,
随其语、身、心之显现;
如过去诸大仙,依其种类、以如是方式,
是故,胜者如来即是如是种类。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pahāya kāmādimale yathā gatā, Samādhiñāṇehi vipassiādayo; Mahesino sakyamunī jutindharo, Tathāgato tena tathāgato mato. Tathañca dhātāyatanādilakkhaṇaṃ, Sabhāvasāmaññavibhāgabhedato; Sayambhuñāṇena jino samāgato, Tathāgato vuccati sakyapuṅgavo. Tathāni saccāni samantacakkhunā, Tathā idappaccayatā ca sabbaso; Anaññaneyyena yato vibhāvitā, Yāthāvato tena jino tathāgato. Anekabhedāsupi lokadhātusu, Jinassa rūpāyatanādigocare; Vicittabhedaṃ tathameva dassanaṃ, Tathāgato tena samantalocano. Yato ca dhammaṃ tathameva bhāsati, Karoti vācāyanuloma mattano; Guṇehi lokaṃ abhibhuyya iriyati, Tathāgato tenapi lokanāyako. Yathābhinīhāramato yathāruci, Pavattavācātanucittabhāvato; Yathāvidhā yena purā mahesino, Tathāvidho tena jino tathāgato’’ti. (itivu. aṭṭha. 38);
此摄颂仅为纲要。何以故?如同“不放逸”句,总摄一切法之修行与一切佛功德。故说“以一切行相”等。显示巴利原文
Saṅgahagāthā mukhamattameva. Kasmā? Appamādapadaṃ viya sakaladhammapaṭipattiyā sabbabuddhaguṇānaṃ saṅgāhakattā. Tenevāha ‘‘sabbākārenā’’tiādi.
“他问‘那是哪个?’”——以此显示“比丘们,哪个是彼……”等语并非一般性的提问。为彰显其提问之特殊性,故以引义方式举示《大义释》中所有提问,如“其中,何为提问……”等。而此处的“其中”,即指“他问‘那是哪个?’”句中那个一般性提问语所在之处。显示巴利原文
‘‘Taṃkatamanti pucchatī’’ti etena ‘‘katamañca taṃ bhikkhave’’tiādivacanassa sāmaññato pucchābhāvo dassito avisesato hi tassa pucchāvisesabhāvañāpanatthaṃ mahāniddese āgatā sabbāva pucchā atthuddhāranayena dasseti ‘‘tattha pucchā nāmā’’tiādinā. Tattha tatthāti ‘‘taṃ katamanti pucchatī’’ti ettha yadetaṃ sāmaññato pucchāvacanaṃ, tasmiṃ.
「相」:即任何想要了知的某种自性。「未被知」:指以任何智尚未了知的状态。「未被见」:指以见智尚未如现量般得见的状态。「未被衡量」:指以衡量之智,尚未被衡量为“此有几何”等的状态。「未被审察」:指以审察之智,尚未完成智行之终结的状态。「未彰显」:指于智中不显现的状态。「未令彰显」:指未被智所彰显的状态。能令未见者得照了,故称「未见之照明」。能令已见者得会合,故称「已见之合会」,即依论议而作决断。能令疑得断除,故称「疑之断除」。征求同意而问,故为「同意问」。如“比丘们,汝等于此作何想?”等问,即是问“汝等之同意为何?”,故为同意问。「欲说」:指因欲说故。显示巴利原文
Lakkhaṇanti ñātuṃ icchito yo koci sabhāvo. ‘‘Aññāta’’nti yena kenaci ñāṇena aññātabhāvamāha, ‘‘adiṭṭha’’nti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena paccakkhaṃ viya adiṭṭhataṃ. ‘‘Atulita’’nti ‘‘ettakameta’’nti tulanabhūtena atūlitataṃ, ‘‘atīrita’’nti tīraṇabhūtena akatañāṇakiriyāsamāpanataṃ, ‘‘avibhūta’’nti ñāṇassa apākaṭabhāvaṃ, ‘‘avibhāvita’’nti ñāṇena apākaṭīkatabhāvaṃ. Adiṭṭhaṃ jotīyati etāyāti adiṭṭhajotanā. Diṭṭhaṃ saṃsandīyati etāyāti diṭṭhasaṃsandanā, sākacchāvasena vinicchayakaraṇaṃ. Vimati chijjati etāyāti vimaticchedanā. Anumatiyā pucchā anumatipucchā. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha bhikkhave’’tiādi pucchāya hi ‘‘kā tumhākaṃ anumatī’’ti anumati pucchitā hoti. Kathetukamyatāti kathetukamyatāya.
8 「过坠」:对于自然具有坠落性质者,在其尚未自然坠落之际,便强行令其急速坠落,即不允许它缓慢坠落,而令其快速坠落,这就是“过坠”的意思。或者,以刀杖等超越、征服后再使其坠落,也称为过坠。「有情」:指五蕴的相续,因为在其中安立了“有情”的施设。「命根」:指色命根与非色命根。当色命根被破坏时,其余的非色命根也因为与它相关联而灭坏。那么,为何此处以单数说明“杀生”——即“对命根的过坠,此处依世俗说为有情”?难道此处并非要表达远离对一切无余有情的杀害吗?因为后面确实以复数说明:“悲悯一切众生、有情”等。这是事实。然而,此处依于有情这一共通性而作了单数说明,并且由于“一切”一词的邻近,其中的复数意义其实已很清楚。因此,此处未作共通性的说明,而是按照表达差别的意图,作了复数说明。而且应当知道:大多数情况下,禁制的受持是从共通性来说的,而在这共通性之中,特殊的禁制又是有差别的,为了显示这一差别,故而作了如此言辞上的差别。怎样的思是杀生呢?当命根还在持续时,对作为命根所依的大种施加某种方法为因,由此大种——显示巴利原文
8. Saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atīva pātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto. Sattoti khandhasantāno. Tattha hi sattapaññatti. Jīvitindriyanti rūpārūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Rūpajīvitindriye hi vikopite itarampi taṃsambandhatāya vinassati. Kasmā panettha ‘‘pāṇassa atipāto, pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto’’ti ca ekavacananiddeso kato, nanu niravasesānaṃ pāṇānaṃ atipātato virati idha adhippetā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti sabbe pāṇabhūte’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā) bahuvacananiddesanti? Saccametaṃ, pāṇabhāvasāmaññavasena panettha ekavacananiddeso kato, sabbasaddasannidhānena tattha puthuttaṃ viññāyamānamevāti sāmaññaniddesaṃ akatvā bhedavacanicchāvasena bahuvacananiddeso katoti . Kiñca bhiyyosāmaññato saṃvarasamādānaṃ, tabbisesato saṃvarabhedoti imassa visesassa ñāpanatthaṃ ayaṃ vacanabhedo katoti veditabbo. Yāya cetanāya vattamānassa jīvitindriyassa nissayabhūtesu mahābhūtesu upakkamakaraṇahetu taṃ mahābhūtappaccayā uppajjanakamahābhūtā nuppajjissanti, sā tādisappayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pāṇātipāto. Laddhupakkamāni hi bhūtāni itarabhūtāni viya na visadānīti samānajātiyānaṃ kāraṇaṃ na hontīti. ‘‘Kāyavacīdvārāna’’nti etena manodvāre pavattāya vadhakacetanāya pāṇātipātabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati.
「重罪性」:由于加行、对象等条件的重大性等因缘,罪业便显得尤为深重。应当了知,这是从这些条件所生起的“思”具有特别强的力量来理解的。所谓“加行重大”,是指对于所欲达成的加行,通过突然成就的方式,令成办事业的思多次生起速行、经反复练习而成为惯习,再依决意思的力量,这样的加行便称为重大。所谓“对象重大”,是指即使有时对微小与巨大的有情,加行的程度相同,但在杀害巨大有情时,所生起的思会更加猛利,这便是对象的重大性。因此,这两者都因思的力量强而得以成立。再者,由于所杀害的对象具有巨大功德,针对它生起的加害思,便如同种植在肥沃土地上的作物,会变得强盛,并更猛烈地生起,所以其重罪性应如此看待。因此,即使加行和对象等条件并非重大,但只要由于功德大等因缘,导致思的力量增强,重罪性也应当如此理解。显示巴利原文
Payogavatthumahantatādīhi mahāsāvajjatā tehi paccayehi uppajjamānāya cetanāya balavabhāvato veditabbā. Yathādhippetassa hi payogassa sahasā nipphādanavasena kiccasādhikāya bahukkhattuṃ pavattajavanehi laddhāsevanāya ca sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya vasena payogassa mahantabhāvo. Satipi kadāci khuddake ceva mahante ca pāṇe payogassa samabhāve mahantaṃ hanantassa cetanā tibbatarā uppajjatīti vatthussa mahantabhāvo. Iti ubhayaṃ petaṃ cetanāya balavabhāveneva hoti. Tathā hi hantabbassa mahāguṇabhāvena tattha pavattaupakāracetanā viya khettavisesanibbattiyā apakāracetanāpi balavatī, tibbatarā ca uppajjatīti tassā mahāsāvajjatā daṭṭhabbā. Tasmā payogavatthuādipaccayānaṃ amahattepi mahāguṇatādipaccayehi cetanāya balavabhāvādivaseneva mahāsāvajjabhāvo veditabbo.
因为以此而积聚,故称为“资粮”,即诸支分。在这些支分中,认定有情的杀害心,有些也属于前分(预备阶段)。“加行”乃是由杀害思所发起的。具足五支的杀生思,应观为不离此五支。杀生的加行有明咒所成者,如阿达婆吠陀师等的咒念加行;有神通所成者,即由业异熟所生的神通力,如毒牙等。这便是所谓“极其广衍”,意即极为庞杂、种类繁多。显示巴利原文
Sambharīyanti etehīti sambhārā, aṅgāni. Tesu pāṇasaññitāvadhakacittāni pubbabhāgiyānipi honti. Upakkamo vadhakacetanāsamuṭṭhāpito. Pañcasambhāravatī pāṇātipātacetanāti sā pañcasambhāravinimuttā daṭṭhabbā. Vijjāmayo mantaparijappanapayogo āthabbaṇikādīnaṃ viya. Iddhimayo kammavipākajiddhimayo dāṭhākoṭakādīnaṃ viya. Ativiya papañcoti atimahāvitthāro.
于此有人问:在念念坏灭、自性即坏灭的诸行中,谁是杀者?谁又是被杀者?若说是心与心所相续,它无色,无法以截断、破坏等方式加以损毁,亦非可损毁;若说是色法相续,它无心,犹如木柴,不能像对待死尸那样,以截断等方法成立杀生。再者,杀生的加行,如击打等,是针对过去的诸行、未来的诸行,还是现在的诸行?过去与未来的诸行不存在,故不可能。若针对现在的诸行,诸行是刹那性的,其自性即灭;对于本来就趋于坏灭者,加行便成无用;又因为坏灭无因,死亡并非以击打等加行为因;而且诸行并无主动造作,那加行又是谁的呢?由于刹那性,杀心生起即灭,于作用结束时不住,那么谁又被杀生业所系缚呢?回答:与前述杀生思共俱的诸行之聚,假名为“有情”,此即是杀者。此杀者所发起的杀生加行为缘——若未作此杀生加行,本应生起的名色聚集,由彼加行使先前的识与命根离去,从而安立“死亡”的称谓——这个名色聚集就是被杀者;或者说显示巴利原文
Etthāha – khaṇe khaṇe nirujjhanasabhāvesu saṅkhāresu ko hanti, ko vā haññati, yadi cittacetasikasantāno, so arūpatāya na chedanabhedanādivasena vikopanasamattho, nāpi vikopanīyo, atha rūpasantāno, so acetanatāya kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamoti na tattha chedanādinā pāṇātipāto labbhati yathā matasarīre, payogopi pāṇātipātassa paharaṇappakārādi atītesu vā saṅkhāresu bhaveyya anāgatesu vā paccuppannesu vā, tattha na tāva atītānāgatesu sambhavati tesaṃ abhāvato, paccuppannesu ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikattā saraseneva nirujjhanasabhāvatāya vināsābhimukhesu nippayojano payogo siyā, vināsassa ca kāraṇarahitattā na paharaṇappakārādipayogahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhakatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ kassa so payogo, khaṇikattā vadhādhippāyasamakālabhijjanakassa kiriyāpariyosānakālānavaṭṭhānato kassa vā pāṇātipātakammabaddhoti.
“被说为”——与如前所述的杀生思俱行的诸行之聚,名为“有情”的杀害者;由彼所发动的杀生加行之相,在已离去的心识与命根灭后,成为“死”之称呼所依的那个如前所述的杀生加行未作时本应生起的色法、非色法之聚被杀害,或者纯粹的心、心所相续被杀害。即使在杀生加行所不及的状态中,由于在五蕴有中,彼(心、心所相续)依于色相续而转起,当他人对色相续施加断除命根的加行时,通过生起与彼(命根)生起相障碍的相似色法,色相续被破坏,便有中断,因此杀生并非不可能,杀生也非无因,且加行并非无果,因为对于现前的诸行,依所作的加行,其后本应生起的诸行之聚便如此不生起;由于这里并不把刹那诸行的刹那灭视为“死”,而相续之死又如前所述是有因的,故死非无因;又,杀生加行并非没有作者,因为即使在无主动者的诸行中,仅凭作为助缘而存在、能决定产生与自己相符之果的诸因,也可成立“作者”的称呼,如说“灯照亮,月是夜之主”;再者,并非纯粹与杀意共存的、心与心所之聚被称为杀生,因为(杀生)是依相续而安立的,而依相续转起的灯等也被看到能成就其作用,因此,杀生确实能结缚业。这一考察,在不与取等中,也应随其所应地加以阐明。显示巴利原文
Vuccate – yathāvuttavadhakacetanāsahito saṅkhārānaṃ puñjo sattasaṅkhāto hantā, tena pavattitavadhakapayoganimittaṃ apagatusmāviññāṇajīvitindriyo matavohārappavattinibandho yathāvuttavadhappayogākaraṇe uppajjanāraho rūpārūpadhammasamūho haññati, kevalo vā cittacetasikasantāno. Vadhappayogāvisayabhāvepi tassa pañcavokārabhave rūpasantānādhīnavuttitāya rūpasantāne parena payojitajīvitindriyupacchedakapayogavasena tannibbattivibandhakavisadisarūpuppattiyā vihate vicchedo hotīti na pāṇātipātassa asambhavo, nāpi ahetuko pāṇātipāto, na ca payogo nippayojano paccuppannesu saṅkhāresu katapayogavasena tadanantaraṃ uppajjanārahassa saṅkhārakalāpassa tathā anuppattito, khaṇikānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikamaraṇassa idha maraṇabhāvena anadhippetattā, santatimaraṇassa ca yathāvuttanayena sahetukabhāvato na ahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, na ca katturahito pāṇātipātappayogo nirīhakesupi saṅkhāresu sannihitatāmattena upakārakesu attano anurūpaphaluppādananiyatesu kāraṇesu kattuvohārasiddhito yathā ‘‘padīpo pakāseti nisākaro candimā’’ti ca, na ca kevalassa vadhādhippāyasahabhuno cittacetasikakalāpassa pāṇātipāto icchito santānavasena avaṭṭhitasseva paṭijānanato, santānavasena pavattamānānañca padīpādīnaṃ atthakiriyāsiddhi dissatīti attheva pāṇātipātena kammabaddho. Ayañca vicāro adinnādānādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vibhāvetabbo.
“从断除之时起,即已远离”——以此指出,这里所意指的断除离是以断除为因的。由于世尊以业尽智断除了杀生等恶戒,故说世尊从此究竟彻底地远离,这是从断除这一角度来意趣断与离的。虽然断除与离并没有前时、后时的区别,但当考量道支中的正见等为缘、正语等为缘所生时,即使它们同时生起,以缘与缘所生的方式来把握,也就是以前、后的方式来把握。依于此种把握的转起行相,对于作为缘、能断的正见等法,其断除的作用被安立为“前时”;对于作为缘所生的离,其远离的作用被安立为“后时”。应如此看待此处的含义。或者,“断”应理解为断除的方式,“离”应理解为止息的方式。又或者,这样来解释:“以此而有杀生”即“杀生”,是指作为杀生之因的法聚。那是什么呢?就是无惭、无愧、愚痴、害等烦恼。因为世尊以圣道断除并根绝了这些烦恼,故说世尊从杀生恶戒中究竟远离,因为烦恼已断,依烦恼为相之业便不再生起。“断除不与取”等,也依同样的道理。“即已离”中的“即”字,是表示那种离在时间等方面是没有任何限制的。也就是说,其他受持离的人可能由于心不稳定,或为了利养、活命等缘故而破戒。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pahīnakālatopaṭṭhāya viratovā’’ti etena pahānahetukā idhādhippetā samucchedaviratīti dasseti. Kammakkhayañāṇena hi pāṇātipātadussīlyassa pahīnattā bhagavā accantameva tato paṭiviratoti vuccati samucchedavasena pahānaviratīnaṃ adhippetattā. Kiñcāpi pahānaviramaṇānaṃ purimapacchimakālatā natthi, maggadhammānaṃ pana sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ sammāvācādīnañca paccayapaccayuppannabhāve apekkhite sahajātānampi paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena gahaṇaṃ purimapacchimabhāveneva hotīti gahaṇappavattiākāravasena paccayabhūtesu sammādiṭṭhiādīsu pahāyakadhammesu pahānakiriyāya purimakālavohāro, paccayuppannāsu ca viratīsu viramaṇakiriyāya aparakālavohāro ca hotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Pahānaṃ vā samucchedavasena, virati paṭippassaddhivasena yojetabbā. Atha vā pāṇo atipātīyati etenāti pāṇātipāto, pāṇaghātahetubhūto dhammasamūho. Ko paneso? Ahirikānottappadosamohavihiṃsādayo kilesā. Te hi bhagavā ariyamaggena pahāya samugghāṭetvā pāṇātipātadussīlyato accantameva paṭiviratoti vuccati kilesesu pahīnesu kilesanimittassa kammassa anuppajjanato. ‘‘Adinnādānaṃ pahāyā’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Viratovāti avadhāraṇena tassā viratiyā kālādivasena apariyantataṃ dasseti. Yathā hi aññe samādinnaviratikāpi anavaṭṭhitacittatāya lābhajīvitādihetu samādānaṃ bhindanti, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana sabbaso pahīnapāṇātipātattā accantavirato evāti. Vītikkamissāmīti anavajjadhammehi vokiṇṇā antarantarā uppajjanakā dubbalākusalā. Yasmā pana kāyavacīpayogaṃ upalabhitvā ‘‘imassa kilesā uppannā’’ti viññunā sakkā ñātuṃ, tasmā te iminā pariyāyena ‘‘cakkhusotaviññeyyā’’ti vuttāti daṭṭhabbā. Kāyikāti pāṇātipātādinipphādake balavākusale sandhāyāha.
“以种姓而得名称”——这是句义关联。为了阐明梵授王所赞美的那些功德,本经通过显示其间的连结而开始说法。这里的阐明是这样的:“比丘僧团舍离了杀生,远离杀生,沙门乔达摩的声闻僧团放下了棍棒,放下了刀杖”——应如此广说。或许有人问:梵授王难道没有称赞法吗?的确也称赞了,但因为法源于正自觉者、由圣僧众所摄持,而且法的成就来自法本身的威力,所以当赞颂这两者时,法也就被一同阐明了,因此没有单独举出。事实上,正是由于正法的威力,世尊和比丘僧团才有能力断除杀生等,只不过教法从一开始便是如此传承下来的。显示巴利原文
Gottavasena laddhavohāroti sambandho. Dīpetuṃ vaṭṭati brahmadattena bhāsitavaṇṇassa anusandhidassanavasena imissā desanāya āraddhattā. Tatthāyaṃ dīpanā – ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakasaṅgho nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho’’ti vitthāretabbaṃ. Nanu ca dhammassāpi vaṇṇo brahmadattena bhāsito? Saccaṃ bhāsito, so pana sammāsambuddhapabhavattā, ariyasaṅghādhārattā ca dhammassa dhammānubhāvasiddhattā ca tesaṃ tadubhayadīpaneneva dīpito hotīti visuṃ na uddhaṭo. Saddhammānubhāveneva hi bhagavā bhikkhusaṅgho ca pāṇātipātādippahānasamattho ahosi, desanā pana ādito paṭṭhāya evaṃ āgatāti.
此处的意趣如下:世尊欲以“比丘们,还有其他法”等语,围绕诸佛不共的功德,进一步开展后面的教说,因此从一开始便以“若欲赞叹如来之德”等,纯粹依佛功德而开始教说,并非依比丘僧团。因为世尊教说的常法即是:即使可以一味地显示教说,有时也不取某些内容。例如在色蕴的二法等解说中,并未取心所依处。由于与其他所依处行相不同,教说便会有分类。正如眼识等必定依于眼等,而意识并非必定依于心所依处;而依于所依的所依二法等教说,是以“有色是眼识的所依,有色非眼识的所依”等方式展开。即使对于必定依于心所依处的部分,若在二法等中以“有色是意识的所依”等方式宣说,也不会有与之相应的所缘二法等。因为不能说“有色是意识的所缘,有色非意识的所缘”,这样所依、所缘的二法便会行相不同,教说也就不能一味了。同样地,在安立品中,由于不以心生起分别来宣说,在无寻无伺句的解答中便不能说“有伺”,因此在无寻唯伺句的解答中,虽然可得寻,也不举出;否则就应说“有寻”了。显示巴利原文
Etthāyaṃ adhippāyo – ‘‘atthi bhikkhave aññe ca dhammā’’tiādinā anaññasādhāraṇe buddhaguṇe ārabbha upari desanaṃ vaḍḍhetukāmo bhagavā ādito paṭṭhāya ‘‘tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyyā’’tiādinā buddhaguṇavaseneva desanaṃ ārabhi, na bhikkhusaṅghavasenāti. Esā hi bhagavato desanāya pakati, yaṃ ekaraseneva desanaṃ dassetuṃ labbhamānassāpi kassaci aggahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi rūpakaṇḍe dukādīsu tanniddesesu ca hadayavatthu na gahitaṃ. Itaravatthūhi asamānagatikattā desanābhedo hotīti. Yathā hi cakkhuviññāṇādīni ekantato cakkhādinissayāni, na evaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ ekantena hadayavatthunissayaṃ, nissitavasena ca vatthudukādidesanā pavattā ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthu, atthi rūpaṃ na cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthū’’tiādinā. Yampi ekantato hadayavatthunissayaṃ, tassa vasena ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ manoviññāṇassa vatthū’’tiādinā dukādīsu vuccamānesupi na tadanurūpā ārammaṇadukādayo sambhavanti. Na hi ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ manoviññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ, atthi rūpaṃ na manoviññāṇassa ārammaṇa’’nti sakkā vattunti vatthārammaṇadukā bhinnagatikā siyunti na ekarasā desanā bhaveyyāti. Tathā nikkhepakaṇḍe cittuppādavibhāgena avuccamānattā avitakkaavicārapadavissajjane ‘‘vicāro cā’’ti vattuṃ na sakkāti avitakkavicāramattapadavissajjane labbhamānopi vitakko na uddhaṭo, aññathā ‘‘vitakko cā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā.
为彰显远离了名为“杖”的、用以恼害他人的“刀杖”之义,故说“放下刀杖”,并进而解说“为了害他”等语。“从害的性行”,即从恼害的性行而言。由于前文已提及“亦可依比丘僧团来阐明”,因此在此顺便略示其义,而说到“但凡比丘”等。显示巴利原文
Daṇḍanasaṅkhātassa daṇḍassa paraviheṭhanassa vivajjitabhāvadīpanatthaṃ daṇḍasatthānaṃ nikkhepavacananti āha ‘‘parūpaghātatthāyā’’tiādi. Viheṭhanabhāvatoti vihiṃsanabhāvato. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghavasenāpi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttattā tampi ekadesena dīpento ‘‘yaṃ pana bhikkhū’’tiādimāha.
“有惭者”:应当了知,此处所说的“惭”中,亦已包含了“愧”。因为,厌离恶行者不可能无惭,对恶行的怖畏者亦不可能无愧。又,因佛陀与法以自重为尊,故将“惭”安立为“自增上”,而并未提及属于世间增上的“愧”。
“具足悲愍、慈心”:为何如此说呢?岂非在“具足悲愍”等表述中,“悲愍”一词所指即为悲悯吗?确实如此。然而,此处的“悲愍”一词含有守护之义,当其转起时,可通于慈与悲。此处是指它以慈的方式转起。
“慈”:即柔和、滋润;具足慈者,称为“具慈”;具有此心者,称为“慈心”;此心的性质,便是“慈心性”,其含义即是慈。
“利益悲悯一切有情众生”:以此显示,那种远离是以一切众生为所缘,而无任何局限。
“有情众生”,即一切已出生的有情。
“悲悯者”,即具足悲愍之人。然而,因为慈是悲的特殊缘,故说“即由那种悲愍性”。
如此,便具足了眼离杀生的诸法,即:惭、慈与悲。
“住”:成就了如此的状态后,于一种威仪中生起的苦,藉由另一种威仪予以断除而转起,或者令有身得以延续,意指“行动、存续、运作、保护”。因此说“行、存续、运作、保护”。显示巴利原文
Lajjīti ettha vuttalajjāya ottappampi vuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi pāpajigucchanaṃ pāputtāsanarahitaṃ, pāpabhayaṃ vā alajjanaṃ atthīti. Dhammagarutāya vā buddhānaṃ, dhammassa ca attādhīnattā attādhipatibhūtā lajjāva vuttā, na pana lokādhipati ottappaṃ. ‘‘Dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpanno’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu dayā-saddo ‘‘dayāpanno’’tiādīsu karuṇāya pavattatīti? Saccametaṃ , ayaṃ pana dayā-saddo anurakkhaṇamatthaṃ antonītaṃ katvā pavattamāno mettāya karuṇāya ca pavattatīti idha mettāya pavattamāno vutto. Midati siniyhatīti mettā, mettā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, mettaṃ cittaṃ etassāti mettacitto, tassa bhāvo mettacittatā, mettā icceva attho. ‘‘Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī’’ti etena tassā viratiyā sattavasena apariyantataṃ dasseti. Pāṇabhūteti pāṇajāte. Anukampakoti karuṇāyanako. Yasmā pana mettā karuṇāya visesapaccayo hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tāya eva dayāpannatāyā’’ti. Evaṃ yehi dhammehi pāṇātipātā virati sampajjati, tehi lajjāmettākaruṇāhi samaṅgībhāvo dassito. Viharatīti evaṃbhūto hutvā ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe uppannaṃ dukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā harati pavatteti, attabhāvaṃ vā yāpetīti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘iriyati yapeti yāpeti pāletī’’ti.
“仅行仪戒”:指的仅仅是善士的行为规范戒。由此表明,即使是具足根律仪等功德的世间凡夫,也无法以那些功德来赞叹如来。同样地,在此处的“戒论”中,也并未详细分析依于根律仪的资具受用戒等。显示巴利原文
Ācārasīlamattakanti sādhujanācārasīlamattakaṃ, tena indriyasaṃvarādiguṇehipi lokiyaputhujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vattuṃ na sakkotīti dasseti. Tathā hi indriyasaṃvarapaccayaparibhogasīlāni idha sīlakathāyaṃ na vibhattāni.
「取他人之物」:即拿取属于他人的物品。「贼」即是盗,其性为盗性。此处,对于微细的他人财物,罪过轻;对于重大的财物,罪过重。何以故?因加行重大之故;此外,在物品品质相同的情况下,若烦恼与加行柔缓,罪过便轻;若猛利,罪过便重——这一道理亦应配合理解。显示巴利原文
Parasaṃharaṇanti parassa santakaharaṇaṃ. Theno vuccati coro, tassa bhāvo theyyaṃ. Idhāpi khuddake parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, mahante mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya, vatthuguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjaṃ, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjanti ayampi nayo yojetabbo.
「亲手等」:此处,通过念咒谋取他人之物,即是「明所作」;不依咒语,而以身语加行夺取他人之物,或藉由如是神通威力而夺取,即是「神变加行」。显示巴利原文
Sāhatthikādayoti ettha mantaparijappanena parasantakaharaṇaṃ vijjāmayo, vinā mantena kāyavacīpayogena parasantakassa ākaḍḍhanaṃ tādisaiddhānubhāvena iddhimayo payogo.
「其余」,是指「已舍断而戒绝」等语句,那只是前面已说过的道理。虽然此处并未以「学处」之名而说远离,但在其他经文处、律藏及阿毗达摩中,依转起的方式,远离与思作为增上戒学等的所依,亦是其中一分,故称为「于第一学处」。虽然这里未直接说「具惭者、具悲悯者」,但依所论义理,其义已被道出,应作如是解。因为惭等不仅是断除杀生的殊胜因缘,也同样是不与取等的殊胜因缘,故亦当引彼经文来说明。此法于余处亦得适用。或者,通过「成为清净者」一语,已表达了具足惭与愧等,并断除了无惭无愧等,故不必再说「具惭者」等,应作如是观。显示巴利原文
Sesanti ‘‘pahāya paṭivirato’’ti evamādikaṃ. Tañhi pubbe vuttanayaṃ. Kiñcāpi nayidha sikkhāpadavohārena virati vuttā, ito aññesu pana suttapadesesu vinayābhidhammesu ca pavattavohārena viratiyo cetanā ca adhisīlasikkhādīnaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, tesu aññatarakoṭṭhāsabhāvato ca sikkhāpadanti āha ‘‘paṭhamasikkhāpade’’ti. Kāmañcettha ‘‘lajjī dayāpanno’’ti na vuttaṃ, adhikāravasena pana atthato vā vuttamevāti veditabbaṃ. Yathā hi lajjādayo pāṇātipātappahānassa visesappaccayo, evaṃ adinnādānappahānassāpīti, tasmā sāpi pāḷi ānetvā vattabbā. Eseva nayo ito paresupi. Atha vā ‘‘sucibhūtenā’’ti etena hirottappādīhi samannāgamo, ahirikādīnañca pahānaṃ vuttamevāti ‘‘lajjī’’tiādi na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“非胜行”者:指非胜者、卑劣者的行为,或者即是非胜、低劣、下贱的行为,此处意指淫欲。所谓“梵行是最胜行”,是说远离淫欲。由“远避淫欲者”等文句,应知这也是在显示远离七种淫欲的系缚,正如《增支部》7.50中所说:“于此,有某婆罗门……绝不以女人行两两会合,然却接受女人的涂油、按摩、沐浴、推拿,于此爱乐、希求并以此为满足……”在此,以身门生起、以行非法为目的而引发的非道行道的思,即是“非梵行”;而“邪淫”则是违越不应行处的思,应当如此结合来理解。其中,对于男子,不应行处即二十种女人:母护等十种,以及买得等十种。对于女子,则是十二种其他男子:买得等十种,以及有守护者与有惩罚者等。对于无功德者违犯,罪过轻;对于有大功德者违犯,罪过重。即便是对无功德者,若以强力压制而犯,罪过亦重;在双方同意时,则随烦恼与努力的程度而有罪过的轻重差别,应如此了知。构成“非梵行”的支分有二:欲行之心与非道行道。而“邪淫”则有四支:存在不应行处、行欲之心、非道行道以及领受。有说:“虽遭侵逼而违犯,纵有非道行道,然由……”显示巴利原文
Aseṭṭhacariyanti aseṭṭhānaṃ hīnānaṃ, aseṭṭhaṃ vā lāmakaṃ nihīnaṃ vuttiṃ, methunanti attho. ‘‘Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāra’’nti methunaviratimāha. ‘‘Ārācārī methunā’’ti etena ‘‘idha brāhmaṇa ekacco…pe… na heva kho mātugāmena saddhiṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, apica kho mātugāmassa ucchādanaparimaddananhāpanasambāhanaṃ sādiyati, so taṃ assādeti, taṃ nikāmeti, tena ca vittiṃ āpajjatī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 7.50) vuttā sattavidhamethunasaṃyogāpi paṭivirati dassitāti daṭṭhabbā. Idhāpi asaddhammasevanādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā maggenamaggapaṭipattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā abrahmacariyaṃ, micchācāre pana agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanāti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ māturakkhitādayo dasa, dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dasannaṃ dhanakkitādīnaṃ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānañca vasena dvādasannaṃ aññe purisā. Guṇavirahite vippaṭipatti appasāvajjā, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjā. Guṇarahitepi ca abhibhavitvā pavatti mahāsāvajjā, ubhinnaṃ samānacchandabhāvepi kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjā, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjāti veditabbā. Tassa dve sambhārā sevetukāmatācittaṃ, maggenamaggapaṭipattīti. Micchācāre pana agamanīyaṭṭhānatā, sevanācittaṃ maggenamaggapaṭipatti, sādiyanañcāti cattāro. ‘‘Abhibhavitvā vītikkamane maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsane satipi purimuppannasevanābhisandhipayogābhāvato abhibhuyyamānassa micchācāro na hotī’’ti vadanti. Sevanācitte sati payogābhāvo na pamāṇaṃ itthiyā sevanāpayogassa yebhuyyena abhāvato, itthiyā puretaraṃ upaṭṭhāpitasevanācittāyapi micchācāro na siyāti āpajjati payogābhāvato. Tasmā purisassa vasena ukkaṃsato cattāro vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, aññathā itthiyā purisakiccakaraṇakāle purisassapi sevanāpayogābhāvato micchācāro na siyāti eke. Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – attano ruciyā pavattitassa tayo, balakkārena pavattitassa tayo, anavasesaggahaṇena pana cattāroti. Eko payogo sāhatthikova.
9 为了显示其成就为业道,故说“破坏利益者”。语表或身表,旨在说明“妄语”一词以行为为其要义。欲行欺诳的意图,存在于前分刹那与正说那刹那。如律中所说:“事先他便有‘我将说妄语’之心,正说时亦有‘我正在说妄语’之心”(《波逸提》205)。唯此两者方为支分,其余条件或有或无皆非紧要。“彼之”指那欺诳者的。如同前面所阐明的,依于加行——即依之而说妄语、令人知、令生起——这一“思”,即是妄语。显示巴利原文
9. Kammapathappattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atthabhañjanako’’ti vuttaṃ. Vacīpayogo kāyapayogo vāti musā-saddassa kiriyāpadhānataṃ dasseti. Visaṃvādanādhippāyo pubbabhāgakkhaṇe taṅkhaṇe ca. Vuttañhi ‘‘pubbevassa hoti ‘musā bhaṇissa’nti, bhaṇantassa hoti ‘musā bhaṇāmī’ti’’ (pārā. 205). Etañhi dvayaṃ aṅgabhūtaṃ, itaraṃ pana hotu vā mā vā, akāraṇametaṃ. Assāti visaṃvādakassa . Yathāvuttaṃ payogabhūtaṃ musā vadati viññāpeti, samuṭṭhāpeti vā etāyāti cetanā musāvādo.
先前的一种解释中,由于其相未能周遍,且“妄语”一词又可以解释为表示欺诳之义,故而为圆满显示妄语相,又开示第二种解释:“妄语”者,即虚假、不实的事物等。在此解释中,依之而说、依之被称为妄语,这一思即是妄语。所谓“破坏其利益”,是就所依事物的角度,说明妄语罪过的轻重。被破坏利益的对象若无功德,罪过便轻;若有大功德,则罪过便重。如同“不与取”那样,也应随功德大小来了解。同时,也随烦恼的强弱而有罪过的轻重差别。显示巴利原文
Purimanaye lakkhaṇassa abyāpitatāya, musā-saddassa ca visaṃvaditabbatthavācakattasambhavato paripuṇṇaṃ katvā musāvādalakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthū’’tiādinā dutiyanayo āraddho. Imasmiñca naye musā vadīyati vuccati etāyāti cetanā musāvādo. ‘‘Yamatthaṃ bhañjatī’’ti vatthuvasena musāvādassa appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatamāha. Yassa atthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjo, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjoti adinnādāne viya guṇavasenāpi yojetabbaṃ. Kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvasenāpi appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā labbhatiyeva.
出于不愿施舍己物,以及基于“补足之说”的方式而言,此时唯以欺诳为前导,方成妄语。然而在此中,思心所并不强,故说罪过轻微。为补足未得之不足利益而作的言说,称为补足之说。显示巴利原文
Attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya, pūraṇakathānayena ca visaṃvādanapurekkhārasseva musāvādo. Tattha pana cetanā balavatī na hotīti appasāvajjatā vuttā. Appatāya ūnassa atthassa pūraṇavasena pavattā kathā pūraṇakathā.
“适合的”意为适合那个,即随顺欺诳的意思。“努力”一词,是以努力为标示而说加行。即使以欺诳的意图作出了加行,若对方未能了知彼事,欺诳便不成就,因此对方了知彼事为一个条件。有人则说:“有三个条件——不实语、欺诳心、对方了知彼事。”在发动行动的思心生起之刹那,即被妄语业所系缚,因为决断思已经生起;即便由于对方迟钝,需稍作思虑后方能了知彼事,意图亦是如此。显示巴利原文
Tajjoti tassāruppo, visaṃvādanānurūpoti attho. ‘‘Vāyāmo’’ti vāyāmasīsena payogamāha. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena payoge katepi parena tasmiṃ atthe aviññāte visaṃvādanassa asijjhanato parassa tadatthavijānanaṃ eko sambhāro vutto. Keci pana ‘‘abhūtavacanaṃ visaṃvādanacittaṃ parassa tadatthavijānananti tayo sambhārā’’ti vadanti. Kiriyāsamuṭṭhāpakacetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakakammunā bajjhati sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya nibbattattā, sacepi dandhatāya vicāretvā paro tamatthaṃ jānātīti adhippāyo.
正如在“以真实、以坚固”等经文(《中部》1.19)中,“theta”一词是坚固的同义词,而坚固性因具足真实语而超胜,故当从言语的角度来了解,由此说:“坚固说者”即是此义。“非坚固说者”是指,如同姜黄之色等,因其性不安住而不坚固,同样地,凡其言语不坚固者,便称为非坚固说者。应如此将姜黄之色等作为言语的譬喻。这一方法同样适用于“如石刻”等比喻。显示巴利原文
‘‘Saccato thetato’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.19) viya theta-saddo thirapariyāyo, thirabhāvo ca saccavāditāya adhikatattā kathāvasena veditabboti āha ‘‘thirakathoti attho’’ti. Nathirakathoti yathā haliddirāgādayo anavaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya na thirā, evaṃ na thirā kathā yassa so na thirakathoti haliddirāgādayo yathā kathāya upamā honti, evaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Esa nayo ‘‘pāsāṇalekhā viyā’’tiādīsupi.
「信」在此处流布、转起,因此称为「信所」;信所即是可信的,犹如说「可引导的」一般(《增支部》8.11;《波逸提》8)。或者,应被信所寻求,即是可信的,意思是应当信受。因其能欺诳,故而成为应受谴责的状态——这是它的意趣。显示巴利原文
Saddhā ayati pavattati etthāti saddhāyo, saddhāyo eva saddhāyiko yathā ‘‘venayiko’’ti (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8). Saddhāya vā ayitabbo saddhāyiko, saddheyyoti attho. Vattabbataṃ āpajjati visaṃvādanatoti adhippāyo.
「空无性」是指由于缺乏喜而成为空虚的状态。而离间语,即如前所说具有声音自性的言语,因其导致可爱之物的空无,故称为离间语——这是依词源学的方式说明其意义。或者,「pisati」意为破坏,离间语即是令和合的众生分崩离析,使其分裂、败坏。显示巴利原文
Suññabhāvanti pītivirahitatāya rittataṃ. Sā pisuṇavācāti yāyaṃ yathāvuttā saddasabhāvā vācā, sā piyasuññakaraṇato pisuṇavācāti niruttinayena atthamāha. Pisatīti vā pisuṇā, samagge satte avayavabhūte vagge bhinne karotīti attho.
「粗恶语」指因缺乏柔和而粗糙。它本身亦是粗恶的,因为由忧俱生起,本性即是粗暴。在这里,「作粗恶」是从果的增语而说;或者「说粗恶」,应理解为言语中「粗恶」这一音声的生起。而「它本身亦是粗恶的」,则是因其伤及他人要害而转起,缘于其绝对残酷的本性而说;又或者,依因的假名,应知是言语中「粗恶」音声的生起。正因如此,它既不悦耳,由于义理败坏,亦不称心。显示巴利原文
Pharusanti sinehābhāvena lūkhaṃ. Sayampi pharusāti domanassasamuṭṭhitattā sabhāvenapi kakkasā. Ettha ca pharusaṃ karotīti phalūpacārena, pharusayatīti vā vācāya pharusa-saddappavatti veditabbā. Sayampi pharusāti paresaṃ mammacchedavasena pavattiyā ekantaniṭṭhuratāya sabhāvena, kāraṇavohārena ca vācāya pharusa-saddappavatti daṭṭhabbā. Tatoyeva ca neva kaṇṇasukhā. Atthavipannatāya na hadayaṅgamā.
由此说“杂秽语”:以那种称为无用(palāpa)的无义之语,破坏、撕裂、毁坏安乐与利益,故得“杂秽”(sampha)之名——即任何对自己与他人无所助益的话,如此闲谈,即是杂秽语。显示巴利原文
Yena samphaṃ palapatīti yena palāpasaṅkhātena niratthakavacanena sukhaṃ hitañca phalati vidarati vināsetīti ‘‘sampha’’nti laddhanāmaṃ attano paresañca anupakārakaṃ yaṃ kiñci palapati.
“染污心者”:指被贪或瞋所逼迫、烧恼,或被污染的心,这是其含义。依此心而生起的思即是离间语,藉此而说离间语。若于未和合者中制造分裂,过患较轻;若于已和合者中,则过患重大。同样,随烦恼的软、强等差别也是如此。显示巴利原文
Saṃkiliṭṭhacittassāti lobhena dosena vā vibādhitacittassa, upatāpitacittassa vā, dūsitacittassāti attho. Cetanā pisuṇavācā pisuṇaṃ vadanti etāyāti. Yassa yato bhedaṃ karoti, tesu abhinnesu appasāvajjaṃ, bhinnesu mahāsāvajjaṃ, tathā kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvisesesu.
“对他施离间”:无论对方是否因此而分裂,只要令他了知离间的意思,即已构成离间语,故说“令他知彼义”。然而,离间语业道的成就,唯在对方确实分裂之时。显示巴利原文
Yassa pesuññaṃ upasaṃharati, so bhijjatu vā mā vā, tassa atthassa viññāpanameva pamāṇanti āha ‘‘tadatthavijānana’’nti, kammapathappatti pana bhinne eva.
「随与者」(Anuppadātā):指随力给予者,或以随顺的方式给予者。那么,对谁随顺与给予呢?因经中说「对和合者」(Sahitānaṃ),可知其对「连结者」(sandhānassa)而言,故称「连结之随与者」(sandhānānuppadātā)。由于以随顺的方式对连结进行给予,正是对连结的安立、守护或加固,所以意思是「作加固者」。「在此中喜乐」即乐园,指应喜乐处。即使不作词形分析,仍能得此意义,故说「经文亦读作“喜和合者”(samaggarāmo),此处正是此义」。显示巴利原文
Anuppadātāti anubalappadātā, anuvattanavasena vā padātā. Kassa pana anuvattanaṃ padānañca? ‘‘Sahitāna’’nti vuttattā ‘‘sandhānassā’’ti viññāyati. Tenevāha ‘‘sandhānānuppadātā’’ti. Yasmā pana anuvattanavasena sandhānassa padānaṃ ādhānaṃ, rakkhaṇaṃ vā daḷhīkaraṇaṃ hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘daḷhīkammaṃ kattāti attho’’ti. Āramanti etthāti ārāmo, ramitabbaṭṭhānaṃ . Yasmā pana ākārena vināpi ayamevattho labbhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samaggarāmotipi pāḷi, ayamevettha attho’’ti.
「如疮口般的疮口」:如同恶疮,仅被粗恶语稍加触及,或如被击打一般,心即极度痛苦。哪些是这些疮口呢?即出身等被用作辱骂的题材。藉由身业、语业的造作,使那些疮口裂开或破裂,这种人便是「破疮口者」。纯粹粗恶的思即是粗恶语,依此思而说出粗恶语。那么,纯粹粗恶的思如何生起?由心中有瞋恚。此处「对这个」是指依于纯粹粗恶的思而有粗恶语的状态。其用意是:破疮口也就是语音上的粗恶。若心柔和,粗恶语不至成为业道;然而当心粗暴时,成为业的状态则不可阻止。如此,以随顺的方式,用思的粗暴来成立粗恶语之后,现在再以对立的方式来成立,所以说「由言语柔和」等。那种粗恶语,「对此人」即是对某一个人。此中也是一样:未达到业道程度的,过失较小;已经达到的,过失重大。同样,根据烦恼的轻微或猛烈,也有过失轻重的差别。又有一些论师说:「对某人发出粗恶语,只有当面朝向他的时候才成立」;另一些论师说:「即使背地里说,粗恶语也成立。」对此,合理的理解或许是:当面造作时,由于不尊重者的心力比较强盛,所显示巴利原文
Mammāni viya mammāni, yesu pharusavācāya chupitamattesu duṭṭhārūsu viya ghaṭṭitesu cittaṃ adhimattaṃ dukkhappattaṃ hoti. Kāni pana tāni? Jātiādīni akkosavatthūni. Tāni chijjanti, bhijjanti vā yena kāyavacīpayogena, so mammacchedako. Ekantena pharusacetanā pharusavācā pharusaṃ vadati etāyāti. Kathaṃ pana ekantapharusacetanā hoti? Duṭṭhacittatāya. Tassāti ekantapharusacetanāya eva pharusavācābhāvassa. Mammacchedako savanapharusatāyāti adhippāyo. Cittasaṇhatāya pharusavācā na hoti kammapatha’ppattattā, kammabhāvaṃ pana na sakkā vāretunti. Evaṃ anvayavasena cetanāpharusatāya pharusavācaṃ sādhetvā idāni tameva paṭipakkhanayena sādhetuṃ ‘‘vacanasaṇhatāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sā pharusavācā . Yanti yaṃ puggalaṃ. Etthāpi kammapathabhāvaṃ appattā appasāvajjā, itarā mahāsāvajjā, tathā kilesānaṃ mudutibbatābhāve. Keci pana ‘‘yaṃ uddissa pharusavācā payujjanti, tassa sammukhāva sīsaṃ etī’’ti, eke ‘‘parammukhāpi pharusavācā hotiyevā’’ti vadanti. Tatthāyamadhippāyo yutto siyā – sammukhā payoge agāravādīnaṃ balavabhāvato siyā cetanā balavatī, parassa ca tadatthajānanaṃ, na tathā asammukhāti. Yathā pana akkosite mate āḷahane katā khamanā upavādantarāyaṃ nivatteti, evaṃ ‘‘parammukhā payuttāpi pharusavācā hotiyevā’’ti sakkā viññātunti. Kupitacittanti akkosādhippāyeneva kupitacittaṃ, na maraṇādhippāyena. Maraṇādhippāyena hi cittakope sati byāpādoyeva hotīti. Etthāti –
看哪,那无恼者前来,已断诸流,无有系缚。」(《相应部》4.347;《优陀那》65)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Nelaṅgo setapacchādo, ekāro vattatī ratho; Anīghaṃ passa āyantaṃ, chinnasotaṃ abandhana’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 4.347; udā. 65);
在此偈颂中,“诸肢无过”(nelaṅga)即指戒。因此,质多居士(citto gahapati)说:“尊者!‘诸肢无过’是戒的别名。”“柔软”(Sukumārāti):由于不粗暴,故而柔和。“对于城人”(Purassāti):此处“城”(pura)一词应理解为指住在城中的人,如同“村子来了”等说法,是以地指人。因此说“城市居民”。“令意满足、增长,即称心”(manāpā):所以解释为“令心增长者”。习行、修习、多作。如果是为令他人持守而说的教法,在他人未接受时,过失较小;一旦接受,过失便重大。此处也是随烦恼的轻微或猛烈,而有较小过患与重大过患的差别。显示巴利原文
Imissā gāthāya. Sīlañhettha ‘‘nelaṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha citto gahapati ‘‘nelaṅganti kho bhante sīlānametaṃ adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.347). Sukumārāti apharusatāya mudukā. Purassāti ettha pura-saddo tannivāsīvācako daṭṭhabbo ‘‘gāmo āgato’’tiādīsu viya. Tenevāha ‘‘nagaravāsīna’’nti. Manaṃ appāyati vaḍḍhetīti manāpā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cittavuḍḍhikarā’’ti. Āsevanaṃ bhāvanaṃ bahulīkaraṇaṃ. Yaṃ gāhayituṃ pavattito, tena aggahite appasāvajjo gahite mahāsāvajjoti, idhāpi kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvasenāpi appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā labbhatiyeva.
「说时语者」等,是显示远离杂秽语者的行道。正如「远离杀生」等,是显示断除杀生的行道。因为当说「舍断杀生而住」时,如何是杀生的舍断呢?由于有期待,故说「远离杀生」。然而,那远离是怎样的呢?故说「放下棍棒,放下刀杖」。而那放下棍棒与刀杖又是怎样的呢?故说「有惭」等。如此,后后是对前前的方便指示。同样,对于不与取等,也应随其所应地加以连结。因此说:「说时语者等,是显示远离杂秽语者的行道。」因为即使是有利益的语言,若以不适当的时机而运用,也可能不带来利益,从而随顺于表达无义之语,所以为了舍断杂秽语,应当避免非时语,故说「说时语者」。即使适时而说,由于不真实能成就两种无利益,故应避免不实之语,因而说「说实语者」。为了显示即使说真实语,也只应说能成就此世与他世利益之语,故说「说义语者」。为了显示即使说利益语,也不应只说依止于世间法者,而应说依止于出世间法者,故说「说法语者」。为了显示利益如何是依止于出世间法,故说「说律语者」。因为,依于五种律仪——巴帝摩卡律仪、念律仪、智律仪、忍律仪、精进律仪,以及五种律——彼分断律、镇伏断律、正断律、安息律、出离律而所说的义理,由于是证得涅槃之因,故成为依止于出世间法。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kālavādī’’tiādi samphappalāpā paṭiviratassa paṭipattidassanaṃ. Yathā hi ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādi pāṇātipātappahānapaṭipattidassanaṃ. ‘‘Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya viharatī’’ti hi vutte kathaṃ pāṇātipātappahānaṃ hotīti? Apekkhāsabbhāvato ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, sā pana virati kathanti āha ‘‘nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho’’ti, tañca daṇḍasatthanidhānaṃ kathanti vuttaṃ ‘‘lajjī’’tiādi, evaṃ uttaruttaraṃ purimassa purimassa upāyasandassanaṃ, tathā adinnādānādīsu yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kālavādītiādi samphappalāpā paṭiviratassa paṭipattidassana’’nti. Atthasañhitāpi hi vācā ayuttakālappayogena atthāvahā na siyāti anatthaviññāpanavācaṃ anulometi, tasmā samphappalāpaṃ pajahantena akālavāditā parivajjetabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kālavādī’’ti. Kālena vadantenāpi ubhayānatthasādhanato abhūtaṃ parivajjetabbanti āha ‘‘bhūtavādī’’ti. Bhūtañca vadantena yaṃ idhalokaparalokahitasampādakaṃ, tadeva vattabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘atthavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthaṃ vadantenāpi na lokiyadhammasannissitameva vattabbaṃ, atha kho lokuttaradhammasannissitaṃ pīti dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā ca attho lokuttaradhammasannissito hoti, taṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vinayavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti hi pañcannaṃ saṃvarānaṃ, tadaṅgavinayo vikkhambhanavinayo samucchedavinayo paṭippassaddhivinayo nissaraṇavinayoti pañcannaṃ vinayānañca vasena vuccamāno attho nibbānādhigamahetubhāvato lokuttaradhammasannissito hotīti.
这是为了显示:如此具足殊胜功德的义理,在宣说时若有教说善巧,便能辉耀并成办其事,否则不然,故说“说含藏之语”。现在,为阐明那教说善巧,而说“应时”等。对于依听众的意乐、事由及提问而进入教说范围的内容,善加观察一向记、分别记等记答方式之后,以安立、理由、引证、连结,随应各各时机而作阐明。这种教说,虽然以外观有限有界,却能含摄极为广博、甚深、崇高的众多义理,而为广说。能如此随他人之意乐,将其安立于究竟义成就中者,即名为“教说善巧者”——此处应如此了知义理的连结。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ guṇavisesayutto ca attho vuccamāno desanākosalle sati sobhati, kiccakaro ca hoti, nāññathāti dassetuṃ ‘‘nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni taṃ desanākosallaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kālenā’’tiādimāha. Ajjhāsayaṭṭhuppattīnaṃ pucchāya ca vasena otiṇṇe desanāvisaye ekaṃsādibyākaraṇavibhāgaṃ sallakkhetvā ṭhapanāhetudāharaṇasaṃsandanāni taṃtaṃkālānurūpaṃ vibhāventiyā parimitaparicchinnarūpāya vipulataragambhīrudārapahūtatthavitthārasaṅgāhakāya desanāya pare yathājjhāsayaṃ paramatthasiddhiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpento ‘‘desanākusalo’’ti vuccatīti evamettha atthayojanā veditabbā.
10 如此次第分别了七条根本学处之后,虽则舍断贪欲等亦摄于律仪戒修学之中,然因其属于上分功德所摄,且非世间凡夫之行境,世尊为以更上之教法加以统摄,便将其暂且搁置,转而分别一般大众熟知的威仪戒,故说“伤害种子与植物之行”等。在此,“gāma”是集合之意。难道树木等由于无心,便不是众生吗?应知它们无心,是因为它们无有挣扎、砍后能再生、种类相异、非属四生等。然而,珊瑚、石、盐等也有增长,可见增长并非有生命的理由;至于感知对象与分别构想,犹如梦境般仅是心的想象,同理,受孕等也是如此。那么,为何期求远离伤害种子与植物之行呢?这是为了符合沙门的身份,并保护依止它们的众生。因此世尊说:“愚人于树木有命想……”等(《波逸提》89)。“Nīlatiṇarukkhādikassā”是指青草等,即生草及生树木等。由“等”字应知,还包括药草、灌木、藤蔓等。显示巴利原文
10. Evaṃ paṭipāṭiyā satta mūlasikkhāpadāni vibhajitvā satipi abhijjhādippahānassa saṃvarasīlasikkhāsaṅgahe upariguṇasaṅgahato, lokiyaputhujjanāvisayato ca uttaradesanāya saṅgaṇhituṃ taṃ pariharitvā pacurajanapākaṭaṃ ācārasīlameva vibhajanto bhagavā ‘‘bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gāmoti samūho. Nanu ca rukkhādayo cittarahitatāya na jīvā, cittarahitatā ca paripphandābhāvato , chinne viruhanato, visadisajātikabhāvato, catuyoniappariyāpannato ca veditabbā, vuḍḍhi pana pavāḷasilālavaṇānampi vijjatīti na tesaṃ jīvabhāve kāraṇaṃ, visayaggahaṇañca parikappanāmattaṃ supanaṃ viya ciñcādīnaṃ, tathā dohaḷādayo, tattha kasmā bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirati icchitāti? Samaṇasāruppato, sannissitasattānurakkhaṇato ca. Tenevāha ‘‘jīvasaññino hi moghapurisā manussā rukkhasmi’’ntiādi (pāci. 89). Nīlatiṇarukkhādikassāti allatiṇassa ceva allarukkhādikassa ca. Ādi-saddena osadhigacchalatādayo veditabbā.
“一食”即一顿饭,有此习惯者称为“一食者”,即一日中仅进食一次的人。然而,他也有可能在夜间进食,为遮止此,而说“离非时食”。即便如此,仍可能出现午后进食而自认一食者的情况,为消除这一疑虑,故说“远离非时食”。从曙光出现直到日中,是诸佛所常行、常习的进食时间,此外即为非时。而在注疏中,由于第二句已禁止了夜食,因此将午后称为“非时”。显示巴利原文
Ekaṃ bhattaṃ ekabhattaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti ekabhattiko, ekasmiṃ divase ekavārameva bhuñjanako. Tayidaṃ rattibhojanopi siyāti tannivattanatthamāha ‘‘rattūparato’’ti. Evampi aparaṇhabhojīpi siyā ekabhattikoti tadāsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ ‘‘virato vikālabhojanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aruṇuggamanato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhanhikā, ayaṃ buddhānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo bhojanassa kālo nāma, tadañño vikālo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana dutiyapadena rattibhojanassa paṭikkhittattā aparaṇho ‘‘vikālo’’ti vutto.
简要地说,世尊的教法依于‘诸恶莫作……’(《长部》2.90;《法句》183;《导论》30,50,116,124)的理则而开演,并不随顺以极重欲贪为起因的观听舞蹈等事,所以称为‘与教法不随顺’(sāsanassa ananulomattā)。在律藏中,无论是自己舞蹈,还是令人舞蹈,由于舞蹈形态的共通性,仅以一个‘舞’(nacca)字概括;歌唱与演奏也是如此。因此,说‘以自舞、令舞等方式’(naccananaccāpanādivasena)时,其中的‘等’(ādi)字就涵盖了自歌、令歌、自奏与令奏。在此处,‘观看’(dassana)通过提举部分来代表其余的方式,也包含了‘听’的意思。或者说,因为前五识以‘见’为自性,即使在听的活动中,也存在‘见’的简略共通特性,所以只称为‘观看’(dassanā)。若只是偶尔听到并不属于戏耍性质的歌声,这是允许的,因此说‘娱乐性质的观看除外’(visūkabhūtā dassanā)。正如《胜义灯》(Paramatthajotikā)中《小诵经注》所说。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhepato ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50, 116, 124) nayappavattaṃ bhagavato sāsanaṃ accantachandarāgappavattito naccādīnaṃ dassanaṃ na anulometīti āha ‘‘sāsanassa ananulomattā’’ti. Attanā payojiyamānaṃ, parehi payojāpiyamānañca naccaṃ naccabhāvasāmaññato pāḷiyaṃ ekeneva nacca-saddena gahitaṃ, tathā gītavādita-saddena cāti āha ‘‘naccananaccāpanādivasenā’’ti. Ādi-saddena gāyanagāyāpanavādanavādāpanāni saṅgaṇhāti. Dassanena cettha savanampi saṅgahitaṃ virūpekasesanayena. Ālocanasabhāvatāya vā pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ savanakiriyāyapi dassanasaṅkhepasabbhāvato ‘‘dassanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Avisūkabhūtassa gītassa savanaṃ kadāci vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘visūkabhūtā dassanā’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ paramatthajotikāya khuddakapāṭhaṭṭhakathāya (khu. pā. aṭṭha. pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘dhammūpasaṃhitampi cettha gītaṃ vaṭṭati, gītūpasaṃhito dhammo na vaṭṭatī’’ti.
‘Uccā’是高的意思,与‘高的’(uccasaddena)同义,是一个词缀。‘卧于此中,所以称为卧具’(seti etthāti sayanaṃ)。‘高广大床’(uccāsayanamahāsayanā)意指不适合沙门身份的、尺寸过量的、不如法的敷具,因此解释为‘过量、不如法的敷设’(pamāṇātikkantaṃ, akappiyattharaṇa)。应当了知,此处像狮子座等坐具,也被‘床’一词所涵盖。然而,当所依的器具被禁止时,依托于该器具的行为也自然被禁止,因此只说了‘高广大床’;但从义理上,这其实是显示了要远离以享乐为目的的坐与卧。或者在这种意义下,是以余类兼摄的方式表达了‘高床、广大床的坐与卧’,就如同‘以名色为缘而有六处’(nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana)(《中部》3.126;《相应部》2.1;《优陀那》1)的表达方式一样。由于‘坐’的行为在顺序上先于‘卧’,所以应当理解,此处用‘卧’这一个词就已将‘坐’涵盖其中了。显示巴利原文
Uccāti uccasaddena samānatthaṃ ekaṃ saddantaraṃ, seti etthāti sayanaṃ. Uccāsayanaṃ mahāsayanañca samaṇasārupparahitaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘pamāṇātikkantaṃ, akappiyattharaṇa’’nti . Āsandādiāsanañcettha sayanena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā pana ādhāre paṭikkhitte tadādhārakiriyā paṭikkhittāva hoti, tasmā ‘‘uccāsayanamahāsayanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, atthato pana tadupabhogabhūta nisajjānipajjanehi virati dassitāti daṭṭhabbā. Uccāsayanasayanamahāsayanasayanāti vā etasmiṃ atthe ekasesanayena ayaṃ niddeso kato yathā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1). Āsanakiriyāpubbakattā sayanakiriyāya sayanaggahaṇeneva āsanaṃ gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
透过令他人执取,或对别人所寄存的物品表示认可,也能获得‘受持’的含义,因此说‘不令执取,也不对寄存物表示认可’(na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādīyatī)。又或者说,受持有三种:以身受持、以语受持、以意受持。其中,以身受持即是‘执取’(uggaṇhana),以语受持即是‘令执取’(uggahāpana),以意受持即是‘认可’(sādiyana)。如此,从整体上或以余类兼摄的方式,将这三种受持总称为‘受持’(paṭiggahaṇā),因而说‘他不执取……’(neva naṃ uggaṇhātī)等。这一道理也同样适用于‘生谷的受持’等处。之所以只称‘七种’(sattavidha)谷物,是因为像泥婆罗谷之类的副粮,已包含在稻米等根本粮之中。世尊曾开许:‘诸比丘,我允许五种兽脂作为药:熊脂、鱼脂、鳄脂、猪脂、驴脂。’(《大品》262)因此,这属于特定的开许。而对于这些,律中说‘于时受持’(《大品》262),所以持受是允许的,因此说。显示巴利原文
Aññehi gāhāpane upanikkhittasādiyane ca paṭiggahaṇattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādīyatī’’ti. Atha vā tividhaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ kāyena vācāya manasā. Tattha kāyena paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggaṇhanaṃ, vācāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggahāpanaṃ, manasā paṭiggahaṇaṃ sādiyananti tividhampi paṭiggahaṇaṃ sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vā gahetvā ‘‘paṭiggahaṇā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘neva naṃ uggaṇhātī’’tiādi. Esa nayo ‘‘āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā’’tiādīsupi. Nīvārādiupadhaññassa sāliyādimūladhaññantogadhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sattavidhassā’’ti. ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave pañca vasāni bhesajjāni acchavasaṃ macchavasaṃ susukāvasaṃ sūkaravasaṃ gadrabhavasa’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttattā idaṃ odissa anuññātaṃ nāma, tassa pana ‘‘kāle paṭiggahita’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttattā paṭiggahaṇaṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘aññatra odissa anuññātā’’ti.
Akkamatī(压)即压挤,指在预备阶段进行的压挤。Hadaya(心)是指量筒、管筒等器具的内部。以管筒等量取芝麻等物时,唯有堆起的顶端方称为“尖顶”(sikhā),对其造成的损坏即是“削刮”(hāpana)。这是一些简摄句注师(sārasamāsācariyā)及北寺住众(uttaravihāravāsino)的观点。显示巴利原文
Akkamatīti nippīḷeti. Pubbabhāge akkamatīti sambandho. Hadayanti nāḷiādimānabhājanānaṃ abbhantaraṃ. Tilādīnaṃ nāḷiādīhi minanakāle ussāpitasikhāyeva sikhā, tassā bhedo hāpanaṃ. Kecīti sārasamāsācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca.
Vadho(杀)是指以拳打、刀砍等方式进行伤害,即“恼害”(viheṭhana)的意思。事实上,“杀”(vadha)一词本身就有恼害义,如“一一恼害自己”(attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā)等语句(《波逸提》880)所示。正如虽然同具“不可捉持”的性质,但为了显示出家人不可捉持的特殊对象之类别,而将女人、少女、女仆、女奴等分别解说;同样,虽然就取走他人之物而言,都属于“不与取”的共性,但为了显示诸如偷斤减两等不与取的特殊形态,才予以分别叙述,并非对杀生同义词“杀”(vadha)的再次提及有何特殊必要。也不能说“在那里是自作,在这里是令他作”,因为文中已说“以身、语的努力为等起的思,有六种努力”。因此,前文所述的义理较为妥当。至于注疏说“vadhoti māraṇaṃ”(杀即夺命),那也是针对“打击”(pothana)而言,因为“夺命”一词也可用于“恼害”的意义。显示巴利原文
Vadhoti muṭṭhippahārakasātāḷanādīhi hiṃsanaṃ, viheṭhananti attho. Viheṭhanatthopi hi vadhasaddo dissati ‘‘attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 880). Yathā hi appaṭiggahabhāvasāmaññe satipi pabbajitehi appaṭiggahitabbavatthuvisesabhāvasandassanatthaṃ itthikumāridāsidāsādayo vibhāgena vuttā , evaṃ parassaharaṇabhāvato adinnādānabhāvasāmaññe satipi tulākūṭādayo adinnādānavisesabhāvadassanatthaṃ vibhāgena vuttā, na evaṃ pāṇātipātapariyāyassa vadhassa punaggahaṇe payojanaṃ atthi. ‘‘Tattha sayaṅkāro, idha paraṃkāro’’ti ca na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā chappayogā’’ti ca vuttattā. Tasmā yathāvuttoyeva attho sundarataro. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘vadhoti māraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, tampi pothanameva sandhāyāti ca sakkā viññātuṃ māraṇa-saddassa vihiṃsanepi dissanato.
Ettāvatā(至此)是指从“离杀生……”起,直至“远离割截……粗暴行为等”(chedana…pe… sahasākārā paṭivirato)为止的经文段落。由于其间未插入分段,且依巴利圣典所示的方式,包含了二十六条学处,而大多数学处尚未细分,故称「小戒」(cūḷasīla)。此处所谓小、中、大的划分,是就开示方式而言,并非依于法本身的特质。事实上,在此书中,正是对那些以略说方式列举而未细分的学处,通过分别解说来展开“中戒”的教示。因此才说「在详细开演中戒之时」(majjhimasīlaṃ vitthārento)。显示巴利原文
Ettāvatāti ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādinā ‘‘chedana…pe… sahasākārā paṭivirato’’ti etaparimāṇena pāṭhena. Antarābhedaṃ aggahetvā pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayena chabbīsatisikkhāpadasaṅgahaṃ yebhuyyena sikkhāpadānaṃ avibhattattā cūḷasīlaṃ nāma. Desanāvasena hi idha cūḷamajjhimādibhāvo adhippeto, na dhammavasena. Tathā hi idha saṅkhittena uddiṭṭhānaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ avibhattānaṃ vibhajanavasena majjhimasīladesanā pavattā. Tenevāha ‘‘majjhimasīlaṃ vitthārento’’ti.
「中戒」的注释。显示巴利原文
Majjhimasīlavaṇṇanā
11 其中,「如同」(yathā)是表譬喻的虚词。「或」(vā)是表抉择的词。「而」(pana)是用于庄严言辞的词。「一些人」(eke)指其他的人。「贤者」(bhonto)是对善士们的亲切称呼。因为善士们称呼他人时,会用“贤者”、“诸天所爱者”或“尊者”。凡出家者通称沙门;仅凭出身便称为婆罗门。此意谓:即使是一个凡夫,若竭诚称赞我,也会说“他已断除杀生,远离杀生”等语,用指称他人的方式来说明;又或者,有些人自称沙门、婆罗门,他人也这样认为,但他们由于不知、也无能力践行相应的修行,故未能圆满;而这位沙门乔达摩却全然不是如此,他在一切方面都圆满成就了沙门所应行。这样,无论是用指称他人的方式,还是用指称自己的方式,都只会说到戒行本身,而不会超出这个范围。显示巴利原文
11. Tattha yathāti opammatthe nipāto. Vāti vikappanatthe. Panāti vacanālaṅkāre. Eketi aññe. Bhontoti sādhūnaṃ piyasamudāhāro. Sādhavo hi pare ‘‘bhonto’’ti vā, ‘‘devānaṃ piyā’’ti vā ‘‘āyasmanto’’ti vā samālapanti. Yaṃ kiñci pabbajjaṃ upagatā samaṇā. Jātimattena brāhmaṇā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ussāhaṃ katvā mama vaṇṇaṃ vadamānopi puthujjano ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādinā parānuddesikanayena vā yathā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇabhāvaṃ paṭijānamānā, parehi ca tathāsambhāviyamānā tadanurūpapaṭipattiṃ ajānanato, asamatthato ca na abhisambhuṇanti, na evamayaṃ, ayaṃ pana samaṇo gotamo sabbathāpi samaṇasāruppapaṭipadaṃ pūresiyevāti evaṃ aññuddesikanayena vā sabbathāpi ācārasīlamattameva vadeyyuṃ, na taduttarinti.
在「伤害种子与植物之行」这一表述中,依于词序,「种子与植物」虽本非主要成分,却因需要被特别指出而获得了主要地位。词序是一回事,义序是另一回事,因此才问:“什么是种子与植物?”因为对它的分别,伤害行为便随其所缘而得以分别。由此,世尊说了“根种子”等。「根种子」(mūlabīja)的意思是:根本身就是种子,故称根种子;或者以根为种子的,也叫根种子。其余各类也依同样的方式来理解。「节种子」(phaḷubīja)指节茎的种子。“种子”一词,本指能生出同类果实的因,在其他因缘的配合下,有其特别的因缘能产生同类之果,因此在具有发芽能力的真实果实上,安立为种子。而依于此义,种子一词也可用于某些根等事物,为从根等中将其区分出来,便特别用一个“种子”词来指明,称为「种种子」(bījabīja),如同“色色”(rūparūpa)、“苦苦”(dukkhadukkha)的语例那样。那么,为什么在此处问了种子与植物之后,只分别了种子呢?不应如此看待。难道我们不曾说过……显示巴利原文
Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhapade saddakkamena appadhānabhūtopi bījagāmabhūtagāmo niddisitabbatāya padhānabhāvaṃ paṭilabhati. Añño hi saddakkamo añño atthakkamoti āha ‘‘katamo so bījagāmabhūtagāmo’’ti. Tasmiñhi vibhatte tabbisayatāya samārambhopi vibhattova hotīti . Tenevāha bhagavā ‘‘mūlabīja’’ntiādi. Mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ, mūlaṃ bījaṃ etassātipi mūlabījaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Phaḷubījanti pabbabījaṃ. Paccayantarasamavāye sadisaphaluppattiyā visesakāraṇabhāvato viruhaṇasamatthe sāraphale niruḷho bīja-saddo tadatthasaṃsiddhiyā mūlādīsupi kesuci pavattatīti mūlādito nivattanatthaṃ ekena bīja-saddena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘bījabīja’’nti. ‘‘Rūparūpaṃ , dukkhadukkha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.327) ca yathā. Kasmā panettha bījagāmabhūtagāmaṃ pucchitvā bījagāmo eva vibhattoti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nanu avocumha ‘‘mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ, mūlaṃ bījaṃ etassātipi mūlabījanti’’. Tattha purimena bījagāmo niddiṭṭho, dutiyena bhūtagāmo, duvidhopesa sāmaññaniddesena, mūlabījañca mūlabījañca mūlabījanti ekasesanayena vā pāḷiyaṃ niddiṭṭhoti veditabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘sabbañheta’’ntiādi.
12 「已作储存者」(sannidhikatassa)这一句,显示在「储存后受用」(sannidhikāraparibhoga)的表达中,“行为”(kāra)一词具有动作对象的意义。又或者,正如应说“ācayaṃgamino”时,以省略鼻音的方式说成“ācayagāmino”,此处本应说“sannidhikāraṃ paribhoga”,也以省略鼻音的方式说成了“sannidhikāraparibhoga”,其意为:储存后而受用。显示巴利原文
12.‘‘Sannidhikatassā’’ti etena ‘‘sannidhikāraparibhoga’’nti ettha kāra-saddassa kammatthataṃ dasseti. Yathā vā ‘‘ācayaṃgamino’’ti vattabbe anunāsikalopena ‘‘ācayagāmino’’ti (dha. sa. 10) niddeso kato, evaṃ ‘‘sannidhikāraṃ paribhoga’’nti vattabbe anunāsikalopena ‘‘sannidhikāraparibhoga’’nti vuttaṃ, sannidhiṃ katvā paribhoganti attho.
正当地削除烦恼,故称「削除」(sallekha)——这是依经教而修的方式。「随方」(pariyāyo)意即随顺适宜而运用,也就是遵循可用的言辞而修行。由于会被烦恼所接触,所以称为「物质」(āmisa),指任何可享用的事物。因此说“物质是指其余已说过的那些东西”。这仅是就储存物品举出的一种示例而已。“水中与泥中”(udakakaddame):指在水里和在泥里。“请坐”(acchatha):就是请你们坐下。“伸展脖子”(gīvāyāmakaṃ):意为伸长脖子;就像因吃得过饱,脖子不得不直直地伸着那样,是这个意思。“四分之一量”(catubhāgamattaṃ):相当于一俱卢陀的量。“可用的房屋”等,是依据律藏而说的。显示巴利原文
Sammā kilese likhatīti sallekho, suttantanayena paṭipatti. Pariyāyati kappīyatīti pariyāyo, kappiyavācānusārena paṭipatti. Kilesehi āmasitabbato āmisaṃ, yaṃ kiñci upabhogārahaṃ vatthu. Tenevāha ‘‘āmisanti vuttāvasesa’’nti. Nayadassanañhetaṃ sannidhivatthūnaṃ. Udakakaddameti udake ca kaddame ca. Acchathāti nisīdatha. Gīvāyāmakanti gīvaṃ āyamitvā, yathā ca bhutte atibhuttatāya gīvā āyamitabbāva hoti, evanti attho. Catubhāgamattanti kuḍubamattaṃ. ‘‘Kappiyakuṭiya’’ntiādi vinayavasena vuttaṃ.
13 「仅此些许」(ettakampi)也是指称判决与审察所依之处的叙述。「仅为词义连接」(payojanamattameva):仅仅是为了将词义连接起来。不过,对于那些不详细解说就无法理解其意义的词,详细的解说也仍归属于词义摄集的范围。由于出于好奇而值得观看,故称为「表演」(pekkhā),即依戏剧家的规则,由演员进行的演出。因演员团体对大众所做的活动,所以说为「舞会」(naṭasamajja),在《精要摄集》中称为“表演盛会”(pekkhā maha)。「杖鼓」(ghanatāḷa)是指木制的,或由石条、石片制成的击打乐器。“一些人”(eke)是指《精要摄集》的老师们和北方寺的住众。如同此处,以后出现“一些人”的地方也应如此理解。「方形鼓」(caturassaambaṇakatāḷa)是以树心木等,或任何木材,做成方形,四面蒙上皮革而制成的乐器。“撒散”(abbhokkiraṇa)是指用色彩做装饰,也就是所谓的“欢喜”(nandī)。“作美观者”(sobhanak)……显示巴利原文
13.Ettakampīti vinicchayavicāraṇāvatthukittanampi . Payojanamattamevāti padatthayojanamattameva. Yassa pana padassa vitthārakathaṃ vinā na sakkā attho viññātuṃ, tattha vitthārakathāpi padatthasaṅgahameva gacchati. Kutūhalavasena pekkhitabbato pekkhā, naṭasatthavidhinā naṭānañca payogo. Naṭasamūhena pana janasamūhe karaṇavasena ‘‘naṭasamajja’’nti vuttaṃ, sārasamāse ‘‘pekkhā maha’’nti vuttaṃ. Ghanatāḷaṃ nāma daṇḍamayatāḷaṃ, silāsalākatāḷaṃ vā. Eketi sārasamāsācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca. Yathā cettha, evaṃ ito paresupi ‘‘eke’’ti āgataṭṭhānesu. Caturassaambaṇakatāḷaṃ nāma rukkhasāradaṇḍādīsu yena kenaci caturassaambaṇakaṃ katvā catūsu passesu cammena onandhitvā katavāditaṃ. Abbhokkiraṇaṃ raṅgabalīkaraṇaṃ, yā ‘‘nandī’’ti vuccati. Sobhanakaranti sobhanakaraṇaṃ, ‘‘sobhanagharaka’’nti sārasamāse vuttaṃ. Caṇḍālānamidanti caṇḍālaṃ. Sāṇe udakena temetvā aññamaññaṃ ākoṭanakīḷā sāṇadhovanaṃ. Indajālenāti aṭṭhidhovanamantaṃ parijappitvā yathā pare aṭṭhīniyeva passanti, evaṃ tacādīnaṃ antaradhāpanamāyāya. Sakaṭabyūhādīti ādi-saddena cakkapadumakaḷīrabyūhādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
14 「格子」(padāni)是棋子安放的位置。所谓「十格戏」(dasapada),是用两排共二十个格子进行的博戏。骰子(pāsaka)是在六个面上分别显示一到六点的玩具,投掷后,依所得的点数,按相应规则移动或移除棋子而进行游戏。有人认为壶戏(ghaṭikā)是用罐子来玩的游戏。在众多签条中取出一根无特别记号的签,投入后又抽出来,这被一些人称为「签手」(salākahattha)。用叶子做成的管状乐器叫作「管」(nāḷikā),因此说“吹奏它”。也有人说:「字戏」(akkharikā)是取发问者口中所出的字来占卜得失等的游戏。还有人说:「如法」(yathāvajja)就是随着音乐跳舞或唱歌。这样做则获胜,否则便失败——以胜败为主导而进行活动,由此可知,越轨等行为也都属于放逸赌博的场合。应知,以竹木等制成的玩具,其成与不成会带来胜败,这样的玩法也包含在前述范围之中。而“如法”一词,是依盲人等相似的外相而显示胜败,从博戏的性质来说的。显示巴利原文
14.Padānīti sārīnaṃ patiṭṭhānaṭṭhānāni. Dasapadaṃ nāma dvīhi pantīhi vīsatiyā padehi kīḷanajūtaṃ. Pāsakaṃ vuccati chasu passesu ekekaṃ yāva chakkaṃ dassetvā katakīḷanakaṃ, taṃ vaḍḍhetvā yathāladdhaṃ ekakādivasena sāriyo apanentā upanentā ca kīḷanti. Ghaṭena kīḷā ghaṭikāti eke. Bahūsu salākāsu visesarahitaṃ ekaṃ salākaṃ gahetvā tāsu pakkhipitvā puna tasseva uddharaṇaṃ salākahatthanti eke. Paṇṇena vaṃsākārena katā nāḷikā. Tenevāha ‘‘taṃ dhamantā’’ti. ‘‘Pucchantassa mukhāgataṃ akkharaṃ gahetvā naṭṭhamutti lābhālābhādijānanakīḷā akkharikā’’tipi vadanti. ‘‘Vāditānurūpaṃ naccanaṃ gāyanaṃ vā yathāvajjaṃ’’ tipi vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ kate jayo bhavissati, aññathā parājayo’’ti jayaparājaye purakkhatvā payogakaraṇavasena parihārapathādīnampi jūtapamādaṭṭhānabhāvo veditabbo. Paṅgacīrādīhipi vaṃsādīhi kātabbakiccasiddhiasiddhijayaparājayāvaho payogo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Yathāvajja’’nti ca kāṇādīhi sadisatākāradassanehi jayaparājayavasena jūtakīḷitabhāvena vuttaṃ.
15 “兽形”即指带有猛兽形状的床脚。“不可用的床或榻”出自《摄义》。“彩绘”指在墙壁、顶棚等处作画而令其华丽。木棉、藤棉、草棉,即依这三种棉。“上等毛布”是一些论师、《摄义》的老师与北方住处比丘们的主张;同样,“单面毛布”也如此。“丝毛混织”指用丝与毛混合织成的织物。“纯丝”指未经宝物装饰的丝布。“除棉”一语显示:即使没有宝物装饰,棉垫亦不适宜。“以宝物装饰”一语则显示:以宝物装饰者,若用作铺地物,或随宜铺于床、椅上使用,是允许的。“以羚羊皮”即用羚羊之皮。据说其皮质极薄,因此需做成双层、三层再缝合起来,故称“羚羊缝”。“依所说之方式”即依律藏中所说的方式。显示巴利原文
15.Vāḷarūpānīti āharimāni vāḷarūpāni. ‘‘Akappiyamañcova pallaṅko’’ti sārasamāse. Vānavicittanti bhitticchadādivasena vānena vicitraṃ. Rukkhatūlalatātūlapoṭakītūlānaṃ vasena tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ. Uddalomiyaṃ kecīti sārasamāsācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca. Tathā ekantalomiyaṃ. Koseyyakaṭṭissamayanti koseyyakassaṭamayaṃ. Suddhakoseyyanti ratanaparisibbanarahitaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā tūlika’’nti etena ratanaparisibbanarahitāpi tūlikā na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. ‘‘Ratanaparisibbitānī’’ti iminā yāni ratanaparisibbitāni, tāni bhūmattharaṇavasena, yathānurūpaṃ mañcapīṭhādīsu ca upanetuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Ajinacammehīti ajinamigacammehi. Tāni kira cammāni sukhumāni, tasmā dupaṭṭatipaṭṭāni katvā sibbanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ajinappaveṇī’’ti. Vuttanayenāti vinaye vuttanayena.
16 “装饰润饰”仅为装饰,并非药物,因为其所追求的只是打扮与装饰的快乐。“花”这个词在佛教教法中亦可用于指纯花,因此说“结缚的花或散花”。“土陶泥”指用药材调和而成的瑜伽用泥块。“扰动”指激扰之时。“血沉滞”指坏血耗尽之时。显示巴利原文
16.Alaṅkārañjanameva na bhesajjaṃ maṇḍanānuyogassa adhippetattā. Mālā-saddo sāsane suddhapupphesupi niruḷhoti āha ‘‘baddhamālā vā’’ti. Mattikakakkanti osadhehi abhisaṅkhataṃ yogamattikakakkaṃ. Caliteti kupite. Lohite sannisinneti duṭṭhalohite khīṇe.
17 “出离”:因能从恶趣和轮回中出离,故称为出离,即天道与解脱道。此出离是应得的,或者与出离相应,或者以出离为其果,因此称为“能导出的”;另一种解释是,从语恶行的染污中出离,因而将长音ī变为短音,将ya变为ka,成为niyyānikā,指伴随思心所的远离绮语。其对立面即“非导出的”,彼状态即“非导出性”,故说“由于是非导出的”。“畜生性”指障碍性。“于业处修习中”指结合无常随观而修习四谛业处。“有义”即与利益相关。“街巷”指屋舍聚集之处;以街巷代指其中居住的人,如同说“村庄来了”一般。因此才说“勇敢、有能力”以及“有信仰、清净的信心”。以盛水的瓮处来指称瓮婢女,故说“或者谈论瓮婢女的故事”。“世间论”即依生、住、资具等方面来叙述世间。显示巴利原文
17. Duggatito saṃsārato ca niyyāti etenāti niyyānaṃ, saggamaggo mokkhamaggo ca. Taṃ niyyānaṃ arahati, niyyāne vā niyuttā, niyyānaṃ vā phalabhūtaṃ etissā atthīti niyyānikā, vacīduccaritasaṃkilesato niyyātīti vā ī-kārassa rassattaṃ, ya-kārassa ca ka-kāraṃ katvā niyyānikā, cetanāya saddhiṃ samphappalāpā veramaṇi. Tappaṭipakkhato aniyyānikā, tassā bhāvo aniyyānikattaṃ, tasmā aniyyānikattā. Tiracchānabhūtāti tirokaraṇabhūtā. Kammaṭṭhānabhāveti aniccatāpaṭisaṃyuttacatusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāve. Saha atthenāti sātthakaṃ, hitapaṭisaṃyuttanti attho. Visikhāti gharasanniveso, visikhāgahaṇena ca tannivāsino gahitā ‘‘gāmo āgato’’tiādīsu viya. Tenevāha ‘‘sūrā samatthā’’ti, ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’ti ca. Kumbhaṭṭhānāpadesena kumbhadāsiyo vuttāti āha ‘‘kumbhadāsīkathā vā’’ti. Uppattiṭhitisambhārādivasena lokaṃ akkhāyatīti lokakkhāyikā.
18 “相违”:即前后矛盾。显示巴利原文
18.Sahitanti pubbāparāviruddhaṃ.
19 信使所做之事,名为信使事务;关于此事的谈论,即是信使事务之谈。显示巴利原文
19. Dūtassa kammaṃ dūteyyaṃ, tassa kathā dūteyyakathā.
20 “三种”:指依近处低语、依威仪、依资具受用这三种方式。“令惊奇”:指让他人对自己生起“啊,真是奇特之人”的惊奇感。“吹嘘”:指抬高自己或施主,以使对方有所给予而夸大其辞。“依相而行或制造相的人”称为占相者;所谓“相”,是指能引发施主布施心的身业与语业。“压榨”:即压榨;压榨者即是压榨者。所谓压榨,就像狡黠之人为了获得利养恭敬而进行的辱骂、讥嫌、嘲讽、背后中伤等行为。显示巴利原文
20.Tividhenāti sāmantajappanairiyāpathasannissitapaccayapaṭisevanabhedato tippakārena. Vimhāpayantīti ‘‘aho acchariyapuriso’’ti attani paresaṃ vimhayaṃ uppādenti. Lapantīti attānaṃ, dāyakaṃ vā ukkhipitvā yathā so kiñci dadāti, evaṃ ukkācetvā kathenti. Nimittena caranti, nimittaṃ vā karontīti nemittikā nimittanti ca paresaṃ paccaya dānasaññuppādakaṃ kāyavacīkammaṃ vuccati. Nippiṃsantīti nippesā, nippesāyeva nippesikā, nippesoti ca saṭhapuriso viya lābhasakkāratthaṃ akkosakhuṃsanuppaṇḍanaparapiṭṭhimaṃsikatādi.
大戒注释显示巴利原文
Mahāsīlavaṇṇanā
21 「肢」:因以肢体为境而说,故与肢体相应的学问即称为「肢」。对于「相」,也可依同样的道理理解。但有人则认为「肢」是指肢体的变化,即通过观察他人肢体的变化来预知利益或损失等。般度王是南摩腊婆的统治者。说「大的」,是表明有小征兆、大征兆以及灾异等。‘看见如此这般’:若有人在梦中见到自己骑在公牛、大象、楼阁或高山上,便会有如此这般的结果。所谓梦书,即是关于梦的学问。「肢」仅就显示肢体的成就与失败而言;「相」则是通过显示能成就大神力的特殊肢体特征,这便是二者的差别。「新的」指未用过的。此段起:涉及天、罗刹、人等种种品类的事物,若从此处或彼处截断,便会有种种受用等。达毗火供等,是根据火供所用器具等的差异,来显示果报的差别而施设的。火供是依其他成就方式而进行的火供。肢骨即身体。云学,是由护云者所造的论书,称为护云者论。地学即增长庄稼的学问,此据《精要略集》所说。有翅者……乃至……四足者:即苍蝇等有翅类、壁虎等无翅类、天与人、鹭等两足类、豺狼等四足类。显示巴利原文
21. Aṅgāni ārabbha pavattattā aṅgasahacaritaṃ satthaṃ ‘‘aṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Nimittanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Keci pana ‘‘aṅganti aṅgavikāra’’nti vadanti, paresaṃ aṅgavikāradassanenāpi lābhālābhādivijjāti. Paṇḍurājāti dakkhiṇāmadhurādhipati. ‘‘Mahantāna’’nti etena appakaṃ nimittaṃ, mahantaṃ nimittaṃ uppātoti dasseti. Idaṃ nāma passatīti yo vasabhaṃ kuñjaraṃ pāsādaṃ pabbataṃ vā āruḷhaṃ supine attānaṃ passati, tassa idaṃ nāma phalaṃ hotīti. Supinakanti supinasatthaṃ. Aṅgasampattivipattidassanamattena ādisanaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘aṅga’’nti iminā, ‘‘lakkhaṇa’’nti iminā pana mahānubhāvatānipphādakaaṅgalakkhaṇavisesadassanenāti ayametesaṃ visesoti. Ahateti nave. Ito paṭṭhāyāti devarakkhasamanussādibhedena vividhavatthabhāge ito vā etto vā sañchinne idaṃ nāma bhogādi hotīti. Dabbihomadīni homassupakaraṇādivisesehi phalavisesadassanavasena pavattāni. Aggihomaṃ vuttāvasesasādhanavasena pavattaṃ homaṃ. Aṅgalaṭṭhinti sarīraṃ. Abbhino satthaṃ abbheyyaṃ, māsurakkhena kato gantho māsurakkho. Bhūrivijjā sassabuddhikaraṇavijjāti sārasamāse. Sapakkhaka…pe… catuppadānanti piṅgalamakkhikādisapakkhaka gharagolikādiapakkhakadevamanussakoñcādidvipadakakaṇṭakajambukādicatuppadānaṃ.
23 「某日」是就半月中的第二日、第三日等日期而言。「由某星宿」是指与昴宿等星宿会合的情况。显示巴利原文
23.‘‘Asukadivase’’ti ‘‘pakkhassa dutiye tatiye’’tiādi tithivasena vuttaṃ. Asukanakkhattenāti rohiṇīādinakkhattayogavasena.
24 「陨星坠落」:指光芒坠落。当风团猛烈地互相撞击时,会产生如同灯光的光辉,从天空落下,这便称为陨星坠落。「不净」是就云、雾等而言。显示巴利原文
24.Ukkānaṃ patananti ukkobhāsānaṃ patanaṃ. Vātasaṅghātesu hi vegena aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭentesu dīpakobhāso viya obhāso uppajjitvā ākāsato patati, tatthāyaṃ ukkāpātavohāro. Avisuddhatā abbhamahikādīhi.
25 “倾泻”:即降雨。“手印”:指用手来示意传达,实为屈指计数而已。如同波斯、蔑戾车等人,以布丸计数的无孔计数那般。“六十产生等”:其中“等”字,包含了脱落、份额、夺取等事。以思维的方式:应知思维诗人是自己长时间思索事与义理之后而创作;闻诗人是听闻一部分后,将未曾听闻的部分加以连结而创作;义诗人是了知某一义理之后,通过略说、广释等方式而创作;辩才诗人则是见到他人所创的诗歌或戏剧后,凭自身应机的辩才,创作出与之相类的其他作品。显示巴利原文
25.Dhārānupavecchanaṃ vassanaṃ. Hatthena adhippetaviññāpanaṃ hatthamuddā, taṃ pana aṅgulisaṅkocanena gaṇanāyeva. Pārasika milakkhakādayo viya navantavasena gaṇanā acchiddakagaṇanā. Saṭuppādanādīti ādi-saddena vokalanabhāgahārādike saṅgaṇhāti. Cintāvasenāti vatthuṃ anusandhiñca sayameva cirena cintetvā karaṇavasena cintākavi veditabbo, kiñci sutvā sutena assutaṃ anusandhetvā karaṇavasena sutakavi, kañci atthaṃ upadhāretvā tassa saṅkhipanavitthāraṇādivasena atthakavi, yaṃ kiñci parena kataṃ kabbaṃ nāṭakaṃ vā disvā taṃ sadisameva aññaṃ attano ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānena karaṇavasena paṭibhānakavi veditabbo.
26 以执取的方式将女孩接来,称为“迎娶”;同样,让女孩被给出去,称为“嫁出”。在异地以获取双倍、三倍等回报的方式运用物品,称为“投资”;于此处或他处,按时间限定获取增值的运用,称为“回收”。也有人说:“让那些没有本金的人经商,然后说‘连同本金和这么多利润一并归还’,这样给钱是投资;而仅暂时给钱的,是回收。”关于“以三种原因”:这里的意思是,当风、虫等毁坏胎儿时,乃因过去的业未给予机会,故而业报成熟;然而,当业自身给予了机会时,则不必然观待风、虫等外缘,因此业被单独说为一种原因。“熄灭”:即令其止息。“对治”:即为使其不再咬啮而施作的对治。“翻转”:为配合武器等举起手后,又再举起的翻转。“耳语”:是把心愿诉诸天神耳边的祈请。“侍奉日神”:是以夹竹桃花鬘供养后,整日面对太阳而立,以此侍奉日神。有读作“以头呼唤”者,意为诵咒之后,用头来呼唤所愿之事。显示巴利原文
26. Pariggahabhāvena dārikāya gaṇhāpanaṃ āvāhanaṃ. Tathā dāpanaṃ vivāhanaṃ. Desantare diguṇatiguṇādigahaṇavasena bhaṇḍappayojanaṃ payogo. Tattha vā aññattha vā yathākālaparicchedaṃ vaḍḍhigahaṇavasena payojanaṃ uddhāro. ‘‘Bhaṇḍamūlarahitānaṃ vāṇijjaṃ katvā ettakenudayena saha mūlaṃ dethāti dhanadānaṃ payogo, tāvakālikadānaṃ uddhāro’’ti ca vadanti. Tīhi kāraṇehīti ettha vātena, pāṇakehi vā gabbhe vinassante na purimakammunā okāso kato, tappaccayā kammaṃ vipaccati. Sayameva pana kammunā okāse kate na ekantena vāto pāṇakā vā apekkhitabbāti kammassa visuṃ kāraṇabhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nibbāpanīyanti upasamakaraṃ. Paṭikammanti yathā te na khādanti, tathā paṭikaraṇaṃ. Parivattanatthanti āvudhādinā saha ukkhittahatthassa ukkhipanavasena parivattanatthaṃ. Icchitatthassa devatāya kaṇṇe kathanavasena jappanaṃ kaṇṇajappananti. Ādiccapāricariyāti karavīramālāhi pūjaṃ katvā sakaladivasaṃ ādiccābhimukhāvaṭṭhānena ādiccassa paricaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Siravhāyana’’nti keci paṭhanti, tassatthomantaṃ parijappitvā sirasā icchitassa atthassa avhāyananti.
27 “成就时”指所祈愿之事成就之时。“寂止许诺业”是指:为向天神祈请,应当进行回报的寂止,作出这样许诺的行为,也就是寂止的祈请之用。在此作为许诺之果报——即所如愿的业中,所谓“若我此事得以成就”。对此,即寂止许诺,也称为“誓愿”。因为依照许诺进行供奉时,誓愿与祈请便已交付。仅令妇女处于无欲的状态。“相”即男相。举行祭祀,既为挡灾,亦为招福。“过失”指胆汁等过患。其中,“下泻”指往下排泄。“上泻”是呕吐,因为说“向上排除诸过失”。同样,泻药即下泻;而下泻也包括净瓶、灌肠等事,因为说“向下排除诸过失”。头部泻泄,是为了排除痰等。“膜”即眼膜。外科医疗即眼科手术,这是为了将所说的其余外科医疗包含在内而说,应如此理解。因为滋补等措施也归属外科。“根本药”:能够有力平息主要疾病的药物,即名根本药;或者,能对治诸病中根本之病的药物,即名根本药。依随根本而有,疾病有两种:一旦根本疾病被治疗,余病大多便会随之平息。显示身体医疗:这是因为儿科、外科、眼科等,已作为医典分科在诸处分别说过,此处是依其余的方式陈述,因此……显示巴利原文
27.Samiddhikāleti āyācitassa atthassa siddhikāle. Santipaṭissavakammanti devatāyācanāya yā santi paṭikattabbā, tassā paṭiññāpaṭissavakammakaraṇaṃ, santiyā āyācanappayogoti attho. Tasminti paṭissavaphalabhūte yathābhipatthitakammasmiṃ, yaṃ ‘‘sace me idaṃ nāma samijjhissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassāti santipaṭissavassa, yo ‘‘paṇidhī’’ti ca vutto. Yathāpaṭissavañhi upahāre kate paṇidhi āyācanā katā niyyātitā hotīti. Acchandikabhāvamattanti itthiyā akāmakabhāvamattaṃ. Liṅganti purisaliṅgaṃ. Balikammakaraṇaṃ upaddavapaṭibāhanatthañceva vaḍḍhiāvahanatthañca. Dosānanti pittādidosānaṃ. Ettha ca vamananti pacchaṭṭanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Uddhaṃvirecananti vamanaṃ ‘‘uddhaṃ dosānaṃ nīharaṇa’’nti vuttattā. Tathā virecananti virecanameva. Adhovirecananti pana suddhivatthikasāvatthiādi vatthikiriyāpi adhippetā ‘‘adho dosānaṃ nīharaṇa’’nti vuttattā. Sīsavirecanaṃ semhanīharaṇādi. Paṭalānīti akkhipaṭalāni. Salākavejjakammanti akkhivejjakammaṃ, idaṃ vuttāvasesasālākiyasaṅgahaṇatthaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbanti. Tappanādayopi hi sālākiyānevāti. Mūlāni padhānāni rogūpasame samatthāni bhesajjāni mūlabhesajjāni, mūlānaṃ vā byādhīnaṃ bhesajjāni mūlabhesajjāni. Mūlānubandhavasena hi duvidho byādhi. Mūlaroge ca tikicchite yebhuyyena itaraṃ vūpasamatīti. ‘‘Kāyatikicchanaṃdassetī’’ti idaṃ komārabhaccasallakattasālākiyādikaraṇavisesabhūtatantīnaṃ tattha tattha vuttattā pārisesavasena vuttaṃ, tasmā tadavasesāya tantiyāpi idha saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sabbāni cetāni ājīvahetukāniyeva idhādhippetāni ‘‘micchājīvena jīvikaṃ kappentī’’ti vuttattā . Yaṃ pana tattha tattha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘iti vā’’ti vuttaṃ, tattha itīti pakāratthe nipāto, vā-iti vikappanatthe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti iminā pakārena, ito aññe na vāti. Tena yāni ito bāhirakapabbajitā sippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānādīni jīvikopāyabhūtāni ājīvapakatā upajīvanti, tesaṃ pariggaho katoti veditabbo.
前际论者常住论的解释。显示巴利原文
Pubbantakappikasassatavādavaṇṇanā
28 所谓「比丘僧团所说的解释」,即从“乃至世尊……”等开端的阐述。此处的关联如下——“诸比丘,并非只有你们所见的这些佛陀功德而已,更有不显明的功德,如‘诸比丘,还有其他法……’”这样的广说。在其中,通过“这些见处如此被执取”等说明,揭示了常见等见处虽被执取,其体性实为空;通过“他了知彼而不执取”一句,指出戒等的不执取、能导向出离的性质,进而显示它们并无恒常的实核等。此外,那些未离贪染的外道,对于诸受生起了这些见的纷扰;教说通过显示这些纷扰之缘——如痴等——以及感受者、作者的自性并不存在,由此彰显了一切法无我、无我所的特性;又通过显示无执取的般涅槃,表明这一教说以彰显空性为要旨,所以说“开始揭示空性”。所谓「教典」,即分为律藏等不同部类的经论。所谓「教说」,即对那条教典以心意作出确定而进行的阐明,或根据法义如理宣说而成为言说,或以随顺等方式进行的解说。教典与教说的差别,前文已作界定,因此说“于教说中,于教典中”。“如这些等”中的「等」字,包含了真理、自性、定显示巴利原文
28.Bhikkhusaṅghena vuttavaṇṇo nāma ‘‘yāvañcidaṃ tena bhagavatā’’tiādinā vuttavaṇṇo. Etthāyaṃ sambandho – na bhikkhave ettakā eva buddhaguṇā, ye tumhākaṃ pākaṭā, apākaṭā pana ‘‘atthi bhikkhave aññe dhammā’’ti vitthāro. Tattha ‘‘ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṃ gahitā’’tiādinā sassatādidiṭṭhiṭṭhānānaṃ yathāgahitākārasuññatabhāvappakāsanato, ‘‘tañca pajānanaṃ na parāmasatī’’ti sīlādīnañca aparāmāsaniyyānikabhāvadīpanena niccasārādivirahappakāsanato, yāsu vedanāsu avītarāgatāya bāhirakānaṃ etāni diṭṭhivipphanditāni sambhavanti, tesaṃ paccayabhūtānañca sammohādīnaṃ vedakakārakasabhāvābhāvadassanamukhena sabbadhammānaṃ attattaniyatāvirahadīpanato, anupādāparinibbānadīpanato ca ayaṃ desanā suññatāvibhāvanappadhānāti āha ‘‘suññatāpakāsanaṃ ārabhī’’ti. Pariyattīti vinayādibhedabhinnā tanti. Desanāti tassā tantiyā manasāvavatthāpitāya vibhāvanā, yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpabhūtā vā paññāpanā, anulomādivasena vā kathananti pariyattidesanānaṃ viseso pubbeyeva vavatthāpitoti āha ‘‘desanāyaṃ pariyattiya’’nti. Evaṃ ādīsūti ettha ādi-saddena saccasabhāvasamādhipaññāpakatipuññaāpattiñeyyādayo saṅgayhanti. Tathā hi ayaṃ dhamma-saddo ‘‘catunnaṃ bhikkhave dhammānaṃ ananubodhā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.186; a. ni. 4.1) sacce vattati, ‘‘kusalā dhammā akusalā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1) sabhāve, ‘‘evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto ahesu’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.378) samādhimhi, ‘‘saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, sa ve pecca na socatī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 190) paññāya, ‘‘jātidhammānaṃ bhikkhave sattānaṃ evaṃ icchā uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.373; paṭi. ma. 1.33) pakatiyaṃ, ‘‘dhammo suciṇṇo sukhamāvahātī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 184; theragā. 303; jā. 1.10.102) puññe, ‘‘cattāro pārājikā dhammā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 233) āpattiyaṃ, ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthaṃ āgacchantī’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.6) ñeyye vattati (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.suttanikkhepavaṇṇanā; abhi. aṭṭha. 1.tikamātikāpadavaṇṇanā; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. ratanacaṅkamanakaṇḍavaṇṇanā). Dhammā hontīti suññā dhammamattā hontīti attho.
以「难见」一词,便已显示这些法难以契入。然而,若有人不自量力,欲凭自己的智慧深入这些法,他的智慧将毫无立足之处,犹如蚊喙试图刺入大海一般,故说「不可得立足处」。应知此处“不可得立足处”的分解为:立足处于此中不可得。正因立足处不可得,无法深入观察并说出“这些只有如此之多,这些就是如此”,故说「唯因甚深,所以难见」。既然连见也不可得,想要深入其中去了知,也就更无从谈起,故说「唯因难见,所以更难觉」。
这些法生起于一切热恼止息的顶点,并与熄灭一切热恼的等至境界相融合,故是「熄灭一切热恼的」。说它们是「平静的所缘」,是因为那些自性不寂静的烦恼和诸行皆已止息。或可理解为:由于作意恒时处于定中、散乱已除,依此所缘的诸法便呈现寂静的状态,犹如破除遍相之后,空无边处识所展现的无限性一般。
犹如射手精准击中靶心,能如实无谬地了知诸法自性,这是甘美且殊胜的,故说「以无厌倦的含义」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Duddasā’’ti eteneva tesaṃ dhammānaṃ dukkhogāhatā pakāsitā hoti. Sace pana koci attano pamāṇaṃ ajānanto ñāṇena te dhamme ogāhituṃ ussāhaṃ kareyya, tassa taṃ ñāṇaṃ appatiṭṭhameva makasatuṇḍasūci viya mahāsamuddeti āha ‘‘alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā’’ti. Alabbhaneyyā patiṭṭhā etthāti alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhāti padaviggaho veditabbo. Alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhānaṃ ogāhituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ‘‘ettakā ete īdisā cā’’ti passituṃ na sakkāti vuttaṃ ‘‘gambhīrattā eva duddasā’’ti. Ye pana daṭṭhumeva na sakkā, tesaṃ ogāhitvā anubujjhane kathā eva natthīti āha ‘‘duddasattā eva duranubodhā’’ti. Sabbapariḷāhapaṭippassaddhimatthake samuppannattā, nibbutasabbapariḷāhasamāpattisamokiṇṇattā ca nibbutasabbapariḷāhā. Santārammaṇāni maggaphalanibbānāni anupasantasabhāvānaṃ kilesānaṃ saṅkhārānañca abhāvato. Atha vā samūhatavikkhepatāya niccasamāhitassa manasikārassa vasena tadārammaṇadhammānaṃ santabhāvo veditabbo kasiṇugghāṭimākāsatabbisayaviññāṇānaṃ anantabhāvo viya. Avirajjhitvā nimittapaṭivedho viya issāsānaṃ avirajjhitvā dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvabodho sāduraso mahāraso ca hotīti āha atittikaraṇaṭṭhenāti. Paṭivedhappattānaṃ, tesu ca buddhānaṃyeva sabbākārena visayabhāvūpagamanato na takkabuddhiyā gocarāti āha ‘‘uttamañāṇavisayattā’’tiādi. ‘‘Nipuṇā’’ti ñeyyesu tikkhavisadavuttiyā chekā. Yasmā pana so chekabhāvo ārammaṇe appaṭihatavuttitāya sukhumañeyyagahaṇasamatthatāya supākaṭo hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saṇhasukhumasabhāvattā’’ti.
另一种解释方法:因清晰地阐明了律的制定等甚深、应被引导的意义,故称「甚深」。有时即使历经无量无数大劫,也甚难有缘得见,故称「难见」。此处的“见”,应知专指依慧眼而见。
由于名为“法随觉”的随顺觉知,唯极少数人能生起,故称「更难觉」。
因其体性寂静,且为可教化众生功德圆满的终极所依,故称「寂静」。
因其被种种缘牵引至极为殊胜的状态,故称「殊胜」。
因已证得真实谛的相状,故非逻辑推论之思慧所能行历;或因非推理之慧所能行历,故称「非寻思所行」。
它本身微细,或以微细之义,依真实、缘起等方式进行阐明,故称「微妙」。
这些法,唯有世间最顶尖的智者——正自觉者——所亲证并明示,故称「唯智者能知」。因世尊获得无碍智,故宣说:“我是一切知者……诸比丘,如来成就十力……”等,由此彰显自他的一切知性等功德。因此,注释说:“自己证知、作证后”显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo – vinayapaṇṇattiādigambhīraneyyavibhāvanato gambhīrā. Kadāci asaṅkhyeyyamahākappe atikkamitvāpi dullabhadassanatāya duddasā. Dassanañcettha paññācakkhuvaseneva veditabbaṃ. Dhammanvayasaṅkhātassa anubodhassa kassacideva sambhavato duranubodhā. Santasabhāvato, veneyyānañca guṇasampadānaṃ pariyosānattā santā. Attano ca paccayehi padhānabhāvaṃ nītatāya paṇītā. Samadhigatasaccalakkhaṇatāya atakkehi, atakkena vā ñāṇena avacaritabbatāya atakkāvacarā. Nipuṇaṃ, nipuṇe vā atthe saccappaccayākārādivasena vibhāvanato nipuṇā. Loke aggapaṇḍitena sammāsambuddhena vedīyanti pakāsīyantīti paṇḍitavedanīyā. Anāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhato hi bhagavā ‘‘sabbavidū haṃ asmi, (dha. pa. 353; mahāva. 11; kathā. 405) dasabalasamannāgato bhikkhave tathāgato’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.21) attano sabbaññutādiguṇe pakāseti. Tenevāha ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetī’’ti.
在此,虽然一切知智并不像果与涅槃那样具有应当被亲证的自体,但当漏尽智被证得时,它也便一同被证得了,因此,将它的现前成就称为‘作证’,故说‘以殊胜的智现前作证后’。而‘以殊胜的智’是表示原因义的工具格,意思是‘由于殊胜智的证得’。或者,如果将‘殊胜智’理解为省察智,工具格的用法也同样成立。而这里的‘宣说’,应知是因为能成就对属于智所行境的诸谛等的说法作用,以及由于‘我是正自觉者’等的宣称。‘正在说者’中,māna一词是‘意欲’之义,意为‘正努力想说者’。处于这种状态的人,正是想要说的人,因此说为‘想要宣说功德者’。即使有所保留地说,也如同颠倒说,不能称为‘正确地宣说’,故说‘无遗漏地’,由此显示此处的‘正’字具有无余的含义。以‘能说’来显示‘说’这个词具有表示自身意义的作用。而在此,虽然世尊的十力等智也是不与其他人共通的,但由于那些智的所缘范围是局部的,因此凭借它们并未能无遗漏地把握佛陀的功德;然而,由于一切知智的所缘范围是毫无剩余的,当它被把握时,一切佛陀功德也就确实被把握了。为了彰显这个意义,故说‘若有人’显示巴利原文
Tattha kiñcāpi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ phalanibbānāni viya sacchikātabbasabhāvaṃ na hoti, āsavakkhayañāṇe pana adhigate adhigatameva hotīti tassa paccakkhakaraṇaṃ sacchikiriyāti āha ‘‘abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena paccakkhaṃ katvā’’ti. Abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇenāti ca hetuatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, abhivisiṭṭhañāṇādhigamahetūti attho. Abhivisiṭṭhañāṇanti vā paccavekkhaṇañāṇe adhippete karaṇavacanampi yujjatiyeva. Pavedanañcettha aññāvisayānaṃ saccādīnaṃ desanākiccasādhanato, ‘‘ekomhi sammāsambuddho’’tiādinā (mahāva. 11; kathā. 405) paṭijānanato ca veditabbaṃ. Vadamānāti ettha sattiattho māna-saddo, vattuṃ ussāhaṃ karontoti attho. Evaṃbhūtā ca vattukāmā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘vaṇṇaṃ vattukāmā’’ti. Sāvasesaṃ vadantopi viparītaṃ vadanto viya ‘‘sammā vadatī’’ti na vattabboti āha ‘‘ahāpetvā’’ti, tena anavasesattho idha sammā-saddoti dasseti. ‘‘Vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyu’’nti iminā ‘‘vadeyyu’’nti sakatthadīpanabhāvamāha. Ettha ca kiñcāpi bhagavato dasabalādiñāṇānipi anaññasādhāraṇāni, sappadesavisayattā pana tesaṃ ñāṇānaṃ na tehi buddhaguṇā ahāpetvā gahitā nāma honti, nippadesavisayattā pana sabbaññutaññāṇassa tasmiṃ gahite sabbepi buddhaguṇā gahitā eva nāma hontīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘yehi…pe… vadeyyu’’nti. Puthūni ārammaṇāni etassāti puthuārammaṇaṃ, sabbārammaṇattāti adhippāyo. Atha vā puthuārammaṇārammaṇatoti etasmiṃ atthe ‘‘puthuārammaṇato’’ti vuttaṃ, ekassa ārammaṇa-saddassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘oṭṭhamukho kāmāvacara’’nti ādīsu viya, tenassa puthuñāṇakiccasādhakataṃ dasseti. Tathā hetaṃ tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇaṃ, pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇaṃ, chasu asādhāraṇañāṇesu sesāsādhāraṇañāṇāni, sattaariyapuggalavibhāvakañāṇaṃ, aṭṭhasupi parisāsu akampanañāṇaṃ, navasattāvāsaparijānanañāṇaṃ, dasabalañāṇanti evamādīnaṃ anekasatasahassabhedānaṃ ñāṇānaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetīti. ‘‘Punappunaṃ uppattivasenā’’ti etena sabbaññutaññāṇassa kamavuttitaṃ dasseti. Kamenāpi hi taṃ visayesu pavattati, na sakiṃyeva yathā bāhirakā vadanti ‘‘sakiṃyeva sabbaññū sabbaṃ jānāti, na kamenā’’ti.
如果是这样,对于具有不可思维、不可度量差别的所知,又如何能以有分齐的单一智来无余地通达呢?或者,是谁曾这样说——‘佛陀的智是有分齐的’呢?要知道,佛智如同所知一样,是无量的。诚然,经中曾这样说过:‘所知有多少,智慧就有多少;智慧有多少,所知就有多少。’即便如此,当所知依生类、界、自性等,以及依方位、时间等而分为众多差别,并被次第把握时,无余通达难道不确实不可能实现吗?事实并非如此。为什么?因为凡是世尊想要了知的,无论是全部还是一部分,对此,智都能以无滞无碍的方式现前运转;又由于无有散乱,世尊在一切时中皆处于定中,对于想要了知的对象,其现前性不可被阻挡,正如经中所说‘佛陀世尊的智是系于愿望的’等等。而且,在此不应理解为:世尊的智在通达众多法时,是以不取具体形相的方式运转,如同远观一幅画的人,又或者如同观照‘一切法无我’的人那样。应知这是由于佛智具有不可思议的威神力。因此,经中说‘佛的境界是不可思议的’。而在此,决定的结论是:世尊由于获得了能依一切方式通达一切法、系于愿望而运转的无障碍智,并且由于断除了一切所知障,其相续能够通达一切法,因此是‘一切知者’,而并非仅一次就通达一切法显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ acinteyyāparimeyyabhedassa ñeyyassa paricchedavatā ekena ñāṇena niravasesato kathaṃ paṭivedhoti, ko vā evamāha ‘‘paricchedavantaṃ buddhañāṇa’’nti. Anantañhi taṃ ñāṇaṃ ñeyyaṃ viya. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyya’’nti (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5). Evampi jātibhūmisabhāvādivasena disādesakālādivasena ca anekabhedabhinne ñeyye kamena gayhamāne anavasesapaṭivedho na sambhavati yevāti, nayidamevaṃ. Kasmā? Yaṃ kiñci bhagavatā ñātuṃ icchitaṃ sakalaṃ ekadeso vā. Tattha appaṭihatacāratāya paccakkhato ñāṇaṃ pavattati, vikkhepābhāvato ca bhagavā sabbakālaṃ samāhitova ñātuṃ, icchitassa paccakkhabhāvo na sakkā nivāretuṃ ‘‘ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇa’’ntiādi (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato, na cettha dūrato cittapaṭaṃ passantānaṃ viya, ‘‘sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti vipassantānaṃ viya ca anekadhammāvabodhakāle anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti gahetabbaṃ acinteyyānubhāvatāya buddhañāṇassa. Tenevāha ‘‘buddhavisayo acinteyyo’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃsabbākārena sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthassa ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhavuttino anāvaraṇañāṇassa paṭilābhena bhagavā santānena sabbadhammapaṭivedhasamattho ahosi sabbaneyyāvaraṇassa pahānato, tasmā sabbaññū, na sakiṃyeva sabbadhammāvabodhato , yathā santānena sabbaindhanassa dahanasamatthatāya pāvako ‘‘sabbabhū’’ti vuccatīti.
「决定说」即结论性的表述,意为确定不移的说法。在此,通过确定,显示了被排除的内容,即“不是离杀生等”。而这个“唯”字,如同“亦”字一样,因其并非固定出现在某一处,所以即使是在它被说出的地方之外,也会根据表达的需要而现起,因此注释说“或者是甚深……”等。
「以一切句」,是指一直到“唯智者能知”这一句为止,以所有前面的句子。
「声闻波罗蜜智」,是指声闻通过圆满修行布施等波罗蜜所成就的智慧,它分为三明、六神通、四无碍解等类别。
「由此」,即从声闻波罗蜜智。
「于此」,即在声闻波罗蜜智上。
「乃至更由此」,是指从紧接着被指出的独觉佛智之后,言下之意是:连高于它的独觉佛智都尚且如此,更何况是声闻波罗蜜智呢?
这里的义理衔接是这样的:虽然声闻波罗蜜智相较于低下的有学智和凡夫智是甚深的,但相较于独觉佛智,则并非如此甚深,因此不能绝对地说“唯是甚深”。同样地,独觉佛智相较于一切知智,也无法确立这种决定性。然而,对于一切知智所领悟的法来说,它不像声闻波罗蜜智等那样,需要依靠与某个对比的对象相比才能被称为甚深显示巴利原文
Vavatthāpanavacananti sanniṭṭhāpanavacanaṃ, avadhāraṇavacananti attho. Aññe vāti ettha avadhāraṇena nivattitaṃ dasseti ‘‘na pāṇātipātā veramaṇiādayo’’ti, ayañca eva-saddo aniyatadesatāya ca-saddo viya yattha vutto, tato aññatthāpi vacanicchāvasena upatiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘gambhīrā vā’’tiādi. Sabbapadehīti yāva ‘‘paṇḍitavedanīyā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ, tāva sabbapadehi. Sāvakapāramiñāṇanti sāvakānaṃ dānādipāripūriyā nipphannaṃ vijjattayachaḷabhiññācatuppaṭisambhidādibhedaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tatoti sāvakapāramiñāṇato. Tatthāti sāvakapāramiñāṇe. Tatopīti anantaraniddiṭṭhato paccekabuddhañāṇatopi, ko pana vādo sāvakapāramiñāṇatoti adhippāyo. Etthāyaṃ atthayojanā – kiñcāpi sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ heṭṭhimasekkhañāṇaṃ puthujjanañāṇañca upādāya gambhīraṃ, paccekabuddhañāṇaṃ upādāya na tathā gambhīranti ‘‘gambhīramevā’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ. Tathā paccekabuddhañāṇampi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ upādāyāti tattha vavatthānaṃ na labbhati, sabbaññutaññāṇadhammā pana sāvakapāramiñāṇādīnaṃ viya kiñci upādāya agambhīrabhāvābhāvato gambhīrā vāti. Yathā cettha vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ duddasaṃ, paccekabuddhañāṇaṃ pana tato duddasataranti tattha vavatthānaṃ natthītiādinā vavatthānasabbhāvo netabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘tathā duddasāva…pe… veditabba’’nti.
为何以此方式开头?其意图是:姑且不论其余,一切知智虽仅一智,但因它堪能无余开显诸佛功德,故以“诸比丘,另有其他法”等复数文句总摄,以此成就其具备众多所依、多种所缘与多种智用。那么,在后续详释时,为何不依真实、缘起等特有的不共方式分别解说,却选择从分析诸“见”入手?
这是为了说明:正如对真实、缘起等的分别是不共的、唯属一切知智的所行境一般,这种对恶见的无余分别,同样是不共的、唯属一切知智的所行境,因此才以“因为佛陀……”等语开始。
此处,“处”即原因。
“吼声广大”,意谓由于所教化的义理种类繁多、甚深难解,当以种种理路展开教导时,此教法的狮子吼便极广大、极广博,且具多重分类。
“智随入”:正因如此,能教导的智慧在将所教之法加以区分剖析时,便随之契入法之深处,犹如安住其中——此即其义。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panetaṃ evaṃ āraddhaṃti etthāyaṃ adhippāyo – bhavatu tāva niravasesabuddhaguṇavibhāvanūpāyabhāvato sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ekampi puthunissayārammaṇañākiccasiddhiyā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave aññeva dhammā’’tiādinā bahuvacanena uddiṭṭhaṃ, tassa pana vissajjanaṃ saccapaccayākārādivisesavasena anaññasādhāraṇena vibhajananayena anārabhitvā sanissayānaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ vibhajanavasena kasmā āraddhanti. Tattha yathā saccapaccayākārādīnaṃ vibhajanaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇasseva visayo, evaṃ niravasesena diṭṭhigatavibhajanampīti dassetuṃ ‘‘buddhānañhī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ṭhānānīti kāraṇāni. Gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hotīti desetabbassa atthassa anekavidhatāya, duviññeyyatāya ca nānānayehi pavattamānaṃ desanāgajjitaṃ mahantaṃ vipulaṃ, bahubhedañca hoti. Ñāṇaṃ anupavisatīti tato eva ca desanāñāṇaṃ desetabbadhamme vibhāgaso kurumānaṃ anupavisati, te anupavissa ṭhitaṃ viya hotīti attho.
“佛陀之智的广大性得以彰显”,意谓:能教导并通达如此深妙之法的导师——佛陀,其教说智与通达智的殊胜、伟大,由此变得十分显明。
此处,虽依“佛陀世尊的一切语业,皆是以智为先导、以智为随转”之说,世尊所有言说无一刻离于智慧,且世尊于一切处说法皆如师子,展现出同一无惧的精进力;然而应知,随所教法之不同,教说在特定场合中,智慧会显现更深之契入,其所诠法义也更显甚深。
那么,当涉及律仪之制定时,教说又如何触及无常、苦、无我这三相,并与空性相应呢?因此处乃为应彼时在场大众之意乐而作教说,故同样开示诸行无常等性,并彰明一切法无我、无我所之本质。是故经云:“以种种方便说法……”等。显示巴利原文
Buddhañāṇassa mahantabhāvo paññāyatīti evaṃvidhassa nāma dhammassa desakaṃ paṭivedhakañcāti buddhānaṃ desanāñāṇassa paṭivedhañāṇassa ca uḷārabhāvo pākaṭo hoti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi ‘‘sabbaṃ vacīkammaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivattī’’ti (mahāni. 69; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5; netti. 14) vacanato sabbāpi bhagavato desanā ñāṇarahitā natthi, sīhasamānavuttitāya ca sabbattha samānussāhappavatti desetabbadhammavasena pana desanā visesato ñāṇena anupaviṭṭhā gambhīratarā ca hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kathaṃ pana vinayapaṇṇattiṃ patvā desanā tilakkhaṇāhatā suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttā hotīti? Tatthāpi ca sannisinnaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ pavattamānā desanā saṅkhārānaṃ aniccatādivibhāvanī, sabbadhammānaṃ attattaniyatābhāvappakāsanī ca hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘anekapariyāyena dhammiṃ kathaṃ katvā’’tiādi.
“地差别”,指诸法的状态差别与处所差别。其中,状态差别即念处、根、力、觉支、道支等分类;处所差别即欲界等分类。“缘起句”之义,已如前说。“时差别”,指见的差别,即种种不同之见;或又指其他时。如是,依于轻、重等因缘,当相应之事出现时,便据此制立学处。显示巴利原文
Bhūmantaranti dhammānaṃ avatthāvisesañca ṭhānavisesañca. Tattha avatthāvisesosatiādidhammānaṃ satipaṭṭhānindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgādibhedo. Ṭhānaviseso kāmāvacarādibhedo. Paccayākārapadassa attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Samayantaranti diṭṭhivisesā, nānāvihitā diṭṭhiyoti attho, aññasamayaṃ vā. Evaṃ otiṇṇe vatthusminti evaṃ lahukagarukādivasena tadanurūpe otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanaṃ.
虽然通过身随观念处等方式,念处等法在经藏中也有解说,然而通过“经分别”等方式,这些法在阿毗达摩中才得到了尤为详尽的分别,因此他说:“此四念处……(中略)……分别阿毗达摩藏”。其中,“七触”是用来表示与七识界相应的。“七受”等也是如此。在“出世间法”一词中,“iti”一字表起始,或表行相,由此也包含了阿毗达摩中所述其余诸法应被分别的方式。此处有二十四种周围缘摄,故称“二十四周围缘摄”,即阿毗达摩藏。此处不考虑缘的关联,仅从法本身的角度设立这二十四种周围缘摄的分类。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Yadipi kāyānupassanādivasena satipaṭṭhānādayo suttantapiṭakepi (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107) vibhattā, suttantabhājanīyādivasena pana abhidhammeyeva te savisesaṃ vibhattāti āha ‘‘ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā…pe… abhidhammapiṭakaṃ vibhajitvā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘satta phassā’’ti sattaviññāṇadhātusampayogavasena vuttaṃ. Tathā ‘‘satta vedanā’’tiādīsupi. Lokuttarā dhammā nāmāti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, tena vuttāvasesaṃ abhidhamme āgataṃ dhammānaṃ vibhajitabbākāraṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Catuvīsati samantapaṭṭhānāni etthāti catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānaṃ, abhidhammapiṭakaṃ. Ettha paccayanayaṃ aggahetvā dhammavaseneva samantapaṭṭhānassa catuvīsatividhatā vuttā. Yathāha –
三法、最上之发趣、无上二法,
以及二法纳入三法、三法纳入二法;
三法、二法种种分别,
于顺次中,有六种甚深理趣。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Tikañca paṭṭhānavaraṃ dukuttamaṃ, Dukatikañceva tikadukañca; Tikatikañceva dukadukañca, Cha anulomamhi nayā sugambhīrā. (paṭṭhā. 1.paccayaniddesa 41, 44, 48, 52);
Tikañca…pe… cha paccanīyamhi nayā sugambhīrā; Tikañca…pe… cha anulomapaccanīyamhi nayā sugambhīrā; Tikañca…pe… paccanīyānulomamhi nayā sugambhīrā’’ti. (paṭṭhā. 1.paccayaniddesa 44, 52);
如此,依于法而有二十四种之分,在三法发趣等之中,每一种以缘的方式而分随顺等四种,故有九十六种周遍发趣。其中,于法随顺的三法发趣中,就善三法而言,在缘分别、缘随顺、因根之中,以因缘而说,有四十九种问分、七种答分等,所展示的分位有无量的差别,因此称为“无边理”。此外还有:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ dhammavasena catuvīsatibhedesu tikapaṭṭhānādīsu ekekaṃ paccayanayena anulomādivasena catubbidhaṃ hotīti channavuti samantapaṭṭhānāni. Tattha pana dhammānulome tikapaṭṭhāne kusalattike paṭiccavāre paccayānulome hetumūlake hetupaccayavasena ekūnapaññāsa pucchānayā satta vissajjananayāti ādinā dassiyamānā anantabhedā nayāti āha ‘‘anantanaya’’nti. Hoti cettha –
所谓“发趣”,是指对于一一法,于随顺等中,依三法、二法等,以缘根为殊胜的四种理,展现为七种趣向。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paṭṭhānaṃ nāma paccekaṃ dhammānaṃ anulomādimhi tikadukādīsu yā paccayamūlavisiṭṭhā catunayato sattadhā gatī’’ti.
“以九种行相”:即依于“生”等九种缘的行相。其中,“生”:因为果从此而生起,故名为“生”,意即生起的原因性。当无明存在时,诸行便生起;若无明不存在,则不生起。因此,无明以“生”的方式成为诸行的缘。同样地,当无明存在时,诸行转起、持续、安住;当无明存在时,它们将果投掷于“有”等之中;它们造作积聚,为生果而加功用;与自果相合;在自相续中,自分生起后,即系缚彼相续;在其余诸缘和合时,它们兴起、生起;并且,无明完成了对于诸行的因性——即“以无明为缘,诸行生起”而转起。像这样,无明在成就诸行因性上的种种不同,便是“生”等九相,应当了知。同样地,对于行等缘于识等,也是如此。显示巴利原文
Navahākārehīti uppādādīhi navahi paccayākārehi. Tattha uppajjati etasmā phalanti uppādo, uppattiyā kāraṇabhāvo. Sati ca avijjāya saṅkhārā uppajjanti, na asati, tasmā avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ uppādo hutvā paccayo hoti. Tathā avijjāya sati saṅkhārā pavattanti dharanti, nivisanti ca, te avijjāya sati phalaṃ bhavādīsu khipanti, āyūhanti phaluppattiyā ghaṭanti, saṃyujjanti attano phalena, yasmiṃ santāne sayañca uppannā, taṃ palibundhanti, paccayantarasamavāye udayanti uppajjanti, hinoti ca saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchati, paṭicca avijjaṃ saṅkhārā ayanti pavattantīti evaṃ avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvūpagamanavisesā uppādādayo veditabbā. Tathā saṅkhārādīnaṃ viññāṇādīsu.
在“生、住”等词中,“住”由“依此而住”得名,故“住”即是因。“生”本身即是“住”,因此名为“生住”。此理也适用于其他行相。由于不如理作意,且依“由漏集起故,无明集起”之说,诸漏亦为无明之缘,故说“这两种法都是缘所生”。“缘摄受慧”:即对于行等诸法及无明,能辨别把握生等缘相而生起的智慧。“法住智”:即对于缘所生法,依缘性而了知法住,也就是缘起的智慧。何以故?缘起中的缘法,依十二缘起之说,故有十二支缘。此理不仅通于现在,也通于过去与未来;不但无明缘行,行等缘识等也是如此。为了圆满开示缘相的种种品类,故以“过去时”等经文为始。《发趣》中所显示的因等诸缘,在此是以生等缘相来理解的,因此应善巧对应而结合说明,然而恐过于冗长,故不作结合。显示巴利原文
Uppādaṭṭhitītiādīsu ca tiṭṭhati etenāti ṭhiti, kāraṇaṃ. Uppādo eva ṭhiti uppādaṭṭhiti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Yasmā ayonisomanasikāro, ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103) vacanato āsavā ca avijjāya paccayo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhopete dhammā paccayasamuppannā’’ti. Paccayapariggahe paññāti saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāya ca uppādādike paccayākāre paricchinditvā gahaṇavasena pavattā paññā. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti dhammānaṃ paccayuppannānaṃ paccayabhāvato dhammaṭṭhitisaṅkhāte paṭiccasamuppāde ñāṇaṃ. Paccayadhammā hi paṭiccasamuppāde ‘‘dvādasa paṭiccasamuppādā’’ti vacanato dvādasa paccayā. Ayañca nayo na paccuppanne eva, atha kho atītānāgatakālepi, na ca avijjāya eva saṅkhāresu, atha kho saṅkhārādīnampi viññāṇādīsu labbhatīti paripuṇṇaṃ katvā paccayākārassa vibhattabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atītampi addhāna’’ntiādi pāḷiṃ ārabhi. Paṭṭhāne (paṭṭhā. 1.paccayaniddesa 1) dassitā hetādipaccayā evettha uppādādipaccayākārehi gahitāti te yathāsambhavaṃ nīharitvā yojetabbā, ativitthārabhayena pana na yojayimha.
“彼彼法”:指各个由缘所生的法,如行等。“如如缘性”:即以如是缘性,即生等、因等的缘性。由过去、现在、未来三时,故称“三时”。由因-果、果-因、因-果三种连结,故称“三连结”。“摄”:此处是将无明等与识等总摄为业与异熟。或说“摄”为部分之义。过去由业摄等而有四种摄,故称“四种摄”。“行相”:虽未直接显示其自性,但在每一摄中,通过把握无明、行等项目而得以显了,故称“行相”;或者说,过去因等的类别即是“行相”。这些行相于每一摄中各有五种,故总为二十种行相,称为“二十行相”。显示巴利原文
Tassa tassa dhammassāti tassa tassa saṅkhārādipaccayuppannadhammassa. Tathā tathā paccayabhāvenāti uppādādihetādipaccayabhāvena. Atītapaccuppannānāgatavasena tayo addhā kālā etassāti tiyaddhaṃ. Hetuphalaphalahetuhetuphalavasena tayo sandhī etassāti tisandhiṃ. Saṅkhippanti ettha avijjādayo viññāṇādayo cāti saṅkhepo, kammaṃ vipāko ca. Saṅkhippanti etthāti vā saṅkhepo, avijjādayo viññāṇādayo ca. Koṭṭhāsapariyāyo vā saṅkhepa-saddo. Atīte kammasaṅkhepādivasena cattāro saṅkhepā etassāti catusaṅkhepaṃ. Sarūpato avuttāpi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ saṅkhepe ākirīyanti avijjāsaṅkhārādiggahaṇehi pakāsīyantīti ākārā, atīte hetuādīnaṃ vā pakārā ākārā, te saṅkhepe pañca pañca katvā vīsatiākārā etassāti vīsatākāraṃ.
虽常住论者因刹帝利等差别而分多种,但依忆念百千生等执著之因,实际上仅有四种,不增不减。为显示常住论等数量限定及其不共境界,故说“四种人”等。其中,“四种人”指四类人群。“依此”:指对此“此缘性”的正确把握;虽因果相续紧密无间、未作区分,且于胜义中存在差别,却因未思择差别之理而执取单一性。“执此”:指执取此常见而转起;依此道理,一分常住论等亦可相应结合说明。“分解”:即由“依勤精进”等加以分析,并以“诸比丘,如来了知此”等予以破斥,解开结缚、显露丛聚,即解开见结、显露见丛。显示巴利原文
Khattiyādibhedena anekabhedabhinnāpi sassatavādino jātisatasahassānussaraṇādino abhinivesahetuno vasena cattārova honti , na tato uddhaṃ adhoti sassatavādādīnaṃ parimāṇaparicchedassa anaññavisayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cattāro janā’’tiādimāha. Tattha cattāro janāti cattāro janasamūhā. Idaṃ nissāyāti idaṃ idappaccayatāya sammā aggahaṇaṃ, tatthāpi ca hetuphalabhāvena sambandhānaṃ santatighanassa abheditattā paramatthato vijjamānampi bhedanibandhanaṃ nānattanayaṃ anupadhāretvā gahitaṃ ekattaggahaṇaṃ nissāya. Idaṃ gaṇhantīti idaṃ sassataggahaṇaṃ abhinivissa voharanti, iminā nayena ekaccasassatavādādayopettha yathāsambhavaṃ yojetvā vattabbā. Bhinditvāti ‘‘ātappamanvāyā’’tiādinā vibhajitvā ‘‘tayidaṃ bhikkhave tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādinā vimadditvā nijjaṭaṃ nigumbaṃ katvā diṭṭhijaṭāvijaṭanena diṭṭhigumbavivaraṇena ca.
“故”等:由于此开示是依于佛陀的功德而发起,故表明:世尊善于说法,在指出一切知智之后,便以把握其他宗派的方式,开解一切知智。“存在”一词,既显示那些持邪见者的存在未曾间断,又表明法王的教法通过对他们邪执的削弱与辨析,已尽其所应作,真实不虚。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tasmā’’tiādinā buddhaguṇe ārabbha desanāya samuṭṭhitattā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ uddisitvā desanākusalo bhagavā samayantaraviggāhaṇavasena sabbaññutaññāṇameva vissajjetīti dasseti. ‘‘Santī’’ti iminā tesaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vijjamānatāya avicchinnataṃ, tato ca nesaṃ micchāgāhato sithilakaraṇavivecanehi attano desanāya kiccakāritaṃ, avitathatañca dīpeti dhammarājā.
29 “有”:与“存在”同义,为一适用于复数范围的独立小品词,如“于此身中,有头发等”(《长部》2.377;《中部》1.110;《中部》3.154;《相应部》4.127;《小诵》3.1)所示。以常见等分别前际者,称为前际分别论者。然而,由于他们先以先前成立的贪与见之分别来分别那前际,重复修习而变得强有力,并以种种方式演绎,随后又以之后成立的、以执取为自性的贪与见之执取,来执取、执著、执持,因此说“分别前际、加以演绎而后执取”。或者,应知分别与执取乃爱执取之故,因为爱是取的缘。又,“边”一词在“部分”的意义上,此处应理解为“部分之类”。因为“边”一词也用于填词、邻近、邪道等场合。例如:“来,你受持经、偈或阿毗达摩”(《波逸提》442)及“在经中求得开许后”(《波逸提》1221)等句中,“边”表填词;“靠近村边”(《波罗夷》409;《小品》343)、“村边坐卧处”等,表邻近;“沉溺欲乐是一边,迦旃延,说‘有’是一边”(《相应部》2.15;3.90)等,表邪道。显示巴利原文
29.Atthīti ‘‘saṃvijjantī’’ti iminā samānattho puthuvacanavisayo eko nipāto ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.377; ma. ni. 1.110; ma. ni. 3.154; saṃ. ni. 4.127; khu. pā. 3.1) viya. Sassatādivasena pubbantaṃ kappentīti pubbantakappikā. Yasmā pana te taṃ pubbantaṃ purimasiddhehi taṇhādiṭṭhikappehi kappetvā, āsevanabalavatāya vicittavuttitāya ca vikappetvā aparabhāgasiddhehi abhinivesabhūtehi taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhehi gaṇhanti abhinivisanti parāmasanti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbantaṃkappetvā vikappetvā gaṇhantī’’ti. Taṇhupādānavasena vā kappanaggahaṇāni veditabbāni. Taṇhāpaccayā hi upādānaṃ. Koṭṭhāsesūti ettha koṭṭhāsādīsūti attho veditabbo. Padapūraṇasamīpaummaggādīsupi hi anta-saddo dissati. Tathā hi ‘‘iṅgha tvaṃ suttante vā gāthāyo vā abhidhammaṃ vā pariyāpuṇassu (pāci. 442), suttante okāsaṃ kārāpetvā’’ti (pāci. 1221) ca ādīsu padapūraṇe anta-saddo vattati, gāmantaṃ osareyya, (pārā. 409; cūḷava. 343) gāmantasenāsana’’ntiādīsu samīpe , ‘‘kāmasukhallikānuyogo eko anto, atthīti kho kaccāna ayameko anto’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.15; 3.90) ummaggeti.
“劫”一词用于大劫、全分、烦恼欲、寻、时间、施设、相似状态等多种意义,故说“用于众多含义”。例如,在“诸比丘,这些是劫的不可数”等(《增支部》4.156)中,“劫”指大劫;在“以一劫光照竹林”等(《相应部》1.94)中,指全分;在“图谋即欲,贪即欲,意图寻思即欲”等(《大义释》1;《小义释》8)中,指烦恼欲;在“思、寻、意图”等(《法集论》7)中,指寻;在“我常恒如此而住”等(《中部》1.387)中,指时间;在“如是尊者劫”等(《经集》1090;《小义释》113)中,指施设;在“我们与如同导师一般的弟子共论而不知”等(《中部》1.260)中,指相似状态。此处所依为《大义释》(《大义释》28)。“以爱见之力”:指作为见的亲依止、与之俱生、并以随喜为性的爱,以及依常见等相而执著者的邪执之力。“前”一词,因意指对前所住处法的分别,故是表示过去时的用语;“边”一词,则因离开色等蕴之外没有分别的基础,故是部分之意,因此说“过去蕴之部分”。“分别”:指对于那前际,令爱著……显示巴利原文
Kappa-saddo mahākappasamantabhāvakilesakāmavitakkakālapaññattisadisabhāvādīsu vattatīti āha ‘‘sambahulesu atthesu vattatī’’ti. Tathā hesa ‘‘cattārimāni bhikkhave kappassa asaṅkhyeyyānī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.156) mahākappe vattati, ‘‘kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.94) samantabhāve, ‘‘saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmo’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 1; cūḷani. 8) kilesakāme, ‘‘takko vitakko saṅkappo’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 7) vitakke, ‘‘yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) kāle, ‘‘iccāyasmā kappo’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 1090; cūḷani. 113) paññattiyaṃ, ‘‘satthukappena vata kira bho sāvakena saddhiṃ mantayamānā na jānimhā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.260) sadisabhāve vattatīti. Vuttampi cetanti mahāniddesaṃ (mahāni. 28) sandhāyāha. Taṇhādiṭṭhivasenāti diṭṭhiyā upanissayabhūtāya sahajātāya abhinandanabhūtāya ca taṇhāya, sassatādiākārena abhinivisantassa micchāgāhassa ca vasena. Pubbenivutthadhammavisayāya kappanāya adhippetattā atītakālavācako idha pubba-saddo, rūpādikhandhavinimuttassa kappanāvatthuno abhāvā anta-saddo ca bhāgavācakoti āha ‘‘atītaṃ khandhakoṭṭhāsa’’nti. ‘‘Kappetvā’’ti ca tasmiṃ pubbante taṇhāyanābhinivesānaṃ samatthanaṃ pariniṭṭhāpanamāha. Ṭhitāti tassā laddhiyā avijahanaṃ. Ārabbhāti ālambitvā. Visayo hi tassā diṭṭhiyā pubbanto. Visayabhāvato eva hi so tassā āgamanaṭṭhānaṃ, ārammaṇapaccayo cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘āgamma paṭiccā’’ti.
“增语词”即是施设词。如同在“奴仆”等中的“西利瓦达”等称呼,仅仅是言语,以此为所依而转起,故称为增语,即施设。或者,“adhi”前缀表示“上”,“vuccati”是“说”,上方之说即是增语,于被造色等之上所施设的,就是“取施设”的意思。因此应知这是表达施设的词。因为“我”、“世间”等只是施设,并非像色、受等那样是究竟义。又或者,由于具有增说的性质,诸见也称为“增说”。因为诸见于自性法上,增益了常住、本性、实体、命者、身等不真实的意义而转起。显示巴利原文
Adhivacanapadānīti paññattipadāni. Dāsādīsu sirivaḍḍhakādi-saddā viya vacanamattameva adhikāraṃ katvā pavattiyā adhivacanaṃ paññatti. Atha vā adhi-saddo uparibhāve, vuccatīti vacanaṃ, upari vacanaṃ adhivacanaṃ, upādābhūtarūpādīnaṃ upari paññāpiyamānā upādāpaññattīti attho , tasmā paññattidīpakapadānīti attho daṭṭhabbo. Paññattimattañhetaṃ vuccati, yadidaṃ ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca, na rūpavedanādayo viya paramattho. Adhikavuttitāya vā adhivuttiyoti diṭṭhiyo vuccanti. Adhikañhi sabhāvadhammesu sassatādiṃ pakatiādidabbādiṃ jīvādiṃ kāyādiñca abhūtamatthaṃ ajjhāropetvā diṭṭhiyo pavattantīti.
30 “宣称者”是指那些固持着“只有这是真实的,其余都是虚妄的”的见解,然后宣称“这是法,这不是法”,进而与他人争论的人。为了显示这种宣称的行为至今仍未中断,经文使用了现在时动词。“见所至”就是把见本身称为见所至,如同“漏所至”、“行所至”等用法一样。或者,因为这种见并没有实际可抵达的去处,它仅仅是见的“所到之处”,意思是那只是见的抓取而已。又或者,“见所至”是指见的种种形态。世间语法学家们就是把“种类”、“所到之处”、“形态”这些词视为同义词的。再者,针对每一个“我”和“世间”,都会由于那种特殊的抓取而有所安立,所以注释说:“他们在色等诸蕴中,抓住其中某一个,把它当作‘我’和‘世间’。”“不死的”、“常的”、“恒久的”都是“常住”的同义词。“不死”是因为没有死亡;“常”是因为没有生起,于一切时都存在;“恒久”则是以坚固义而说,因为它不会变异。从“正如……”开始,通过释义与无碍解的方式,阐明了显示巴利原文
30.Abhivadantīti ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187, 203, 427; ma. ni. 3.27, 29) abhinivisitvā vadanti ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, nāyaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā vivadanti. Abhivadanakiriyāya ajjāpi avicchedabhāvadassanatthaṃ vattamānakālavacanaṃ. Diṭṭhi eva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘muttagataṃ, (ma. ni. 2.119; a. ni. 9.11) saṅkhāragata’’ntiādīsu (mahāni. 41) viya. Gantabbābhāvato vā diṭṭhiyā gatamattaṃ, diṭṭhiyā gahaṇamattanti attho. Diṭṭhippakāro vā diṭṭhigataṃ. Lokiyā hi vidhayuttagatapakāra-sadde samānatthe icchanti. Ekekasmiñca ‘‘attā’’ti, ‘‘loko’’ti ca gahaṇavisesaṃ upādāya paññāpanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘rūpādīsu aññataraṃ attā ca loko cāti gahetvā’’ti. Amaraṃ niccaṃ dhuvanti sassatavevacanāni. Maraṇābhāvena vā amaraṃ, uppādābhāvena sabbathāpi atthitāya niccaṃ, thiraṭṭhena vikārābhāvena dhuvaṃ. ‘‘Yathāhā’’tiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ niddesapaṭisambhidāpāḷīhi vibhāveti. Ayañca attho ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, vedanaṃ, saññaṃ, saṅkhāre, viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti imissā pañcavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena vutto. ‘‘Rūpavantaṃ attāna’’ntiādikāya pana pañcadasavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena cattāro cattāro khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadaññaṃ ‘‘loko’’ti paññapentīti ayampi attho labbhati. Tathā ekaṃ khandhaṃ ’’attā’’ti gahetvā tadaññe attano upabhogabhūto lokoti, sasantatipatite vā khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadaññe ‘‘loko’’ti paññapentīti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Etthāha – sassato vādo etesanti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu tesaṃ attā loko ca sassatoti adhippeto, na vādo ti? Saccametaṃ, sassatasahacaritatāya pana ‘‘vādo sassato’’ti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti. Sassato iti vādo etesanti vā iti-saddalopo daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā sassataṃ vadanti ‘‘idameva sacca’’nti abhinivissa voharantīti sassatavādā, sassatadiṭṭhinoti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
31 “热烈”是指对烦恼的恼害、摧毁与断除。“勤”是指不让心堕入懈怠之类的状态,而持续地策励心。“精勤”是指为了达到定的殊胜分位,而反复修习精进。由于此处在经文中意指带来近行定与安止定、令心调柔的精进,所以称它为“三种精进”。“不放逸”是指依此而不放逸,也就是心不忘失。“如理作意”是指依此以正确的方法将业处运用于心,这就是智。因此注释说:“精进、念与智”。在此处,也就是经文“依于热烈……乃至……作意”这一段。与戒清净一并,证得四种色界禅那的修行之道本应详细说明,但它在《清净道论》中已经详细说过了,所以这里只讲“简要的意义”。而“彼类那样的”,是指依于十四种调心的方法,将第四色界禅那完全调伏的状态。显示巴利原文
31.Ātāpanaṃ kilesānaṃ vibādhanaṃ pahānaṃ. Padahanaṃ kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adatvā cittassa ussahanaṃ. Anuyogo yathā samādhi visesabhāgiyataṃ pāpuṇāti, evaṃ vīriyassa bahulīkaraṇaṃ. Idha upacārappanācittaparidamanavīriyānaṃ adhippetattā āha ‘‘tippabhedaṃ vīriya’’nti . Nappamajjati etenāti appamādo, asammoso. Sammā upāyena manasi karoti kammaṭṭhānaṃ etenāti sammāmanasikāro ñāṇanti āha ‘‘vīriyañca satiñca ñāṇañcā’’ti. Etthāti ‘‘ātappa…pe… manasikāraṃ anvāyā’’ti imasmiṃ pāṭhe. Sīlavisuddhiyā saddhiṃ catunnaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ adhigamanapaṭipadā vattabbā, sā pana visuddhimagge vitthārato vuttāti āha ‘‘saṅkhepattho’’ti. ‘‘Tathārūpa’’nti cuddasavidhehi cittadamanehi rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānassa damitataṃ vadati.
对于具足等引等八支、证得第四色界禅那的瑜伽行者,那是其禅定威力的展现,是世间神通。经中所说的「禅那等」,意在表明:对获得禅那者,禅那诸法变得清晰,以此为门,其余诸法也随之清晰。以此否定「能生」的特性。若真有「能生」的特性,禅那等便会像色法、乐受等法那样,依于缘而起作用,从而应有生起之事。既有生起,则灭去必然存在,如是,「常」的特性便绝不可能。应当了知,「如山般稳固」一词,世间即用以表示绝对恒常、永恒不变。而「如柱坚立」则是说明它像城门柱不被风吹动一般,不会因任何事物而变异,以此显示其「无有变异性」。接着,又以「如山般稳固」说明其「无有无常性」。因为变异即是毁灭,故论中说:「两者皆在阐明世间没有毁灭」。至于「本来就存在着的」,这显示巴利原文
Samādhānādiaṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatarūpāvacaracatutthajjhānassa yogino samādhivijambhanabhūtā lokiyābhiññā jhānānubhāvo. ‘‘Jhānādīna’’nti idaṃ jhānalābhissa visesena jhānadhammā āpāthaṃ āgacchanti, taṃmukhena sesadhammāti imamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Janakabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Sati hi janakabhāve rūpādidhammānaṃ viya sukhādidhammānaṃ viya, ca paccayāyattavuttitāya uppādavantatā viññāyati, uppāde ca sati avassambhāvī nirodhoti anavakāsāva niccatā siyāti. Kūṭaṭṭha-saddo vā loke accantanicce niruḷho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito’’ti etena yathā esikā vātappahārādīhi na calati, evaṃ na kenaci vikāraṃ āpajjatīti vikārābhāvamāha, ‘‘kūṭaṭṭho’’ti iminā pana aniccatābhāvaṃ. Vikāropi vināsoyevāti āha, ‘‘ubhayenapi lokassa vināsābhāvaṃ dīpetī’’ti. ‘‘Vijjamānamevā’’ti etena kāraṇe phalassa atthibhāvadassanena abhibyattivādaṃ dīpeti. Nikkhamatīti ca abhibyattiṃ gacchatīti attho. Kathaṃ pana vijjamānoyeva pubbe anabhibyatto abhibyattiṃ gacchatīti? Yathā andhakārena paṭicchanno ghaṭo ālokena abhibyattiṃ gacchati.
对此,应如是观察:光明究竟做了什么,而被称为「照亮瓶子」?若谓它生起了以瓶子为所缘的认知,则因说明了未生认知的生起,「显了论」即告退失。若谓它驱散了作为瓶子认知障碍的黑暗,「显了论」同样退失。何以故?若瓶子认知已存在,黑暗又如何成为其障碍?正如瓶子的显了并不合理,认知自身亦然。彼处,若由根、境等和合,令未生的认知得以生起,则仅凭「生起」一言,「显了论」便已退失,同理,常住论亦当退失。若认为它驱散了住于黑暗处的愚痴——即认知生起的障碍,则当认知存在时,愚痴如何为障?因为确实可能存在某种差异。事实上,能显的日月、摩尼宝、灯火等的差异,并不会造成所显的瓶子等的差异;然而所缘色的不同,却会造成认知的不同。因此,所谓「显了」的说法,更不合理。再者,以此言说来安立其学说亦不合理,因为言说与其所诠,二者不能是异质。而所谓「那些众生在流转」,意为:那些在此地以人的状态存在的众生,正是他们自己,由于获得显示巴利原文
Idamettha vicāretabbaṃ – kiṃ karonto āloko ghaṭaṃ pakāsetīti vuccati, yadi ghaṭavisayaṃ buddhiṃ karonto, buddhiyā anuppannāya uppattidīpanato abhibyattivādo hāyati. Atha ghaṭabuddhiyā āvaraṇabhūtaṃ andhakāraṃ vidhamanto, evampi abhibyattivādo hāyatiyeva. Sati hi ghaṭabuddhiyā andhakāro kathaṃ tassā āvaraṇaṃ hotīti, yathā ghaṭassa abhibyatti na yujjati, evaṃ attanopi. Tatthāpi hi yadi indriyavisayādisannipātena anuppannāya buddhiyā uppatti, uppattivacaneneva abhibyattivādo hāyati, tathā sassatavādo. Atha buddhippavattiyā āvaraṇabhūtassa andhakāraṭṭhāniyassa mohassa vidhamanena. Sati buddhiyā kathaṃ moho āvaraṇanti, kiñci bhedasambhavato. Na hi abhibyañjanakānaṃ candasūriyamaṇipadīpādīnaṃ bhedena abhibyañjitabbānaṃ ghaṭādīnaṃ bhedo hoti, hoti ca visayabhedena buddhibhedoti bhiyyopi abhibyatti na yujjatiyeva, na cettha vuttikappanā yuttā vuttiyā vuttimato ca anaññathānujānanatoti . Teca sattā sandhāvantīti ye idha manussabhāvena avaṭṭhitā, teyeva devabhāvādiupagamanena ito aññattha gacchanti, aññathā katassa kammassa vināso, akatassa ca abbhāgamo āpajjeyyāti adhippāyo.
「展转」是指从此生到另一生。「这样入于数说」:因执持自我有恒常的本质,故既非死生轮回之事,亦非因遍满一切而流转轮回;实则只是依于诸法转起的种种差别,方有这样的称呼与言说,此即其意旨所在。由此来显示对固定本质之我的见解,以及依法而有的、众生只是单纯生灭的变异论。至于此处还需说明的内容,将在后文再讲。破其我论:依流转等言辞所成立的无常性,破坏了他先前所承认的常住论,即予以破坏、摧毁之意。或者应这样理解:他所谓的「常恒」,其义即是常、坚实、永远恒久。显示巴利原文
Aparāparanti aparasmā bhavā aparaṃ bhavaṃ. Evaṃ saṅkhyaṃ gacchantīti attano niccasabhāvattā na cutūpapattiyo, sabbabyāpitāya nāpi sandhāvanasaṃsaraṇāni, dhammānaṃyeva pana pavattivisesena evaṃ saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti, evaṃ voharīyantīti adhippāyo. Etena avaṭṭhitasabhāvassa attano, dhammino ca dhammamattaṃ uppajjati ceva vinassati cāti imaṃ vipariṇāmavādaṃ dasseti. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato vakkhāma. Attano vādaṃ bhindatīti sandhāvanādivacanasiddhāya aniccatāya pubbe paṭiññātaṃ sassatavādaṃ bhindati, viddhaṃsetīti attho. Sassatisamanti vā etassa sassataṃ thāvaraṃ niccakālanti attho daṭṭhabbo.
「显示因」,指向那些将我与世间施设为「常住」的见行者,显示其所以如此施设的原因。实际上,他并非以自己现量亲见之义来直接成立自宗,而是以自己现量亲见之义,去成立自己未现量亲见的道理。因为他将自己已确定的见解用以令他人信解,而非将尚未确定者显示出来。在此,「显示因」的例示为:在这许多十万生中,此我与世间是同一的,因为有随念的可能。凡是经历某境者,即能随念该境,而非他人可随念。因为他人所经历的境,另一人无法随念,正如佛授所经历的法授不能随念一样。如是,于今生如此,于更早的许多生中亦是如此。问:那么为何说我的我与世间是常住的呢?而且,如我这般,其他众生的我与世间也是常住的吗?执持常见、跳入见林的见行者,亦令他人安立于此见中。然而,经典中说:「他们宣说种种言词。他这样说……」由此可见,此处是从推度他人、以类比的方式来显示因的。因有三种:能达因、能生因、能知因。其中,圣道是涅槃的能达因,种子是芽的能生因。显示巴利原文
Hetuṃ dassentoti yesaṃ ‘‘sassato’’ti attānañca lokañca paññapeti ayaṃ diṭṭhigatiko, tesaṃ hetuṃ dassentoti attho. Na hi attano diṭṭhiyā paccakkhakatamatthaṃ attanoyeva sādheti, attano pana paccakkhakatena atthena attano appaccakkhabhūtampi atthaṃ sādheti. Attanā hi yathānicchitaṃ parehi viññāpeti, na anicchitaṃ. ‘‘Hetuṃ dassento’’ti ettha idaṃ hetudassanaṃ – etesu anekesu jātisatasahassesu ekovāyaṃ me attā, loko ca anussaraṇasabbhāvato. Yo hi yamatthaṃ anubhavati, so eva taṃ anussarati, na añño. Na hi aññena anubhūtamatthaṃ añño anussarituṃ sakkoti yathā taṃ buddharakkhitena anubhūtaṃ dhammarakkhito. Yathā cetāsu, evaṃ ito purimatarāsupi jātīsūti. Kasmā sassato me attā ca loko ca. Yathā ca me, evaṃ aññesampi sattānaṃ sassato attā ca loko cāti? Sassatavasena diṭṭhigahanaṃ pakkhando diṭṭhigatiko parepi tattha patiṭṭhapeti, pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘anekavihitāni adhivuttipadāni abhivadanti. So evaṃ āhā’’ti ca vacanato parānumānavasena idha hetudassanaṃ adhippetanti viññāyati. Kāraṇanti tividhaṃ kāraṇaṃ sampāpakaṃ nibbattakaṃ ñāpakanti. Tattha ariyamaggo nibbānassa sampāpakaṃ kāraṇaṃ, bījaṃ aṅkurassa nibbattakaṃ kāraṇaṃ, paccayuppannatādayo aniccatādīnaṃ ñāpakaṃ kāraṇaṃ, idhāpi ñāpakakāraṇameva adhippetaṃ. Ñāpako hi ñāpetabbatthavisayassa ñāṇassa hetubhāvato kāraṇanti. Tadāyattavuttitāya taṃ ñāṇaṃ tiṭṭhati tatthāti ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti, vasati tattha pavattatīti ‘‘vatthū’’ti ca vuccati. Tathā hi bhagavatā vatthu-saddena uddisitvāpi ṭhānasaddena niddiṭṭhanti.
32-33 第二、第三种论,与第一种论相比,除时间有差别外,并无不同,故说「后二论中,理亦同此」。若如此,为何常住论被分为四种?难道不应如无因生论那样,仅分为两种便可吗?对此的回答是:「因为外道是钝慧之人」等。显示巴利原文
32-33. Dutiyatatiyavādānaṃ paṭhamavādato natthi viseso ṭhapetvā kālavisesanti āha ‘‘upari vādadvayepi eseva nayo’’ti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā sassatavādo catudhā vibhatto, nanu adhiccasamuppannikavādo viya duvidheneva vibhajitabbo siyāti āha ‘‘mandapañño hi titthiyo’’tiādi.
34 「寻思」(Takkayatīti):即推度、衡量,指以常见等行相,将心投向种种所缘。「寻」(Takko):具有撞击或决断的特征,是诸见立足处的思惟。「伺察」(Vīmaṃsā):即审察,但于此义而言,它是相似于慧、与贪俱行的心生起,或是邪执的非理作意,又或在前期为见的躁动;应如此理解。故说「衡量、喜好、容忍」。「遍击」:即寻对于所缘的把握,故说「以种种方式寻思之后」。「随伺察」:依于伺察而随转,或以随伺察行的审察而研磨。「各各照耀」:即辩才(paṭibhāna),指能彰显所确立行相差别的心生起。从辩才生起者,名为辩才所得;自己即是自己的辩才,故称「自辩才」。因此他说「唯自辩才所生」。「唯」字遮遣殊胜之证得等。显示巴利原文
34.Takkayatīti ūhayati, sassatādiākārena tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropetīti attho. Takkoti ākoṭanalakkhaṇo vinicchayalakkhaṇo vā diṭṭhiṭṭhānabhūto vitakko. Vīmaṃsā nāma vicāraṇā, sā panettha atthato paññāpatirūpako lobhasahagatacittuppādo, micchābhiniveso vā ayonisomanasikāro, pubbabhāge vā diṭṭhivipphanditanti daṭṭhabbā. Tenevāha ‘‘tulanā ruccanā khamanā’’ti. Pariyāhananaṃ vitakkassa ārammaṇaūhanaṃ evāti āha ‘‘tena tena pakārena takketvā’’ti. Anuvicaritanti vīmaṃsāya anupavattitaṃ, vīmaṃsānugatena vā vicārena anumajjitaṃ. Paṭi paṭi bhātīti paṭibhānaṃ, yathāsamihitākāravisesavibhāvako cittuppādo. Paṭibhānato jātaṃ paṭibhānaṃ, sayaṃ attano paṭibhānaṃ sayaṃ paṭibhānaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘attano paṭibhānamattasañjāta’’nti. Matta-saddena visesādhigamādayo nivatteti.
“未来也将如此存在”这句话,不应仅理解为针对这里所述的寻思者而说,应当看作是为了显示获得殊胜的寻思者也有此可能而说。凡自己所得之色等、乐等,于此处获得,即称为“得”,并非指禅那等殊胜。“如是存有,此则形成”——在无常的诸有中,便会产生“作者是一人,受者是另一人”的过失,从而导致所作灭失、未作到来。而在常住的诸有中,作者即是受者,便无此过失。这就是显示寻思者寻求合理性的推理方式。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anāgatepievaṃ bhavissatī’’ti idaṃ na idhādhippetatakkīvaseneva vuttaṃ, lābhītakkino evampi sambhavatīti sambhavadassanavasena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ kiñci attanā paṭiladdhaṃ rūpādi sukhādi ca idha labbhatīti lābho, na jhānādiviseso. ‘‘Evaṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti aniccesu bhāvesu añño karoti, añño paṭisaṃvedetīti āpajjati, tathā ca sati katassa vināso, akatassa ca abbhāgamo siyā. Niccesu pana bhāvesu yo karoti, so paṭisaṃvedetīti na doso āpajjatīti takkikassa yuttigavesanākāraṃ dasseti.
“仅凭寻思”:由于没有圣教、证得以及传闻等,纯粹只凭寻思。难道不是如此吗?即使那些获得殊胜的常住论者,也因自身殊胜证得之因,在许多百千生中、在十劫坏成中、在四十劫坏成中,随念自己所经历的相续以及与之关联的对象为“我、世间”,并由此推想在更早更早的诸生中也是如此存在,进而推想一切众生也同样如此存在,由此才执著常住。若是这样,那么所有常住论者,都如同那位随念宿生、忆持生世的寻思者一样,依凭自己所得的经验事实生起寻思以安立其论,因此都应归于寻思者这一类。而且,必然应当承认有这样一类寻思,否则,获得殊胜的常住论者岂不是会归入一分常论或无因生论那一类了吗?然而,不应这样看待。因为对获得殊胜者来说,对蕴相续极其长久、更为长久、最为长久之随念,才是他们执著常住的、不共之因。正如经中所显示:“我随念多种宿住。以此,我知道此”,可见正是以随念作为主要的因。至于他基于此而产生的“以此,我知道此”的寻思,在这里并非主要,因为它相对于随念处于次要的地位。如果这样,那么藉由显示巴利原文
Takkamattenevāti āgamādhigamādīnaṃ anussavādīnañca abhāvā suddhatakkeneva. Nanu ca visesalābhinopi sassatavādino attano visesādhigamahetu anekesu jātisatasahassesu dasasu saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu cattālīsāya saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu yathānubhūtaṃ attano santānaṃ tappaṭibaddhañca ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca anussaritvā tato purimapurimatarāsupi jātīsu tathābhūtassa atthitānuvitakkanamukhena sabbesampi sattānaṃ tathābhāvānuvitakkanavaseneva sassatābhinivesino jātā, evañca sati sabbopi sassatavādī anussutijātissaratakkikā viya attano upaladdhavatthunibandhanena takkanena pavattavādattā takkīpakkheyeva tiṭṭheyya, avassañca vuttappakāraṃ takkanamicchitabbaṃ , aññathā visesalābhī sassatavādī ekaccasassatikapakkhaṃ, adhiccasamuppannikapakkhaṃ vā bhajeyyāti ? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, yasmā visesalābhīnaṃ khandhasantānassa dīghadīghataradīghatamakālānussaraṇaṃ sassataggāhassa asādhāraṇakāraṇaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarāmi. Imināmahametaṃ jānāmī’’ti anussaraṇameva padhānakāraṇabhāvena dassitaṃ. Yaṃ pana tassa ‘‘imināmahametaṃ jānāmī’’ti pavattaṃ takkanaṃ, na taṃ idha padhānaṃ anussaraṇaṃ pati tassa appadhānabhūtattā. Yadi evaṃ anussavādīnampi padhānabhāvo āpajjatīti ce? Na, tesaṃ sacchikiriyāya abhāvena takkapadhānattā, padhānakāraṇena ca niddeso niruḷho sāsane loke ca yathā ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, yavaṅkuro’’ti ca.
或者,为了显示不以殊胜证得为依凭的寻思如何独立成为执取常的原因,应将殊胜证得单独作为另一种执取常的原因予以说明。而那种殊胜证得,依钝慧、中慧、利慧的不同而有三种。世尊把一切纯粹只是寻思的人,以“都是寻思者”这一共性归为一类,从而将常住论确定为四种。即使像仅凭传闻者那样,钝慧者等也如同寻思者一样,由于低劣等差别的存在而可有许多分类,获得殊胜者同样可以有多种分类;然而,把一切获得殊胜者依钝慧、中慧、利慧收摄为三类之后,在其中以最上等者为代表,通过随念多生、十万生、十劫坏成、四十劫坏成,作了这样的区分。在那三类中,钝慧者和中慧者只能随念少于所述界限的内容;而利慧者则不会随念超越所述界限的内容——这里正是这样说的。因此,正是通过收摄于某种差别分类的方式,世尊分别了四种依据,确立了常住论者的四种类型。因为在这里,法王世尊所宣说的是无余的法。显示巴利原文
Atha vā visesādhigamanibandhanarahitassa takkanassa visuṃ sassataggāhe kāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ visesādhigamo visuṃ sassataggāhakāraṇaṃ vattabbo , so ca mandamajjhatikkhapaññāvasena tividhoti bhagavatā sabbatakkino takkībhāvasāmaññena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā catudhā vavatthāpito sassatavādo. Yadipi anussavādivasena takkikānaṃ viya mandapaññādīnampi hīnādivasena anekabhedasabbhāvato visesalābhīnampi bahudhā bhedo sambhavati, sabbe pana visesalābhino mandapaññādivasena tayo rāsī katvā tattha ukkaṭṭhavasena anekajātisatasahassadasasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭacattārīsasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭānussaraṇena ayaṃ vibhāgo vutto. Tīsupi rāsīsu ye hīnamajjhapaññā, te vuttaparicchedato ūnakameva anussaranti. Ye pana tattha ukkaṭṭhapaññā, te vuttaparicchedaṃ atikkamitvā nānussarantīti evaṃ panāyaṃ desanā. Tasmā aññatarabhedasaṅgahavaseneva bhagavatā cattāriṭṭhānāni vibhattānīti vavatthitā sassatavādīnaṃ catubbidhatā. Na hi idha sāvasesaṃ dhammaṃ deseti dhammarājā.
35 为了说明“以某一种”(aññatarena)的含义,而说“以一种”(ekena);为了显示“或”(vā)字的不确定义,而说“以两种或三种”。由此表明,在四种情形中,随其所宜,某一事对某一人的安立只是辅助因。那么,这些事究竟是执取(abhinivesa)的因,还是成立主张(patiṭṭhāpana)的因呢?对此,如果先说是执取的因,为何只举出随念与推论,却没有举出想颠倒等呢?须知,颠倒想、不如理作意、亲近恶人、听闻非正法等,都是邪见生起的所依。如果说是成立主张的因,那么如同证得之理依于理证一般,教证也应作为事由被提及。在两种情况下,“除此之外没有”这句话难道不都成不合理了吗?并非如此。为什么呢?就执取的立场而言,这位见行者由于亲近恶人、听闻非正法,不如理地沉溺其中,成为颠倒想者;他不能了知色等诸法刹那刹那坏灭的本质,却过度追逐法理,以“一性之理”错误执取之后,通过上面所说的随念和推论,在诸蕴上产生了“我与世间是常”的执取。因此,随念与推论作为近因、作为主要原因,只举出它们,也就包含了其余。显示巴利原文
35.‘‘Aññatarenā’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ekenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vā-saddassa pana aniyamatthataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dvīhi vā tīhi vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena catūsu ṭhānesu yathārahaṃ ekaccaṃ ekaccassa paññāpane sahakārīkāraṇanti dasseti. Kiṃ panetāni vatthūni abhinivesassa hetu, udāhu patiṭṭhāpanassa. Kiñcettha yadi tāva abhinivesassa, kasmā anussaraṇatakkanāniyeva gahitāni, na saññāvipallāsādayo. Tathāhi viparītasaññā ayonisomanasikāraasappurisūpanissayaasaddhammassavanādīni micchādiṭṭhiyā pavattanaṭṭhānāni. Atha patiṭṭhāpanassa adhigamayuttiyo viya āgamopi vatthubhāvena vattabbo, ubhayatthāpi ‘‘natthi ito bahiddhā’’ti vacanaṃ na yujjatīti? Na. Kasmā? Abhinivesapakkhe tāva ayaṃ diṭṭhigatiko asappurisūpanissayaasaddhammassavanehi ayoniso ummujjitvā vipallāsasañño rūpādidhammānaṃ khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanasabhāvassa anavabodhato dhammayuttiṃ atidhāvanto ekattanayaṃ micchā gahetvā yathāvuttānussaraṇatakkehi khandhesu ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.31) abhinivesaṃ janesi. Iti āsannakāraṇattā, padhānakāraṇattā, taggahaṇeneva ca itaresampi gahitattā anussaraṇatakkanāniyeva idha gahitāni. Patiṭṭhāpanapakkhe pana āgamopi yuttipakkheyeva ṭhito visesato bāhirakānaṃ takkagāhibhāvatoti anussaraṇatakkanāniyeva diṭṭhiyā vatthubhāvena gahitāni. Kiñca bhiyyo duvidhaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ paramatthadhammānaṃ sabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇañcāti. Tattha sabhāvalakkhaṇāvabodho paccakkhañāṇaṃ, sāmaññalakkhaṇāvabodho anumānañāṇaṃ, āgamo ca sutamayāya paññāya sādhanato anumānañāṇameva āvahati, sutānaṃ pana dhammānaṃ ākāraparivitakkanena nijjhānakkhantiyaṃ ṭhito cintāmayaṃ paññaṃ nibbattetvā anukkamena bhāvanāya paccakkhañāṇaṃ adhigacchatīti evaṃ āgamopi takkavisayaṃ nātikkamatīti taggahaṇena gahitovāti veditabbo. So aṭṭhakathāyaṃ anussutitakkaggahaṇena vibhāvitoti yuttaṃ evidaṃ ‘‘natthi ito bahiddhā’’ti. ‘‘Anekavihitāni adhivuttipadāni abhivadanti, sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.30) ca vacanato patiṭṭhāpanavatthūni idhādhippetānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
36 见本身就是见的据点,因为它是导致种种祸患之因中的最重罪。正如所说:“比丘们,我说邪见是罪过中之最。”(《增支部》1.310)借由“正如所说”等语句,引用了《无碍解道》(《无碍解道》1.124)的圣典,显示了见的据点之分类。其中,诸蕴也是见的据点,从所缘义上,如“视色为我”等(《相应部》3.81, 345)经中所说。无明也是见的据点,因其以亲依止等为缘而转起。如经中说:“比丘们,未闻之凡夫,不见圣者,不娴圣法……”(《中部》1.2;《无碍解道》1.130)。触也是见的据点,又如经中说:“亦以触为缘”(《长部》1.118等),“触诸触后,领受……”(《长部》1.144)。想也是见的据点,也曾说:“想诚为戏论之因”(《经集》880;《大义释》109),“从地想为地……”(《中部》1.2)。寻也是见的据点,也曾说:“于诸见中构造推论已,他们说有二法:真实与虚妄”(《经集》892),“他是推论者、审察者”(《长部》1.34)等。不如理作意也是见的据点,故世尊说:“显示巴利原文
36.Diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ paramavajjatāya anekavihitānaṃ anatthānaṃ hetubhāvato. Yathāha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ bhikkhave vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310) ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādinā paṭisambhidāpāḷiyā (paṭi. ma. 1.124) diṭṭhiyā ṭhānavibhāgaṃ dasseti. Tattha khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇaṭṭhena ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.81, 345) vacanato. Avijjāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādibhāvena pavattanato. Yathāha ‘‘assutavā bhikkhave puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.2; paṭi. ma. 1.130). Phassopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathā cāha ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā, (dī. ni. 1.118 ādayo) phussa phussa paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.144) ca . Saññāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā, (su. ni. 880; mahāni. 109) pathavito saññatvā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.2) ca ādi. Vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘takkañca diṭṭhīsu pakappayitvā, saccaṃ musāti dvayadhammamāhū’’ti (su. ni. 892) ‘‘takkī hoti vīmaṃsī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.34) ca ādi. Ayonisomanasikāropi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘tassa evaṃ ayoniso manasi karoto channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjati. ‘Atthi me attā’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.19). Samuṭṭhāti etenāti samuṭṭhānaṃ samuṭṭhānabhāvo samuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Pavattitāti parasantānesu uppāditā. Pariniṭṭhāpitāti abhinivesassa pariyosānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpitāti attho. ‘‘Ārammaṇavasenā’’ti aṭṭhasu diṭṭhiṭṭhānesu khandhe sandhāyāha. Pavattanavasenāti avijjādayo. Āsevanavasenāti pāpamittaparatoghosādīnampi sevanaṃ labbhatiyeva. Atha vā evaṃgatikāti evaṃgamanā, evaṃniṭṭhāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime diṭṭhisaṅkhātā diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṃ paramatthato asantaṃ attānaṃ sassatabhāvañcassa ajjhāropetvā gahitā, parāmaṭṭhā ca bālalapanā yāva paṇḍitā na samanuyuñjanti, tāva gacchanti pavattanti. Paṇḍitehi samanuyuñjiyamānā pana anavaṭṭhitavatthukā avimaddakkhamā sūriyuggamane ussāvabindū viya khajjopanakā viya ca bhijjanti vinassanti cāti.
于此,对此审问的略说如下:如果由他人所构想出的“我”或“世间”是常住的,那么因为它无有变异,不会舍弃先前的形态,从而无法赋予任何人殊胜之处,因此,为了从不利中回转以及为实践利益之事而作的教导,对常住论者而言便全然无用。再者,既无变异,那种教导又如何能运作?而且如此一来,这常住的我就如同虚空一般,不可能有布施等善行,也不可能有杀生等恶行。同样地,因不被业所缚,常住论者经历乐苦的关联便完全不合理;又因无生等,哪里还会有解脱?然而,如果他辩解说:“对于那个常住的我,只是有一些法生灭,借着这些法才有了行为等假名。”即便如此,对一个不舍弃先前形态、恒常安住的“我”,你无法合理地认定“只是法”。再者,那些属于“我”的法,是作为它的状态而存在,还是与它相异?如果相异,那么即使那些法生起,对那个“我”而言也没有任何差别。而他却期望那个“我”借着那些法来造作、感受、死亡和投生,因此,那个“我”就处于如前所述有过失的状态。而且,这种对法的施设也可能毫无意义。显示巴利原文
Tatthāyaṃ anuyuñjane saṅkhepakathā – yadi hi parena parikappito attā loko vā sassato siyā, tassa nibbikāratāya purimarūpāvijahanato kassaci visesādhānassa kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ahitato nivattanatthaṃ, hite ca paṭipattiatthaṃ upadeso eva nippayojano siyā sassatavādino, kathaṃ vā so upadeso pavattīyati vikārābhāvato, evañca attano ajaṭākāsassa viya dānādikiriyā hiṃsādikiriyā ca na sambhavati. Tathā sukhassa dukkhassa anubhavananibandho eva sassatavādino na yujjati kammabaddhābhāvato, jātiādīnañca asambhavato kuto vimokkho, atha pana dhammamattaṃ tassa uppajjati ceva vinassati ca, yassa vasenāyaṃ kiriyādivohāroti vadeyya, evampi purimarūpāvijahanena avaṭṭhitassa attano dhammamattanti na sakkā sambhāvetuṃ, te vā panassa dhammā avatthābhūtā aññe vā siyuṃ anaññe vā. Yadi aññe, na tāhi tassa uppannāhipi koci viseso atthi. Yāhi karoti paṭisaṃvedeti cavati upapajjati cāti icchitaṃ, tasmā tadavattho eva yathāvuttadoso. Kiñca dhammakappanāpi niratthikā siyā, athānaññe uppādavināsavantīhi avatthāhi anaññassa attano tāsaṃ viya uppādavināsasabbhāvato kuto niccatāvakāso, tāsampi vā attano viya niccatāti bandhavimokkhānaṃ asambhavo evāti na yujjatiyeva sassatavādo. Na cettha koci vādī dhammānaṃ sassatabhāve parisuddhaṃ yuttiṃ vattuṃ samattho, yuttirahitañca vacanaṃ na paṇḍitānaṃ cittaṃ ārādhetīti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yāva paṇḍitā na samanuyuñjanti, tāva gacchanti pavattantī’’ti. Kammavasena abhimukho sampareti etthāti abhisamparāyo, paroloko.
此处言及“及一切知智”,是因为在此要对一切知智加以分别;或者,当说一切知智时,由于彼是一切智之所依,漏尽智即已包含在内;又因与一切知智不相离故,世尊所具有的十力等一切智亦被全部纳入,因此说已将其全部纳入。“虽了知”中的“虽”字有推想之义,借此表达了“及彼”一词中“而”的含义。此中意谓:即便是那些较恶见更为殊胜、堪称心髓的戒等功德殊胜,如来亦不执取,何况于轮回中的诱饵? “我”一词,是基于“见”指出了一种执取方式。在“我了知”中,“iti”是表方式的词,借此显示了基于“爱”而执取为“我所”的方式。所谓“执取”,就是逾越了法的真实体性,而向别处抓取。实则,于诸蕴中,实无任何一法可被执取为“我”或“我所”。然而,此执取不外乎是贪爱等烦恼。而世尊于菩提树下已将其彻底断除,由此故说“于所执取的烦恼”等。“因无所执取故”是“寂灭了感受者”的原因说明;或者,此是与“已了知”相呼应,使用了充当主语的属格形式;又或者,此处之义当如此理解:显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbaññutaññāṇañcā’’ti idaṃ idha sabbaññutaññāṇassa vibhajiyamānattā vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ vā vutte tadadhiṭṭhānato āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ, tadavinābhāvato sabbampi vā bhagavato dasabalādiñāṇaṃ gahitameva hotīti katvā. Pajānantopīti pi-saddo sambhāvane, tena ‘‘tañcā’’ti ettha vuttaṃ ca-saddatthamāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – taṃ diṭṭhigatato uttaritaraṃ sārabhūtaṃ sīlādiguṇavisesampi tathāgato nābhinivisati, ko pana vādo vaṭṭāmiseti. ‘‘Aha’’nti diṭṭhivasena vā taṃ parāmasanākāramāha. Pajānāmīti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho, tena ‘‘mama’’nti taṇhāvasena parāmasanākāraṃ dasseti. Dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanaṃ parāmāso. Na hi taṃ atthi, khandhesu yaṃ ‘‘aha’’nti vā, ‘‘mama’’nti vā gahetabbaṃ siyā. Yo pana parāmāso taṇhādayova, te ca bhagavato bodhimūleyeva pahīnāti āha ‘‘parāmāsakilesāna’’ntiādi. Aparāmāsatoti vā nibbutivedanassa hetuvacanaṃ, ‘‘viditā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ apekkhitvā kattari sāmivacanaṃ, aparāmasanahetu parāmāsarahitāya paṭipattiyā tathāgatena sayameva asaṅkhatadhātu adhigatāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
通过“于哪些受中”等语句,显示了世尊说法的善巧。诚然,尽管在依蕴、处等分类的多种四圣谛教法中都有可能,但这亦是诸佛说法时的惯例:为了显明那些邪见者如何因错误的修行而跳入见的丛林,兼而显示要证得遍知,受乃其基础所在,故独举“受”而说之。 其中,“业处”即四谛业处。 “如实了知后”意为:以观慧,透过所缘通达的方式,了知受的集起等;以道慧,透过无痴通达的方式,遍知、全分通达。 “缘集之义”:依“此有故彼有,此生故彼生”所示之法则,指由无明等缘生起,以及道尚未将其彻底断除故。“生起的特征”指“生起”这一特征,即“生”的意思。于所提及的“五种特征”中,应知是将前四种缘的“生起特征”合为一类而说,因“缘的特征”亦可得故,注释书也是如此解释的。至于“缘灭之义”一句,其义亦应依前所说之理而知。“凡”字,意为“因为”,或指那种乐与喜悦。“缘于”是指获得了作为所缘缘等的受之后。“此”是指成为乐与喜悦之缘,或者就是显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāsu vedanāsū’’tiādinā bhagavato desanāvilāsaṃ dasseti. Tathā hi khandhāyatanādivasena anekavidhāsu catusaccadesanāsu sambhavantīsupi ayaṃ tathāgatānaṃ desanāsu paṭipatti, yaṃ diṭṭhigatikā micchāpaṭipattiyā diṭṭhigahanaṃ pakkhandāti dassanatthaṃ vedanāyeva pariññāya bhūmidassanatthaṃ uddhaṭā. Kammaṭṭhānanti catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ viditvāti vipassanāpaññāya vedanāya samudayādīni ārammaṇapaṭivedhavasena maggapaññāya asammohapaṭivedhavasena jānitvā, paṭivijjhitvāti attho. Paccayasamudayaṭṭhenāti ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.404; saṃ. ni. 2.21; udā. 1) vuttalakkhaṇena avijjādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ uppādena ceva maggena asamugghātena ca. Nibbattilakkhaṇanti uppādalakkhaṇaṃ, jātinti attho. Pañcannaṃ lakkhaṇānanti ettha catunnaṃ paccayānampi uppādalakkhaṇameva gahetvā vuttanti gahetabbaṃ, yasmā paccayalakkhaṇampi labbhatiyeva, tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Paccayanirodhaṭṭhenāti etthāpi vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Yanti yasmā, yaṃ vā sukhaṃ somanassaṃ. Paṭiccāti ārammaṇapaccayādibhūtaṃ vedanaṃ labhitvā. Ayanti sukhasomanassānaṃ paccayabhāvo, sukhasomanassameva vā, ‘‘assādo’’ti padaṃ pana apekkhitvā pulliṅganiddeso. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – purimuppannaṃ vedanaṃ ārabbha somanassuppattiyaṃ yo purimavedanāya assādetabbākāro somanassassādanākāro, ayaṃ assādoti. Kathaṃ pana vedanaṃ ārabbha sukhaṃ uppajjatīti? Cetasikasukhassa adhippetattā nāyaṃ doso. Visesanaṃ hettha somanassaggahaṇaṃ sukhaṃ somanassanti ‘‘rukkho siṃsapā’’ti yathā.
以“无常”一词,依行苦之理,指出了舍受的过患,亦可说是开示了一切受的过患;以其余(“苦”与“变易”)二词,则依次依苦苦与坏苦之理,指出苦受与乐受的过患;或者,此三词亦可无差别地通用于一切受,以明其过患。 “此”是指:感受那种“既生复灭”层面的无常性,那种“为生灭不断逼迫”层面的苦性,以及那种“会被老与死两种方式所变易”的特质——此即受之过患;或谓:正由此过患,才有衰败与极度的悲悯产生。 “从受中出离”一语中,“受”为从格用法。若人未舍断对受所生之紧密欲贪,此人即仍黏着于受。一旦舍断彼欲贪,此人即从诸受中出离、解脱。是故,欲贪的舍断即名为“从受中出离”。 此处,以“受”为标举,则凡与受俱生者、为受所依止者、成为受之所缘的色法及非色法,即已含摄其中。故应知,此处实已举示全部五取蕴。然而,教授主要以受为纲领先行开演,其中缘由,前文已说。或复次,此理亦当显示巴利原文
‘‘Aniccā’’ti iminā saṅkhāradukkhatāvasena upekkhāvedanāya, sabbavedanāsuyeva vā ādīnavamāha, itarehi itaradukkhatāvasena yathākkamaṃ dukkhasukhavedanānaṃ, avisesena vā tīṇipi padāni sabbāsampi vedanānaṃ vasena yojetabbāni. Ayanti yo vedanāya hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccabhāvo, udayabbayapaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhabhāvo, jarāya maraṇena cāti dvedhā vipariṇāmetabbabhāvo ca, ayaṃ vedanāya ādīnavo, yato vā ādīnaṃ paramakāruññaṃ vāti pavattatīti. Vedanāya nissaraṇanti ettha vedanāyāti nissakkavacanaṃ, yāva vedanāpaṭibaddhaṃ chandarāgaṃ na pajahati, tāvāyaṃ puriso vedanaṃ allīnoyeva hoti. Yadā pana taṃ chandarāgaṃ pajahati, tadāyaṃ puriso vedanāya nissaṭo visaṃyutto hotīti chandarāgappahānaṃ vedanāya nissaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha ca vedanāggahaṇena vedanāya sahajātanissayārammaṇabhūtā ca rūpārūpadhammā gahitā eva hontīti pañcannampi upādānakkhandhānaṃ gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vedanāsīsena pana desanā āgatā, tattha kāraṇaṃ vuttameva, lakkhaṇahāranayena vā ayamattho vibhāvetabbo. Tattha vedanāggahaṇena gahitā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ, vedanānaṃ samudayaggahaṇena gahitā avijjādayo samudayasaccaṃ, atthaṅgamanissaraṇapariyāyehi nirodhasaccaṃ, ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ viditvā’’ti etena maggasaccanti evamettha cattāri saccāni veditabbāni. Kāmupādānamūlakattā sesupādānānaṃ, pahīne ca kāmupādāne upādānasesābhāvato ‘‘vigatachandarāgatāya anupādāno’’ti vuttaṃ. Anupādāvimuttoti attano maggaphalappattiṃ bhagavā dasseti. ‘‘Vedanāna’’ntiādinā hi yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā imaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ sakāraṇaṃ sagatikaṃ pabhedato vibhajituṃ samattho ahosi , tassa sabbaññutaññāṇassa saddhiṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya uppattibhūmiṃ dasseti dhammarājā.
一分常住论的注释显示巴利原文
Ekaccasassatavādavaṇṇanā
38 在众生与诸行中,认为其中一部分是常住的,此见即是“一分常住”,持此观点的理论便是“一分常住论”。由于这些人持有此论,故被称为“一分常住论者”。正是因为他们将“一分常住论”执为自己的见解,才获得“一分常住论者”之名。为阐明此义,才说“那些一分常住论者”。依此方法,对于“一分无常论者”一词的涵义,也应当如是理解。若问:当说“一分常住论者”时,另一部分是无常的这个结论,难道不是自然成立的吗?回答是:确实,从逻辑义理上说,此结论自然成立,但在言辞上,并未直接宣说。因此,为使此义更加明了清晰,才明确说出“一分无常论者”。因为,法主世尊在此说法,绝不会留下半截话,令人揣度。这里的“在此”,可指于“一分常住论者”这一词句中,即是以此取义、如此宣说,从而开显其义。或者,“在此”也可指于这整个教导之中。诚然如此,前面三种论是基于“众生”来分别的,而这第四种论,则是基于“行”来分别的。所谓“一分行常住……”显示巴利原文
38. Sattesu saṅkhāresu ca ekaccaṃ sassataṃ etassāti ekaccasassato, ekaccasassatavādo. So etesaṃ atthīti ekaccasassatikā. Te pana yasmā ekaccasassato vādo diṭṭhi etesanti ekaccasassatavādā nāma honti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ekaccasassatavādā’’ti. Iminā nayena ekaccaasassatikā dipadassapi attho veditabbo. Nanu ca ‘‘ekaccasassatikā’’ti vutte tadaññassa ekaccassa asassatatāsanniṭṭhānaṃ siddhameva hotīti? Saccaṃ siddhameva hoti atthato, na pana saddato. Tasmā supākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ekaccaasassatikā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi idha sāvasesaṃ katvā dhammaṃ deseti dhammassāmī. Idhāti ‘‘ekaccasassatikā’’ti imasmiṃ pade. Gahitāti vuttā, tathā ceva attho dassito. Idhāti vā imissā desanāya. Tathā hi purimakā tayo vādā sattavasena, catuttho saṅkhāravasena vibhatto. ‘‘Saṅkhārekaccasassatikā’’ti idaṃ tehi sassatabhāvena gayhamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ yāthāvasabhāvadassanavasena vuttaṃ, na panekaccasassatikamatadassanavasena. Tassa hi sassatābhimataṃ asaṅkhatamevāti laddhi. Tenevāha ‘‘cittanti vā…pe… ṭhassatī’’ti. Na hi yassa bhāvassa paccayehi abhisaṅkhatabhāvaṃ paṭijānāti, tasseva niccadhuvādibhāvo anummattakena sakkā paṭiññātuṃ. Etena ‘‘uppādavayadhuvatāyuttabhāvā siyā niccā, siyā aniccā siyā na vattabbā’’tiādinā pavattassa sattabhaṅgavādassa ayuttatā vibhāvitā hoti.
于此,这是阐明其不合理之处:如果有人说“任何法以某种自性而被称为存在,即以那种自性而不存在”等语,那么就会成为不定论。如果以另一种方式宣说,则不会成为不定论。而且在此处,由于那个法是一切世间所共许的,并无争议,所以也不适合说它与方位差别等有什么关联。然而,有些人这样说道:“如同用金瓶做成王冠时,瓶性消失,冠性生起,而金性却恒常存在;同样地,在一切存在中,有些法灭去,有些法生起,而自性却恒常存在。”这些人应当被如是反问:“那个在瓶和冠中恒常存在的‘金’究竟是什么?若说是色等,那它就如同声音一样是无常的。若说是色等的集合,所谓集合仅是假名,于其中根本找不到‘存在’‘不存在’或‘常’这些性质。”如此,便不会成为不定论。而且,在诸法及具有那些法的事物上,由于种种变化而产生的过失,在省察常见论之处已经说过了。因此,于彼处所说的道理,在此处也应当依之了知。再者,由于在究竟义上承认有‘我’和‘世间’的存在,它们便很难用常、无常等形态来表述,就像常等中的某一种形态,或者如同灯焰等一样。因为灯焰等这些有生灭自性的事物……显示巴利原文
Tatthāyaṃ ayuttatāvibhāvanā – yadi ‘‘yena sabhāvena yo dhammo atthīti vuccati, teneva sabhāvena so dhammo natthī’’tiādinā vucceyya, siyā anekantavādo. Atha aññena, siyā na anekantavādo. Na cettha desantarādisambandhabhāvo yutto vattuṃ tassa sabbalokasiddhattā, vivādābhāvato . Ye pana vadanti ‘‘yathā suvaṇṇaghaṭena makuṭe kate ghaṭabhāvo nassati, makuṭabhāvo uppajjati, suvaṇṇabhāvo tiṭṭhatiyeva, evaṃ sabbabhāvānaṃ koci dhammo nassati, koci dhammo uppajjati, sabhāvo pana tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Te vattabbā ‘‘kiṃ taṃ suvaṇṇaṃ, yaṃ ghaṭe makuṭe ca avaṭṭhitaṃ, yadi rūpādi, so saddo viya anicco. Atha rūpādi samūho, samūho nāma sammutimattaṃ. Na tassa atthitā natthitā niccatā vā labbhatī’’ti anekantavādo na siyā. Dhammānañca dhammino aññathānaññathāsu doso vuttoyeva sassatavādavicāraṇāyaṃ. Tasmā so tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Apica niccāniccanavattabbarūpo attā loko ca paramatthato vijjamānatāpaṭijānanato yathā niccādīnaṃ aññataraṃ rūpaṃ, yathā vā dīpādayo. Na hi dīpādīnaṃ udayabbayasabhāvānaṃ niccāniccanavattabbasabhāvatā sakkā viññātuṃ, jīvassa niccādīsu aññataraṃ rūpaṃ viyāti evaṃ sattabhaṅgassa viya sesabhaṅgānampi asambhavoyevāti sattabhaṅgavādassa ayuttatā veditabbā.
于此,“自在天是常,其余有情是无常”——如此生起的论说,即属“一分有情为常”的观点,如同那些主张自在天的论师。“极微是常、坚固,由极微所构成的等是无常”——如此生起的论说,则属“一分行为常”的观点,如同那些迦那陀论师。难道在“某些法是常,某些法是无常”这一论中,确定了眼等是无常,不正是随顺其自性而了知吗?这怎么会是邪见呢?然而,又有谁这样说过“确定眼等是无常是邪见”呢?实际上,正是在这些无常法之中,对其中一些法生起了“常住”的执取,这才是此处的邪见。然而,当此邪见一生起,对眼等无常性的了知便被它染污了,因为与之混杂一处,犹如掺了毒的醍醐精华,无法再发挥其效用,所以不能将它归于正见之列。或者,即使是已被无常性所确定的眼等,由于被见行者们赋予了“命者”的自性,那么去了解它们的无常性,这种了解本身就难免成为邪见。所以他才说:“眼……乃至……身,这就是我的我”等等。若如此看待,依于无为界与有为界,顺次而说:“某些法是常,某些法是无常”——如此宣说的分论者,也便成为了一分常住论者。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘issaro nicco, aññe sattā aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādā sattekaccasassatikā seyyathāpi issaravādā. ‘‘Paramāṇavo niccā dhuvā, aṇukādayo aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādā saṅkhārekaccasassatikā seyyathāpi kāṇādā. Nanu ‘‘ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatā’’ti etasmiṃ vāde cakkhādīnaṃ asassatatāsanniṭṭhānaṃ yathāsabhāvāvabodho eva, tayidaṃ kathaṃ micchādassananti, ko vā evamāha ‘‘cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ micchādassana’’nti? Asassatesuyeva pana kesañci dhammānaṃ sassatabhāvābhiniveso idha micchādassanaṃ. Tena pana ekavāre pavattamānena cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvāvabodho vidūsito saṃsaṭṭhabhāvato visasaṃsaṭṭho viya sappimaṇḍo sakiccakaraṇāsamatthatāya sammādassanapakkhe ṭhapetabbataṃ nārahatīti. Asassatabhāvena nicchitāpi vā cakkhuādayo samāropitajīvasabhāvā eva diṭṭhigatikehi gayhantīti tadavabodhassa micchādassanabhāvo na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘cakkhuṃ itipi…pe… kāyo itipi ayaṃ me attā’’tiādi. Evañca katvā asaṅkhatāya saṅkhatāya ca dhātuyā vasena yathākkamaṃ ‘‘ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatā’’ti evaṃ pavatto vibhajjavādopi ekaccasassatavādo āpajjatīti evaṃpakārā codanā anavakāsā hoti aviparītadhammasabhāvasampaṭipattibhāvato.
诚然,在前面的论点中,将无常法执取为“常”,尤其是一种邪见;但将常法执取为“常”,却不是邪见,因为那是如实地执取。然而,正是由于在无常法中,区分了“某些法是常,某些法是无常”这样应被执取的法,这种论才被说成不同于其他论。对此,不能这样说:“因为部分包含在整体中,所以对一部分有所保留的常执,就并入无保留的常执中去了。”因为论主是依其所取对象的差别,而有这两种论的生起。实际上,有一类见行者倾向于“一切法皆常”,另一类则倾向于“一部分常”。对诸行毫无保留地全部执取,与只执取一部分,正是这两种论的区别所在。进一步说,这是因为他们所倾向的对象,有的是多种类聚集的蕴相续,有的是单一种类聚集的蕴相续。四种常住论者,由于类别的差异,或依种种色身所依的聚集,或依无色法的聚集,而生起常住的倾向;他们或借助神通智,或借助随念,执取了色身的坏灭。正如经中所言:“从彼处死,于此处生”(《长部》1.32),以及“他们死,他们生”等。获得更殊胜境界的一分常住论者……显示巴利原文
Kāmañcettha purimavādepi asassatānaṃ dhammānaṃ ‘‘sassatā’’ti gahaṇaṃ visesato micchādassanaṃ, sassatānaṃ pana ‘‘sassatā’’ti gāho na micchādassanaṃ yathāsabhāvaggahaṇabhāvato. Asassatesuyeva pana ‘‘kecideva dhammā sassatā, keci asassatā’’ti gahetabbadhammesu vibhāgappavattiyā imassa vādassa vādantaratā vuttā, na cettha ‘‘samudāyantogadhattā ekadesassa sappadesasassataggāho nippadesasassataggāhe samodhānaṃ gacchatī’’ti sakkā vattuṃ vādī tabbisayavisesavasena vādadvayassa pavattattā. Aññe eva hi diṭṭhigatikā ‘‘sabbe dhammā sassatā’’ti abhiniviṭṭhā, aññe ‘‘ekaccasassatā’’ti. Saṅkhārānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ, ekadesapariggaho ca vādadvayassa paribyattoyeva. Kiñca bhiyyo anekavidhasamussaye ekavidhasamussaye ca khandhapabandhe abhinivesabhāvato. Catubbidhopi hi sassatavādī jātivisesavasena nānāvidharūpakāyasannissaye eva arūpadhammapuñje sassatābhinivesī jāto abhiññāṇena anussavādīhi ca rūpakāyabhedaggahaṇato. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘tato cuto amutra udapādi’’nti (dī. ni. 1.32) ‘‘cavanti upapajjantī’’ti ca ādi. Visesalābhī ekaccasassatiko anupadhāritabhedasamussayeva dhammapabandhe sassatākāraggahaṇena abhinivisanaṃ janesi ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhasantānavisayattā tadabhinivesassa. Tathā ca tīsupi vādesu ‘‘taṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, tato paraṃ nānussaratī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ, takkīnaṃ pana sassatekaccasassatavādīnaṃ sassatābhinivesaviseso rūpārūpadhammavisayatāya supākaṭoyevāti.
39 39.“经过极长时间的超越”:即离开了坏劫与坏劫住。由于“界”有多种意义,而vaṭṭa(转起)一词加上接头词saṃ(共同)后,是表示坏灭的,故说“灭尽”,意思是依灭尽而转起。从导致破坏的大雨云生起开始,一直到连微尘大小的行也不存在为止,这时就说世间在坏灭。这里的“世间”,是指地等器世间。“在上层的梵天世间中”:即在少净天等色界梵天世间中。这里所说的劫坏,主要是指以火来坏灭,因其较常发生,所以世尊说:“他们成为转生光音天者。”“或在无色界中”:这里的“或”字,应理解为是在坏灭的世间界与其他世间界之间作抉择。因为不能认为“所有恶趣众生那时都生于色界、无色界”,原因是恶趣中寿命极长者不可能生于人界。虽然一切众生都是依造作之心而结生,但由于没有外在的因缘,唯由心而生,所以色界有情被称为“意所成”。若如此,那欲界的化生有情是否也成了意所成呢?不会,为了说明“意所成”这一称呼是用于由殊胜心——即增上心——所生的有情,他说:“由于是由禅那心所生,所以是意所成。”那么,无色界有情是否也成了……显示巴利原文
39.Dīghassakālassa atikkamenāti vivaṭṭavivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīnaṃ apagamena. Anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ saṃ-saddena yutto vaṭṭa-saddo vināsavācīti āha ‘‘vinassatī’’ti, saṅkhayavasena vattatīti attho. Vipattikaramahāmeghasamuppattito paṭṭhāya hi yāva aṇusahagatopi saṅkhāro na hoti, tāva loko saṃvaṭṭatīti vuccati. Lokoti cettha pathavīādibhājanaloko adhippeto. Uparibrahmalokesūti parittasubhādīsu rūpībrahmalokesu. Agginā hi kappavuṭṭhānaṃ idhādhippetaṃ bahulaṃ pavattanato. Tenevāha bhagavā ‘‘ābhassarasaṃvattanikā hontī’’ti. Arūpesuvāti vā-saddena saṃvaṭṭamānalokadhātūhi aññalokadhātūsu vāti vikappanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Na hi ‘‘sabbe apāyasattā tadā rūpārūpabhavesu uppajjantī’’ti sakkā viññātuṃ apāyesu dīghatamāyukānaṃ manussalokūpattiyā asambhavato. Satipi sabbasattānaṃ abhisaṅkhāramanasā nibbattabhāve bāhirapaccayehi vinā manasāva nibbattattā ‘‘manomayā’’ti vuccanti rūpāvacarasattā. Yadi evaṃ kāmabhave opapātikasattānampi manomayabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati adhicittabhūtena atisayamanasā nibbattasattesu manomayavohāratoti dassanto āha ‘‘jhānamanena nibbattattā manomayā’’ti. Evaṃ arūpāvacarasattānampi manomayabhāvo āpajjatīti ce? Na, tattha bāhirapaccayehi nibbattetabbatāsaṅkāya eva abhāvato, ‘‘manasāva nibbattā’’ti avadhāraṇāsambhavato. Niruḷho vāyaṃ loke manomayavohāro rūpāvacarasattesu. Tathā hi ‘‘annamayo pānamayo manomayo ānandamayo viññāṇamayo’’ti pañcadhā attānaṃ vedavādino vadanti. Ucchedavādepi vakkhati ‘‘dibbo rūpī manomayo’’ti (dī. ni. 1.86). Sobhanā pabhā etesu santīti subhā. ‘‘Ukkaṃsenā’’ti ābhassaradeve sandhāyāha, parittābhā appamāṇābhā pana dve cattāro ca kappe tiṭṭhanti. Aṭṭhakappeti aṭṭha mahākappe.
40 40.‘住立’:即从能带来成就的大雨云生起开始,依地持水、水持风、风持大地等的生起而安住;或者由于‘界’有多种意义,其意思就是‘生起’。‘自然’:即依自性,它与‘空’这个词有关联。对此,说出原因:‘因为没有已生起的众生’,意思是尚未生起。这就表示:有些天宫因为里面已生起的有情死了而变得空无,但这里的情况不是这样。梵众天、梵辅天和大梵天是梵身天,他们所住的地也叫做‘梵身天’。‘以业为缘’:业是这一地的亲依止缘,所以叫‘以业为缘’。或者,因为那里所生有情的受报业具有俱行缘的性质;或者说‘业的缘’,所以叫‘以业为缘’。‘以时节为生源’:即‘以时节为生源’。或者读作‘以业为缘、以时节为生源’:业是资助的缘,或者作为业的资助缘就是‘业缘’;那个本身就是时节,所以是‘业缘时节’;它就是这一地的生源——应这样来连接解释。‘在这里’:即在称为‘梵宫’的梵身地。怎么在殊胜的第二禅那地里住立,还会生到比较低劣的初禅那地里去呢?为了解释这个,说了‘那时那些有情……’这一段。‘降下’:即以受生的方式,往下面那一地去。显示巴利原文
40.Saṇṭhātīti sampattikaramahāmeghasamuppattito paṭṭhāya pathavīsandhārakudakataṃsandhārakavāyumahāpathavīādīnaṃ samuppattivasena ṭhāti, ‘‘sambhavati’’ icceva vā attho anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ. Pakatiyāti sabhāvena, tassa ‘‘suñña’’nti iminā sambandho. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘nibbattasattānaṃ natthitāyā’’ti, anuppannattāti attho, tena yathā ekaccāni vimānāni tattha nibbattasattānaṃ cutattā suññāni honti, na evamidanti dasseti. Brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmāno brahmakāyikā, tesaṃ nivāso bhūmipi ‘‘brahmakāyikā’’ti vuttā. Kammaṃ upanissayavasena paccayo etissāti kammapaccayā. Atha vā tattha nibbattasattānaṃ vipaccanakakammassa sahakārīpaccayabhāvato, kammassa paccayāti kammapaccayā. Utu samuṭṭhānaṃ etissāti utusamuṭṭhānā. ‘‘Kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānā’’ti vā pāṭho, kammasahāyo paccayo, kammassa vā sahāyabhūto paccayo kammapaccayo , sova utu kammapaccayautu, so samuṭṭhānaṃ etissāti yojetabbaṃ. Etthāti ‘‘brahmavimāna’’nti vuttāya brahmakāyikabhūmiyā. Kathaṃ paṇītāya dutiyajjhānabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitānaṃ hīnāya paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyā upapatti hotīti āha ‘‘atha sattāna’’ntiādi. Otarantīti upapajjanavasena heṭṭhābhūmiṃ gacchanti.
“寿量微小”:是指他所造的大福业,其应生的果报相续,寿量极为有限。“唯依寿量”:即唯依其最长的寿量。那么,什么是最长之寿?它又怎样被确定为有限量呢?应知——正如在各趣、各品类中,依过去世已成就的有愿和亲依止缘之力,有情的身体、肢节、颜色、形态、大小等各各差别;同理,对于胎生者、欲界天、色界有情而言,由精血、时节、食物等为缘而生起并得到诸缘支持的果报相续,其安住的时间大多有固定限量。这些色法与无色法的命根,对于它们自己那些同生且仅住一刹那的相应法,虽也表现出令其安住的作用,但其作用不仅仅是作为这些法刹那安住的因而守护它们,并且一直到有分心断绝为止,它们也作为相续不断的因而守护着。因此,以命为因,于因上假立名称,便称为“寿”;又依最高的限制,而称为“最长寿”。此寿量,诸天、地狱有情及郁单越人皆有确定的限量;其中郁单越人更为唯一确定。其余的人、饿鬼、畜生,在能招感长久安住的业力强盛时,依凭与彼业俱生的相续所产生的精血等缘,以及以此为根本、由日月等显示巴利原文
Appāyuketi yaṃ uḷāraṃ puññakammaṃ kataṃ, tassa uppajjanārahavipākapabandhato appaparimāṇāyuke. Āyuppamāṇenevāti paramāyuppamāṇeneva. Kiṃ panetaṃ paramāyu nāma, kathaṃ vā taṃ paricchinnapamāṇanti? Vuccate – yo tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhavavisese purimasiddhabhavapatthanūpanissayavasena sarīrāvayavavaṇṇasaṇṭhānapamāṇādivisesā viya taṃtaṃgatinikāyādīsu yebhuyyena niyataparicchedo gabbhaseyyakakāmāvacaradevarūpāvacarasattānaṃ sukkasoṇitautubhojanādi utuādipaccayuppannapaccayūpatthambhito vipākapabandhassa ṭhitikālaniyamo, so yathāsakaṃ khaṇamattāvaṭṭhāyīnampi attano sahajātānaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ ṭhapanākāravuttitāya pavattakāni rūpārūpajīvitindriyāni yasmā na kevalaṃ nesaṃ khaṇaṭhitiyā eva kāraṇabhāvena anupālakāni, atha kho yāva bhavaṅgupacchedā anupabandhassa avicchedahetubhāvenāpi, tasmā āyuhetukattā kāraṇūpacārena āyu, ukkaṃsaparicchedavasena paramāyūti ca vuccati. Taṃ pana devānaṃ nerayikānaṃ uttarakurukānañca niyataparicchedaṃ, uttarakurukānaṃ pana ekantaniyataparicchedameva, avasiṭṭhamanussapetatiracchānānaṃ pana ciraṭṭhitisaṃvattanikakammabahule kāle taṃkammasahitasantānajanitasukkasoṇitappaccayānaṃ taṃmūlakānañca candasūriyasamavisamaparivattanādijanitautuāhārādisamavisama paccayānaṃ vasena cirācirakālato aniyataparicchedaṃ, tassa ca yathā purimasiddhabhavapatthanāvasena taṃtaṃgatinikāyādīsu vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivisesaniyamo siddho dassanānussavādīhi, tathā ādito gahaṇasiddhiyā. Evaṃ tāsu tāsu upapattīsu nibbattasattānaṃ yebhuyyena samappamāṇaṭṭhitikālaṃ dassanānussavehi labhitvā taṃ paramataṃ ajjhosāya pavattitabhavapatthanāvasena ādito paricchedaniyamo veditabbo. Yasmā pana kammaṃ tāsu tāsu upapattīsu yathā taṃtaṃupapattiniyatavaṇṇādinibbattane samatthaṃ, evaṃ niyatāyuparicchedāsu upapattīsu paricchedātikkamena vipākanibbattane samatthaṃ na hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘āyuppamāṇeneva cavantī’’ti. Yasmā pana upatthambhakasahāyehi anupālakappaccayehi upādinnakakkhandhānaṃ pavattetabbākāro atthato paramāyu, tassa yathāvuttaparicchedānatikkamanato satipi kammāvasese ṭhānaṃ na sambhavati, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘attano puññabaleneva ṭhātuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. Kappaṃ vāti asaṅkhyeyyakappaṃ vā tassa upaḍḍhaṃ vā upaḍḍhakappato ūnamadhikaṃ vāti vikappanattho vā-saddo.
41 “不喜”:即因独住一处而生起的不欢喜。然此种不喜实因希求与他人会合,故说“期盼其他有情前来”。“因与可爱事物分离,或未获得可爱事物”,这种心的困扰名为“厌倦”;其实质即是忧俱心的生起,因此说为“与瞋相应”。“长时沉浸于禅那之乐的人”,当上述那种不喜的相生起时,取着“我”与“我所”的爱和见,在此称为“战栗”。又因为它们是内心先前状态的动摇不安,故说“恐惧、颤动”。是故他说:“此既是爱所引的战栗,也是见所引的战栗,两者皆可。”在摄取义理时则说:“‘啊,愿其他有情也来到此生!’这称为爱所引的战栗。”这是为了显示有别于见所引战栗的例子,因而特别将爱所引战栗单独提出;不应认为此处无有见所引战栗。“其战栗”:即心的惊恐。“怖畏”:即面对可怖所缘相而生起的强烈恐惧。由怖畏令身体僵直的状态,名为“惊悚”。“怖畏、悚惧”:在这些词中,“怖畏”指在坏灭随观修习纯熟之后,由对一切行心生畏怖而生起的怖畏智。显示巴利原文
41.Anabhiratīti ekavihārena anabhirati. Sā pana yasmā aññehi samāgamicchā hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aparassāpi sattassa āgamanapatthanā’’ti. Piyavatthuvirahena piyavatthualābhena vā cittavighāto ukkaṇṭhitā, sā atthato domanassacittuppādo yevāti āha ‘‘paṭighasampayuttā’’ti. Dīgharattaṃ jhānaratiyā ramamānassa vuttappakāraṃ anabhiratinimittaṃ uppannā ‘‘mama’’nti ca ‘‘aha’’nti ca gahaṇassa kāraṇabhūtā taṇhādiṭṭhiyo idha paritassanā. Tā pana cittassa purimāvatthāya calanaṃ kampananti āha ‘‘ubbijjanā phandanā’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘taṇhātassanāpi diṭṭhitassanāpi vaṭṭatī’’ti. Yaṃ pana atthuddhāre ‘‘aho vata aññepi sattā itthattaṃ āgaccheyyunti ayaṃ taṇhātassanā nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ diṭṭhitassanāya visuṃ udāharaṇaṃ dassentena taṇhātassanaṃyeva tato niddhāretvā vuttaṃ, na pana tattha diṭṭhitassanāya abhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tāsatassanā cittutrāso. Bhayānakanti bheravārammaṇanimittaṃ balavabhayaṃ. Tena sarīrassa thaddhabhāvo chambhitattaṃ bhayaṃ saṃveganti ettha bhayanti bhaṅgānupassanāya ciṇṇante sabbasaṅkhārato bhāyanavasena uppannaṃ bhayañāṇaṃ. Saṃveganti sahottappañāṇaṃ, ottappameva vā. Santāsanti ādīnavanibbidānupassanāhi saṅkhārehi santassanañāṇaṃ. Saha byāyati pavattati, dosaṃ vā chādetīti sahabyo, sahāyo, tassa bhāvaṃ sahabyataṃ.
42 “征服已而立”是他们有情之心念。然彼以值得赞叹的殊胜状态、最尊上的状态,自认“他们有情已被我征服而立”,故说“我是最胜者”。“我确然明见十方”:以无障碍的看见,以及能够把握所知差别的方式,宣称自己为无遮障的见者,故说“我看见一切,即是此义”。“已存在的与将存在的”:过去已存在的名“已存在”,现在存在及未来将存在的名“将存在”。但在注释书中,是唯就现在时的意义来解释“将存在”一词。“于第一心刹那”:即在结生心刹那。虽然那位梵天由于观察不稳固,抛弃了凡夫在过往生中已熟悉的“业是自己所有”之智,仅被系缚于神通变化心念的有情化现所颠倒,高唱“我是自在天、造作者、化作者”等,坠入那种自在天所作的邪见;然因经中说“他这样想”,这仅表示他以偏向的方式而住,并非以确立的方式而住。为显示他实是依于确立的次第而生起那种倾向,故说“欲以因由证明”以及“先立誓言”。因此世尊说:“那是什么原因呢?”等。在此,“意的希求”:即是仅用意识显示巴利原文
42.Abhibhavitvā ṭhito ime satteti adhippāyo. Yasmā pana so pāsaṃsabhāvena uttamabhāvena ca ‘‘te satte abhibhavitvā ṭhito’’ti attānaṃ maññati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘jeṭṭhakohamasmī’’ti. Aññadatthu dasoti dassane antarāyābhāvavacanena, ñeyyavisesapariggāhikabhāvena ca anāvaraṇadassāvitaṃ paṭijānātīti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ passāmīti attho’’ti. Bhūtabhabyānanti ahesunti bhūtā, bhavanti bhavissantīti bhabyā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vattamānakālavaseneva bhabya-saddassa attho dassito. Paṭhamacittakkhaṇeti paṭisandhicittakkhaṇe. Kiñcāpi so brahmā anavaṭṭhitadassanattā puthujjanassa purimatarajātiparicitampi kammassakataññāṇaṃ vissajjetvā vikubbaniddhivasena cittuppattimattapaṭibaddhena sattanimmānena vipallaṭṭho ‘‘ahaṃ issaro kattā nimmātā’’tiādinā issarakuttadassanaṃ pakkhandamāno abhinivisanavaseneva patiṭṭhito, na patiṭṭhāpanavasena ‘‘tassa evaṃ hotī’’ti vuttattā, patiṭṭhāpanakkameneva pana tassa so abhiniveso jātoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘kāraṇato sādhetukāmo’’ti, ‘‘paṭiññaṃ katvā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’tiādi. Tattha manopaṇidhīti manasā eva patthanā, tathā cittappavattimattamevāti attho, itthabhāvanti idappakārataṃ. Yasmā pana itthanti brahmattabhāvo idhādhippeto, tasmā ‘‘brahmabhāvanti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu ca devānaṃ upapattisamanantaraṃ ‘‘imissā nāma gatiyā cavitvā iminā nāma kammunā idhūpapannā’’ti paccavekkhaṇā hotīti? Saccaṃ hoti, sā pana purimajātīsu kammassakataññāṇe sammadeva niviṭṭhajjhāsayānaṃ. Ime pana sattā purimāsupi jātīsu issarakuttadassanavasena vinibandhābhinivesā ahesunti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘iminā maya’’ntiādi.
43 “Āsati”意为“自在”,故“自在者”(īso)即“胜伏者”。“大自在者”(mahā īso)即“大自在天”(maheso);又因其具备善建立的大自在性,而被他人称为“大自在”,由此得名“大威德者”(mahesakkha)。更殊胜的大威德,即是“更大威德者”(mahesakkhatara),应如此理解其词义。然而,这种大威德的特性是通过其具备主宰与眷属的成就而为人所知,所以说:“依自在与眷属而有更大美誉者”。显示巴利原文
43. Īsatīti īso, abhibhūti attho. Mahā īso maheso, suppatiṭṭhamahesatāya pana parehi ‘‘maheso’’ti akkhātabbatāya mahesakkho, atisayena mahesakkho mahesakkhataroti vacanattho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā pana so mahesakkhabhāvo ādhipateyyaparivārasampattiyā viññāyati, tasmā ‘‘issariyaparivāravasena mahāyasataro’’ti vuttaṃ.
44 “即来此世”:指在这人间世界,以结生方式到来。“某有情”中的“yaṃ”仅是语助词,或为具格中的反身指代,意为“以某种状态”,或指动作本身。“来至此生”意为:此生的到来这种情形是存在的。这一理路同样适用于“出家、触证心定、随念宿住”等文句。因为“比丘们!有此情形:某有情……”此句,应分别与“出家”等语句衔接理解。显示巴利原文
44.Idheva āgacchatīti imasmiṃ manussaloke eva paṭisandhivasena āgacchati. Yaṃ aññataro sattoti ettha yanti nipātamattaṃ, karaṇe vā paccattaniddeso, yena ṭhānenāti attho, kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā. Itthattaṃ āgacchatīti ettha yadetaṃ itthattassa āgamanaṃ, etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti attho. Esa nayo ‘‘pabbajati, cetosamādhiṃ phusati, pubbenivāsaṃ anussaratī’’ti etesupi padesu. ‘‘Ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ bhikkhave vijjati, yaṃ aññataro satto’’ti imañhi padaṃ ‘‘pabbajatī’’tiādīhi padehi paccekaṃ yojetabbanti.
45 “戏笑败坏者”:因耽著戏笑而败坏,故名戏笑败坏者(khiḍḍāpadosino),这些戏笑败坏者即是那些具有戏笑败坏性的天众。或者,因他们具有“戏笑败坏”这一特质,故称戏笑败坏者。“过度耗时”即超过时间,指超过了受用食物的时刻。由淫欲交合所生的乐、嬉戏欢笑的乐,称为乐法、乐的自性。关于“食物”:这里,诸天的食物是什么?进食时间又是什么?一切欲界天众皆以甘露为食,从上界天到下界天,食物次第转为精妙。他们各自以天界的一日为周期,每日进食。但有一类人说:“他们取用如猫足迹般大小的甘露,置于舌上仅一瞬间,便遍满全身乃至发端指尖,且能维持七日所需。”“无间地咀嚼吞咽”乃是假设之说。业生的火界之所以强盛,是因为它由广大的福德所生,也由于广大、厚重、润滑的甘露食物被消化。而化身则柔和、纤细、嫩滑,故而羸弱。正因如此,世尊在因陀娑罗窟中,对无法站立于自然地面上的天帝释提桓因说:“请你决意令身体粗重吧。”“他们的”指人类的;“事”指化身;“有一些”指无畏山寺的僧众。显示巴利原文
45. Khiḍḍāya padussantīti khiḍḍāpadosino, khiḍḍāpadosino eva khiḍḍāpadosikā, khiḍḍāpadoso vā etesaṃ atthīti khiḍḍāpadosikā. Atikkantavelaṃ ativelaṃ, āhārūpabhogakālaṃ atikkamitvāti attho. Methunasampayogena uppajjanakasukhaṃ keḷihassasukhaṃ ratidhammo ratisabhāvo. Āhāranti ettha ko devānaṃ āhāro, kā āhāravelāti? Sabbesampi kāmāvacaradevānaṃ sudhā āhāro, sā heṭṭhimehi uparimānaṃ paṇītatamā hoti, taṃ yathāsakaṃ divasavasena divase divase bhuñjanti. Keci pana ‘‘biḷārapadappamāṇaṃ sudhāhāraṃ bhuñjanti, so jivhāya ṭhapitamatto yāva kesagganakhaggā kāyaṃ pharati, tesaṃyeva divasavasena sattadivase yāpanasamattho ca hotī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Nirantaraṃ khādantā pivantā’’ti idaṃ parikappanavasena vuttaṃ. Kammajatejassa balavabhāvo uḷārapuññanibbattattā, uḷāragarusiniddhasudhāhārajīraṇato ca. Karajakāyassa mandabhāvo mudusukhumālabhāvato. Teneva hi bhagavā indasālaguhāyaṃ pakatipathaviyaṃ saṇṭhātuṃ asakkontaṃ sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ ‘‘oḷārikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhehī’’ti āha. Tesanti manussānaṃ. Vatthunti karajakāyaṃ. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino.
47 “以意”:指被嫉妒所败坏的心。由于嫉妒,心的败坏称为意败坏;他们以此意败坏为毁灭之因,是故名为“意败坏者”,应如此理解。“不怒者得护”:嗔怒者的嗔怒,对于不嗔怒的另一方来说,由于没有执取、仅生起一次而不成惯习,无法令其退堕,犹如火焰到达水边便熄灭一样。因此,不怒者能从退堕中护住自己。然而,当双方都嗔怒时,彼此的嫌恶辗转增盛,极为锐利、具有燃烧所依性质的嗔怒便生起,它会烧灼心的所依处,毁坏那极其微细柔嫩的化身,随后整个生命体也随之消失。所以说“然而当两者皆……”等。世尊同样说过:“彼此以染污之心、疲惫之身……退堕。”“法性”即法的决定性。由于他们的化身羸弱,而如此生起的嗔怒又极为强烈,所以他们会从位次退堕,这便是这些有色、无色法的自性,也是此处的意趣。显示巴利原文
47.Manenāti issāpakatattā paduṭṭhena manasā. Usūyāvasena manasova padoso manopadoso, so etesaṃ atthi vināsahetubhūtoti manopadosikāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Akuddho rakkhatīti kuddhassa so kodho itarasmiṃ akujjhante anupādāno ekavārameva uppattiyā anāsevano cāvetuṃ na sakkoti udakantaṃ patvā aggi viya nibbāyati, tasmā akuddho taṃ cavanato rakkhati, ubhosu pana kuddhesu bhiyyo bhiyyo aññamaññamhi parivaḍḍhanavasena tikhiṇasamudācāro nissayadahanaraso kodho uppajjamāno hadayavatthuṃ nidahanto accantasukhumālakarajakāyaṃ vināseti, tato sakalopi attabhāvo antaradhāyati. Tenāha ‘‘ubhosu panā’’tiādi . Tathā cāha bhagavā ‘‘aññamaññaṃ paduṭṭhacittā kilantakāyā…pe… cavantī’’ti. Dhammatāti dhammaniyāmo. So ca tesaṃ karajakāyassa mandatāya, tathāuppajjanakakodhassa ca balavatāya ṭhānaso cavanaṃ, tesaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ sabhāvoti adhippāyo.
49 “见眼等之坏灭”:由于见到眼等在违逆之缘和合时产生变异,以及最后归于不可见,因而看到它们的坏灭;这是因为色法的坏灭较为粗重。“给予缘”:指作为无间缘等而成为缘。“更强大”:这是说心的坏灭更为迅速。事实上,在一个色法持续的时间里,就已经有十六个心识坏灭。“不见坏灭”:对于心识,虽然它刹那刹那地坏灭,但因它是作为后一心识的无间缘而坏灭,这就像掩盖了前一心识的消失,同时让后一心识生起,存在的方面更为强大、更显著,而不是不存在的方面,所以看不到心识的坏灭。这一意义通过火把旋转的譬喻可以非常清晰地了解。然而,推理者那类人对多种性理趣极为生疏,对单一性理趣又错误地执取,于是便生起“这个识在一切时都以同一模式转起,这就是自我、是常”等倾向,因此说“他不见此……”等。显示巴利原文
49.Cakkhādīnaṃ bhedaṃ passatīti virodhipaccayasannipāte vikārāpattidassanato, ante ca adassanūpagamanato vināsaṃ passati oḷārikattā rūpadhammabhedassa. Paccayaṃ datvāti anantarapaccayādivasena paccayo hutvā. ‘‘Balavatara’’nti cittassa lahutaraṃ bhedaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ekasmiṃ rūpe dharanteyeva soḷasa cittāni bhijjanti. Bhedaṃ na passatīti khaṇe khaṇe bhijjantampi cittaṃ parassa anantarapaccayabhāveneva bhijjatīti purimacittassa abhāvaṃ paṭicchādetvā viya pacchimacittassa uppattito bhāvapakkho balavataro pākaṭo ca hoti, na abhāvapakkhoti cittassa vināsaṃ na passati, ayañca attho alātacakkadassanena supākaṭo viññāyati. Yasmā pana takkīvādī nānattanayassa dūrataratāya ekattanayassapi micchāgahitattā ‘‘yadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sabbadāpi ekarūpena pavattati, ayameva attā nicco’’tiādinā abhinivesaṃ janeti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘so taṃ apassanto’’tiādi.
有边无边论注显示巴利原文
Antānantavādavaṇṇanā
53 “有边无边论者”:此处,“边”指自性终结、行尽之处,也就是界限;否定它便称为“无边”。有边与无边合称,即是“有边无边”,以及“非有边非无边”,总括起来名为“有边无边”——这是用总名来说,或者如同“以名色为缘而有六处”等那样,是一种省略的表述。是谁的有边、无边呢?所谓“世间”,被那些寻求出离轮回的见行者所认知,或者他们通过世间认知福行、非福行及其异熟,故名为世间,此处即指自我。因此世尊说:“他们于世间安立为有边、无边。”那么,此处的自我是什么呢?是禅那所缘的遍相。这位见行者就将它执取为世间想。也这样说:“执取它后便以为是世间。”但有一些人说:“禅那及其相应法在这里被执取为‘自我’与‘世间’。”以有边、无边为谈论对象,就称为“有边无边”,就像说“矛在闪耀”(用矛指代持矛者);或者以有边、无边为所依的谈论,如同“床在呼喊”(用床指代床上的人)。他们具有这种谈论,所以是“有边无边论者”;又因为他们如上所述,将这样的有边无边论执为见,故得“有边无边论者”之名。因此,在注释中说“有边无边论者”之后,又用“或有边”等来加以解说。显示巴利原文
53.Antānantikāti ettha amati gacchati ettha sabhāvo osānanti anto, mariyādā. Tappaṭisedhena ananto, anto ca ananto ca antānanto ca nevantānānanto ca antānantā sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesena vā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.176; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1) viya. Kassa pana antānantoti? Lokīyati saṃsāranissaraṇatthikehi diṭṭhigatikehi, lokīyanti vā ettha tehi puññāpuññaṃ tabbipāko cāti lokoti saṅkhyaṃ gatassa attano. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘antānantaṃ lokassa paññapentī’’ti. Ko pana eso attāti? Jhānavisayabhūtakasiṇanimittaṃ. Tattha hi ayaṃ diṭṭhigatiko lokasaññī. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ lokoti gahetvā’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘jhānaṃ taṃsampayuttadhammā ca idha ‘attā , loko’ti ca gahitā’’ti vadanti. Antānantasahacaritavādo antānanto, yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti antānantasannissayo vā yathā ‘‘mañcā ghosantī’’ti. So etesaṃ atthīti antānantikā. Te pana yasmā yathāvuttanayena antānanto vādo diṭṭhi etesanti ‘‘antānantavādā’’ti vuccanti. Tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘antānantavādā’’ti vatvā ‘‘antaṃ vā’’tiādinā attho vibhatto.
这里问道:前三类论师的主张涉及有边性、无边性及亦有边亦无边性,因此称他们为有边无边论者,尚可成立;但最后一类论师是以否定这两者的方式提出主张,如何还能称为有边无边论者呢?回答:正是因为他以否定这两者的方式提出主张。因为否定有边无边的论说,其范围仍不离有边无边,他是围绕这一主题而展开的。注释中说“围绕它起论的人”,正是为了说明这一点。再者,如同在第三类论说中,由于方位的不同,同一个自我可以既有边又无边;同样,在推理者的论说中,由于时间的不同,两者都可以成立,因此他以互相否定的方式来论说两者。怎么说呢?因为否定了有边性,便是说了无边性;否定了无边性,便是说了有边性。而有边与无边并非第三种状态,这里是依时间不同为意趣的。也就是说:这个被称为世间的自我,已被证得殊胜境界的大圣者们有时现见为无边,所以他并非有边;但那些圣者们有时又现见为有边,因此也并非无边。如同依传闻推理的方式,这也应当运用于依宿命通推理等其他方面。因为这位推理者,由于先前未曾增长的遍相,在增长时,依增长的时间,不能现显示巴利原文
Etthāha – yuttaṃ tāva purimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vādīnaṃ antattañca anantattañca antānantattañca ārabbha pavattavādattā antānantikattaṃ, pacchimassa pana tadubhayapaṭisedhanavasena pavattavādattā katha antānantikattanti? Tadubhayapaṭisedhanavasena pavattavādattā eva. Yasmā antānantapaṭisedhavādopi antānantavisayo eva taṃ ārabbha pavattattā. Etadatthaṃyeva hi sandhāya aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ārabbha pavattavādā’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā yathā tatiyavāde desabhedavasena ekasseva antavantatā anantatā ca sambhavati, evaṃ takkīvādepi kālabhedavasena ubhayasambhavato aññamaññapaṭisedhena ubhayaññeva vuccati. Kathaṃ? Antavantatāpaṭisedhena hi anantatā vuccati, anantatāpaṭisedhena ca antavantatā, antānantānañca na tatiyavādabhāvo kālabhedassa adhippetattā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā ayaṃ lokasaññito attā adhigatavisesehi mahesīhi ananto kadāci sakkhidiṭṭhoti anusuyyati, tasmā nevantavā. Yasmā pana tehiyeva kadāci antavā sakkhidiṭṭhoti anusuyyati, tasmā na pana anantoti. Yathā ca anussutitakkīvasena, evaṃ jātissaratakkī ādīnañca vasena yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Ayañhi takkiko avaḍḍhitabhāvapubbakattā paṭibhāganimittānaṃ vaḍḍhitabhāvassa vaḍḍhitakālavasena appaccakkhakāritāya anussavādimatte ṭhatvā ‘‘nevantavā’’ti paṭikkhipati. Avaḍḍhitakālavasena pana ‘‘na panānanto’’ti, na pana antatānantatānaṃ accantamabhāvena yathā taṃ ‘‘nevasaññināsaññī’’ti. Purimavādattayapaṭikkhepo ca attanā yathādhippetappakāravilakkhaṇatāya tesaṃ, avassañcetaṃ evaṃ viññātabbaṃ, aññathā vikkhepapakkhaṃyeva bhajeyya catutthavādo. Na hi antatāanantatātadubhayavinimutto attano pakāro atthi, takkīvādī ca yuttimaggako, kālabhedavasena ca tadubhayaṃ ekasmimpi na na yujjatīti.
然而,有些人这样描述第四论的主张:如果此我是有边的,那么忆念在远方投生等事便无法完成;如果我是无边的,那么住在此处者也可能在天界、地狱等处感受苦乐;如果我是亦有边亦无边的,则会兼具两者的过失。因此,这个我是“有边”或“无边”不可记说的。他们以推理的方式这样表述第四论的主张。如此,后两类论师称为有边无边论者,倒也合理,因为他们的论说以有边和无边为所缘,涉及这两者的范围。但前两类论师如何能单独称为有边无边论者呢?这是依近行转起来说的。因为“有边无边”一词,是在总称有边无边论者时使用的,由于惯用于彼处,所以也单独用于每一位有边无边论者,就像“八解脱”的名称也单独用于每一种无色定,又如世间所说的“众生之所依”。或者,这是依他们之前的执取和先前时期的转起而施设的名称。因为在那些邪见者证得那种心三摩地之前,他们惯常于执取“这个世界是有边的,还是无边的”这两方面的思惟,由此而有“有边无边性”的惯用称呼;即使后来因获得殊胜而执取一边,也依先前已确立的惯用语来称呼。显示巴利原文
Keci pana yadi panāyaṃ attā antavā siyā, dūradese upapajjanānussaraṇādi kiccanipphatti na siyā. Atha ananto, idha ṭhitassa devalokanirayādīsu sukhadukkhānubhavanampi siyā. Sace pana antavā ca ananto ca, tadubhayadosasamāyogo. Tasmā ‘‘antavā, ananto’’ti ca abyākaraṇīyo attāti evaṃ takkanavasena catutthavādappavattiṃ vaṇṇenti. Evampi yuttaṃ tāva pacchimavādīdvayassa antānantikattaṃ antānantānaṃ vasena ubhayavisayattā tesaṃ vādassa. Purimavādīdvayassa pana kathaṃ visuṃ antānantikattanti? Upacāravuttiyā. Samuditesu hi antānantavādīsu pavattamāno antānantika-saddo tattha niruḷhatāya paccekampi antānantikavādīsu pavattati, yathā arūpajjhānesu paccekaṃ aṭṭhavimokkhapariyāyo, yathā ca loke sattāsayoti. Atha vā abhinivesato purimakālappavattivasena ayaṃ tattha vohāro kato. Tesañhi diṭṭhigatikānaṃ tathārūpacetosamādhisamadhigamato pubbakālaṃ ‘‘antavā nu ayaṃ loko, ananto nū’’ti ubhayākārāvalambino parivitakkassa vasena niruḷho antānantikabhāvo visesalābhena tattha uppannepi ekaṃsaggāhe purimasiddharuḷhiyā voharīyatīti.
54-60 所谓“依所说的方法”,即如“推理者,故为推理者”等,这是从词源上说;又如“有四种推理者”等,这是从意义上说,皆按常见论中所说的方法。“依先前所见而随念”,即依作为见的识,随念先前所领受的有边等。这样一来,传闻推理者和纯粹推理者也得以摄在此处。或者,仅凭“见”一字,即可知犹如在“观看舞蹈、歌唱、音乐、表演等”的语境中那样,也包含了闻等。“有边”等论说,由于是以执取所意欲的自我恒常存在的方式而转起,故应视为包含在常见中。正如将说:“其余的属于常见。”显示巴利原文
54-60.Vuttanayenāti ‘‘takkayatīti takkī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34) saddato, ‘‘catubbidho takkī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34) atthato ca sassatavāde vuttavidhinā. Diṭṭhapubbānusārenāti dassanabhūtena viññāṇena upaladdhapubbassa antavantādino anussaraṇena. Evañca katvā anussutitakkīsuddhatakkīnampi idha saṅgaho siddho hoti. Atha vā diṭṭhaggahaṇeneva ‘‘naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 10, 194) viya sutādīnampi gahitatā veditabbā. ‘‘Antavā’’tiādinā icchitassa attano sabbadā bhāvaparāmasanavaseneva imesaṃ vādānaṃ pavattanato sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 97-98).
不死矫乱论的解释显示巴利原文
Amarāvikkhepavādavaṇṇanā
61 “不死”意为不灭、不断。而“如是,我亦无”等语,是指以种种方式驳斥其他论敌,这称为“矫乱”。依不死的邪见与言论而行矫乱者,称为“不死矫乱者”,不死矫乱者即是不死矫乱论者。因其在任何自性上都不确立,故而从此至彼流转不定。或者,如同鳗鱼一般辗转矫乱——应依前一种方式理解其词义。显示巴利原文
61.Na maratīti na ucchijjati. ‘‘Evampi me no’’tiādinā vividho nānappakāro khepo parena paravādīnaṃ khipanaṃ vikkhepo. Amarāya diṭṭhiyā vācāya ca vikkhipantīti vā amarāvikkhepino. Amarāvikkhepino eva amarāvikkhepikā. Ito cito ca sandhāvati ekasmiṃ sabhāve anavaṭṭhānato. Amarā viya vikkhipantīti vā purimanayeneva saddattho daṭṭhabbo.
62 对于扰乱论者而言:他们没有能力以自性差别来了知超人法,也没有能力以自性差别来了知不善法,因此“善”与“不善”这些词,只是依善不善业道来理解其义。依第一种方式,为说明无边际的扰乱——也就是如同鳗鱼般的扰乱,故说“非限定的扰乱”。其中,“非限定的扰乱”是指不固定于常见等任何一种立场而进行扰乱,即否定他人所问的任何一边。依第二种方式,为显示如同鳗鱼般的扰乱,说“或被问‘这是善’等”。又或者,通过“这样我也不是”等语,以不定的方式否定常见、一分常见、断见、诡辩论,便是对那些论说的否定,因为他属于无边际扰乱论者。然而,由于他自己不确立任何论说,故而不立足于任何一边,因此说“然而自己……回答说”。如今,通过不回答善等问题,表明同样的不确立性,说“或被问‘这是善’等”,因此说“不立足于任何一边”。显示巴利原文
62. Vikkhepavādino uttarimanussadhamme, akusaladhammepi sabhāvabhedavaseneva ñātuṃ ñāṇabalaṃ natthīti kusalākusalapadānaṃ kusalākusalakammapathavaseneva attho. Paṭhamanayavaseneva apariyantavikkhepatāya amarāvikkhepaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘evantipi me noti aniyamitavikkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha aniyamitavikkhepoti sassatādīsu ekasmimpi pakāre aṭṭhatvā vikkhepakaraṇaṃ, paravādinā yasmiṃ kismiñci pucchite pakāre tassa paṭikkhepoti attho. Dutiyanayavasena amarāsadisāya amarāya vikkhepaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kusalanti vā puṭṭho’’tiādimāha. Atha vā ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādinā aniyamatova sassatekaccasassatucchedatakkīvādānaṃ paṭisedhanena taṃ taṃ vādaṃ paṭikkhipateva apariyantavikkhepavādattā amarāvikkhepino. Attanā pana anavaṭṭhitavādattā na kismiñci pakkhe avatiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘sayaṃ pana…pe… byākarotī’’ti. Idāni kusalādīnaṃ abyākaraṇena tameva anavaṭṭhānaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘idaṃ kusalanti vā puṭṭho’’tiādinā. Tenevāha ‘‘ekasmimpi pakkhe na tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
63 对于不如实了知善与不善的人:当我在某些时候如实地回答“这是善”“这是不善”,而那些人们因此恭敬尊重我,说“啊!真是智者”时,我对此便生起了欲或贪——或者生起嗔恚或反感。这里是以相反的方面来对应解释。注释中是以对自己智者状态的贪等来作解释的。“欲与贪这两者就是取”,这是依阿毗达摩的说法。因为在阿毗达摩中,只有爱与见称为“取”;但在经中,嗔也称为“取”,例如“被嗔取所系缚而遭受苦恼”等。因此说“或者两者因为坚执而称为取”。坚执即是不放开。因为当嗔以怨恨等形态转起时,也同样不放开所缘。恼害即是伤害、逼迫。贪也因为热恼而带有激昂性,逼迫其依处。这与“因为想要破坏而执取所缘”相连。显示巴利原文
63. Kusalākusalaṃ yathābhūtaṃ appajānantopi yesamahaṃ samayena kusalameva ‘‘kusala’’nti, akusalameva ca ‘‘akusala’’nti byākareyyaṃ, tesu tathā byākaraṇahetu ‘‘aho vata re paṇḍito’’ti sakkārasammānaṃ karontesu mama chando vā rāgo vā assāti evampettha attho sambhavati. Doso vā paṭigho vāti ettha vuttavipariyāyena yojetabbaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana attano paṇḍitabhāvavisayānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ vasena yojanā katā. ‘‘Chandarāgadvayaṃ upādāna’’nti abhidhammanayena vuttaṃ. Abhidhamme hi taṇhādiṭṭhiyova ‘‘upādāna’’nti āgatā, suttante pana dosopi ‘‘upādāna’’nti vutto ‘‘kodhupādānavinibandhā vighātaṃ āpajjantī’’tiādīsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhayampi vā daḷhaggahaṇavasena upādāna’’nti . Daḷhaggahaṇaṃ amuñcanaṃ. Paṭighopi hi upanāhādivasena pavatto ārammaṇaṃ na muñcati. Vihananaṃ hiṃsanaṃ vibādhanaṃ. Rāgopi hi pariḷāhavasena sāraddhavuttitāya nissayaṃ vibādhatīti. Vināsetukāmatāya ārammaṇaṃ gaṇhātīti sambandho.
64 「智性」即是指智慧。正是藉由此法,一个人被称为「智者」,此法即是「智性」,它指的是由闻、思所成的智慧,而非由业所生的自然慧。由于「kata」一词是表示所作之共性的词,如同在「katavijja」(已学技艺者)等词中那样,「kata」表达与智慧相应,因此说为「已了知其他教说者」。所谓「能射穿七分瓣的发端者」,即是「发射者」。显示巴利原文
64.Paṇḍiccenāti paññāya. Yena hi dhammena yutto ‘‘paṇḍito’’ti vuccati, so dhammo paṇḍiccaṃ, tena sutacintāmayaṃ paññaṃ dasseti, na pākatikakammanibbattaṃ sābhāvikapaññaṃ. Kata-saddassa kiriyāsāmaññavācakattā ‘‘katavijjo’’tiādīsu viya kata-saddo ñāṇānuyuttataṃ vadatīti āha ‘‘viññātaparappavādā’’ti. Sattadhā bhinnassa vālaggassa aṃsukoṭivedhako ‘‘vālavedhī’’ti adhippeto.
65-6 在此,前三种人虽然因不能如实了知善等诸法的自性而显得有些愚钝,但他们对自己不了知善等法这一点是有清晰觉察的;后一种人则没有这样的觉察,所以才被称为「愚钝且愚痴者」。难道后一种人不是也会说出「如果有他世,我就回答“有他世”,那样我也不是」等话吗?这似乎也表明他觉察到自己对法不了知。虽有这样的表示,但他并不像前几种人那样,因不了知法而在回答时会对妄语等生起恐惧与厌恶;他其实是最为愚痴的人。或者,「那样我也不是」等话语,只是他在应对问题时制造扰乱,展示的仅是提问的方式,而非自己对法的了知。因此,特别说他是「愚钝且愚痴者」。正因如此,对于持此论说的散若夷·毗罗吒子,才说:「此人于这些沙门、婆罗门中,是最愚钝、最愚痴者。」(《长部》1.181)
其中,「有他世」这一问题,是从常见或正见的角度提出。「无他世」是从断见或正见的角度提出。「亦有亦无他世」是从断见或正见的角度提出。「非有非无他世」:在否决了前三种方式后,由于再没有其他可能方式,「他世」既不能被说为有,也不能被说为无,因此只是为了扰乱而发,或是依正见而提出。显示巴利原文
65-6. Ettha ca kiñcāpi purimānampi tiṇṇaṃ kusalādidhammasabhāvānavabodhato attheva mandabhāvo, tesaṃ pana attano kusalādidhammānavabodhassa avabodhaviseso atthi, tadabhāvā pacchimoyeva mandamomūhabhāvena vutto. Nanu ca pacchimassāpi ‘‘atthi paroloko’ti iti ce me assa, ‘atthi paroloko’ti iti te naṃ byākareyyaṃ, evantipi me no’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.65) vacanato attano dhammānavabodhassa avabodho atthiyevāti? Kiñcāpi atthi, na tassa purimānaṃ viya apariññātadhammabyākaraṇanibandhanamusāvādādibhayaparijigucchanakāro atthi, atha kho mahāmūḷhoyeva. Atha vā ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādinā pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇatthaṃ ‘‘atthi paroloko’ti iti ce maṃ pucchasī’’ti pucchāṭhapanameva tena dassīyati, na attano dhammānavabodhoti ayameva visesena ‘‘mando ceva momūho cā’’ti vutto. Teneva hi tathāvādinaṃ sañjayaṃ belaṭṭhaputtaṃ ārabbha ‘‘ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbamando sabbamūḷho’’ti (dī. ni. 1.181) vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘atthi paroloko’’ti sassatadassanavasena sammādiṭṭhivasena vā pucchā. ‘‘Natthi paroloko’’ti natthikadassanavasena sammādassanavasena vā pucchā. ‘‘Atthi ca natthi ca paroloko’’ti ucchedadassanavasena sammādiṭṭhivasena eva vā pucchā. ‘‘Neva atthi na natthi paroloko’’ti vuttappakārattayapaṭikkhepe sati pakārantarassa asambhavato atthitānatthitāhi navattabbākāro parolokoti vikkhepaññeva purekkhārena sammādiṭṭhivasena vā pucchā. Sesacatukkattayepi vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Puññasaṅkhārattiko viya hi kāyasaṅkhārattikena purimacatukkasaṅgahito eva attho. Sesacatukkattayena attaparāmāsapuññādi phalatācodanānayena saṅgahitoti.
「难以捉摸的扰乱论者」:因自己对常见等皆不乐,于一切问题上只用「如此我也不是」等言说进行扰乱。这里,「如此我也不是」等说法,是通过否定所问方式来显示扰乱的样子。有人或许会问:扰乱论者不是应当承认并安立于这种扰乱方式才合理吗?并非如此,因为他在那种情况下也是全然愚痴,并且唯有通过否定的方式才会发起扰乱论。正如散若夷·毗罗吒子在被阿阇世王问及现世可见的沙门果时,便以否定他世等三类问题的方式,作出了扰乱性的回答。显示巴利原文
Amarāvikkhepiko sassatādīnaṃ attano aruccanatāya sabbattha ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādinā vikkhepaññeva karoti. Tattha ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādi tattha tattha pucchitākārapaṭisedhanavasena vikkhipanākāradassanaṃ. Nanu ca vikkhepavādino vikkhepapakkhassa anujānanaṃ vikkhepapakkhe avaṭṭhānaṃ yuttarūpanti? Na, tatthāpi tassa sammūḷhattā, paṭikkhepavaseneva ca vikkhepavādassa pavattanato. Tathā hi sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto raññā ajātasattunā sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ puṭṭho paralokattikādīnaṃ paṭisedhanamukhena vikkhepaṃ byākāsi.
有人问:这些不死扰乱论者,难道不是由于不如实了知善等法、他世等三类法,在被问及各处问题时,只是对提问加以扰乱而已吗?他怎么会是见行者呢?因为,就像不想说话的人,不了解所问的意义,仅仅做出扰乱,不应被称为见行者。回答是:他并非仅因对提问作出扰乱就成为见行者,而是因为错误的执取。一个以常见执取而错误执著的人,由于智慧迟钝,不能如实通达善等法以及他世等三类法;自己未了知的道理,也无法向别人讲明,同时又害怕犯下妄语等过失,所以才会作出扰乱。正如后文将说:‘其中七种是断见,其余的属常见。’(《长部注》1.97-98)或者另一种情况:由于对福、非福及其果报既不了知也不信受,认为对于这方面的问题加以扰乱才是最合适的,于是生起认可与喜好,倾心于此,这样便产生了一类独特的见,如同七分见那样。因此应当这样看待,正如所说:‘见行者没有边际,见与语是一起的。’(《长部注》1.61)那么,这种见为什么被归入常见呢?因为它不是以断灭倾向来执取的。世间人多有争论,没有人能如实了知诸显示巴利原文
Etthāha – nanu cāyaṃ sabbopi amarāvikkhepiko kusalādayo dhamme, paralokattikādīni ca yathābhūtaṃ anavabujjhamāno tattha tattha pañhaṃ puṭṭho pucchāya vikkhepanamattaṃ āpajjati, tassa kathaṃ diṭṭhigatikabhāvo. Na hi avattukāmassa viya pucchitamatthamajānantassa vikkhepakaraṇamattena diṭṭhigatikatā yuttāti? Vuccate – na heva kho pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇamattena tassa diṭṭhigatikatā, atha kho micchābhinivesavasena. Sassatābhinivesena micchābhiniviṭṭhoyeva hi puggalo mandabuddhitāya kusalādidhamme paralokattikādīni ca yāthāvato appaṭipajjamāno attanā aviññātassa atthassa paraṃ viññāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya musāvādādibhayena ca vikkhepaṃ āpajjatīti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘yāsaṃ satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.97-98) atha vā puññapāpānaṃ tabbipākānañca anavabodhena asaddahanena ca tabbisayāya pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇaṃyeva sundaranti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā abhinivisantassa uppannā visuṃyevesā ekā diṭṭhi sattabhaṅgadiṭṭhi viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ceva vācā cā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.61). Kathaṃ panassā sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho? Ucchedavasena anabhinivesato. Natthi koci dhammānaṃ yathābhūtavedī vivādabahulattā lokassa, ‘‘evameva’’nti pana saddantarena ‘‘dhammanijjhānanā anādikālikā loke’’ti gāhavasena sassatalesopettha labbhatiyeva.
「无因生论」的解释显示巴利原文
Adhiccasamuppannavādavaṇṇanā
67 67.「无因生论」:指‘我’和‘世间’这些诸蕴,是偶然、随意、没有任何原因,或者不以某人的增长为前提而生起的——这种见解,以无因生的行相为所缘,依此而行相而转起,并与该行相同伴,所以称为‘无因生论’。就像说‘床叫唤’、‘矛行走’一样。为说明此义,故说:‘认为我与世间是无因而生的见,即是无因生论。’显示巴利原文
67. Adhicca yadicchakaṃ yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ, kassaci vuddhipubbaṃ vā vinā samuppannoti attalokasaññitānaṃ khandhānaṃ adhiccuppattiākārārammaṇaṃ dassanaṃ tadākārasannissayena pavattito, tadākārasahacaritatāya ca ‘‘adhiccasamuppanna’’nti vuccati yathā ‘‘mañcā ghosanti, kuntā pacarantī’’ti ca imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘adhiccasamuppanno attā ca loko cāti dassanaṃ adhiccasamuppanna’’nti.
68-73 68-73.「以说法之首要」是指选取最上首的来说,以此表明世尊是以‘想’为中心来作这部分开示的,并不是说那里就没有其他非色法了。因此说‘非心所生’等。因为世尊宣说出世间法时,或以定、或以慧为中心;宣说世间法时,或以心、或以想为中心。其中,诸如‘当他修习出世间禅那的时候’、‘有五支正定、五智正定’、‘以慧见后,诸漏灭尽’等文句;以及‘当欲界善心生起时’、‘比丘,你想什么’、‘诸法以意为前导’、‘诸比丘,有众生身异想异’、‘非想非非想处’等诸经,都可作为证明此理的例证。至于「外道处」,是指在其他外道教派中。因为外道们将某种殊胜的再生误认为是解脱,或因看到想的离染与不离染各自的过患与功德而修习无想定,结果投生在非时地,并非佛教的修行者。在风遍上作遍作,即是在风遍中生起初禅等三禅,于第三禅获得自在后,出定,为证得第四禅而作遍作。因此说‘生起第四禅’。显示巴利原文
68-73.Desanāsīsanti desanāya jeṭṭhakabhāvena gahaṇaṃ, tena saññaṃyeva dhuraṃ katvā bhagavatā ayaṃ desanā katā, na pana tattha aññesaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ atthibhāvatoti dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘acittuppādā’’tiādi. Bhagavā hi yathā lokuttaradhammaṃ desento samādhiṃ paññaṃ vā dhuraṃ karoti, evaṃ lokiyadhammaṃ desento cittaṃ saññaṃ vā dhuraṃ karoti. Tattha ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye lokuttaraṃ jhānaṃ bhāveti (dha. sa. 277) pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi [dī. ni. 3.355 (kha)] pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhi, [dī. ni. 3.355 (ja); vibha. 2.804] paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā hontī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.271) tathā ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, (dha. sa. 1) kiṃcitto tvaṃ bhikkhu (pārā. 146, 180) manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, (dha. pa. 1, 2; netti. 90; peṭako. 83) santi bhikkhave sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, (dī. ni. 3.332, 342, 357; a. ni. 9.24; cūḷani. 83) na nevasaññānāsaññāyatana’’ntiādīni suttāni (dī. ni. 3.358) etassa atthassa sādhakāni daṭṭhabbāni. Titthāyataneti aññatitthiyasamaye. Titthiyā hi upapattivisese vimuttisaññino, saññāvirāgāvirāgesu ādīnavānisaṃsadassino vā hutvā asaññasamāpattiṃ nibbattetvā akkhaṇabhūmiyaṃ uppajjanti, na sāsanikā. Vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvāti vāyokasiṇe paṭhamādīni tīṇi jhānāni nibbattetvā tatiyajjhāne ciṇṇavasī hutvā tato vuṭṭhāya catutthajjhānādhigamāya parikammaṃ katvā. Tenevāha ‘‘catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā’’ti.
然而,为何在此处只针对风遍说遍作呢?答道:正如在作为色法类似者的那些遍处差别中,通过阐明色法,而证得名为“色离欲修习”的无色定;同样地,在作为无色法类似者、且无清晰形体的遍处差别中,通过阐明无色法,而证得名为“无色离欲修习”的色界定。此处,以“想是病、想是疮”等及“呸,心!应呵责那心”等理趣,通过观察无色界流转的过患,以及于其止息时认定寂静为殊胜,而有色界定的造作;而色离欲修习则连同近行定一起成就无色定,其中尤其是第一无色界禅那。若如此,那么也应当说“于限定虚空遍处”了,因为它也被视为无色法的类似者。这确实是某些人所认可的,但此处的古师们并未这样说,因为他们不曾采纳此见。正如色离欲修习,仅因所离染之法而圆满成就,并显现于与所离染之法相似的所缘差别中;同样地,无色离欲修习也是如此。如此看来,并无矛盾。然而,由于那种定是共外道的,而外道们正是系缚着那种禅那在感官领域上修习的,因此,被见地所围困的古师们,仅在第四地遍处论及了无色离欲修习的遍作,应当如此看待。再者,如同在色遍处……显示巴利原文
Kasmā panettha vāyokasiṇeyeva parikammaṃ vuttanti? Vuccate – yatheva hi rūpapaṭibhāgabhūtesu kasiṇavisesesu rūpavibhāvanena rūpavirāgabhāvanāsaṅkhāto arūpasamāpattiviseso sacchikarīyati, evaṃ aparibyattaviggahatāya arūpapaṭibhāgabhūte kasiṇavisese arūpavibhāvanena arūpavirāgabhāvanāsaṅkhāto rūpasamāpattiviseso adhigamīyatīti ettha ‘‘saññā rogo saññā gaṇḍo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.24) ‘‘dhi cittaṃ, dhibbate taṃ citta’’ntiādinā ca nayena arūpappavattiyā ādīnavadassanena, tadabhāve ca santapaṇītabhāvasanniṭṭhānena rūpasamāpattiyā abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ, rūpavirāgabhāvanā pana saddhiṃ upacārena arūpasamāpattiyo, tatthāpi visesena paṭhamāruppajjhānaṃ. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘paricchinnākāsakasiṇepī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tassāpi hi arūpapaṭibhāgatā labbhatīti? Icchitamevetaṃ kesañci avacanaṃ panettha pubbācariyehi aggahitabhāvena. Yathā hi rūpavirāgabhāvanā virajjanīyadhammabhāvamattena parinipphannā, virajjanīyadhammapaṭibhāgabhūte ca visayavisese pātubhavati, evaṃ arūpavirāgabhāvanāpīti vuccamāne na koci virodho, titthiyeheva pana tassā samāpattiyā paṭipajjitabbatāya, tesañca visayapathesupanibandhanasseva tassa jhānassa paṭipattito diṭṭhivantehi pubbācariyehi catuttheyeva bhūtakasiṇe arūpavirāgabhāvanāparikammaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiñca vaṇṇakasiṇesu viya purimabhūtakasiṇattayepi vaṇṇapaṭicchāyāva paṇṇatti ārammaṇaṃ jhānassa lokavohārānurodheneva pavattito. Evañca katvā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.57) pathavīkasiṇassa ādāsacandamaṇḍalūpamāvacanañca samatthitaṃ hoti, catutthaṃ pana bhūtakasiṇaṃ bhūtappaṭicchāyameva jhānassa gocarabhāvaṃ gacchatīti tasseva arūpapaṭibhāgatā yuttāti vāyokasiṇeyeva parikammaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
「就在这里」:指就在五蕴有中。「在那里」:指在无想有中。如果在无想有中只有色蕴显现,那么,没有无色的依止,色如何在那里转起?再者,没有色的依止,在无色界中无色又如何转起?这也只是与那同类的。为什么?因为在此处便看不见。如果这样,那么,没有食团食,在色界中色就不应转起,什么原因呢?因为在此处便看不见。而且,正如对于某心相续的出生之因,若对色的渴爱未离去,它便与色俱起,依止色而转起;对于出生之因中对色的渴爱已离去者,其因中无关于色,无所待于色,便无色而转起。同样地,对于那些色相续的出生之因,在无色中对色的渴爱已离去者,其转起便没有无色。因此,在无想有中,只有色蕴结生。然而,应当审察:在那里,纯粹色相续如何没有现前缘而长时转起呢?又转起多久呢?将这样的质难置于心中后,说:「犹如被弓弦之力弹射的箭」等,以此显示,并非只有依教理,于此这也合乎道理。「那么长的时间」:从最上而言,无想有情甚至住立五百大劫。「禅那之力」:指以无想定所滋养的业力。「消亡」:指由于缘的灭尽而灭尽、不再转起。显示巴利原文
Idhevāti pañcavokārabhaveyeva. Tatthāti asaññabhave. Yadi rūpakkhandhamattameva asaññabhave pātubhavati, kathamarūpasannissayena vinā tattha rūpaṃ pavattati, kathaṃ pana rūpasannissayena vinā arūpadhātuyaṃ arūpaṃ pavattati, idampi tena samānajātiyameva. Kasmā? Idheva adassanato. Yadi evaṃ kabaḷīkārāhārena vinā rūpadhātuyaṃ rūpena na pavattitabbaṃ, kiṃ kāraṇaṃ ? Idheva adassanato. Api ca yathā yassa cittasantānassa nibbattikāraṇaṃ rūpe avigatataṇhaṃ, tassa saha rūpena sambhavato rūpaṃ nissāya pavatti, yassa pana nibbattikāraṇaṃ rūpe vigatataṇhaṃ, tassa vinā rūpena rūpanirapekkhatāya kāraṇassa, evaṃ yassa rūpappabandhassa nibbattikāraṇaṃ vigatataṇhaṃ arūpe, tassa vinā arūpena pavatti hotīti asaññabhave rūpakkhandhamattameva nibbattati. Kathaṃ pana tattha kevalo rūpappabandho paccuppannapaccayarahito cirakālaṃ pavattatīti paccetabbaṃ, kittakaṃ vā kālaṃ pavattatīti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘yathā nāma jiyāvegukkhitto saro’’tiādi, tena na kevalamāgamoyeva ayamettha yuttīti dasseti. Tattakameva kālanti ukkaṃsato pañca mahākappasatānipi tiṭṭhanti asaññasattā. Jhānavegeti asaññasamāpattiparikkhate kammavege. Antaradhāyatīti paccayanirodhena nirujjhati nappavattati.
「此处」:指在欲有中。然而,经过许多百劫之后,从已灭已久的识,识如何在此处生起呢?难道没有见到:当眼灭后,眼识生起吗?这不应独断地看待。因为,即使是灭去已久的心,由于在同类之间没有生起,它只是成为无间缘,而不是种子;种子是业。因此,对于那些从无想有死去者,依于作为种子的业,以及所缘等诸缘,在欲界中确有结生识生起。所以说:「在此处,结生识生起。」于此,应知:正如某些树木依据季节的规律,在开花上有固定时节,当给予催力时,由于催力的力量,便不如规律那样开花;同样地,在五蕴有中,色与非色之法以不离的方式流转着,当给予色离贪与非色离贪的修习催力时,随顺于该等至的催力,在无色有与无想有中,如其次第,诸蕴的转起便无色或无有色。难道于此,依于生在百千生、十种劫灭等的顶端或内在的无想生存,得无因生论者之说,不就像得常见论者之说那样,会有多种分类吗?确实会有。然而,应视为:由于紧接着而成就的无想再生,得无因生论者之说,以理趣显示的方式只显示为一种。或者,因为无因生论者之说被常见所摄,常见中所摄的一切说法之理,应尽可能也被无因生论者之说所采用;为了显示这种殊别,世尊未加分别地开示了得无因生论者之说。并且,无因生论者之说必然应被接受为常见所摄,因为在杂染的部分,有情心的倾向有两重性。正如在注疏中所说:「常见与断见」;并且会说到:「这七种是断灭见,其余的是常见」(《长部注》1.97-98)。显示巴利原文
Idhāti kāmabhave. Kathaṃ pana anekakappasatasamatikkamena ciraniruddhato viññāṇato idha viññāṇaṃ samuppajjati. Na hi niruddhe cakkhumhi cakkhuviññāṇamuppajjamānaṃ diṭṭhanti? Nayidamekantato daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ciraniruddhampi hi cittaṃ samānajātikassa antarānuppajjanato anantarapaccayamattaṃ hotiyeva, na bījaṃ, bījaṃ pana kammaṃ. Tasmā kammato bījabhūtato ārammaṇādīhi paccayehi asaññabhavato cutānaṃ kāmadhātuyā upapattiviññāṇaṃ hotiyeva. Tenāha ‘‘idha paṭisandhisaññā uppajjatī’’ti. Ettha ca yathā nāma utuniyāmena pupphaggahaṇe niyatakālānaṃ rukkhānaṃ vekhe dinne vekhabalena na yathā niyāmatā hoti pupphaggahaṇassa, evameva pañcavokārabhave avippayogena vattamānesu rūpārūpadhammesu rūpārūpavirāgabhāvanāvekhe dinne tassa samāpattivekhabalassa anurūpato arūpabhave asaññābhave ca yathākkamaṃ rūparahitā arūparahitā ca khandhānaṃ pavatti hotīti veditabbaṃ. Nanu ettha jātisatasahassadasasaṃvaṭṭādīnaṃ matthake, abbhantarato vā pavattāya asaññūpavattiyā vasena lābhīadhiccasamuppannikavādo lābhīsassatavādo viya anekabhedo sambhavatīti? Saccaṃ sambhavati, anantarattā pana āpannāya asaññūpapattiyā vasena lābhīadhiccasamuppannikavādo nayadassanavasena ekova dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgahato adhiccasamuppannikavādassa sassatavāde āgato sabbo desanānayo yathāsambhavaṃ adhiccasamuppannikavādepi gahetabboti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ bhagavatā lābhīadhiccasamuppannikavādo avibhajitvā desito. Avassañca sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho adhiccasamuppannikavādassa icchitabbo saṃkilesapakkhe sattānaṃ ajjhāsayassa duvidhattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sassatucchedadiṭṭhi cā’’ti. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘yāsaṃ satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.97-98).
将无因生论者的观点归入常见,难道不合理吗?因为它是以“我从前不存在”之类的方式生起的,执取的是先前从未出现过的众生;而常见则执取自我与世间为恒常存在,是以“实为常住不变”的方式生起的。并非不合理,因为他们于未来不见任何边际。尽管这种理论以“我现存在,是从不存在转变而成”的方式,通过追溯自我与世间的过去边际而生起,但从现在往后,他们看不见这些在任何未来的边际。尤其对于现在与未来际皆不见边际,这正是常见的力量所在,正如他们所说:“如同常住,将会那样保持下去。”若是这样,那么这些理论连同常见等其他论点,被归入“前际论者”,岂非合理?因为它们是以涉及未来时的方式而运作的啊?并非不合理,因为它们的生起属于过去的分位。事实上,它们的产生是被宿住随念智,以及随似于传闻等所引发的推论所摄,注释也是如此解释的。或者,因为法主、论王以无碍之智,毫无遗漏地如实亲自证知一切来处去处,而后宣说了这些见解。因此,对于世尊所开示的任何见解,以及如他所开显示巴利原文
Nanu ca adhiccasamuppannikavādassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho na yutto. ‘‘Ahañhi pubbe nāhosi’’ntiādivasena pavattanato, apubbasattapātubhāvaggāhattā, attano lokassa ca sadābhāvagāhinī ca sassatadiṭṭhi ‘‘atthitveva sassatisama’’nti pavattanato? No na yutto anāgate koṭiadassanato. Yadipi hi ayaṃ vādo ‘‘somhi etarahi ahutvā santatāya pariṇato’’ti (dī. ni. 1.68) attano lokassa ca atītakoṭiparāmasanavasena pavatto, tathāpi vattamānakālato paṭṭhāya na tesaṃ katthaci anāgate pariyantaṃ passati, visesena ca paccuppannānāgatakālesu pariyantādassanapabhāvito sassatavādo. Yathāha ‘‘sassatisamaṃ tatheva ṭhassatī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ imassa vādassa, sassatavādādīnañca pubbantakappikesu saṅgaho na yutto anāgatakālaparāmasanavasena pavattattāti? Na, samudāgamassa atītakoṭṭhāsikattā. Tathā hi nesaṃ samuppatti atītaṃsapubbenivāsañāṇehi, tappaṭirūpakānussavādippabhāvitatakkanehi ca saṅgahitāti, tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Atha vā sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇena vādivarena dhammassāminā niravasesato agatiñca gatiñca yathābhūtaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā paveditā etā diṭṭhiyo, tasmā yāvatikā diṭṭhiyo bhagavatā desitā, yathā ca desitā, tathā tathāva sanniṭṭhānato sampaṭicchitabbā, na ettha yuttivicāraṇā kātabbā buddhavisayattā. Acinteyyo hi buddhavisayoti.
后际论者的解释。显示巴利原文
Aparantakappikavādavaṇṇanā
74 正如在“于后际有智”“有后际随见者”等语句中,“apara”一词于此是指称未来时的用语,故说为“称为未来分位”。在“执取后际”等表述中,应依“执取前际”等中所说的道理来理解其义。此处唯明其差别。显示巴利原文
74. ‘‘Aparante ñāṇaṃ, aparantānudiṭṭhino’’tiādīsu viya apara-saddo idha anāgatakālavācakoti āha ‘‘anāgatakoṭṭhāsasaṅkhāta’’nti. Aparantaṃ kappetvātiādīsu ‘‘pubbantaṃ kappetvā’’tiādīsu vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Visesamattameva vakkhāma.
有想论者的解释。显示巴利原文
Saññīvādavaṇṇanā
75 “死后有想”:由“死后有想”而起的论说,即是死后有想论;持有此论者,即是死后有想论者。然而,因那些见行者说“自我于死后为不变坏”,故又言“他们宣说死后有想,故为死后有想论者”。他们持有“有想”的主张,故是有想论者,正如“他有觉,故是觉者”一样。或者,“有想”指由“有想”而起的论说,依俱行之理,论说本身亦称为“有想”;他们之论即是“有想”,故为“有想论者”。显示巴利原文
75. Uddhamāghātanāti pavatto vādo uddhamāghātano, so etesaṃ atthīti uddhamāghātanikā. Yasmā pana te diṭṭhigatikā ‘‘uddhaṃ maraṇā attā nibbikāro’’ti vadanti, tasmā ‘‘uddhamāghātanā attānaṃ vadantīti uddhamāghātanikā’’ti vuttaṃ. Saññīvādo etesaṃ atthīti saññīvādā ‘‘buddhaṃ assa atthīti buddho’’ti yathā. Atha vā saññīti pavatto vādo saññī sahacaraṇanayena, saññī vādo etesanti saññīvādā.
76-77 「有色之我」:在此,难道不应该有一个离开色的自我吗?正如想是属于自我的一样,色也属于自我。因为「有想之我」这里,想并不是自我。正因如此,才说「把在那里生起的想执取为『想』」。既然这样,为什么将遍色执取为「我」而说呢?其实不应理解成:「他拥有色,所以是有色者」,而应理解为:「他以坏灭为性质,所以是有色者」。而在此处,由于类似于色,遍色在增长与不增长时所显现的差别状态就是坏灭;而且因为确实有「小」「广大」等差别存在,所以不能说「没有这种情况」。若如此,将这种观点归为常见,是否有不合理之处?并无不合理。因为他认可身体破裂之后,自我是恒常不坏的,正如他所说的:「死后,无病,更上。」或者,即使解释为「他拥有色,所以是有色者」,也没有过失。因为即使对于以假立而不成立的区分,也可以看到对无区分者的描述,如同说「石女儿的身体」一样。又或者,色本身就以坏灭为性质,也就是色法,他拥有这样的色,所以是有色者,如同「有色法」等(《法集论·双论母》11)中的用法那样。如此一来,由于自我以色为自性,显示巴利原文
76-77.Rūpī attāti ettha nanu rūpavinimuttena attanā bhavitabbaṃ saññāya viya rūpassapi attaniyattā. Na hi ‘‘saññī attā’’ti ettha saññā attā. Teneva hi ‘‘tattha pavattasaññañcassa saññāti gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sati kasmā kasiṇarūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā vuttanti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ assa atthīti rūpī’’ti, atha kho ‘‘ruppanasīlo rūpī’’ti. Ruppanañcettha rūpasarikkhatāya kasiṇarūpassa vaḍḍhitāvaḍḍhitakālavasena visesāpatti, sā ca ‘‘natthī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ parittavipulatādivisesasabbhāvato. Yadi evaṃ imassa vādassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho na yujjatīti? No na yujjati kāyabhedato uddhaṃ attano nibbikāratāya tena adhippetattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘arogoparaṃ maraṇā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘rūpaṃ assa atthīti rūpī’’ti vuccamānepi na doso. Kappanāsiddhenapi hi bhedena abhedassāpi niddesadassanato, yathā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti. Ruppanaṃ vā rūpasabhāvo rūpaṃ, taṃ etassa atthīti rūpī, attā ‘‘rūpino dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. dukamātikā 11) viya. Evañca katvā rūpasabhāvattā attano ‘‘rūpī attā’’ti vacanaṃ ñāyāgatamevāti ‘‘kasiṇarūpaṃ ‘attā’ti gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Niyatavāditāya kammaphalapaṭikkhepato natthi ājīvakesu jhānasamāpattilābhoti āha ‘‘ājīvakādayo viya takkamatteneva vā rūpī attā’’ti. Tathā hi kaṇhābhijātiādīsu chaḷābhijātīsu aññataraṃ attānaṃ ekacce ājīvakā paṭijānanti. Natthi etassa rogo bhaṅgoti arogoti aroga-saddassa niccapariyāyatā veditabbā, rogarahitatāsīsena vā nibbikāratāya niccataṃ paṭijānāti diṭṭhigatikoti āha ‘‘arogoti nicco’’ti.
破除遍色所生的虚空、空无边处、识无边处、无所有处——这些是诸无色定的所缘相。如同苦味在柠梦叶中,无色的自我安住于其中,其量等同身体的大小。这是尼干陀的主张,因此说:「就如尼干陀等」。所谓以混杂的方式执取,是指将色定与无色定的各种相总合为一,认为「这是一个我」,并将在那里生起的想执取为「想」,以这样的方式执取。因为这位见行者证得了色定与无色定,其相便以有色和无色两种特性显现为自我,于是他生起「有色亦无色」的坚固执取,如同内论者那样;或者,纯粹由推论,将色与非色诸法混杂执取,而认定「有色且无色的我」存在。显示巴利原文
Kasiṇugghāṭimākāsapaṭhamāruppaviññāṇanatthibhāvaākiñcaññāyatanāni arūpasamāpattinimittaṃ nimbapaṇṇe tittakaraso viya sarīraparimāṇo arūpī attā tattha tiṭṭhatīti nigaṇṭhāti āha ‘‘nigaṇṭhādayo viyā’’ti. Missakagāhavasenāti rūpārūpasamāpattīnaṃ nimittāni ekajjhaṃ katvā ‘‘eko attā’’ti, tattha pavattasaññañcassa ‘‘saññā’’ti gahaṇavasena. Ayañhi diṭṭhigatiko rūpārūpasamāpattilābhitāya tannimittaṃ rūpabhāvena arūpabhāvena ca attā upatiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘rūpī ca arūpī cā’’ti abhinivesaṃ janesi ajjhattavādino viya, takkamatteneva vā rūpārūpadhammānaṃ missakaggahaṇavasena ‘‘rūpī arūpī ca attā hotī’’ti.
「以推理执取故」:如同那些仅余诸行、达到极微细状态的法,由于其极端微细而不能发挥作用,就如柱子、墙壁、手脚等的聚合一样,既非有色——因为它并未超越色法的本质,也非无色——他就是以这样的推理而执取。或者,可以像有边无边四论那样,以相互遮破的方式来理解其含义。只不过,在那里因为有处所和时间的差别,所以开示了第三和第四种论说;而这里则是由于时间和所依处的差别——这是唯一的不同。在此处,由于时间的差别,第三论说的出现是因为色相与无色相都不现前;而第四论说则是因为所依处的差别,对色法与无色法的总集生起「一个我」的推论——应依那里所说的道理去了知。显示巴利原文
Takkagāhenevāti saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvappattadhammā viya accantasukhumabhāvappattiyā sakiccasādhanāsamatthatāya thambhakuṭṭahatthapādādisaṅghāto viya neva rūpī, rūpasabhāvānativattanato na arūpīti evaṃ pavattatakkagāhena. Atha vā antānantikacatukkavāde viya aññamaññapaṭikkhepavasena attho veditabbo. Kevalaṃ pana tattha desakālabhedavasena tatiyacatutthavādā dassitā, idha kālavatthubhedavasenāti ayameva visesoti. Kālabhedavasena cettha tatiyavādassa pavatti rūpārūpanimittānaṃ saha anupaṭṭhānato. Catutthavādassa pana vatthubhedavasena pavatti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ samūhato ‘‘eko attā’’ti takkanavasenāti tattha vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ.
在第二组四论中,应依据有边无边论里“此中存在之终极”等所阐释之理,来理解此处应说的内容。显示巴利原文
Dutiyacatukke yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘amati gacchati ettha bhāvo osāna’’ntiādinā antānantikavāde vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
虽然对于证得八等至的见行者来说,由于等至的差别,想也可能呈现差别,因此从入等至者的角度,也能导出“种种想者之我”的论说。然而,由于想只在等至中以单一形态现前,故从入等至者的角度说为“单一想者”。正因如此,此处才使用了“入等至者”一词。或者说,此义应只就仅证得一种等至者来理解。即使由于等至的差别而有想的差别,但为了显示:对于外在的、种种境界,因生起粗显的种种想而被称为种种想者,故说“依非等至者为种种想者”。至于说“依小遍处为小想者”,则显示了他们甚至将与想无关的法也执为“想即是自我”。此处举列遍处,是为指明想的所缘范围;同样,对于“依广大遍处”等处,也应如此理解其义。如此解释之后,在有边无边论与此处的有边无边四论中,通过第一、第二种论说,便成立了这两种论说的差别;否则,在所说的各类论说中,虽依前际、后际的安立而有差别,但有些差别其实并不真正存在。或者,也可以这样理解:“小想者”是指那些通过显现“如拇指量的我、如麦粒量的我、如极微量的我”等形态,而执著我为显示巴利原文
Yadipi aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino diṭṭhigatikassa vasena samāpattibhedena saññābhedasambhavato ‘‘nānattasaññī attā’’ti ayampi vādo samāpannakavasena labbhati. Tathāpi samāpattiyaṃ ekarūpeneva saññāya upaṭṭhānato samāpannakavasena ‘‘ekattasaññī’’ti āha. Tenevettha samāpannakaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Ekasamāpattilābhino eva vā vasena attho veditabbo. Samāpattibhedena saññābhedasambhavepi bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe saññānānattena oḷārikena nānattasaññitaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘asamāpannakavasena nānattasaññī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Parittakasiṇavasena parittasaññī’’ti iminā satipi saññāvinimutte dhamme ‘‘saññāyeva attā’’ti vadatīti dassitaṃ hoti. Kasiṇaggahaṇañcettha saññāya visayadassanaṃ, evaṃ vipulakasiṇavasenāti etthāpi attho veditabbo. Evañca katvā antānantikavāde , idha ca antānantikacatukke paṭhamadutiyavādehi imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vādānaṃ viseso siddho hoti, aññathā vuttappakāresu vādesu pubbantāparantakappanabhedena satipi kehici visese kehici natthi yevāti. Atha vā ‘‘aṅguṭṭhappamāṇo attā, yavappamāṇo, aṇumatto vā attā’’ti ādidassanavasena paritto saññī cāti parittasaññī, kapilakaṇādādayo viya attano sabbagatabhāvapaṭijānanavasena appamāṇo saññī cāti appamāṇasaññīti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
由于天眼是辅助因,凭借天眼威力所生的随业往生智,虽能见到众生的乐等具足相,但在表述上被说成是以天眼所见的,因此经文说“以天眼……”等。若有人问:对于“一向乐的自我”等论说,因其属后际之见,那么说“见其转生”是否不妥?并非不妥,因为他们是见到现前的转生后,推想出未来的一向乐等性——此即论师所指之意。因此,他说:“见到正在转生者,便执取为‘一向乐’。”在此应这样理解:由于在某种生存地,大多见有与乐等相伴之法生起,因此便执取为“一向乐”。或者,这些见行者如同盲人摸象一般,见到什么便执取什么而加以宣称;对此,我们不应去寻求其中的合理性。显示巴利原文
Dibbacakkhuparibhaṇḍatāya yathākammūpagañāṇassa dibbacakkhupabhāvajanitena yathākammūpagañāṇena dissamānāpi sattānaṃ sukhādisamaṅgitā dibbacakkhunāva diṭṭhā hotīti āha ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā’’tiādi. Nanu ca ‘‘ekantasukhī attā’’tiādivādānaṃ aparantadiṭṭhibhāvato ‘‘nibbattamānaṃ disvā’’ti vacanaṃ anupannanti? Nānupapannaṃ, anāgatassa ekantasukhibhāvādikassa pakappanaṃ paccuppannāya nibbattiyā dassanena adhippetanti. Tenevāha ‘‘nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘ekantasukhī’ti gaṇhātī’’ti. Ettha ca tassaṃ tassaṃ bhūmiyaṃ bahulaṃ sukhādisahitadhammappavattidassanena tesaṃ ‘‘ekantasukhī’’ti gāho daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā hatthidassakaandhā viya diṭṭhigatikā yaṃ yadeva passanti, taṃ tadeva abhinivissa voharantīti na ettha yutti maggitabbā.
无想论与非想非非想论的注释。显示巴利原文
Asaññī nevasaññīnāsaññīvādavaṇṇanā
78-83 关于无想论:第一论是依生于无想有的有情而说。第二论如“把想看作我”等处所示的道理,仅执取想为“我”,由于其附属的其他想并不存在,故成为“无想”的论说。第三论同样是将想与色法,或一切色、无色法执取为“我”而成立。第四论则纯由推理执取建立,其义应依前文所说之理了知。在第二类四论中,因遍处色具有非认知的本质,故成立为“无想”;这四论皆应如“有边无边论”中所说的道理来了知。同样,关于非想非非想论:第一论是依生于非想非非想有的有情,在其死心、结生时或一切情况下,承认有一种无法行粗想作用的微细想存在而建立。第二论及其后诸论,则如无想论中所说,是依据微细想并承认其具有认知本质而成立——虽亦可寻求其理由,但为显明这些见行者的主张不足采信,故说“对此不应决定地寻求原因”。再者,这些有想、无想、非想非非想论,既从“死后无病”之说衍生,其归属于常见是很明显的。显示巴利原文
78-83. Asaññīvāde asaññabhave nibbattasattavasena paṭhamavādo, ‘‘saññaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti ettha vuttanayena saññaṃyeva ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tassa kiñcanabhāvena ṭhitāya aññāya saññāya abhāvato ‘‘asaññī’’ti pavatto dutiyavādo, tathā saññāya saha rūpadhamme, sabbe eva vā rūpārūpadhamme ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā pavatto tatiyavādo, takkagāhavaseneva catutthavādo pavatto. Tassa pubbe vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Dutiyacatukkepi kasiṇarūpassa asañjānanasabhāvatāya asaññīti katvā antānantikavāde vuttanayeneva cattāropi veditabbā. Tathā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādepi nevasaññīnāsaññībhave nibbattasattasseva cutipaṭisandhīsu, sabbattha vā paṭusaññākiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthāya sukhumāya saññāya atthibhāvapaṭijānanavasena paṭhamavādo, asaññīvāde vuttanayena sukhumāya saññāya vasena, sañjānanasabhāvatāpaṭijānena ca dutiyavādādayo pavattāti evaṃ ekena pakārena satipi kāraṇapariyesanassa sambhave diṭṭhigatikavādānaṃ anādaraṇīyabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘tattha na ekantena kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabba’’nti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etesañca saññīasaññīnevasaññīnāsaññīvādānaṃ ‘‘arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti vacanato sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho pākaṭoyeva.
断灭论(Ucchedavāda)的注释。显示巴利原文
Ucchedavādavaṇṇanā
84 因为对于不存在的东西,灭尽无从谈起,所以断灭必定建立在执着某种存在物的基础之上,故说“有的”。正如依因果法则而生起的自性法,虽同属一个相续,但若堕入不同的相续而有差别,则在究竟意义上,因与果的自性便是相异的;正如那些堕入不同相续的法一样,以它们必然彻底别异为定论,而对“种种”理的这种邪执,便是导致执取断灭的原因。同样,为了显示出:尽管因与果诸法存在,但因自性有别,却以它们摄属同一相续为由,而对“一”理生起彻底的无差别执,这也是一种原因,因此经文才说“众生的”。实际上,对于依相续而转的诸蕴,由于不能破除密集而执为众生;又因想着“只要此我尚未被断灭,此我便一直存在”,基于这种执取,便被断灭见所束缚;或者说,灭尽意义上的灭尽,在此即是“断灭”,故说“断坏”。“殊胜的灭”与“坏灭”即指不存在。而这种不存在,已超越肉眼和慧眼的观察范围,所以说“不见”。因为“灭”这个词在世间,正是建立在“看不见”之上的。“离去有”即出离了自性。因为凡是依灭……显示巴利原文
84. Asato vināsāsambhavato atthibhāvanibandhano ucchedoti vuttaṃ ‘‘sato’’ti. Yathā hetuphalabhāvena pavattamānānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ satipi ekasantānapariyāpannānaṃ bhinnasantatipatitehi visese hetuphalānaṃ paramatthato bhinnasabhāvattā bhinnasantānapatitānaṃ viya accantabhedasanniṭṭhānena nānattanayassa micchāgahaṇaṃ ucchedābhinivesassa kāraṇaṃ, evaṃ hetuphalabhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ vijjamānepi sabhāvabhede ekasantatipariyāpannatāya ekattanayena accantamabhedaggahaṇampi kāraṇaṃ evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sattassā’’ti vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ. Santānavasena hi vattamānesu khandhesu ghanavinibbhogābhāvena sattagāho, sattassa ca atthibhāvagāhanibandhano ucchedagāho yāvāyaṃ attā na ucchijjati, tāvāyaṃ vijjatiyevāti gahaṇato, nirudayavināso vā idha ucchedoti adhippetoti āha ‘‘upaccheda’’nti. Visesena nāso vināso, abhāvo. So pana maṃsacakkhupaññācakkhūnaṃ dassanapathātikkamoyeva hotīti āha ‘‘adassana’’nti. Adassane hi nāsa-saddo loke niruḷhoti. Bhāvavigamanti sabhāvāpagamaṃ. Yo hi nirudayavināsavasena ucchijjati, na so attano sabhāvena tiṭṭhatīti. Lābhīti dibbacakkhuñāṇalābhī. Cutimattamevāti sekkhaputhujjanānampi cutimattameva. Na upapātanti pubbayogābhāvena, parikammākaraṇena vā upapātaṃ daṭṭhuṃ na sakkoti. ‘‘Alābhī ca ko paralokaṃ na jānātī’’ti natthikavādavasena, mahāmūḷhabhāveneva vā ‘‘ito añño paraloko atthī’’ti anavabodhamāha. Ettakoyeva visayo, yo yaṃ indriyagocaroti. Attano dhītuyā hatthagaṇhanakarājādi viya kāmasukhagiddhatāya vā. ‘‘Na puna viruhantī’’ti patitapaṇṇānaṃ vaṇṭena appaṭisandhikabhāvamāha. Evameva sattāti yathā paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto na paṭisandhiyati, evaṃ sabbe sattā appaṭisandhikamaraṇameva nigacchantīti. Jalapubbūḷakūpamā hi sattāti tassa laddhi. Tathāti vuttappakārena. Lābhinopi cutito uddhaṃ adassaneneva imā diṭṭhiyo uppajjantīti āha ‘‘vikappetvā vā’’ti.
于此,有人问:正如不死矫乱论是纯粹依未证得者而开示的,也正如死后有想论的四论是纯粹依证得者而开示的,但此论并非如此。相反,此论就像常见、一分常见等论那样,是依证得者与未证得者而展开的。事实上,经中也正是这样说的:“其中,有两类人……”等等。如果确实如此,那么为什么这里的开示,与常见论等开示的方式不一样呢?答:这是由于开示善巧的缘故。佛陀、世尊们具备开示的善巧,会随顺所化众生的意乐,以种种方式来说法。或者,世尊若想在此处也这样开示其差别,也会这样讲:“比丘们,在此,有某沙门或婆罗门,由精勤……乃至……心得定后,将心转向了知众生的死与再生之智。他以清净超越常人的天眼,看见阿拉汉的死心,或看见众多其他众生,却不见其再生的情形。于是他这样说:‘正如尊者们,此我……’”由此便将具有殊胜证得者与仅凭推论者分别开示。因此应当了知,正是由于开示的善巧,随顺所化者的意乐,此论才以不同于常见论等方式而开示。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – yathā amarāvikkhepikavādā ekantaalābhīvaseneva dassitā, yathā ca uddhamāghātanikasaññīvādacatukko ekantalābhīvaseneva, na evamayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana sassatekaccasassatavādādayo viya lābhīalābhīvasena pavatto. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha dve janā’’tiādi. Yadi evaṃ kasmā sassatavādādidesanāhi idha aññathā desanā pavattāti? Vuccate – desanāvilāsappattito. Desanāvilāsappattā hi buddhā bhagavanto, te veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ vividhenākārena dhammaṃ desenti, aññathā idhāpi ca evaṃ bhagavā deseyya ‘‘idha bhikkhave ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya…pe… yathāsamāhite citte sattānaṃ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṃ abhininnāmeti, so dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena arahato cuticittaṃ passati, puthūnaṃ vā parasattānaṃ, na heva kho taduddhaṃ upapattiṃ, so evamāha ‘yathā kho bho ayaṃ attā’’’ tiādinā visesalābhino, takkino ca visuṃ katvā, tasmā desanāvilāsena veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ sassatavādādidesanāhi aññathāyaṃ desanā pavattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
或者,不像在一分常见等论中那样,证悟者的论说与推论者的论说并非以不同形式呈现;在此论中,由于二者类别相同,所以形式也相同。为了彰显这一特点,世尊才将此断灭论说成与前面那些论不同的形式。因为推论者也可能依靠传闻等,如同证悟者一样对此产生执取。又或者,这些恶见并非世尊以“未来将会如此”的方式所开示,也不是依于虚妄的构想而开示,而是如来以一切知智,如实了知见行者们如何认定“唯有这个是真实的,其余都是虚妄的”之后,将它揭示出来的。藉由开示那些甚深、非凡夫所能行境的佛法,并对之加以称扬,如来等才得以被正确地赞叹。而且,这些断灭论者,就好比那些见上上有的论者,为了遮破持有后有的论说,而各自安立自己的主张,此断灭论的开示也是这样成立的。因此,不应用先前那些论的开示方式,来指责此论在开示方式上存在差异。这样观察,就应当了知:如同依据无色有而作分析一样,也可以依据欲有、色有而分析断灭论。或者,也不应像对欲有、色有各别分析那样,又依无色有来进行分析;如果那样做,显示巴利原文
Atha vā ekaccasassatavādādīsu viya na idha takkīvādito visesalābhīvādo bhinnākāro, atha kho samānabhedatāya samānākāroyevāti imassa visesassa pakāsanatthaṃ bhagavatā ayamucchedavādo purimavādehi visiṭṭhākāro desito. Sambhavati hi takkinopi anussavādivasena adhigamavato viya idha abhiniveso. Atha vā na imā diṭṭhiyo bhagavatā anāgate evaṃ bhāvīvasena desitā, nāpi parikappavasena, atha kho yathā yathā diṭṭhigatikehi ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti paññattā, tathā tathā yathābhuccaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇena paricchinditvā pakāsitā. Yehi gambhīrādippakārā aputhujjanagocarā buddhadhammā pakāsanti, yesañca parikittanena tathāgatā sammadeva thomitā honti. Ucchedavādīhi ca diṭṭhigatikehi yathā uttaruttarabhavadassīhi aparabhavadassīnaṃ tesaṃ vādapaṭisedhavasena sakasakavādā patiṭṭhāpitā, tathāyaṃ desanā pavattāti purimadesanāhi imissā desanāya pavattibhedo na codetabbo. Evañca katvā arūpabhavabhedavasena viya kāmarūpabhavabhedavasenāpi ucchedavādo vibhajitvā daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā paccekaṃ kāmarūpabhavabhedavasena viya arūpabhavavasenāpi na vibhajitvā vattabbo, evañca sati bhagavatā vuttasattakato bahutarabhedo, appatarabhedo vā ucchedavādo āpajjatīti evaṃ pakārāpi codanā anavakāsāvāti.
于此,有人问:在前三种主张中说“身坏”,这是合适的,因为那些主张是围绕着五蕴所摄的有身而转起的;但是,后四种主张是依于四蕴所摄的有身而转起的,为什么也对它们说“身坏”呢?毕竟,那些无色界众生的确没有身体。回答是:确实如此。然而,那位见行者是把在色有身的情况下所使用的世俗言说,也套用到了无色有身上,因此才说“身坏”。而且,正如那些见行者是如何安立他们的恶见一样,世尊随顺于此,也就这样开示出来。或者,也可将“身”这一名称,视为对由触等诸法聚集而成的无色有身的一种指代。在这里,建立“欲天有身等一切都无余断灭”的第二类等主张,称为后际论者是合理的,因为其主张是以未来时为所缘的;而建立“作为见行者现量亲证之人身的断灭”的第一类主张,则由于是以现在时为所缘的,似乎就不应属于后际论者。但实际上,第二类等主张所说的“此我尚未如此完全断灭……”等,正是针对它们自己所含摄的前后各各有的断灭而言的,这才合乎后际论者的性质;而其中所说的“然而,贤者,还有另一个我”,是着眼于显示巴利原文
Etthāha – yuttaṃ tāva purimesu tīsu vādesu ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti vuttaṃ pañcavokārabhavapariyāpannaṃ attabhāvaṃ ārabbha pavattattā tesaṃ vādānaṃ, catuvokārabhavapariyāpannaṃ pana attabhāvaṃ nissāya pavattesu catutthādīsu catūsu vādesu kasmā ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti vuttaṃ . Na hi arūpīnaṃ kāyo vijjatīti? Saccametaṃ, rūpattabhāve pavattavohāreneva pana diṭṭhigatiko arūpattabhāvepi kāyavohāraṃ āropetvā āha ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti. Yathā ca diṭṭhigatikā diṭṭhiyo paññāpenti, tathā ca bhagavā dassetīti, arūpakāyabhāvato vā phassādidhammasamūhabhūte arūpattabhāve kāyaniddeso daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca kāmadevattabhāvādiniravasesavibhavapatiṭṭhāpakānaṃ dutiyavādādīnaṃ yutto aparantakappikabhāvo anāgataddhavisayattā tesaṃ vādānaṃ, na pana diṭṭhigatikapaccakkhabhūtamanussattabhāvasamucchedapatiṭṭhāpakassa paṭhamavādassa paccuppannavisayattā. Dutiyavādādīnañhi purimapurimavādasaṅgahitasseva attano taduttaruttaribhavopapannassa samucchedato yujjati aparantakappikatā, tathā ca ‘‘no ca kho bho ayaṃ attā ettāvatā sammā samucchinno hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, yaṃ pana tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘atthi kho bho añño attā’’ti, taṃ manussakāyavisesāpekkhāya vuttaṃ, na sabbathā aññabhāvatoti? No na yutto, idhalokapariyāpannattepi ca paṭhamavādavisayassa anāgatakālasseva tassa adhippetattā paṭhamavādinopi aparantakappikatāya na koci virodhoti.
见法涅槃论者释义显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavaṇṇanā
93 “见法”:即由作为“见”的智慧所证得的法。其中,有些法虽非感官领域,但因其极为明显,便如同感官对象一般,故说“见法也就是现量法”。也正因如此,才说“这是于各处所得有身的代名词”。显示巴利原文
93.Diṭṭhadhammoti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena upaladdhadhammo. Tattha yo anindriyavisayo, sopi supākaṭabhāvena indriyavisayo viya hotīti āha ‘‘diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkhadhammo vuccatī’’ti. Teneva ca ‘‘tattha tattha paṭiladdhattabhāvassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ.
95 “以内灼为相”:当心被亲属、财富、疾病、戒行、见解等灾祸所触时,内在生起灼热般的愁虑,这称为“内灼”;以它为特相,就是“以内灼为相”。“以依彼悲叹为相”:依于这作为生起因的愁而生的,称为“依彼”;极度悲泣,称为“悲叹”。“依彼”与“悲叹”合起来,即“依彼悲叹”;以此为特相,便是“以依彼悲叹为相”。当一个人被亲属灾祸等所触,即使通过悲泣也无法排遣时,由内在愁虑所引发的极度苦恼,便称为“恼”。然而,由于它表现为心的不清净状态,故说“以颓丧为相”。显示巴利原文
95.Antonijjhāyanalakkhaṇoti ñātibhogarogasīladiṭṭhibyasanehi phuṭṭhassa cetaso anto abbhantaraṃ nijjhāyanaṃ socanaṃ antonijjhāyanaṃ, taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti antonijjhāyanalakkhaṇo. Tannissitalālappanalakkhaṇoti taṃ sokaṃ samuṭṭhānahetuṃ nissitaṃ tannissitaṃ, bhusaṃ vilāpanaṃ lālappanaṃ, tannissitañca lālappanañca tannissitalālappanaṃ, taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti tannissitalālappanalakkhaṇo. Ñātibyasanādinā phuṭṭhassa paridevenāpi asakkuṇantassa antogatasokasamuṭṭhito bhuso āyāso upāyāso. So pana yasmā cetaso appasannākāro hoti, tasmā ‘‘visādalakkhaṇo’’ti vutto.
96 “寻思”即“所寻”,它本身便是具有安立作用的寻,因此说“寻……即寻”。对于“所伺”一词,也应同理理解。由于寻与伺的特性是扰动,含有寻、伺的禅那就如同带着刺一般,所以说“如似有刺”。显示巴利原文
96. Vitakkanaṃ vitakkitaṃ, taṃ pana abhiniropanasabhāvo vitakkoyevāti āha ‘‘abhi…pe… vitakko’’ti. Esa nayo vicāritanti etthāpi. Khobhakarasabhāvattā vitakkavicārānaṃ taṃsahitaṃ jhānaṃ saubbilanaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sakaṇḍakaṃ viya khāyatī’’ti.
97 当那种能使心踊跃的喜生起时,心便因此被称为“踊跃”;而心之所以有踊跃的状态,正是因为那种喜存在,没有它便没有,因此那喜被称为“踊跃之因”。显示巴利原文
97. Yāya ubbilāpanapītiyā uppannāya cittaṃ ‘‘ubbilāvita’’nti vuccati, sā pīti ubbilāvitattaṃ yasmā pana cittassa ubbilabhāvo tassā pītiyā sati hoti, nāsati, tasmā sā ‘‘ubbilabhāvakāraṇa’’nti vuttā.
98 「作意」是指心的倾注状态,即心朝向所缘、低俯之状态。因为乐生起时,心倾向于所缘,不似苦生起时那样背离,亦不似不苦不乐时那样既不倾向亦不背离。在此,第一类主张者不如理作意而生起如是见:「犹如为饥渴等所逼迫者,对可口食等之欲,当其要远离欲乐时,对执取所缘的渴望会特别增长;然而,已充分享用殊胜欲味而得满足者,便如饱啖美食后,对欲乐不复有受用之欲;乃至极难脱离欲境之贪染者,亦如水蛭自行松开。」他却颠倒而执,以为藉由满足五欲乐即能止息轮回之苦。第二类主张者等,则通过揭示欲等之过患、初禅等之安乐寂静,以为满足于初禅等乐便可断除轮回苦。对于断灭论,亦应依此方式加以考察。而此处之差别在于:于一有身中,可有五种主张。亦因此故,圣典中并未特别指出「另一个我」。问:若是,开示完全涅槃的见法涅槃论者,为何归于常见而非断见?答:因其阐明:藉由获得种种殊胜快乐而实现离缚后,纯粹之我便安住于自性之中。显示巴利原文
98.Ābhogoti vā cittassa ābhuggabhāvo, ārammaṇe oṇatabhāvoti attho. Sukhena hi cittaṃ ārammaṇe abhinataṃ hoti, na dukkhena viya apanataṃ, nāpi adukkhamasukhena viya anabhinataṃ anapanatañca. Tattha ‘‘khuppipāsādiabhibhūtassa viya manuññabhojanādīsu kāmehi viveciyamānassupādārammaṇapatthanā visesato abhivaḍḍhati, uḷārassa pana kāmarasassa yāvadatthaṃ tittassa manuññarasabhojanaṃ bhuttāvino viya suhitassa bhottukāmatā kāmesu pātabyatā na hoti, visayassāgiddhatāya visayehi dummociyehipi jalūkā viya sayameva muñcatī’’ti ca ayoniso ummujjitvā kāmaguṇasantappitatāya saṃsāradukkhavūpasamaṃ byākāsi paṭhamavādī. Kāmādīnaṃ ādīnavadassitāya, paṭhamādijjhānasukhassa santabhāvadassitāya ca paṭhamādijjhānasukhatittiyā saṃsāradukkhupacchedaṃ byākaṃsu dutiyādivādino, idhāpi ucchedavāde vuttappakāro vicāro yathāsambhavaṃ ānetvā vattabbo. Ayaṃ panettha viseso – ekasmiñhi attabhāve pañca vādā labbhanti. Teneva hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘añño attā’’ti aññaggahaṇaṃ na kataṃ. Kathaṃ panettha accantanibbānapaññāpakassa attano diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādassa sassatadiṭṭhiyā saṅgaho, na pana ucchedadiṭṭhiyāti? Taṃtaṃsukhavisesasamaṅgitāpaṭiladdhena bandhavimokkhena suddhassa attano sakarūpe avaṭṭhānadīpanato.
「其余」是指其余的五十五种邪见。彼中,有边无边论者等所持之常见性,各处已作说明。显示巴利原文
Sesāti sesā pañcapaññāsa diṭṭhiyo. Tāsu antānantikavādādīnaṃ sassatadiṭṭhibhāvo tattha tattha pakāsitoyeva.
101-3 问:为何唯以过去际与未来际显示为见执之领域,而不将两者合为一际耶?答:以其无可能故。非如过去际与未来际,于中间无法安立见,因时极短暂故。若谓现在有为二者之中间,则因其兼具二际之性,实已摄于过去际与未来际中,如何能说未被显示耶?又或,因具过去际与未来际故,中间亦名「过去未来际」;而于说「过去未来际论者或过去未来际随见者」时,已将其与过去际、未来际分离而说明,当如是理解。于义疏中,或以「一切后际论者即前际后际论者」之总称,或以省略方式,亦已包含之;否则,强行归纳之说即成无义。然则,何等为前际后际论者?当知即那些兼持受有边无边论与见法涅槃论等者。显示巴利原文
101-3. Kiṃ pana kāraṇaṃ pubbantāparantā eva diṭṭhābhinivesassa visayabhāvena dassitā, na pana tadubhayamekajjhanti? Asambhavato. Na hi pubbantāparantesu viya tadubhayavinimutte majjhante diṭṭhikappanā sambhavati ittarakālattā, atha pana paccuppannabhavo tadubhayavemajjhaṃ, evaṃ sati diṭṭhikappanakkhamo tassa ubhayasabhāvo pubbantāparantesuyeva antogadhoti kathamadassitaṃ. Atha vā pubbantāparantavantatāya ‘‘pubbantāparanto’’ti majjhanto vuccati , so ca ‘‘pubbantāparantakappikā vā pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhino’’ti vadantena pubbantāparantehi visuṃ katvā vuttoyevāti daṭṭhabbo. Aṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘sabbepi te aparantakappike pubbantāparantakappike’’ti etena sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesena vā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, aññathā saṅkaḍḍhitvā vuttavacanassa anatthakatā āpajjeyyāti. Ke pana te pubbantāparantakappikā? Ye antānantikā hutvā diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti evaṃ pakārā veditabbā.
此中,由经云:“所有这些都是以此六十二事、或以其中任一为所依,此外更无”,且除前际论者、后际论者及兼观前际后际论者这三类外,更无其他见行者,因此,《沙门果经》等其余经典中所说种种无业论、无因论、无有论等,以及外道中所见尊佑论、生主论、士夫论、时论、自性论、决定论、意欲论等诸恶见,当知皆摄于这六十二见之中。如何摄?先看无业论:以“如阉人、如山般稳固”等说显明业无,故属常见。同样,以“这些七身”之说出现的帕古德迦旃延论,亦属常见。依“众生杂染无因无缘”等说,无因论即摄于无因生论中。依“无有他世”等说,无有论即摄于断见中。的确,彼处说:“身坏则断灭”等。由第一个“等”字,尼干陀论等亦被摄含在内。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘sabbe te imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi, etesaṃ vā aññatarena, natthi ito bahiddhā’’ti vacanato, pubbantakappikādittayavinimuttassa ca kassaci diṭṭhigatikassa abhāvato yāni tāni sāmaññaphalādi (dī. ni. 1.166) suttantaresu vuttappakārāni akiriyāhetukanatthikavādādīni, yāni ca issarapajāpatipurisakālasabhāvaniyatiyadicchāvādādippabhedāni diṭṭhigatāni (visuddhi. ṭī. 2.563; vibha. anuṭī. 189 passitabbaṃ) bahiddhāpi dissamānāni, tesaṃ ettheva saṅgaho, antogadhatā ca veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Akiriyavādo tāva ‘‘vañjho kūṭaṭṭho’’tiādinā kiriyābhāvadīpanato sassatavāde antogadho, tathā ‘‘sattime kāyā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.174) nayappavatto pakudhavādo, ‘‘natthi hetu natthi paccayo sattānaṃ saṃkilesāyā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.168) vacanato ahetukavādo adhiccasamuppannikavāde antogadho. ‘‘Natthi paro loko’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.171) vacanato natthikavādo ucchedavāde antogadho. Tathā hi tattha ‘‘kāyassa bhedā ucchijjatī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.86) vuttaṃ. Paṭhamena ādi-saddena nigaṇṭhavādādayo saṅgahitā.
圣典中,尼干子之论虽以修习义说为四防护,然以其通过七种超越而成散乱论者,故尼干子论亦如散惹耶论,摄在不死矫乱论中。如“命即是身,命异于身”等主张,即归入“有色之我健康、死后存在”等论中。“如来死后存在”“有化生有情”等说,归入常见。“如来死后不存在”“无有化生有情”等说,为断见所摄。“如来死后亦存在亦不存在”“化生有情亦有亦无”等说,摄在一分常见中。“如来死后非存在非不存在”“化生有情非有非无”等说,摄在不死矫乱论中。自在天、生主、原人、时间等论,摄在一分常见中,胜论派之论亦然。自性、决定、意欲等论,摄在无因生论中。由此理趣,于其他经典中及外道中所见种种恶见,皆悉摄于此六十二见之中,应当了知。显示巴利原文
Yadipi pāḷiyaṃ nāṭaputtavāda (dī. ni. 1.178) bhāvena cātuyāmasaṃvaro āgato, tathāpi sattavatātikkamena vikkhepavāditāya nāṭaputtavādopi sañcayavādo viya amarāvikkhepavādesu antogadho. ‘‘Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīraṃ, aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīra’’nti (dī. ni. 1.377; ma. ni. 2.122; saṃ. ni. 2.35) evaṃ pakārā vādā ‘‘rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’tiādivādesu saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, ‘‘hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, ‘‘atthi sattā opapātikā’’ti evaṃ pakārā sassatavāde. ‘‘Na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti evaṃ pakārā ucchedavādena saṅgahitā. ‘‘Hoti ca na hoti ca tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, atthi ca natthi ca sattā opapātikā’’ti evaṃ pakārā ekaccasassatavāde antogadhā. ‘‘Neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, nevatthi na natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti ca evaṃ pakārā amarāvikkhepavāde antogadhā. Issarapajāpatipurisakālavādā ekaccasassatavāde antogadhā, tathā kaṇādavādo. Sabhāvaniyatiyadicchāvādā adhiccasamuppannikavādena saṅgahitā. Iminā nayena suttantaresu, bahiddhā ca dissamānānaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ imāsu dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīsu antogadhatā veditabbā.
“意欲”者,指对于见的意乐。由常见与断见,众生在杂染品中,即有两种意欲。世尊以一切知智衡度,将无量世界、无量众生在无量所知差别中生起的种种意欲——虽分门别类极为繁多——依“常见论者有四类”等之理,收摄为六十二种分类而予开示,犹如以标准秤称量,故说“如同用秤在称量”。而后文当说“内有网罗”等(《长部》1.146)。“如同从须弥山脚取沙”一句,乃为显示除世尊一切知智,余人实不能胜任此开示。显示巴利原文
Ajjhāsayanti diṭṭhijjhāsayaṃ. Sassatucchedadiṭṭhivasena hi sattānaṃ saṃkilesapakkhe duvidho ajjhāsayo, tañca bhagavā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ aparimāṇe eva ñeyyavisese uppajjanavasena anekabhedabhinnānampi ‘‘cattāro janā sassatavādā’’tiādinā dvāsaṭṭhiyā pabhedehi saṅgaṇhanavasena sabbaññutaññāṇena paricchinditvā dassento pamāṇabhūtāya tulāya dhārayamāno viya hotīti āha ‘‘tulāya tulayanto viyā’’ti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘anto jālīkatā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.146). ‘‘Sinerupādato vālukaṃ uddharanto viyā’’ti etena sabbaññutaññāṇato aññassa imissā desanāya asakkuṇeyyataṃ dasseti.
“连接”即是连结。由提问而形成的连结,名为“问之连结”。或者,能起连结作用的,称为连结;其中以提问为连结,故称“问之连结”。又或者,通过提问而被连接,所以是“问之连结”。对于“意欲连结”,道理亦同。至于“随顺连结”,此处应知:“被连结”即为连结;每一种连结就是“随顺连结”,亦即随顺于连结,故称“随顺连结”。这在注释书中已有说明:“而所谓‘随顺连结’,当依如下诸经来理解:原先由某一法引出的教说,在后来的经文中,或随顺该法,或出于对立法而出现更深入的教导。例如:《若希望经》中,开头以戒引出教导,随后出现了六神通……《锯喻经》中,开头由不忍引出,随后出现了锯喻”等等。显示巴利原文
Anusandhānaṃ anusandhi, pucchāya kato anusandhi pucchānusandhi. Atha vā anusandhayatīti anusandhi, pucchā anusandhi etassāti pucchānusandhi. Pucchāya anusandhiyatīti vā pucchānusandhi. Ajjhāsayānusandhimhipi eseva nayo. Yathānusandhīti ettha pana anusandhīyatīti anusandhi, yā yā anusandhi yathānusandhi, anusandhianurūpaṃ vā yathānusandhīti saddattho veditabbo, so ‘‘yena pana dhammena ādimhi desanā uṭṭhitā, tassa dhammassa anurūpadhammavasena vā paṭipakkhavasena vā yesu suttesu upari desanā āgacchati, tesaṃ vasena yathānusandhi veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ? Ākaṅkheyyasutte (ma. ni. 1.64-69) heṭṭhā sīlena desanā uṭṭhitā, upari cha abhiññā āgatā…pe… kakacūpame (ma. ni. 1.222) heṭṭhā akkhantiyā uṭṭhitā, upari kakacūpamā āgatā’’tiādinā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.100-104) vutto.
“据说”一语,是表明他们不乐于世尊所教导的“无我”。“尊者”是对法的呼唤。“非我所作”,指并非由我所造作,或者是由无我的诸蕴所造作。“将触及哪一个我?”意思是:既然无我,而诸蕴又是刹那灭的,那么业将以各自的果报触对哪一个我呢?是谁在领受业果呢?“非明者”,指由于缺少闻法等因缘,于圣法不精通,故非明者。“具无明者”,即到达无明之人,由于在圣法上未被调伏,未能断除无明。“以爱为主导的心”,是说怀有这样的想法:“如果我确实不存在,我所造业的果报由谁领受?若真的有一个我存在,才谈得上果报的受用。”这种由爱为主导而引生的,便是爱为主导的心,也就是与“我所执取”一同生起的心。“应超越”,意思是:虽然诸行是刹那灭的,但在某个相续中造下业,便在那个相续中产生果报,因此业与果的关系只是依于法的积聚而成立;若错误地执取为一性之理,认为必须有一个兼具造作者与受者身份的实体,否则“业与果的关系便无法成立”,从而认为应当跨越导师教法中揭示我空、我所空的部分。显示巴利原文
Iti kirāti bhagavato yathādesitāya attasuññatāya attano aruccanabhāvadīpanaṃ. Bhoti dhammālapanaṃ. Anattakatānīti attanā na katāni, anattakehi vā khandhehi katāni. Kamattānaṃ phusissantīti asati attani khandhānañca khaṇikattā kammāni kaṃ attānaṃ attano phalena phusissanti, ko kammaphalaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti attho. Avidvāti sutādivirahena ariyadhammassa akovidatāya na vidvā. Avijjāgatoti avijjāya upagato, ariyadhamme avinītatāya appahīnāvijjoti attho. Taṇhādhipateyyena cetasāti ‘‘yadi ahaṃ nāma koci natthi , mayā katassa kammassa ko phalaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, sati pana tasmiṃ siyā phalūpabhogo’’ti taṇhādhipatito āgato taṇhādhipateyyo, tena. Attavādupādānasahagata cetasā. Atidhāvitabbanti khaṇikattepi saṅkhārānaṃ yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ kataṃ, tattheva phaluppattito dhammapuñjamattasseva ca siddhe kammaphalasambandhe ekattanayaṃ micchā gahetvā ekena kārakavedakabhūtena bhavitabbaṃ, aññathā ‘‘kammaphalānaṃ sambandho na siyā’’ti attattaniyasuññatāpakāsanaṃ satthusāsanaṃ atikkamitabbaṃ maññeyyāti attho.
“上方提到了六种神通”——这是通过随顺法来显示随顺连结;其余则是通过对立法来显示。关于烦恼,如“贪是心的随烦恼”等,是依烦恼的角度来讲述。“于此亦尔”中的“亦”字,表示如同在已说诸经中通过对立法显示随顺连结,在此经中也是如此。确实,此教导是因执取恒常、坚实等而引生的恶见所引发,最终以揭示恒常、坚实等为空无实质而结束。显示巴利原文
‘‘Upari cha abhiññā āgatā’’ti anurūpadhammavasena yathānusandhiṃ dasseti, itarehi paṭipakkhavasena. Kilesenāti ‘‘lobho cittassa upakkileso’’tiādinā kilesavasena. Imasmimpīti pi-saddena yathā vuttasuttādīsu paṭipakkhavasena yathānusandhi, evaṃ imasmimpi sutteti dasseti. Tathā hi niccasārādipaññāpakānaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ vasena uṭṭhitā ayaṃ desanā niccasārādisuññatāpakāsanena niṭṭhāpitāti.
关于恐惧和颤动的部分的注释显示巴利原文
Paritassitavipphanditavāravaṇṇanā
105-117 “为显示界限的区分”:是为了阐明,通过对常见等见的如实见,开显其与正见无混杂的区分。“那也是感受”,这是与前文的连接。“对不知不见者”:指对“我与世间是常”这种见处,不能如实了知“此见处是如此被执取、如此被把握、如此受持、如此有来世”的人。同样,对于那些在彼感受中未离贪爱而执取恶见者,他们对那种感受从集等角度不如实知、不见——以此显示如来等以无碍智与一切眼在此拥有如实知见,而恶见者并非如此,他们只有爱与见的执取。因此,此教导正是为了显示界限的区分而生起的。但在注释书中,是以一般的方式说“对诸法的自性不能如实知见的人”。因为并非仅仅不了知有为法的自性,就会产生错误执著。总说的阐明显然会落实到特殊情况,故作此特别连接。“感受”,在此是指为了施设“我与世间是常”之见而生起的、属于见的体验。“入于爱者”,即已进入爱、被爱所侵袭,或流转于爱的人。“而那也正是”,是回顾前文所说。显示巴利原文
105-117.Mariyādavibhāgadassanatthanti sassatādidiṭṭhidassanassa sammādassanena saṅkarābhāvavibhāvanatthaṃ. Tadapi vedayitanti sambandho. Ajānataṃ apassatanti ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti ‘‘idaṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ evaṃgahikaṃ evaṃparāmaṭṭhaṃ evaṃgahitaṃ hoti evaṃabhisamparāya’’nti yathābhūtaṃ ajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ. Tathā yasmiṃ vedayite avītataṇhatāya evaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ upādiyanti, taṃ vedayitaṃ samudayādito yathābhūtaṃ ajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ, etena anāvaraṇañāṇasamantacakkhūhi yathā tathāgatānaṃ yathābhūtamettha ñāṇadassanaṃ, na evaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ, atha kho taṇhādiṭṭhiparāmāsoyevāti dasseti. Teneva cāyaṃ desanā mariyādavibhāgadassanatthā jātā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvaṃ ajānantānaṃ apassantāna’’nti avisesena vuttaṃ. Na hi saṅkhatadhammasabhāvaṃ ajānanamattena micchā abhinivisantīti. Sāmaññajotanā visese avatiṭṭhatīti ayaṃ visesayojanā katā. Vedayitanti ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti diṭṭhipaññāpanavasena pavattaṃ diṭṭhiyā anubhūtaṃ anubhavanaṃ. Taṇhāgatānanti taṇhāya gatānaṃ upagatānaṃ, pavattānaṃ vā. Tañca kho panetanti ca yathāvuttaṃ vedayitaṃ paccāmasati. Tañhi vaṭṭāmisabhūtaṃ diṭṭhitaṇhāsallānuviddhatāya saubbilattā cañcalaṃ, na maggaphalasukhaṃ viya ekarūpena avatiṭṭhatīti. Tenevāha ‘‘paritassitenā’’tiādi.
或者,如此从差别因区分了六十二种恶见之后,现在为了从无差别因加以显示,而开始了“诸比丘,于此”等教导。因为对一切恶见者而言,受、无明与爱,即是无差别的因。在这里,“那也是”,指在“他们施设我与世间是常”之中,这种“我与世间是常”的施设,那也是受。对于乐等三种感受,或者依次从苦、箭、无常的角度,或者从集、灭、味、过患、出离的角度,完全不如实知、不见,又因对乐等无所希求,所以成为进入爱、被爱所侵袭的人。他们唯以爱的恐惧而表现出见的悸动、见的摇摆,或者仅是在身、语二门中,由见引起的躁动状态;而实际上,并没有任何可由见来施设的“常”法存在。这便是其含义。在一分常见论等情形中,道理亦复如是。显示巴利原文
Atha vā evaṃ visesakāraṇato dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni vibhajitvā idāni avisesakāraṇato tāni dassetuṃ ‘‘tatra bhikkhave’’tiādikā desanā āraddhā. Sabbesañhi diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vedanā avijjā taṇhā ca avisiṭṭhakāranti. Tattha tadapīti ‘‘sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapenti’’ti ettha yadetaṃ ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti paññāpanaṃ, tadapi. Sukhādibhedaṃ tividhavedayitaṃ yathākkamaṃ dukkhasallāniccato, avisesena samudayatthaṅgamassādādīnavanissaraṇato vā yathābhūtaṃ ajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ, tato eva ca sukhādipatthanāsambhavato taṇhāya upagatattā taṇhāgatānaṃ taṇhāparitassitena diṭṭhivipphanditameva diṭṭhicalanameva, ‘‘asati attani ko vedanaṃ anubhavatī’’ti kāyavacīdvāresu diṭṭhiyā copanappattimattameva vā, na pana diṭṭhiyā paññāpetabbo sassato koci dhammo atthīti attho. Ekaccasassatavādādīsupi eseva nayo.
触缘部分的注释显示巴利原文
Phassapaccayavāravaṇṇanā
118 “为显示辗转的缘”:这些恶见以爱的恐惧而转起,其感受为缘,而感受又以触为缘——此教导意在确定见的缘起次第。由此显示:如同能施设的法即是见,其缘法亦各自依缘之力而生起,并非无有诸缘;同样,所应施设之法,如色、受等,其中并不存在任何“我”或“世间是常”的道理。应如此理解。显示巴利原文
118. Yena taṇhāparitassitena etāni diṭṭhigatāni pavattanti, tassa vedayitaṃ paccayo, vedayitassāpi phasso paccayoti desanā diṭṭhiyā paccayaparamparaniddhāraṇanti āha ‘‘paramparapaccayadassanattha’’nti, tena yathā paññāpanadhammo diṭṭhi, tappaccayadhammā ca yathāsakaṃ paccayavaseneva uppajjanti, na paccayehi vinā, evaṃ paññāpetabbā dhammāpi rūpavedanādayo, na ettha koci attā vā loko vā sassatoti ayamattho dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“无有此处”部分的注释显示巴利原文
Netaṃṭhānaṃvijjativāravaṇṇanā
131 “其缘”一词,是指触的缘;在“于见为缘的受”中,即以触为要、由自缘所生之意。即使不依眼等依处、不与某些相应法俱,受亦可生起;然而,受决无离触而生之理,故触为受的有力之因,因此说“为显有力性”。纵然所缘现前,若心识生起时不具触之特相,亦不能以所缘缘为缘,所以触才是相应法的殊胜之缘。正如世尊分析心识生起时,首举的是触,受则仅为依处而已。显示巴利原文
131.Tassapaccayassāti phassapaccayassa diṭṭhivedayiteti diṭṭhiyā paccayabhūte vedayite, phassapadhānehi attano paccayehi nipphādetabbeti attho. Vināpi cakkhādivatthūhi, sampayuttadhammehi ca kehici vedanā uppajjati, na pana kadāci phassena vināti phasso vedanāya balavakāraṇanti āha ‘‘balavabhāvadassanattha’’nti. Sannihitopi hi visayo sace phusanākārarahito hoti cittuppādo, na tassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo hotīti phassova sampayuttadhammānaṃ visesapaccayo. Tathā hi bhagavatā cittuppādaṃ vibhajantena phassoyeva paṭhamaṃ uddhaṭo, vedanāya pana adhiṭṭhānameva.
“恶见者所依之轮转”的注释显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhigatikādhiṭṭhānavaṭṭakathāvaṇṇanā
144 因为在下方三个轮转中,“受”皆为增上,且下文将说“他们感受……”,故此处以“受”为主,因此说“总集一切见所受”。“总集”一词即点出在“那些”等处出现的“亦(pi)”字之义。将“受”归入“触”中,正是为了显示“触缘性”,也就是说,“六内处感受六种所缘,唯以六触为因”。“于此中生起”的“生起(sañjāti)”一词,在此处作“依处”解,故说“于生起处”。同样地,“集会(samosaraṇa)”一词也应如此理解。此处,果报展转伸展开来,或者说,以其为因的状态能令自果相续生起,故名为“处”,即是因。犹如树丛与灌木丛聚之处,世人约定俗成地称为“林野”,“林野”本身即是“林野处”,所以说“仅是依概念而假立”。在所谓“三种意义”中,“亦(pi)”字应理解为含摄未显说的意义,由此也包含了“矿藏、住处、依止处”等义。于“金处(金矿)”、“金处(金器)”、“婆苏天处”、“作业处(工坊)”等用法中,“处”字即用于矿藏、住处、依止处等意义。显示巴利原文
144. Heṭṭhā tīsupi vāresu adhikatattā, upari ca ‘‘paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti vakkhamānattā vedayitamettha padhānanti āha ‘‘sabbadiṭṭhivedayitāni sampiṇḍetī’’ti. Sampiṇḍetīti ca ‘‘yepi te’’ti tattha tattha āgatassa pi-saddassa atthaṃ dasseti. Vedayitassa phasse pakkhipanaṃ phassapaccayatādassanameva ‘‘chahi ajjhattikāyatanehi chaḷārammaṇapaṭisaṃvedanaṃ ekantato chaphassahetukamevā’’ti. Sañjāyanti etthāti adhikaraṇattho sañjāti-saddoti āha ‘‘sañjātiṭṭhāne’’ti. Evaṃ samosaraṇasaddopi daṭṭhabbo. Āyatati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāya, āyabhūtaṃ vā attano phalaṃ tanoti pavattetīti āyatanaṃ, kāraṇaṃ. Rukkhagacchasamūhe araññavohāro araññameva araññāyatananti āha ‘‘paṇṇattimatte’’ti. Atthattayepīti pi-saddena avuttatthasampiṇḍanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tena ākāranivāsādhiṭṭhānatthe saṅgaṇhāti. Hiraññāyatanaṃ suvaṇṇāyatanaṃ, vāsudevāyatanaṃ kammāyatananti ādīsu ākaranivāsādhiṭṭhānesu āyatanasaddo. Cakkhādīsu ca phassādayo ākiṇṇā, tāni ca nesaṃ nivāso, adhiṭṭhānañca nissayapaccayabhāvatoti. Tiṇṇampi visayindriyaviññāṇānaṃ saṅgatibhāvena gahetabbo phassoti ‘‘saṅgatī’’ti vutto. Tathā hi so ‘‘sannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti vuccati. Iminā nayenāti vijjamānesupi aññesu sampayuttadhammesu yathā ‘‘cakkhuñca…pe… phasso’’ti (ma. ni. 1.204; ma. ni. 3.421, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-45; saṃ. ni. 4.60; kathā. 465) etasmiṃ sutte vedanāya padhānakāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ phassasīsena desanā katā, evamidhāpi brahmajāle ‘‘phassapaccayā vedanā’’tiādinā phassaṃ ādiṃ katvā aparantapaṭiccasamuppādadīpanena paccayaparamparaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘phassāyatanehi phussa phussā’’ti phassamukhena vuttaṃ.
“触”,虽是无色法,亦不全然黏着于所缘,然其以“触击”的方式转起,犹如正在触击一般,所以说“正是触在触击一个个所缘”。也正因此,它被描述为“以触为相,以撞击为作用”。至于所说的“以触处触了又触……”,就如同“床在作响”等说法,是以假说的方式,将本无触击功能的事物表现为具有触击功能,故云“将它归属于触”,意思是:令其以触为导向,将其提升至触的概念范畴。因为所谓的“概念范畴”仅是世俗的习惯假说,并非依此便成真实之义,所以才接着说了“因此……”等等。显示巴利原文
Phasso arūpadhammopi samāno ekadesena ārammaṇe anallīyamānopi phusanākārena pavattati phusanto viya hotīti āha ‘‘phassova taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusatī’’ti, yena so ‘‘phusanalakkhaṇo, saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti ca vuccati. ‘‘Phassāyatanehi phussa phussā’’ti aphusanakiccānipi āyatanāni ‘‘mañcā ghosantī’’tiādīsu viya nissitavohārena phusanakiccāni katvā dassitānīti āha ‘‘phasse upanikkhipitvā’’ti, phassagatikāni katvā phassūpacāraṃ āropetvāti attho. Upacāro hi nāma vohāramattaṃ, na tena atthasiddhi hotīti āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi.
依自己生起之缘的六触,受可略分为眼触所生受乃至意触所生受六种;详分别有一百零八种。于色爱等差别,即色爱乃至法爱,略分六种差别,详分一百零八种差别。这里说“从亲依止的角度”,意在凸显亲依止缘。然而为何在此只举出亲依止缘?难道乐受和不苦不乐受对于渴爱,不是以唯所缘缘、所缘增上缘、所缘亲依止缘及本性亲依止缘四种方式为缘吗?而苦受不是以唯所缘缘与本性亲依止缘两种方式为缘吗?确实如此,然而这一切都可被统摄于“亲依止”这一大范畴中。所缘亲依止缘本是亲依止的通类,因此将其归入亲依止缘来统摄,还可以理解;但对“唯所缘缘”和“所缘增上缘”又当如何理解?应当了知,它们也是基于“作为所缘”这一共通性,从而被“所缘亲依止缘”所含摄,并非被“本性亲依止缘”所摄。正是为了阐明此义,这里才说“从亲依止的角度”,而不说“以亲依止缘”。显示巴利原文
Attano paccayabhūtānaṃ channaṃ phassānaṃ vasena cakkhusamphassajā yāva manosamphassajāti saṅkhepato chabbidhā vedanā, vitthārato pana aṭṭhasatapariyāyena aṭṭhasatabhedā. Rūpataṇhādibhedāyāti rūpataṇhā yāva dhammataṇhāti saṅkhepato chappabhedāya, vitthārato aṭṭhasatabhedāya. Upanissayakoṭiyāti upanissayasīsena. Kasmā panettha upanissayapaccayova uddhaṭo, nanu sukhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā ca taṇhāya ārammaṇamattaārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayapakatūpanissayavasena catudhā paccayo, dukkhā ca ārammaṇamattapakatūpanissayavasena dvidhāti? Saccametaṃ, upanissaye eva pana taṃ sabbaṃ antogadhaṃ. Yuttaṃ tāva ārammaṇūpanissayassa upanissayasāmaññato upanissayena saṅgaho, ārammaṇamattaārammaṇādhipatīnaṃ pana kathanti? Tesampi ārammaṇasāmaññato ārammaṇūpanissayena saṅgahova kato, na pakatūpanissayenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etadatthamevettha ‘‘upanissayakoṭiyā’’ti vuttaṃ, na ‘‘upanissayenā’’ti.
“四种”:指欲取、见取、戒禁取、我语取。难道不只是渴爱为欲取吗?的确如此。其中,微弱的渴爱仅是渴爱,强力的渴爱则是欲取。或者,对未得之境的希求是渴爱,犹如盗贼伸手摸索;对已得之境的执取是取,犹如盗贼抓取到手的财物。渴爱是少欲的反面,取是知足的反面。渴爱是寻求之苦的根源,取是守护之苦的根源,这就是它们之间的差别。对于取,应了知:不与业同时生起的取,是从亲依止的角度;与业同时生起的取,是从俱生的角度。其中,于无间缘,以无间缘、等无间缘、无间亲依止缘、无有缘、离去缘、习行缘为缘;于非无间缘,则以亲依止缘为缘;而作为所缘的取,则以所缘缘、所缘增上缘、所缘亲依止缘,或唯以所缘缘为缘——将这一切统归亲依止缘,故说“从亲依止的角度”。又因由渴爱而乐著于色等,从而沉溺于欲乐,故渴爱是欲取的亲依止缘。同样,正因于色等迷惑,才会执取“无布施”等邪见;欲从轮回解脱者,执取不净道为净道;执取诸蕴为我、我所的身见,因此渴爱也是其余诸取的亲依止缘。而对于同时生起的取,渴爱则以俱生缘为缘。显示巴利原文
Catubbidhassāti kāmupādānaṃ yāva attavādupādānanti catubbidhassa. Nanu ca taṇhāva kāmupādānanti? Saccametaṃ. Tattha dubbalā taṇhā taṇhāva, balavatī taṇhā kāmupādānaṃ. Atha vā appattavisayapatthanā taṇhā tamasi corānaṃ karapasāraṇaṃ viya. Sampattavisayaggahaṇaṃ upādānaṃ, corānaṃ karappattadhanaggahaṇaṃ viya. Appicchatāpaṭipakkhā taṇhā, santosapaṭipakkhā upādānaṃ. Pariyesanadukkhamūlaṃ taṇhā, ārakkhadukkhamūlaṃ upādānanti ayametesaṃ viseso. Upādānassāti asahajātassa upādānassa upanissayakoṭiyā, itarassa sahajātakoṭiyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha anantarassa anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanapaccayehi, anānantarassa upanissayena, ārammaṇabhūtā pana ārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayehi, ārammaṇamatteneva vāti taṃ sabbaṃ upanissayeneva gahetvā ‘‘upanissayakoṭiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā ca taṇhāya rūpādīni assādetvā kāmesu pātabyataṃ āpajjati, tasmā taṇhā kāmupādānassa upanissayo. Tathā rūpādibhedeva sammūḷho ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 1.171; ma. ni. 1.445; ma. ni. 2.94, 95, 225; ma. ni. 3.91, 116, 136; saṃ. ni. 3.210; dha. sa. 1221; vibha. 938) micchādassanaṃ, saṃsārato muccitukāmo asuddhimagge suddhimaggaparāmasanaṃ, khandhesu attattaniyagāhabhūtaṃ sakkāyadassanaṃ gaṇhāti, tasmā itaresampi taṇhā upanissayoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sahajātassa pana sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatahetuvasena taṇhā paccayo hoti. Taṃ sabbaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sahajātakoṭiyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
「同理」:即从亲依止的角度和从俱生的角度。「有」:即业有和生有。其中,以思等为行的一切趣有之业是业有,欲有等九种是生有。对于这些有,四种取由于是生有之因的业有之因,以及成为其助伴,故以本性亲依止力为缘。而在以业为所缘而造作时,与业俱生的欲取,以所缘缘为生有的缘。对于业有,俱生取以俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离缘,以及因缘、道缘等多种方式为缘;非俱生取以无间缘、等无间缘、无间亲依止缘、无有缘、离去缘、习行缘为缘;其他取以本性亲依止缘为缘;在思惟等时,以所缘缘为缘。其中,将无间等归入亲依止缘,将俱生等归入俱生缘,故说「从亲依止的角度和从俱生的角度」。显示巴利原文
Tathāti upanissayakoṭiyā ceva sahajātakoṭiyā cāti attho. Bhavassāti kammabhavassa ceva upapattibhavassa ca. Tattha cetanādisaṅkhā taṃ sabbaṃ bhavagāmikammaṃ kammabhavo, kāmabhavādiko navavidho upapattibhavo, tesaṃ upapattibhavassa catubbidhampi upādānaṃ upapattibhavakāraṇakammabhavakāraṇabhāvato , tassa ca sahāyabhāvūpagamanato pakatūpanissayavasena paccayo hoti. Kammārammaṇakaraṇakāle pana kammasahajātakāmupādānaṃ upapattibhavassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo hoti. Kammabhavassa pana sahajātassa sahajātaṃ upādānaṃ sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena ceva hetumaggavasena ca anekadhā paccayo hoti, asahajātassa anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanavasena, itarassa pakatūpanissayavasena, sammasanādikālesu ārammaṇavasena ca paccayo hoti. Tattha anantarādike upanissayapaccaye, sahajātādike sahajātapaccaye pakkhipitvā vuttaṃ ‘‘upanissayakoṭiyā ceva sahajātakoṭiyā cā’’ti.
“有缘生”:这里的“有”是指业有,因为业有是生的缘,而不是生有。为什么呢?生有就是最初结生的蕴,那正是生。因此说:“而这里的生,应当看作是有变化的五蕴。”“有变化”是说依结生的变化而有变化,从义理上来说,它们就是生有。同一事物不能作为自己的因。而业有以业缘和亲依止缘作为生有的缘,所以说“有,从亲依止的角度,是生的缘”。显示巴利原文
Bhavo jātiyāti ettha bhavoti kammabhavo adhippeto. So hi jātiyā paccayo, na upapattibhavo. Upapattibhavo hi paṭhamābhinibbattā khandhā jātiyeva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jātīti panettha savikārā pañcakkhandhā daṭṭhabbā’’ti. Savikārāti ca nibbattivikārena savikārā, te ca atthato upapattibhavoyeva. Na hi tadeva tassa kāraṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttanti. Kammabhavo ca upapattibhavassa kammapaccayena ceva upanissayapaccayena ca paccayo hotīti āha ‘‘bhavo jātiyā upanissayakoṭiyā paccayo’’ti.
又因为有生才有老死,被老死等所触的愚者才有愁等生起,无生则无,故说“生……是缘”。由于已经显示了以俱生、亲依止为纲的缘之审察,而未涉及支之审察,所以说是“此是这里的略说”。因为缘起的审察范围极为广大,哪里能够无余地阐述呢?因此说了“若广说……”等。为了说明这里只是部分地阐述缘起,并举例说明理由,而说了“因为世尊……”等。其中,“前际不可知”:这不是说在某个正自觉者或转轮王时无明才生起,在此之前则没有;无明的前际界限,即使是我(佛陀)无障碍的一切知智也无法了知,因为无明本来就没有起始。“此缘此因缘”:这是缘,这是因缘;“从此因缘”:就是从此因、从此缘;“从漏为缘”也是这个意思。“从有爱”:即从作为有结缚的渴爱。“从有见”:即从常见。“由此至彼,由彼至此”:显示的是无边际、前后相续的生起。显示巴利原文
Yasmā ca sati jātiyā jarāmaraṇaṃ, jarāmaraṇādinā phuṭṭhassa bālassa sokādayo ca sambhavanti, nāsati, tasmā ‘‘jāti…pe… paccayo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sahajātūpanissayasīsena paccayavicāraṇāya dassitattā, aṅgavicāraṇāya ca anāmaṭṭhattā āha ‘‘ayamettha saṅkhepo’’ti. Mahāvisayattā paṭiccasamuppādavicāraṇāya sā niravasesā kuto laddhabbāti āha ‘‘vitthārato’’tiādi. Ekadesena cettha kathitassa paṭiccasamuppādassa tathā kathane saddhiṃ udāharaṇena kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha koṭi na paññāyatīti asukassa nāma sammāsambuddhassa, cakkavattino vā kāle avijjā uppannā, na tato pubbeti avijjāya ādimariyādā appaṭihatassa mama sabbaññutaññāṇassāpi na paññāyati avijjamānattāyevāti attho. Ayaṃ paccayo idappaccayo, tasmā idappaccayā, imasmā kāraṇā āsavapaccayāti attho. Bhavataṇhāyāti bhavasaṃyojanabhūtāya taṇhāya. Bhavadiṭṭhiyāti sassatadiṭṭhiyā. ‘‘Ito ettha etto idhā’’ti apariyantaṃ aparāparuppattiṃ dasseti.
「离转论等注释」:对《离转论》等之注释。显示巴利原文
Vivaṭṭakathādivaṇṇanā
145 “受的集”等文句应当视为受业处。而“彼”(触的集、触的灭)是指所说的触处。“食”应理解为抟食。因为根据“抟食是对此身以食缘为缘”(《发趣论》1.缘分别429)的说法,它对业生诸法也起着支撑的缘的作用。虽然入流者等也能如实了知,但这里的开示是以最胜通达之智为尺度,以阿拉汉果为顶点而结束的。在这里,“诸比丘,比丘……如实了知”这句话,通过法的引导性,将僧团的善行也一并显示了出来。正因为如此,在此处的注疏书中说:“谁如此了知?漏尽者了知,乃至开始修观者了知”,作了圆满的说明后,展示了比丘僧团。由此,所说的“也可以依比丘僧团来说明”(《长部注》1.8)这句话,应当知道正是按照这个文句得到了阐明。显示巴利原文
145. ‘‘Vedanānaṃ samudaya’’ntiādipāḷi vedanākammaṭṭhānanti daṭṭhabbā. Tanti ‘‘phassasamudayā phassanirodhā’’ti vuttaphassaṭṭhānaṃ. Āhāroti kabaḷīkāro āhāro veditabbo. So hi ‘‘kabaḷīkāro āhāro imassa kāyassa āhārapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.paccayaniddesa 429) vacanato kammasamuṭṭhānānampi upatthambhakapaccayo hotiyeva. Yadipi sotāpannādayo yathābhūtaṃ pajānanti, ukkaṃsagativijānanavasena pana desanā arahattanikūṭena niṭṭhāpitā. Ettha ca ‘‘yato kho bhikkhave bhikkhu…pe… yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti etena dhammassa niyyānikabhāvena saddhiṃ saṅghassa suppaṭipattiṃ dasseti. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyamettha ‘‘ko evaṃ jānātīti? Khīṇāsavo jānāti, yāva āraddhavipassako jānātī’’ti paripuṇṇaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅgho dassito, tena yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghavasenapi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.8) taṃ yathārutavaseneva dīpitaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
146 「入网内」即处于网内,因被置于网中故,称为「被网所缚」。由堕恶趣故,是「向下沉没」;由处于成就之有的状态故,是「向上出离」。同样地,依小地与广大地、依退缩与奔驰、依前际见与后际见,当依次配合向下沉没与向上出离来理解。所谓「一万世界」,是就众生的诞生之处而说的。显示巴利原文
146. Anto jālassāti antojālaṃ, antojāle katāti antojālīkatā. Apāyūpapattivasena adho osīdanaṃ, sampattibhavavasena uddhaṃ uggamanaṃ. Tathā parittabhūmimahaggatabhūmivasena, olīnatā’tidhāvanavasena, pubbantānudiṭṭhiaparantānudiṭṭhivasena ca yathākkamaṃ adho osīdanaṃ uddhaṃ uggamanaṃ yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Dasasahassilokadhātū’’ti jātikhettaṃ sandhāyāha.
147 「非施设的状态」是指现行施设成为非施设的状态。然而,由于过去的状态,那样的施设在教法隐没之前都成立,乃至此后在其他佛陀出世时也依然成立。正如接下来将要说到的:「将仅仅成为假名而已」(《长部注》1.147)。「身」指有身,即色法与非色法的集合。唯有如此理解,有身与芒果树的相似,以及其支分——色蕴、眼等与芒果果实的相似,才称得上合理。此处,如同截断果蒂时,依附于果蒂的芒果果实便与芒果树分离一般,在截断有轮时,依附于有轮的色蕴等便与相续分离,应仅以此譬喻来理解。显示巴利原文
147.Apaṇṇattikabhāvanti dharamānakapaṇṇattiyā apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ. Atītabhāvena pana tathā paṇṇatti yāva sāsanantaradhānā, tato uddhampi aññabuddhuppādesu vattati eva. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘vohāramattameva bhavissatī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.147). Kāyoti attabhāvo, yo rūpārūpadhammasamūho. Evaṃ hissa ambarukkhasadisatā, tadavayavānañca rūpakkhandhacakkhādīnaṃ ambapakkasadisatā yujjatīti. Ettha ca vaṇṭacchede vaṇṭūpanibandhānaṃ ambapakkānaṃ ambarukkhato vicchedo viya bhavanettichede tadupanibandhānaṃ rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ santānato vicchedoti ettāvatā opammaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
148 「法门」是就经典而言。「此处的义」指现法利益。「他处的义」指后世利益。依此而战胜会战,故称「会战之胜者」。由于义理成就,故为「义网」。由于言辞成就,以及说明了戒等无过失法,故为「法网」。由于是最上义,并对属于梵的诸道果及涅槃作了分别,故为「梵网」。以辨析诸见为途径阐明空性,令正见显明,故为「见网」。因为是摧破外道言论的方法,故为「无上的会战之胜者」。于此,应知这是依这样的次第连接起来的。显示巴利原文
148.Dhammapariyāyeti pāḷiyaṃ. Idhatthoti diṭṭhadhammahitaṃ. Paratthoti samparāyahitaṃ. Saṅgāmaṃ vijināti etenāti saṅgāmavijayo. Atthasampattiyā atthajālaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā, sīlādianavajjadhammaniddesato ca dhammajālaṃ. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtānaṃ maggaphalanibbānānaṃ vibhattattā brahmajālaṃ. Diṭṭhivivecanamukhena suññatāpakāsanena sammādiṭṭhiyā vibhāvitattā diṭṭhijālaṃ. Titthiyavādanimmaddanūpāyattā anuttaro saṅgāmavijayoti evampettha yojanā veditabbā.
149 「心悦」指心为喜悦所摄。正因如此,他才说「由佛所生之……」等。然而,正如「不悦」者由于损害自身利益,而成为他人的不悦、怨敌的喜悦,名为「敌悦」——如「方向对方向」(《法句经》42;《优陀那》33)的偈颂所说——但「心悦」并非如此。这些人由于成就了自身的利益,是自心欢喜的,所以说「『心悦』即自心欢喜」。或者,「心悦」意为全然欢喜,即藉由这个开示,心念圆满具足之义。而「喜乐」有渴爱的含义,因此说「也通于渴爱」。由于字根有多义,「喜乐」也有亲近、承事的含义,因此说「也通于亲近」。同样,「喜乐」也有接受之意,因此说「也通于接受」。由「已喜乐」一词所表达的含义,乃是通过「已随喜」一词来阐明,因此他说「喜乐」一词此处即随喜之意,所以说「也通于随喜」。至于像「诸比丘,那是什么呢?」 (《长部》1.7) 这样在各个地方出现的、因想阐明而发问、并以回答形式展开的,这部经便成为「记说」。然而,尽管以问答形式展开、且带有偈颂的经被称为「祇夜」,但由于无偈颂才是其特点,无偈颂的才称为记说,因此说道:「因为无偈颂,所以……」显示巴利原文
149.Attamanāti pītiyā gahitacittā. Tenevāha ‘‘buddhagatāyā’’tiādi. Yathā pana anattamanā attano anatthacaratāya paramanā verimanā nāma honti. Yathāha ‘‘diso disa’’nti (dha. pa. 42; udā. 33) gāthā, na evaṃ attamanā. Ime pana attano atthacaratāya sakamanā hontīti āha ‘‘attamanāti sakamanā’’ti. Atha vā attamanāti samattamanā, imāya desanāya paripuṇṇamanasaṅkappāti attho. Abhinandatīti taṇhāyatīti atthoti āha ‘‘taṇhāyampi āgato’’ti. Anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ abhinandantīti upagacchanti sevantīti atthoti āha ‘‘upagamanepi āgato’’ti. Tathā abhinandantīti sampaṭicchantīti atthoti āha ‘‘sampaṭicchanepi āgato’’ti. ‘‘Abhinanditvā’’ti iminā padena vuttoyeva attho ‘‘anumoditvā’’ti iminā pakāsīyatīti abhinandanasaddo idha anumodanasaddatthoti āha ‘‘anumodanepi āgato’’ti. ‘‘Katamañca taṃ bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.7) tattha tattha pavattāya kathetukamyatāpucchāya vissajjanavasena pavattattā idaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ hoti. Yasmā pana pucchāvissajjanavasena pavattampi sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ nāma hoti, niggāthakattameva pana aṅganti gāthārahitaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘niggāthakattā hi idaṃ veyyākaraṇanti vutta’’nti.
「对其他……」中的「也」字,也包含了波罗蜜的修习。因为在《佛种姓经》中说:显示巴利原文
Aparesupīti ettha pisaddena pāramiparicayampi saṅgaṇhāti. Vuttañhi buddhavaṃse –
「他如是观照这些法——其自性、味与相;」
以法之力,此大地与万个世界一同震动。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ime dhamme sammasato, sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇe; Dhammatejena vasudhā, dasasahassī pakampathā’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.166);
「以精进之力」:指以大出家时舍弃转轮王荣华作为因的精进威力;以及在前往菩提树下时,如所说「宁可只剩皮、筋、骨,血肉干枯……」(《中部》2.184;《相应部》2.22;《大义释》196)那样具足四支的精进威力。「被稀有之速所冲击」:指被带来惊奇的所作威力所冲击。关于浣洗粪扫衣,有些人说是「以福德的威力」,但「被稀有之速所冲击」似更合理;在《韦桑答拉本生》中,由于圆满波罗蜜的福德威力,大地多次震动,故称「非时之震动」。为给予随喜赞叹而震动,正如转法轮时那样(《相应部》5.1081;《大品》13;《无碍解道》2.30)。在结集等场合,也当知是为给予随喜赞叹而震动。以上是此注疏书里对隐晦义的解释。显示巴利原文
Vīriyabalenāti mahābhinikkhamane cakkavattisiripariccāgahetubhūtavīriyappabhāvena, bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamane ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatū’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22; mahāni. 196) vuttacaturaṅgasamannāgatavīriyānubhāvena. Acchariyavegābhihatāti vimhayāvahakiriyānubhāvaghaṭṭitā . Paṃsukūladhovane keci ‘‘puññatejenā’’ti vadanti , acchariyavegābhihatāti yuttaṃ viya dissati, vessantarajātake pāramiparipūraṇapuññatejena anekakkhattuṃ kampitattā ‘‘akālakampanenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sādhukāradānavasena akampittha yathā taṃ dhammacakkappavattane (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30). Saṅgītikālādīsupi sādhukāradānavasena akampitthāti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ tāvettha aṭṭhakathāya līnatthavaṇṇanā.
「作品方法」释义显示巴利原文
Pakaraṇanayavaṇṇanā
然而,这是以论著方式对圣典意义所作的解释。因为当教法的起源、利益、当机者及总含义被确定之后,这种义解才易于进行、易于理解,所以我们首先来确定这部经的起源等。其中,先说的即是起源,即「说净与不净」。再者,在谴责与赞叹中,令应调伏者不生起嗔恨、欢喜等,并于彼处显示过患,这便是起源。同样,对于谴责与赞叹的修行次第,对于作为赞叹对象、依小中大等多种类别加以区分的戒,对于在常见等邪见立足处及其超越处皆无障碍运行的佛智,以及对于如来在某些处所不被含摄这件事的不理解,也都是起源。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ pana pakaraṇanayena pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanā – sā panāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā yasmā desanāya samuṭṭhānappayojanabhājanesu piṇḍatthesu ca niddhāritesu sukarā hoti suviññeyyā ca, tasmā suttadesanāya samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamaṃ niddhārayissāma. Tattha samuṭṭhānaṃ tāva vuttaṃ ‘‘vaṇṇāvaṇṇabhaṇana’’nti. Apica nindāpasaṃsāsu vineyyāghātānandādibhāvānāpatti, tattha ca ādīnavadassanaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā nindāpasaṃsāsu paṭipajjanakkamassa, pasaṃsāvisayassa khuddakādivasena anekavidhassa sīlassa, sabbaññutaññāṇassa sassatādidiṭṭhiṭṭhānesu tatuttari ca appaṭihatacāratāya, tathāgatassa ca katthaci apariyāpannatāya anavabodho samuṭṭhānaṃ.
应从与前述相反的角度来理解“利益”。也就是说,令应调伏者不生嗔恨与欢喜等,是此教说的最初利益。同样,破除伪装、花言巧语等种种邪命,解开六十二见之网,以诸见为首开显缘起,借由六触处阐明四圣谛业处,彻底灭尽一切恶见,以及阐明无取著般涅槃等,皆是此中利益。显示巴利原文
Vuttavipariyāyena payojanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vineyyāghātānandādibhāvāpatti ādikañhi imaṃ desanaṃ payojetīti. Tathā kuhanalapanādinānāvidhamicchājīvaviddhaṃsanaṃ, dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhijālaviniveṭhanaṃ, diṭṭhisīsena paccayākāravibhāvanaṃ, chaphassāyatanavasena catusaccakammaṭṭhānaniddeso, sabbadiṭṭhigatānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ, attano anupādāparinibbānadīpanañca payojanāni.
所谓“当机者”,是指那些内心随净与不净之相而起随喜、排斥者,那些沉迷于伪装等种种邪命者,那些陷溺于常见等邪见泥沼者,以及那些由于戒蕴等未圆满修持而不能彻悟殊胜功德智者。他们正是此教法的当机者。显示巴利原文
Vaṇṇāvaṇṇanimittaṃ anurodhavirodhavantacittā kuhanādivividhamicchājīvaniratā sassatādidiṭṭhipaṅkaṃ nimuggā, sīlakkhandhādīsu aparipūrakāritāya anavabuddhaguṇavisesañāṇā vineyyā imissā dhammadesanāya bhājanaṃ.
就总含义而言,由“不应作嗔恨等”一语,显示了:令修行者符合誓愿而致力于“沙门想”;勤行忍与柔和;专修梵住之修习;信与慧的结合;住于念与正知;成就思择修习之力;断除现起烦恼与随眠烦恼;修持自他二利行;不为世间八法所染。同样,由“远离杀生等”一语,显示了:由远离而令戒清净;由此具足惭与愧;具足慈与悲;断除违犯;以彼分断;断除恶行与染污;成就三种离;成就为他人爱敬、尊重、善待之品德;获得利养、恭敬、称誉;成为止观安住的基础;令不善根变薄弱;培植善根;远离自他两种不利;于大众中无所畏惧;住于不放逸;不遭他害;以及具足无悔等品德。显示巴利原文
Piṇḍatthā pana āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatāvacanena paṭiññānurūpaṃ samaṇasaññāya niyojanaṃ, khantisoraccānuṭṭhānaṃ, brahmavihārabhāvanānuyogo, saddhāpaññāsamāyogo, satisampajaññādhiṭṭhānaṃ, paṭisaṅkhānabhāvanābalasiddhi, pariyuṭṭhānānusayappahānaṃ, ubhayahitapaṭipatti, lokadhammehi anupalepo ca dassitā honti. Tathā pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanena sīlavisuddhi dassitā, tāya ca hirottappasampatti, mettākaruṇāsamaṅgitā , vītikkamappahānaṃ, tadaṅgapahānaṃ, duccaritasaṃkilesappahānaṃ, viratittayasiddhi, piyamanāpagarubhāvanīyatānipphatti, lābhasakkārasilokasamudāgamo, samathavipassanānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvo, akusalamūlatanukaraṇaṃ, kusalamūlaropanaṃ, ubhayānatthadūrīkaraṇaṃ, parisāsu visāradatā, appamādavihāro,parehi duppadhaṃsiyatā, avippaṭisārādisamaṅgitā ca dassitā honti.
以“甚深”等语,开显深法之阐扬、不可得之安立处、纵经无数劫亦难值遇出世、纵以微细智亦无法现证、纵以名“法随”之推理智亦难通达、一切躁扰止息之轻安、寂静法之敷演、结尾之善美、令人无厌足、成为精勤所缘、如实智所行境界、本质微细,以及大慧之展现。以显示诸见之文句,略明常见与断见,即:开示退缩与奔腾;宣说系著于方术;宣告邪执之确立;显示步入非道;令颠倒执取得以明了;执取谬执;安立关于前际、后际之邪见;区分有见与无见;爱、无明之流转;宣说边际与无际之见;导入二边;并分辨漏、流、轭、结、取等烦恼之差别。又,以“受之集”等语,显示了:成就对四圣谛之随觉与通达;以镇伏与正断断除烦恼;爱、无明之灭去;执取正法住立之相;成就教与证;行持自他二利;具足三种慧;勤修念与正知;信与慧相合;致力于正勤与止;以及成就止观。显示巴利原文
‘‘Gambhīrā’’tiādivacanehi gambhīradhammavibhāvanaṃ, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhatā, kappānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyenāpi dullabhapātubhāvatā, sukhumenapi ñāṇena paccakkhato paṭivijjhituṃ asakkuṇeyyatā, dhammanvayasaṅkhātena anumānañāṇenāpi duradhigamanīyatā, passaddhasabbadarathatā, santadhammavibhāvanaṃ, sobhanapariyosānatā, atittikarabhāvo, padhānabhāvappatti, yathābhūtañāṇagocaratā, sukhumasabhāvatā, mahāpaññāvibhāvanā ca dassitā honti. Diṭṭhidīpakapadehi samāsato sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyo pakāsitāti olīnatātidhāvanavibhāvanaṃ, upāyavinibaddhaniddeso, micchābhinivesakittanaṃ, kummaggapaṭipattiyā pakāsanā, vipariyesaggāhapaññāpanaṃ, parāmāsapariggaho, pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhipatiṭṭhāpanaṃ, bhavavibhavadiṭṭhivibhāgo, taṇhāvijjāpavatti, antavānantavādiṭṭhiniddeso, antadvayāvatāraṇaṃ, āsavoghayogakilesaganthasaṃyojanūpādānavisesavibhajjanañca dassitāni honti. Tathā ‘‘vedanānaṃ samudaya’’ntiādivacanehi catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ anubodhapaṭivedhasiddhi, vikkhambhanasamucchedappahānaṃ , taṇhāvijjāvigamo, saddhammaṭṭhitinimittapariggaho, āgamādhigamasampatti, ubhayahitapaṭipatti, tividhapaññāpariggaho, satisampajaññānuṭṭhānaṃ, saddhāpaññāsamāyogo, sammāvīriyasamathānuyojanaṃ, samathavipassanānipphatti ca dassitā honti.
以“不知者、不见者”确立无明,以“为爱所缠者、恐慌与悸动”确立贪爱。由此二语,亦确立二盖与二结,显示无始轮回流转之不断,显示执取前际并连接后际,显示依过去、现在时分分别其因,显示无明与贪爱以互不逾越之义而相互资助,并显示慧解脱与心解脱之对立面。以“而彼亦以触为缘”等语,因宣说执著常见等为缘之过患,故显示:遮遣诸法之常住性,确立无常性,于胜义中否定作者等,宣说如是法性等,揭示空性,以及阐明定法之缘的相状。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti avijjāsiddhi, ‘‘taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphanditanti taṇhāsiddhi, tadubhayena ca nīvaraṇasaṃyojanadvayasiddhi, anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭānucchedo, pubbantāharaṇaaparantapaṭisandhānāni, atītapaccuppannakālavasena hetuvibhāgo, avijjātaṇhānaṃ aññamaññānativattanaṭṭhena aññamaññūpakāritā, paññāvimutticetovimuttīnaṃ paṭipakkhaniddeso ca dassitā honti. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti sassatādipaññāpanassa paccayādhīnavuttitākathanena dhammānaṃ niccatāpaṭisedho, aniccatāpatiṭṭhāpanaṃ, paramatthato kārakādipaṭikkhepo, evaṃdhammatādiniddeso, suññatāpakāsanaṃ, samattaniyāmapaccayalakkhaṇavibhāvanañca dassitāni honti.
以“已断有之连结者”等语,显示世尊之断德成就、明与胜解、自在而住、三学圆满、二种涅槃界之分别、四依处之圆满,以及不为有、生趣等所摄。而于全经文句中,则显示世尊于可爱与不可爱境中为“泰然不变者”,亦令他人安住于此;宣说作为一切善法根本之二法;教授三学;成就自苦行等四种人;分别黑黑报等四业;宣说四梵住之境界;如实通达集等五法;阐明六和敬法;确立十种能作庇护者之法——如是等总义,应当确定。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko’’tiādinā bhagavato pahānasampatti, vijjādhimutti, vasībhāvo, sikkhattayanipphatti, nibbānadhātudvayavibhāgo, caturadhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, bhavayoniādīsu apariyāpannatā ca dassitā honti. Sakalena pana suttapadena iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu bhagavato tādibhāvo, tattha ca paresaṃ patiṭṭhāpanaṃ, kusaladhammānaṃ ādibhūtadhammadvayassa niddeso, sikkhattayūpadeso, attantapādipuggalacatukkasiddhi, kaṇhākaṇhavipākādikammacatukkavibhāgo, caturappamaññāvisayaniddeso, samudayādipañcakassa yathābhūtāvabodho, chasāraṇīyadhammavibhāvanā , dasanāthakaradhammapatiṭṭhāpanti evamādayo niddhāretabbā.
十六纲释义显示巴利原文
Soḷasahāravaṇṇanā
「教示之引导」的释义:在这里面,关于“我”和“世间”的邪见,由于它是这些邪见的立足处,以及通过感受、触、处等门径所执取的五取蕴中,除了爱之外的「五取蕴」就是苦谛。「爱」是集谛。不过,在经文里,爱正是通过“恐慌”这一执取方式,用“为爱所缠者”这样的词句,以及通过“缘于受而有爱”这种对集的直接执取,还有通过对“有之管道”的执取而直接被把握的。这只是经教的方法。在阿毗达摩教法中,则通过像厌恶、悦乐这样的词语,热忱等的词句,败坏其心的话语,显示一切邪见的词句,对善与不善的执取,对有的执取,对忧愁等的执取,以及在各处对集的执取——简而言之,通过阐明一切世间善、不善法的词句,所执取的业与烦恼就是集谛。这二者的不转起就是灭谛。要知道,对于这个「灭谛」,在经文中是通过各处用感受的“灭尽”、“出离”等同义词,通过“自证寂灭”这个词,以及通过“无取解脱”这个词来把握的。了知灭的道路就是道谛。对于这一点,也要知道在经文中是通过各处“对感受的集等如实感受”的指示,通过“对六触处的集等如实了知”的解说方式,以及通过“有之管道的断除”的解说方式来把握的。这其中,以集来阐明乐味,以苦来阐明过患,以道与灭来阐明出离——要知道,应该这样依照四谛的道理,以及依照经文中以其自身形态出现的乐味、过患、出离,来理解这里的乐味等。针对不同的受教化者有各自的起点等不同情况,以及堕罪等情形,如前所述区分开来的,正是目标(即结果)。对于不应起厌恶等不善法这件事的性质,厌恶等不善法的果报不会延续到其他相续生命流的特性,以及在面对诋毁与赞誉时,如实地承认并加以辩解的这些事情——像这样,为了证得种种特定目标的方便手段就是方法。借着不应起厌恶等不善法的遮止等作为理由,要知道这是法王的命令——这就是教示之引导。显示巴利原文
Desanāhāravaṇṇanā
在此,所谓“我”与“世间”的邪见,作为见的立足处,并通过受、触、处等门径而被执取的五取蕴中,除了爱,此五取蕴即是苦谛。爱即是集谛。然而,此爱在经中,即是通过“恐慌”的执取,以“为爱所缠者”之语来表示;通过“缘受有爱”而对集的自相执取,以及通过对“有之管道”的执取而直接把握。此仅是经教的方法。若依阿毗达摩的方法,则是通过厌恶、悦乐等语,热忱等句,败坏其心之言,显示一切邪见之句,以及对善与不善的执取、对有之取、对忧愁等的执取,并在各处对集的执取——简言之,即通过阐明一切世间善、不善法的词句,所执取的业与烦恼,即是集谛。此二者的不转起,即是灭谛。对于此灭谛,当知在经中是通过各处感受的灭尽、出离等同义词,通过各别涅槃之语,以及通过“无取解脱”之语来把握。了知灭的道路,即是道谛。对于此道谛,亦当知在经中是通过各处“对受的集等如实了知”之教示,通过“对六触处的集等如实了知”之表述,以及通过“断除有之管道”的表述方式来分门把握。于其中,显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca diṭṭhiyā adhiṭṭhānabhāvena, vedanāphassāyatanādimukhena ca gahitesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu taṇhāvajjā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ. Taṇhā samudayasaccaṃ. Sā pana paritassanāggahaṇena ‘‘taṇhāgatāna’’nti, ‘‘vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ti ca sarūpeneva samudayaggahaṇena, bhavanettiggahaṇena ca pāḷiyaṃ gahitāva. Ayaṃ tāva suttantanayo. Abhidhammanayena pana āghātānandādivacanehi, ātappādipadehi, cittappadosavacanena, sabbadiṭṭhidīpakapadehi, kusalākusalaggahaṇena, bhavaggahaṇena, sokādiggahaṇena, tattha tattha samudayaggahaṇena cāti saṅkhepato sabbalokiyakusalākusaladhammavibhāvanapadehi gahitā kammakilesā samudayasaccaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ. Tassa tattha tattha vedanānaṃ atthaṅgamanissaraṇapariyāyehi, paccattaṃ nibbutivacanena, anupādāvimuttivacanena ca pāḷiyaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nirodhapajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccaṃ. Tassāpi tattha tattha vedanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtavedanāpadesena, channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtapajānanapariyāyena, bhavanettiyā ucchedapariyāyena ca gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇanti evaṃ catusaccavasena, yāni pāḷiyaṃ (netti. 9) sarūpeneva āgatāni assādādīnavanissaraṇāni, tesañca vasena idha assādādayo veditabbā. Vineyyānantādibhāvāpattiādikaṃ yathāvuttavibhāgaṃ payojanameva phalaṃ. Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatā, āghātādiphalassa ca anaññasantānabhāvitā, nindāpasaṃsāsu yathāsabhāvapaṭijānananibbeṭhanāti evaṃ taṃtaṃpayojanādhigamahetu upāyo. Āghātādīnaṃ karaṇapaṭisedhanādiapadesena dhammarājassa āṇatti veditabbāti ayaṃ desanāhāro.
「抉择之引导」的释义:虽然实际上并没有真实的建立,但为了方便言说和以指责的方式,使用了“我的”一词;由于没有固定性,为了进行分别,使用了“或”一词;因为具足功德并且要使他们转向法,所以称呼“诸比丘”。因为是与自己不同的状态,以及是敌对的状态,所以使用了“他人”一词;因为是功德的对立面且不应称赞,所以使用了“毁谤”一词。由于有明确说出和详细说明的含义,使用了“会说”一词;因为是承载佛法的状态,并且与非法相对立,所以用了“对法”一词;由于是依靠正见与戒行和合而存在的状态,以及能集合烦恼的缘故,用了“对僧团”一词。为了指示前面提到的内容,以及为了提出言辞,使用了“于此”一词;因为是面对面和众多人在一起的状态,使用了“由你们”一词。因为它会损害心,以及会撞击所缘,所以用了「厌恶」一词;因为对所缘内心退缩,以及表现出不高兴的样子,所以用了「不悦」一词;因为它能思维所缘,以及作为依托,所以用了「心的」一词;因为它完成利益,并且“一次又一次地完成无利益”,所以用了「不欣喜」一词;因为它不应成为原因,以及是安住在导师教法中的人所不能做的,所以说了「不应做」——应该用这样的方法,对一切词句作出抉择。像这样,通过逐词探究、名为“抉择”的这个引导,我们因为极度担心内容过于详细,所以没有详细展开;有智慧的人可以参考本义注及其对隐含意义的解释,自己明了这个义理。显示巴利原文
Vicayahāravaṇṇanā
虽无实质性的设定,亦依世间言说与随说而说“我的”;由于没有决定性,为显简别而说“取”。因其具足功德,为使之现前面向,故称“比丘们”。由于是异己之体、处于对立面,故说“他人”;因其为称赞之反面、不应称扬,故说“非称赞”。由于是明了通达的状态、广为宣说的状态,故说“能言”;由于是持守的状态、与非法对立,故说“如法”;由于以见与戒和合的状态、令烦恼和合,故说“僧团”。此为前述的指示、言辞的安立,故说“于此”;此为当前的状态、众多的状态,故说“汝等”。因损害心、撞击所缘,故说“嗔”;因对所缘的萎缩作用、不满足的状态,故说“不悦”;因思虑所缘、为其所依,故说“心所”;因成就利益、随顺“成就无利益”之说,故说“不欢喜”;因不应成为造作之因、非住于导师教法中的安住者所应为,故说“不应为”。依此方法,应对一切语句作决断。如是,从逐句审察的角度而言,审察之展开,唯恐过于繁细,且智者能随顺注释书及其隐晦义之解释而通达此义,故我等不广泛展开。显示巴利原文
Kappanābhāvepi vohāravasena, anuvādavasena ca ‘‘mama’’nti vuttaṃ, niyamābhāvato vikappanatthaṃ vāggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, guṇasamaṅgitāya, abhimukhīkaraṇāya ca ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti āmantanaṃ. Aññabhāvato, paṭiviruddhabhāvato ca ‘‘pare’’ti vuttaṃ, vaṇṇapaṭipakkhato, avaṇṇanīyato ca ‘‘avaṇṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Byattivasena, vitthāravasena ca ‘‘bhāseyyu’’nti vuttaṃ, dhāraṇabhāvato, adhammapaṭipakkhato ca ‘‘dhammassā’’ti vuttaṃ, diṭṭhisīlehi saṃhatabhāvato, kilesānaṃ saṅghātakaraṇato ca ‘‘saṅghassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttapaṭiniddesato, vacanupanyāsanato ca ‘‘tatrā’’ti vuttaṃ, sammukhabhāvato, puthubhāvato ca ‘‘tumhehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Cittassa hananato, ārammaṇābhighātato ca ‘‘āghāto’’ti vuttaṃ, ārammaṇe saṅkocavuttiyā, atuṭṭhākāratāya ca ‘‘appaccayo’’ti vuttaṃ, ārammaṇacintanato, nissayato ca ‘‘cetaso’’ti vuttaṃ, atthāsādhanato, anu anu ‘‘anatthasādhanato’’ ca ‘‘anabhiraddhī’’ti vuttaṃ, kāraṇānarahattā, satthusāsane ṭhitehi kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā ca ‘‘na karaṇīyā’’ti vuttanti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu vinicchayo kātabbo. Iti anupadavicayato vicayo hāro ativitthārabhayena, sakkā ca aṭṭhakathaṃ tassā līnatthavaṇṇanañca anugantvā ayamattho viññunā vibhāvetunti na vitthārayimha.
应被毁谤的对象以及与毁谤相应的那些过失,如不可信受的语言等种种缺失,是毁谤的立足处。应被称赞的对象以及与称赞相应的那些成就,如值得信受的语言等种种圆满,是称赞的立足处。同样地,厌恶等是地狱等苦的立足处。不做厌恶等,是生天及一切成就的立足处。远离杀生等恶行,是圣戒蕴的立足处。圣戒蕴是圣定蕴的立足处。圣定蕴是圣慧蕴的立足处。世尊与甚深等殊胜功德相应的证悟类别之智,是教说之智的立足处。教说之智是所教化的众生从整个轮回之苦中出离的立足处。一切邪见即是见取,它如其所应地,是九种有的立足处。有是生的立足处,生是老死及忧愁等的立足处。如实知见感受的集等,即是对四圣谛的随觉与证悟。这其中,随觉是证悟的立足处,证悟是四种沙门果的立足处。在“不知者、不见者”这句话中执取了无明,在这里,无明是诸行的立足处,应当照这样推导下去,乃至受是爱的立足处。在“为爱所缠者的恐惧与挣扎”这句话中,爱是取的立足处。在“那也以触为缘”这句话中,安立常见等观点的做法,是他人邪执的立足处;邪执则由于背离了听闻正法、亲近善士、如理作意及法随法行,而成为听闻罪等不善法的立足处。在“除了触……”等说法中,触是受的立足处;六触处是触的立足处,也是整个轮回之苦的立足处。如实了知六触处的集等,是厌离的立足处;厌离是离贪的立足处;应该照这样推导下去,一直到无取著般涅槃。世尊断除了有之管道,这是一切知性的立足处,也是无余般涅槃的立足处——这就是立足处之引导。显示巴利原文
Yuttihāravaṇṇanā
于一切时、于一切处,不作厌恶等,能成就如如不动之状态,这是合理的,因为在可喜与不可喜的境界中,有能平等安住之性。在某一相续中,若生起厌恶等,则以此为因的障碍,必能阻碍此人自身成就的获得,这是合理的。何以故?因其不能转移至其他相续故。压倒其心而生起的厌恶等,能令人对善说等也无法辨别,这是合理的,因为具瞋恚与贪欲者,有如同黑暗般的盲目存在。远离杀生等恶戒,能成就一切有情欢喜与值得称赞的状态,这是合理的,因为由戒的圆满,广大称誉之声得以高高扬起。对具足甚深等殊胜功德的如来之称赞,即便是部分的赞颂,也能导向对其不共之一切知等所有功德的把握,这是合理的。不恰当地以不如理作意所滋养的“获得之因”等论说,能令人陷入常见等固执的倾向,这是合理的,因为虚妄分别之网未被根除。由于不觉悟于受的过患,对受的爱得以增长,这是合理的,因为随观乐味故;当对感受有贪染时,于其中辗转生起的我所执与常见等执著,这也是合理的,因为其因近在眼前。缘爱而有取,对于那些安立常见等论的人,或正显示巴利原文
Sabbena sabbaṃ āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ tādibhāvāya saṃvattatīti yujjati iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu samappavattisabbhāvato. Yasmiṃ santāne āghātādayo uppannā, tannimittako antarāyo tasseva sampattivibandhāya saṃvattatīti yujjati. Kasmā? Santānantaresu asaṅkamanato. Cittaṃ abhibhavitvā uppannā āghātādayo subhāsitādisallakkhaṇepi asamatthatāya saṃvattantīti yujjati sakodhalobhānaṃ andhatamasabbhāvato. Pāṇātipātādidussīlyato veramaṇi sabbasattānaṃ pāmojjapāsaṃsabhāvāya saṃvattatīti yujjati. Sīlasampattiyā hi mahato kittisaddassa abbhuggamo hotīti. Gambhīratādivisesayuttena guṇena tathāgatassa vaṇṇanā ekadesabhūtāpi sakalasabbaññuguṇaggahaṇāya saṃvattatīti yujjati anaññasādhāraṇattā. Tajjāayonisomanasikāraparikkhatāni adhigamatakkanāni sassatavādādiabhinivesāya saṃvattantīti yujjati kappanājālassa asamugghāṭitattā. Vedanādīnavānavabodhena vedanāya taṇhā pavaḍḍhatīti yujjati assādānupassanāsabbhāvato. Sati ca vedayitarāge tattha attattaniyagāho, sassatādigāho ca vipariphandatīti yujjati kāraṇassa sannihitattā. Taṇhāpaccayā hi upādānaṃ sassatādivāde paññapentānaṃ , tadanucchavikaṃ vā vedanaṃ vedayantānaṃ phasso hetūti yujjati visayindriyaviññāṇasaṅgatiyā vinā tadabhāvato. Chaphassāyatananimittavaṭṭassa anupacchedoti yujjati tattha avijjātaṇhānaṃ appahīnattā. Channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādipajānanā sabbadiṭṭhigatikasaññaṃ aticca tiṭṭhatīti yujjati catusaccapaṭivedhabhāvato. Imāheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīhi sabbadiṭṭhigatānaṃ antojālīkatabhāvoti yujjati akiriyavādādīnaṃ issaravādādīnañca tadantogadhattā. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Ucchinnabhavanettiko tathāgatassa kāyoti yujjati, yasmā bhagavā abhinīhārasampattiyā catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu patiṭṭhitacitto sattabojjhaṅgeyeva yathābhūtaṃ bhāvesi. Kāyassa bhedā parinibbutaṃ na dakkhantīti yujjati anupādisesanibbānappattiyaṃ rūpādīsu kassacipi anavasesatoti ayaṃ yuttihāro.
近因处之引导的释义显示巴利原文
Padaṭṭhānahāravaṇṇanā
对于应受呵责者加以呵责,以及与呵责相应的过失——如言语不可信受等缺失,是呵责的所依。对于应受称赞者加以称赞,以及与称赞相应的成就——如言语值得信受等圆满,是称赞的所依。同样地,瞋恨等是地狱等苦的所依。不造作瞋恨等,是生天成就等一切成就的所依。远离杀生等,是圣戒蕴的所依。圣戒蕴是圣定蕴的所依。圣定蕴是圣慧蕴的所依。世尊与甚深等殊胜功德相应的证得方式之智,是教说之智的所依。教说之智是所化众生从整个轮回之苦中出离的所依。一切邪见都是见取,它如其所应地,也是九种有的所依。有是生的所依,生是老死以及忧愁等的所依。对受的集等如实了知,是对四圣谛的随觉与证悟。这其中,随觉是证悟的所依,证悟是四种沙门果的所依。在‘不知者、不见者’这句话中,执取了无明,在此处,无明是诸行的所依,应当照此推导,乃至受是爱的所依。在‘为爱所缠者的恐惧与挣扎’这句话中,爱是取的所依。在‘那也以触为缘’这句话中,所安立的常见等观点,是他人邪执的所依;邪执是背离听闻正法、亲近善士、如理作意及法随法行等的所依,也是听闻不正法等的所依。在‘除了触……’等说法中。显示巴利原文
Avaṇṇārahaavaṇṇānurūpasampattānādeyyavacanatādivipattīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vaṇṇārahavaṇṇānurūsampattasaddheyyavacanatādisampattīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā āghātādayo nirayādidukkhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ saggasampattiādisabbasampattīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirati ariyassa sīlakkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Ariyo sīlakkhandho ariyassa samādhikkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Ariyo samādhikkhandho ariyassa paññākkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Gambhīratādivisesayuttaṃ bhagavato paṭivedhappakārañāṇaṃ desanāñāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Desanāñāṇaṃ vineyyānaṃ sakalavaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbāpi diṭṭhi diṭṭhupādānti sā yathārahaṃ navavidhassāpi bhavassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Bhavo jātiyā, jāti jarāmaraṇassa, sokādīnañca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vedanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtavedanaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ anubodhapaṭivedho. Tattha anubodho paṭivedhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, paṭivedho catubbidhassa sāmaññaphalassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti avijjāgahaṇaṃ, tattha avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ padaṭṭhānti yāva vedanā taṇhāya padaṭṭhānti netabbaṃ. ‘‘Taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti ettha taṇhā upādānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ettha sassatādipaññāpanaṃ paresaṃ micchābhinivesassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, micchābhiniveso saddhammassavanasappurisūpassayayonisomanasikāradhammānudhammapaṭipattīhi vimukhatāya, asaddhammassavanādīnañca padaṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘aññatra phassā’’tiādīsu phasso vedanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, cha phassāyatanāni phassassa, sakalavaṭṭadukkhassa ca padaṭṭhānaṃ, channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtappajānanaṃ nibbidāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, nibbidā virāgassāti yāva anupādāparinibbānaṃ netabbaṃ. Bhagavato bhavanettisamucchedo sabbaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā anupādāparinibbānassāti ayaṃ padaṭṭhānahāro.
「相处」的解释显示巴利原文
Lakkhaṇahāravaṇṇanā
以‘瞋恨’等词,涵盖了忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、诤、轻蔑等,因为它们都包含在瞋心生起之中,所以具有同一相。以‘喜悦’等词,涵盖了贪欲、不平等贪、慢、过慢、骄、放逸等,因为它们都包含在贪心生起之中,所以具有同一相。同样,以瞋恨一词,涵盖了其余的系缚与障碍,因为它们与身系、障碍具有共同的相,所以同一相。以喜悦一词,涵盖了触等,因为它们与行蕴具有共同的相,所以同一相。以‘戒’一词,涵盖了增上心学与增上慧学,因为它们与学具有共同的相,所以同一相。然而在此处,戒应理解为根律仪等。以‘见’一词,涵盖了其余的取,因为它们与取具有共同的相,所以同一相。在‘受’这句中,以受一词,涵盖了其余的取蕴,因为它们与蕴具有共同的相,所以同一相。同样,由于受属于法处与法界,因此,对于那些可被观察的一切处与界,也因与处、界的相相同,而被涵盖于同一相中。在‘不知、不见’这句中,以‘无明’一词,涵盖了因、漏、暴流、轭、障碍等,因为无明与因等具有共同的相,所以同一相;同样,在‘为爱所缠者的恐惧与挣扎’这句中,以‘爱’。显示巴利原文
Āghātādiggahaṇena kodhupanāhamakkhapalāsaissāmacchariyasārambhaparavambhanādīnaṃ saṅgaho paṭighacittuppādapariyāpannatāya ekalakkhaṇattā. Ānandādiggahaṇena abhijjhāvisamalobhamānātimānamadappamādādīnaṃ saṅgaho lobhacittuppādapariyāpannatāya samānalakkhaṇattā. Tathā āghātaggahaṇena avasiṭṭhaganthanīvaraṇānaṃ saṅgaho kāyaganthanīvaraṇalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Ānandaggahaṇena phassādīnaṃ saṅgaho saṅkhārakkhandhalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Sīlaggahaṇena adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhānampi saṅgaho sikkhālakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Idha pana sīlasseva indriyasaṃvarādikassa daṭṭhabbaṃ. Diṭṭhiggahaṇena avasiṭṭhaupādānānampi saṅgaho upādānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Vedanāna’’nti ettha vedanāggahaṇena avasiṭṭhaupādānakkhandhānampi saṅgaho khandhalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā vedanāya dhammāyatanadhammadhātupariyāpannattā sammasanūpagānaṃ sabbesaṃ āyatanānaṃ dhātūnañca saṅgaho āyatanalakkhaṇena, dhātulakkhaṇena ca ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti ettha avijjāggahaṇena hetuāsavoghayoganīvaraṇādisaṅgaho hetādilakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā avijjāya, tathā ‘‘taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti ettha taṇhāggahaṇenāpi. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ettha phassaggahaṇena saññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇānaṃ saṅgaho vipallāsahetubhāvena, khandhalakkhaṇena ca ekalakkhaṇattā. Chaphassāyatanaggahaṇena khandhindriyadhātādīnaṃ saṅgaho phassuppattinimittatāya, sammasanasabhāvena ca ekalakkhaṇattā. Bhavanettiggahaṇena avijjādīnampi saṃkilesadhammānaṃ saṅgaho vaṭṭahetubhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti ayaṃ lakkhaṇahāro.
「四阵列」的解释显示巴利原文
Catubyūhahāravaṇṇanā
那些被毁誉所动摇、心念不正、以邪命过活、不厌离、固执于常见等恶见、在戒等法蕴中不得安住、背离了正自觉者功德之味的有情,是此段开示的因缘。世尊在此处的用意是:‘他们如何能远离上述过失,透过正确的行道而成就自他两利呢?’所谓‘词源’,是指对词语的解释。关于‘eva’等缘起词,以及‘mama’等经文中的词语,依据注疏便容易理解,由于担心过于冗长,我们未加展开。连接有六种:词连接、词义连接、阐明连接、经连接、开示连接。其中,词与词之间的关联,是‘词连接’。同样,词义与词义之间的关联,是‘词义连接’。对于不同接续的经文,那些各各接续之间的关联,以及同一接续中前后分之间的关联,是‘阐明连接’。它在注疏中以问的连接、意趣的连接、如义的连接三种而被区分,但这三种连接其实在注疏中都已经被审察过了。而‘经连接’,我们最初已以安立的方式在前面指出。一种开示与另一种开示相契合,便是‘开示连接’。应当如此了知:‘比丘们,不论他人称赞我……不应心生不喜’这一开示,与‘比丘们,即使盗贼、恶人用双柄的锯子把肢节割断,那时若有人心生嗔恚,他。显示巴利原文
Nindāpasaṃsāhi sammākampitacetasā micchājīvato anoratā sassatādimicchābhinivesino sīlādidhammakkhandhesu appatiṭṭhitatāya sammāsambuddhaguṇarasassādavimukhā veneyyā imissā desanāya nidānaṃ. Te yathāvuttadosavinimuttā kathaṃ nu kho sammāpaṭipattiyā ubhayahitaparā bhaveyyunti ayamettha bhagavato adhippāyo. Padanibbacanaṃ nirutti. Taṃ ‘‘eva’’ntiādinidānapadānaṃ, ‘‘mama’’ntiādipāḷipadānañca aṭṭhakathāvasena suviññeyyattā ativitthārabhayena na vitthārayimha. Padapadatthaniddesanikkhepasuttadesanāsandhivasena chabbidhā sandhi. Tattha padassa padantarena sambandho padasandhi. Tathā padatthassa padatthantarena sambandho padatthasandhi. Nānānusandhikassa suttassa taṃtaṃanusandhīhi sambandho, ekānusandhikassa ca pubbāparasambandho niddesasandhi, yā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pucchānusandhiajjhāsayānusandhiyathānusandhivasena tividhā vibhattā, tā panetā tissopi sandhiyo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vicāritā eva. Suttasandhi ca paṭhamaṃ nikkhepavasena amhehi pubbe dassitāyeva. Ekissā desanāya desanāntarena saddhiṃ saṃsandanaṃ desanāsandhi, sā evaṃ veditabbā – ‘‘mamaṃ vā bhikkhave…pe… na cetaso anabhiraddhi karaṇīyā’’ti ayaṃ desanā ‘‘ubhatodaṇḍakena cepi bhikkhave kakacena corā ocarakā aṅgamaṅgāni okkanteyyuṃ, tatrapi yo mano padūseyya, na me so tena sāsanakaro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.232) imāya desanāya saddhiṃ saṃsandati. ‘‘Tumhaṃ yevassa tena antarāyo’’ti ‘‘kammassakā māṇava sattā…pe… dāyādā bhavissantī’’ti (a. ni. 10.216) imāya desanāya saṃsandati. ‘‘Api tumhe…pe… ājāneyyāthā’’ti ‘‘kuddho atthaṃ…pe… sahate nara’’nti (a. ni. 7.64; mahāni. 5, 156, 195) imāya desanāya saṃsandati.
“比丘们,若他人称赞我……不应心生得意”,这一开示与“比丘们,你们当舍离法,何况非法”“比丘们,我将为你们说筏喻法,为渡越故,非为执取故”(中部1.240)这些开示相契合。“若你们……生起得意,那恰会成为你们自己的障碍”与“贪婪者……能行忍辱者”(如是语88;大义5.156,195;小义128)、“被欲所盲、被网所罩、为渴爱之衣所覆”(优陀那64;导论27,90;无碍解道14)这些开示相契合。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave pare vaṇṇaṃ…pe… na cetaso ubbillāvitattaṃ karaṇīya’’nti ‘‘dhammāpi vo bhikkhave pahātabbā, pageva adhammā (ma. ni. 1.240). Kullūpamaṃ vo bhikkhave dhammaṃ desessāmi, nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.240) imāya desanāya saṃsandati. ‘‘Tatra ce tumhehi…pe… ubbilāvitā, tumhaṃ yevassa tena antarāyo’’ti ‘‘luddhoatthaṃ…pe… sahate nara’’nti (itivu. 88; mahāni. 5.156, 195; cūḷani. 128) ‘‘kāmandhā jālasañchannā, taṇhāchadanachāditā’’ti (udā. 64; netti. 27, 90; peṭako. 14) imāhi desanāhi saṃsandati.
所谓“微细……仅是戒而已”,与“他进入并安住于初禅。婆罗门,此祭祀较前诸祭祀更少烦扰、更少劳费,而果报更大、利益更殊胜”等开示(《长部》1.353)相契合。由说初禅较戒具有更大的果报与利益,显示出从禅那的角度来看,戒的功德是微细的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Appamattakaṃ…pe… sīlamattaka’’nti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṃ kho brāhmaṇa yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṃsataro cā’’tiādikāya (dī. ni. 1.353) desanāya saṃsandati, paṭhamajjhānassa sīlato mahapphalamahānisaṃsatarabhāvavacanena jhānato sīlassa appabhāvadīpanato.
“舍离杀生”等开示,与“沙门乔达摩具戒……具足善戒”等开示(《长部》1.304)相契合。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādi ‘‘samaṇo khalu bho gotamo sīlavā…pe… kusalasīlena samannāgato’’tiādikāhi (dī. ni. 1.304) desanāhi saṃsandati.
“有些法是甚深的”(Aññeva dhammā gambhīrā)等语,与“我所证得的此法甚深”等经文(《长部》2.67;《中部》1.281、2.337;《相应部》1.172;《大品》7,8)相契合。因为由证悟具有甚深等殊胜的法,便能了知智的甚深等性质。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aññeva dhammā gambhīrā’’tiādi ‘‘adhigato kho myāyaṃ dhammo gambhīro’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.67; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 7, 8) pāḷiyā saṃsandati. Gambhīratādivisesayuttadhammapaṭivedhena hi ñāṇassa gambhīrādibhāvo viññāyatīti.
“比丘们,有一些沙门婆罗门”(Santi bhikkhave eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā)等语,与“比丘们,有一些沙门婆罗门是前际论者……他们宣称:‘我与世间是常,唯此为真,余皆虚妄。’有些宣称无常,有些宣称亦常亦无常,有些宣称非常非无常,有些宣称有边,有些宣称无边,有些宣称亦有边亦无边,有些宣称非有边非无边——他们皆言:‘我与世间是真实的,余皆是虚妄。’”等经文(《中部》3.27)相契合。显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi bhikkhave eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’tiādi ‘‘santi bhikkhave eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā…pe… abhivadanti, sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ, moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadanti, asassato, sassato ca asassato ca, neva sassato ca nāsassato ca, antavā, anantavā, antavā ca anantavā ca, nevantavā nānantavā ca attā ca loko ca idameva saccaṃ, moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādikāhi (ma. ni. 3.27) desanāhi saṃsandati.
“比丘们,有一些沙门婆罗门是后际论者”等语,与“比丘们,有一些沙门婆罗门是后际论者……宣称:‘我死后有想而无病。’有些宣称无想,有些宣称非有想非无想。有些宣说有情的断灭、坏灭、不存在。有些宣称现法涅槃”等经文(《中部》3.21)相契合。“对诸受……如来”等语,则与“此有为法是粗劣的,然而确实有诸行的灭;如来知有此,成为见其出离者,从而超越它”等经文(《中部》3.28)相契合。显示巴利原文
‘‘Santi bhikkhave eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā’’tiādi ‘‘santi bhikkhave eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā…pe… abhivadanti, saññī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā. Ittheke abhivadanti asaññī, nevasaññīnāsaññī ca attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā. Ittheke abhivadanti sato vā pana sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapenti, diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ vā paneke abhivadantī’’tiādikāhi (ma. ni. 3.21) desanāhi saṃsandati. ‘‘Vedanānaṃ…pe… tathāgato’’ti ‘‘tayidaṃ saṅkhataṃ oḷārikaṃ, atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodho, atthetanti iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto’’tiādikāhi (ma. ni. 3.28) desanāhi saṃsandati.
“那对他们也只是徒劳的挣扎而已”这段经文,与如下开示相契合:“那些尊者们,离开了欲、离开了喜好、离开了传闻、离开了对形相的思惟考量、离开了对见解的审察和随顺,就能生起自内清净、光洁的智——这是不可能的。比丘们,如果自内清净、光洁的智尚且不存,那么那些沙门婆罗门尊者即便将部分之智净化,也只能说那是他们的执取。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Tadapi tesaṃ…pe… vipphanditamevā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ bhavataṃ aññatreva chandāya aññatra ruciyā aññatra anussavā aññatra ākāraparivitakkā aññatra diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyā paccattaṃyeva ñāṇaṃ bhavissati parisuddhaṃ pariyodātanti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Paccattaṃ kho pana bhikkhave ñāṇe asati parisuddhe pariyodāte yadapi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā tattha ñāṇabhāgamattameva pariyodāpenti, tadapi tesaṃ bhavataṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ upādānamakkhāyatī’’tiādikāhi (ma. ni. 3.29) desanāhi saṃsandati.
“那也是以触为缘”这段经文,与“缘于眼和色而生起眼识,这三者的和合就是触;以触为缘而有受;以受为缘而有爱;以爱为缘而有取”,以及“贤友,这些法以欲为根,以作意为起源,以触为和合,以受为会归”等开示相契合。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti idañca ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādāna’’nti, (saṃ. ni. 2.44) ‘‘chandamūlakā ime āvuso dhammā manasikārasamuṭṭhānā phassasamodhānā vedanāsamosaraṇā’’ti (a. ni. 8.83) ca ādikāhi desanāhi saṃsandati.
“比丘们,当比丘从六触处”这段经文,与如下开示相契合:“阿难,当比丘既不把受看作是我,也不把想、行、识看作是我;他如此不执取时,便不执取世间任何事物;不执取便没有恐惧;没有恐惧,他便自己般涅槃。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yato kho bhikkhave bhikkhu channaṃ phassāyatanāna’’ntiādi ‘‘yato kho ānanda bhikkhu neva vedanaṃ attānaṃ samanupassati, na saññaṃ, na saṅkhāre, na viññāṇaṃ attānaṃ samanupassati, so evaṃ asamanupassanto na kiñci loke upādiyati, anupādiyaṃ na paritassati, aparitassaṃ paccattaṃyeva parinibbāyatī’’tiādikāhi desanāhi saṃsandati.
“他们全都被这六十二种事端所网罗”等语句,与“诸比丘,凡有任何……宣称,他们全都是在宣称这五种蕴,或其中之某一”等教导(《中部》第3.26经)彼此相应。“身坏命终……人天”——显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbe te imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi antojālīkatā’’tiādi ‘‘ye hi keci bhikkhave…pe… abhivadanti, sabbe te imāneva pañca kāyāni abhivadanti etesaṃ vā aññatara’’ntiādikāhi (ma. ni. 3.26) desanāhi saṃsandati. ‘‘Kāyassa bhedā…pe… devamanussā’’ti –
犹如被风吹灭的火焰,世尊对优波私婆说
达到灭没,不落入名称概念
如是,牟尼从名身解脱,
归于灭没,不堕名称概念之数。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Accī yathā vātavegena khittā, (upasivāti bhagavā) Atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkhaṃ; Evaṃ munī nāmakāyā vimutto, Atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkha’’nti. (su. ni. 1080; cūḷani. 43);
与这些初始等开示相应,这就是「四阵列」模式。显示巴利原文
Ādikāhi desanāhi saṃsandatīti ayaṃ cātubyūho hāro.
转起模式的注释显示巴利原文
Āvattahāravaṇṇanā
“不应造作瞋恨等”这一教导,开显的是忍辱与柔和的修行。其中,以忍辱摄受信、慧、他人所加的伤害以及与苦共处;以柔和摄受戒。由摄受信等,信根乃至一切菩提分法得以转起。由摄受戒,无懊悔等一切戒的功德法得以转起。由“远离杀生等”的教导,即是不放逸住;由此,整个教法的梵行得以转起。摄受具足甚深等殊胜功德之法,便是对大菩提的称扬。因为无碍智是漏尽智的基础,漏尽智的基础即是无碍智,这便是大菩提;由此,十力等一切佛陀功德之法皆得转起。执取“常见”等邪见,则摄受了爱染与无明;由它们,无始的轮回流转便得以转起。“如实了知受的集起”等,是世尊的遍知三清净;由此,以慧波罗蜜为首的一切波罗蜜皆能转起。“不知、不见”这一句,是通过执取无明而把握了不如理作意;由此,以不如理作意为根源的诸法便得以转起。“为爱所困者的焦虑与挣扎”这一句,执取爱染便令九种爱根的诸法转起;而“那也是以触为缘”等语句,则是说明常见等所施设之缘的过患;由此,无常等三相得以转起。“如实了知六触处”,是对解脱成就的阐明;由此,七清净得以转起。“如来的身体已断除有爱的导引线”这一句,便是显示巴利原文
Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatāvacanena khantisoraccānuṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha khantiyā saddhāpaññāparāpakāradukkhasahagatānaṃ saṅgaho, soraccena sīlassa. Saddhādiggahaṇena ca saddhindriyādisakalabodhipakkhiyadhammā āvattanti. Sīlaggahaṇena avippaṭisārādayo sabbepi sīlānisaṃsadhammā āvattanti. Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanena appamādavihāro, tena sakalaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ āvattati. Gambhīratādivisesayuttadhammaggahaṇena mahābodhipakittanaṃ. Anāvaraṇañāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ mahābodhi, tena dasabalādayo sabbe buddhaguṇā āvattanti. Sassatādidiṭṭhiggahaṇena taṇhāvijjāya saṅgaho, tāhi anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭaṃ āvattati. Vedanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtavedanena bhagavato pariññāttayavisuddhi, tāya paññāpāramimukhena sabbapāramiyo āvattanti. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti avijjāggahaṇena ayonisomanasikārapariggaho, tena ca ayonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā āvattanti. ‘‘Taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti taṇhāggahaṇena nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā āvattanti, ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā’’tiādi sassatādipaññāpanassa paccayādhīnavuttidassanaṃ, tena aniccatādilakkhaṇattayaṃ āvattati. Channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānanena vimuttisampadāniddeso, tena sattapi visuddhiyo āvattanti. ‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko tathāgatassa kāyo’’ti taṇhāpahānaṃ, tena bhagavato sakalasaṃkilesappahānaṃ āvattatīti ayaṃ āvatto hāro.
分别模式的注释显示巴利原文
Vibhattihāravaṇṇanā
瞋恨与喜贪等是不善法,它们的近因是不如理作意等。而那些令瞋恨与喜贪等不造作、不现起的法,则是无瞋等善法,它们的近因是如理作意等。其中,瞋恨等唯属欲界,而无瞋等则通于四地。同样地,远离杀生等行为,可以是善的,也可以是无记的;其近因是惭、愧等法。此处,善的远离有些属于欲界,有些是出世间法;而无记的则唯是出世间法。在“诸比丘,还有其它甚深之法”这句话所说的法,有些是善的,有些是无记的。其中,善法的近因是导向出起的观;无记法的近因是道法、观或转向。在这些法中,善法是出世间的,而无记法则有些属于欲界,有些是出世间的。一切的邪见,都只是不善法,唯属欲界;它们共同的近因,是在邪见执取中生起的不如理作意。若进一步加以分别:由于未能摧破相续与密集的假相,从而对‘单一性’之理产生错误执取,即那种伴有追忆过去生的推论,便是常见的近因。由于未能掌握因果相续的关系,从而对‘差异性’之理产生错误执取,即那种附带着生起相适应的召集,便是断见的显示巴利原文
Āghātānandādayo akusalā dhammā, tesaṃ ayonisomanasikārādi padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yehi pana dhammehi āghātānandādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ appavatti, te abyāpādādayo kusalā dhammā, tesaṃ yonisomanasikārādi padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tesu āghātādayo kāmāvacarāva, abyāpādādayo catubhūmakā. Tathā pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirati kusalā vā abyākatā vā, tassā hirottappādayo dhammā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha kusalā siyā kāmāvacarā, siyā lokuttarā, abyākatā lokuttarāva. ‘‘Atthi bhikkhave aññeva dhammā gambhīrā’’ti vuttadhammā siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā, tattha kusalānaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Abyākatānaṃ maggadhammā, vipassanā, āvajjanā vā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tesu kusalā lokuttarā, abyākatā siyā kāmāvacarā, siyā lokuttarā, sabbāpi diṭṭhiyo akusalāva kāmāvacarāva, tāsaṃ avisesena micchābhinivese ayonisomanasikāro padaṭṭhānaṃ. Visesato pana santatighanavinibbhogābhāvato ekattanayassa micchāgāho atītajātianussaraṇatakkasahito sassatadiṭṭhiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Hetuphalabhāvena sambandhabhāvassa aggahaṇato nānattanayassa micchāgāho tajjāsamannāhārasahito ucchedadiṭṭhiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ sesadiṭṭhīnampi yathāsambhavaṃ vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Vedanāna’’nti ettha vedanā siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā, siyā kāmāvacarā, siyā rūpāvacarā, siyā arūpāvacarā, phasso tāsaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vedanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtavedanaṃ maggañāṇaṃ, anupādāvimutti phalaṃ , tesaṃ ‘‘aññeva dhammā gambhīrā’’ti ettha vuttanayena dhammādivibhāgo netabbo. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’ntiādīsu avijjā taṇhā akusalā kāmāvacarā, tāsu avijjāya āsavā, ayonisomanasikāro eva vā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Taṇhāya saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādadassanaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ettha phassassa vedanāya viya dhammādivibhāgo veditabbo. Iminā nayena phassāyatanādīnampi yathārahaṃ dhammādivibhāgo netabboti ayaṃ vibhattihāro.
这是关于「旋转理趣」的注释。显示巴利原文
Parivattahāravaṇṇanā
不作瞋恨等行,通过长养忍辱与柔和,并以思择修习之力成就,能带来利益自他的行道。然而,若瞋恨等持续现行,则会令容貌丑陋、眠卧不安、损减财富、败坏声名、令人难以亲近,最终在地狱等处招致大苦。远离杀生等行,会次第带来无懊悔等善果。反之,造作杀生等行,则会次第带来追悔等不善果。与甚深等特质相应之智,能随其所应调伏可度化者,带来明与神通等殊胜功德,这是因为它能如实彻知一切所知法的自性。反之,缺乏甚深等特质之智,则因对所知法有所障碍,而不会带来如上所述的殊胜功德。一切邪见,如其所应,或因执取常见,或因执取断见,而成为两个极端;因其本质不具出离的特质,故无法超越“有身”此岸。然而,正见及其资具,则因具备出离的特质,而成为中道,能度越有身此岸,抵达彼岸。如实觉知受的集起等,其本身即是道,能带来无取著的解脱。对受的集起等未能如实通达,则会形成对轮回牢狱的封锁,因为它成为诸行的缘。愚痴能遮蔽感受的真实本质,并带来对感受的欣喜。而对它施以如实觉照,则显示巴利原文
Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ khantisoraccāni anubrūhetvā paṭisaṅkhānabhāvanābalasiddhiyā ubhayahitapaṭipattiṃ āvahati. Āghātādayo pana pavattiyamānā dubbaṇṇataṃ dukkhaseyyaṃ bhogahāniṃ akittiṃ parehi durupasaṅkamanatañca nipphādentā nirayādīsu mahādukkhaṃ āvahanti. Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirati avippaṭisārādikalyāṇaṃ paramparaṃ āvahati. Pāṇātipātādi pana vippaṭisārādiakalyāṇaṃ paramparaṃ, gambhīratādivisesayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ vineyyānaṃ yathārahaṃ vijjābhiññādiguṇavisesaṃ āvahati sabbañeyyaṃ yathāsabhāvāvabodhato. Tathā gambhīratādivisesarahitaṃ pana ñāṇaṃ ñeyyesu sāvaraṇato yathāvuttaguṇavisesaṃ nāvahati. Sabbāpi cetā diṭṭhiyo yathārahaṃ sassatucchedabhāvato antadvayabhūtā sakkāyatīraṃ nātivattanti aniyyānikasabhāvattā. Niyyānikasabhāvattā pana sammādiṭṭhi saparikkhārā majjhimapaṭipadābhūtā atikkamma sakkāyatīraṃ pāraṃ āgacchati. Vedanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtavedanaṃ anupādāvimuttiṃ āvahati maggabhāvato. Vedanānaṃ samudayādiasampaṭivedho saṃsāracārakāvarodhaṃ āvahati saṅkhārānaṃ paccayabhāvato. Vedayitasabhāvapaṭicchādako sammoho tadabhinandanaṃ āvahati . Yathābhūtāvabodho pana tattha nibbedaṃ virāgañca āvahati. Micchābhinivese ayonisomanasikārasahitā taṇhā anekavihitaṃ diṭṭhijālaṃ pasāreti. Yathāvuttataṇhāsamucchedo paṭhamamaggo taṃ diṭṭhijālaṃ saṅkoceti. Sassatavādādipaññāpanassa phasso paccayo hoti asati phasse tadabhāvato. Diṭṭhibandhanabandhānaṃ phassāyatanādīnaṃ anirodhena phassādianirodho saṃsāradukkhassa anivattiyeva, yāthāvato phassāyatanādipariññā sabbadiṭṭhidassanāni ativattati, phassāyatanādiapariññā taṃdiṭṭhigahanaṃ nātivattati, bhavanettisamucchedo āyatiṃ attabhāvassa anibbattiyā saṃvattati, asamucchinnāya bhavanettiyā anāgate bhavappabandho parivattatiyevāti ayaṃ parivatto hāro.
这是关于「同义语理趣」的注释。显示巴利原文
Vevacanahāravaṇṇanā
“我的”、“我所拥有的”、“属于我的”为同义语。“比丘们”、“沙门”、“苦行者”为同义语。“其他”、“异类”、“敌对者”为同义语。“毁誉”、“恶名”、“讥嫌”为同义语。“可说”、“可论”、“可作”为同义语。“法及其律”、“大师的教法”为同义语。“僧伽的”、“大众的”、“群体的”为同义语。“于彼处”、“于彼”、“于其等中”为同义语。“由你们”、“对你们”、“贤者们”为同义语。“嗔恨”、“嗔恚”、“恼害”为同义语。“不满”、“忧”、“心所苦”为同义语。“心不乐”、“心的嗔恚”、“心的嗔恨”为同义语。“不应作”、“不应令生起”、“不应转起”为同义语。依此类推,于一切语句中应说明同义语。此为“同义语”之释。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mama mayhaṃ me’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhave samaṇā tapassino’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Pare aññe paṭiviruddhā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Avaṇṇaṃ akittiṃ ninda’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhāseyyuṃ bhaṇeyyuṃ kareyyu’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Dhammassa vinayassa satthusāsanassā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghassa samūhassa gaṇassā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Tatra tattha tesū’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Tumhehi vo bhavantehī’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Āghāto doso byāpādo’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Appaccayo domanassaṃ cetasikadukkha’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Cetaso anabhiraddhi cittassa byāpatti manopadoso’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Na karaṇīyā na uppādetabbā na pavattetabbā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Iti iminā nayena sabbapadesu vevacanaṃ vattabbanti ayaṃ vevacano hāro.
「施设」的解释显示巴利原文
Paññattihāravaṇṇanā
“嗔”依事由,施设为十种或十九种。“不满”依近伺察,施设为六种。而“喜悦”等,依方式施设为九种。“喜”总的来说,依小喜等差别施设为五种。“悦”依近伺察施设为六种。“戒”依禁止与行持等施设为多种。与甚深性等殊胜相结合的“智”,依心的生起施设为四种或十二种,又依所缘境的差别施设为多种。“邪见”依常见等施设为六十二种分类,亦依其中所包含的细分施设为多种。“受”施设为六种、一百零八种及多种。受的“集”施设为五种;“灭”亦同样施设。“味”施设为两种。“过患”施设为三种。“出离”施设为一种及四种……(中略)……“无取解脱”施设为两种。显示巴利原文
Āghāto vatthuvasena dasavidhena ekūnavīsatividhena vā paññatto. Appaccayo upavicāravasena chadhā paññatto. Ānandopītiādivasena navadhā paññatto. Pīti sāmaññato khuddikādivasena pañcadhā paññattā. Somanassaṃ upavicāravasena chadhā paññattaṃ. Sīlaṃ vārittacārittādivasena anekadhā paññattaṃ. Gambhīratādivisesayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ cittuppādavasena catudhā, dvādasavidhena vā, visayabhedato anekadhā ca paññattaṃ. Diṭṭhisassatādivasena dvāsaṭṭhiyā bhedehi, tadantogadhavibhāgena anekadhā ca paññattā. Vedanā chadhā aṭṭhasatadhā anekadhā ca paññattā. Tassā samudayo pañcadhā paññatto, tathā atthaṅgamo. Assādo duvidhena paññatto. Ādīnavo tividhena paññatto. Nissaraṇaṃ ekadhā catudhā ca paññattaṃ…pe… anupādāvimutti duvidhena paññattā.
“对不知者、不见者”所说的“无明”,依所缘的不同,施设为四种和八种。“为渴爱所缚者”等所说的“渴爱”,施设为六种、一百零八种及多种。“触”依所依的差别施设为六种。“取”施设为四种。“有”施设为两种及多种。“生”从同义语的角度,施设为六种。“老”亦如是,施设为七种。“死”施设为八种和九种。“忧”施设为五种。“悲”施设为六种。“苦”施设为四种,“忧”(此处指忧受)亦然。“恼”施设为四种。“生起集”的说法是对“生起”的施设;“如实了知”的说法则是对苦的遍知施设、对集的断除施设、对灭的作证施设、对道的修习施设。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti vuttā avijjā visayabhedena catudhā aṭṭhadhā ca paññattā. ‘‘Taṇhāgatāna’’ntiādinā vuttā taṇhā chadhā aṭṭhasatadhā anekadhā ca paññattā. Phasso nissayavasena chadhā paññatto. Upādānaṃ catudhā paññattaṃ. Bhavo dvidhā anekadhā ca paññatto. Jāti vevacanavasena chadhā paññattā. Tathā jarā sattadhā paññattā. Maraṇaṃ aṭṭhadhā navadhā ca paññattaṃ. Soko pañcadhā paññatto. Paridevo chadhā paññatto. Dukkhaṃ catudhā paññattaṃ, tathā domanassaṃ. Upāyāso catudhā paññatto. ‘‘Samudayo hotī’’ti pabhavapaññatti, ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti dukkhassa pariññāpaññatti, samudayassa pahānapaññatti, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāpaññatti, maggassa bhāvanāpaññatti.
“落入网中者”等,是统摄一切见的施设。“已断有爱之根者”等,是“般涅槃”的两种施设。同样,对于嗔等不善法以及善等诸法,应依“从它们的生起而施设”等方式分析;亦应依“嗔”是“瞋恚”的同义语施设、“不满”是“忧”的同义语施设等理趣,分别阐明施设的差别。这便是施设的理趣。显示巴利原文
‘‘Antojālīkatā’’tiādi sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ saṅgahapaññatti. ‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko’’tiādi duvidhena parinibbānapaññatti. Evaṃ āghātādīnaṃ akusalakusalādidhammānaṃ yathāpabhavapaññattiādivasena, tathā ‘‘āghāto’’ti byāpādassa vevacanapaññatti, ‘‘appaccayo’’ti domanassassa vevacanapaññattītiādinā nayena paññattibhedo vibhajitabboti ayaṃ paññattihāro.
「入理解」的解释显示巴利原文
Otaraṇahāravaṇṇanā
从“嗔”的归摄来说,即收入行蕴;同样,从“不喜悦”的归摄,也收入行蕴。从“不满”的归摄,则收入受蕴。这是从蕴门径的摄入。
同样,将“嗔”等法归摄,便摄入了法处、法界、苦谛或集谛。这是从处、界、谛门径的摄入。
再者,与嗔等同时生起的无明,它们之间以因缘、俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离去缘而结成缘;那些不同时生起的,则以无间缘、等无间缘、无间依止缘、离去缘、不离去缘、习行缘而结成缘;中间有间隔的,唯以亲依止缘而结成缘。对于渴爱、取等,以及触等诸法,无论同时生起与否,亦应依相应情形说明其缘相。其中,有些以增上缘力、有些以业缘力、有些以食缘力、有些以根缘力、有些以禅那缘力、有些以道缘力而成为缘,这些差别亦当了知。这是从缘起门径的摄入。
至于喜悦等,亦以同样理趣,显示从蕴等门径的摄入。显示巴利原文
Āghātaggahaṇena saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgaho, tathā anabhiraddhigahaṇena. Appaccayaggahaṇena vedanākkhandhasaṅgahoti idaṃ khandhamukhena otaraṇaṃ. Tathā āghātādiggahaṇena dhammāyatanaṃ dhammadhātu dukkhasaccaṃ samudayasaccaṃ vā gahitanti idaṃ āyatanamukhena dhātumukhena saccamukhena ca otaraṇaṃ. Tathā āghātādīnaṃ sahajātā avijjā hetusahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo hoti, asahajātā pana anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanapaccayehi paccayo hoti, anantarā upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti . Taṇhāupādānādīnaṃ, phassādīnampi tesaṃ sahajātānaṃ asahajātānañca yathārahaṃ paccayabhāvo vattabbo. Koci panettha adhipativasena, koci kammavasena, koci āhāravasena, koci indriyavasena, koci jhānavasena, koci maggavasenapi paccayo hotīti. Ayampi viseso veditabboti idaṃ paṭiccasamuppādamukhena otaraṇaṃ. Ānandādīnampi imināva nayena khandhādimukhena otaraṇaṃ vibhāvetabbaṃ.
同样,戒是对杀生等的远离思心所,以及无瞋等心所法;杀生等本身即是思。这些法及助成它们的惭愧等法,皆收摄于行蕴、法处等。应按照前述方式,从蕴等门径阐明此种摄入。对智、见、受、无明、渴爱等的把握,亦适用此方法。
对出离、无取、解脱的把握,还应通过无为界,从界门径阐明摄入。
同样,通过“诸受……乃至……无取解脱”这段经文,世尊的戒等五法蕴,以及念住等菩提分法,皆已阐明,故亦当知从彼门径的摄入。
而“那也缘于触”等文句,通过显明对见与施设的缘、过患等的说明,即以无常门径而摄入;同样,法性如此,即以缘起门径而摄入;无常本身即是苦、无我,故亦以无愿门径和空门径而摄入。其余语句亦是此理。这便是所谓的入理趣。显示巴利原文
Tathā sīlaṃ pāṇātipātādīhi viraticetanā, abyāpādādicetasikadhammā ca, pāṇātipātādayo cetanāva, tesaṃ tadupakārakadhammānañca lajjādayādīnaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhadhammāyatanādisaṅgaho, purimanayeneva khandhādimukhena ca otaraṇaṃ vibhāvetabbaṃ. Esa nayo ñāṇadiṭṭhivedanāavijjātaṇhādiggahaṇesu. Nissaraṇaanupādāvimuttigahaṇesu asaṅkhatadhātuvasenapi dhātumukhena otaraṇaṃ vibhāvetabbaṃ. Tathā ‘‘vedanānaṃ…pe… anupādāvimutto’’ti etena bhagavato sīlādayo pañca dhammakkhandhā, satipaṭṭhānādayo ca bodhipakkhiyadhammā pakāsitā hontīti taṃ mukhenapi otaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti diṭṭhipaññāpanassa paccayādhīnavuttitādīpanena aniccatāmukhena otaraṇaṃ, tathā evaṃdhammatāya paṭiccasamuppādamukhena otaraṇaṃ, aniccassa dukkhānattabhāvato appaṇihitamukhena suññatāmukhena ca otaraṇaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayoti ayaṃ otaraṇo hāro.
清净理趣的解释显示巴利原文
Sodhanahāravaṇṇanā
“或说我……乃至……说”一语为开始。“说法……乃至……说僧伽……乃至……说”一语,是句清净,而非开始清净。“在那里,你们……乃至……应作”一语,既是句清净,也是开始清净。第二种方式等,亦同此理。同样地,“然而,此是微小者”等语为开始。“何者是”等语为提问。“舍离杀生”等语,是句清净,而非开始清净,也不是提问清净。“此即是”等语,则既是提问清净,也是句清净,也是开始清净。显示巴利原文
‘‘Mamaṃ vā…pe… bhāseyyu’’nti ārambho. ‘‘Dhammassa…pe… saṅghassa…pe… bhāseyyu’’nti padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi. ‘‘Tatra tumhehi…pe… karaṇīyā’’ti padasuddhi ceva ārambhasuddhi ca. Dutiyanayādīsupi eseva nayo . Tathā ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādi ārambho. ‘‘Katama’’ntiādi pucchā. ‘‘Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādi padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi, no ca pucchāsuddhi. ‘‘Idaṃ kho’’tiādi pucchāsuddhi ceva padasuddhi ca ārambhasuddhi ca.
同样地,“诸比丘,有”等为开始。“哪些是那些?”等为提问。“诸比丘,存在”等为开始。“什么?”等,既是开始,也是提问。“如已定”等是句清净,不是开始清净,也不是提问清净。“这些即是”等,则既是句清净,也是提问清净,也是开始清净。依此方式,便能于一切处了解开始等。这便是清净的纲领。显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādi ārambho. ‘‘Katame ca te’’tiādi pucchā. ‘‘Santi bhikkhave’’tiādi ārambho. ‘‘Ki’’ntiādi ārambha pucchā. ‘‘Yathāsamāhite’’tiādi padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi no ca pucchāsuddhi. ‘‘Ime kho te’’tiādi padasuddhi ceva pucchāsuddhi ca ārambhasuddhi ca. Iminā nayena sabbattha ārambhādayo veditabbāti. Ayaṃ sodhano hāro.
这是「安立纲领」(Adhiṭṭhānahāravaṇṇanā)的注释。显示巴利原文
Adhiṭṭhānahāravaṇṇanā
“非难”:先从共相安立,不作分别,而具体说为“或说我、或说法、或说僧伽”。在白分中,也是同样的方法。显示巴利原文
‘‘Avaṇṇa’’nti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ taṃ, avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘mamaṃ vā dhammassa vā saṅghassa vā’’ti. Sukkapakkhepi eseva nayo.
同样,「戒」先以总相安立,随后不加分别,即以别相说“远离杀生”等。显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘sīla’’nti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādi.
“其他诸法”等:先以总相安立,随后不加分别,即以别相说“比丘们,如来对此了知”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Aññeva dhammā’’tiādi sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘tayidaṃ bhikkhave tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādi.
同样,「前际论者」等:先以总相安立,随后不加分别,即以别相说“常住论者”等。依此理则,于一切处应抉择总相与别相。这就是「安立纲领」。显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘pubbantakappikā’’tiādi sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘sassatavādā’’tiādi. Iminā nayena sabbattha sāmaññaviseso niddhāretabboti ayaṃ adhiṭṭhāno hāro.
这是「资助纲领」(Parikkhārahāravaṇṇanā)的注释。显示巴利原文
Parikkhārahāravaṇṇanā
瞋恚等的因,是“他对我作不利益事”等十九种瞋恚事。喜等的因,是于所缘的强烈爱著。戒的因,是惭、愧、少欲等。以“深奥”等语所说的法,以一切波罗蜜为因,尤以般若波罗蜜为最。邪见的共通因,是亲近恶人、听闻恶法,以及由邪执而生的非理作意;其中,对于常住论者等,忆念过去生等则是其特有之因。受的因,是无明、渴爱、业与触。无取解脱的因,是圣道。所施设的因,是非理作意。渴爱的因,是于结缚法随观乐味。触的因是六处,六处的因是名色。有爱之断的因,是清净修习。这便是资助纲领。显示巴利原文
Āghātādīnaṃ ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādīni (dha. sa. 1237; vibha. 909) ca ekūnavīsati āghātavatthūni hetu. Ānandādīnaṃ ārammaṇe abhisineho hetu. Sīlassa hiriottappaṃ appicchatādayo ca hetu. ‘‘Gambhīrā’’tiādinā vuttadhammassa sabbāpi pāramiyo hetu, visesena paññāpāramī. Diṭṭhīnaṃ asappurisūpassayo, asaddhammassavanaṃ, micchābhinivesena ayonisomanasikāro ca avisesena hetu, visesena pana sassatavādādīnaṃ atītajātianussaraṇādi hetu. Vedanānaṃ avijjātaṇhākammāni phasso ca hetu. Anupādāvimuttiyā ariyamaggo hetu. Paññāpanassa ayonisomanasikāro hetu. Taṇhāya saṃyojaniyesu assādānupassanā hetu. Phassassa chaḷāyatanāni, chaḷāyatanassa nāmarūpaṃ hetu. Bhavanettisamucchedassa visuddhibhāvanā hetūti ayaṃ parikkhāro hāro.
这是「归因方式」(Samāropanahāravaṇṇanā)的注释。显示巴利原文
Samāropanahāravaṇṇanā
以“不应作瞋恚等”的说法,显示了忍辱的圆满。以“这只是微小事”等语,显示了调柔的圆满;以“诸比丘,有……”等语,显示了智的圆满;以“不执取而各自证知寂灭”以及“对于诸受……如实了知后无取解脱”等语,显示了与定圆满相伴的明与解脱自在的圆满。其中,忍辱圆满由思择力成就,是调柔圆满的近因。调柔圆满的意义即是戒;如此,宣说远离杀生等,也是为显示戒的同义异名分类。在这里,戒是定的近因,定是慧的近因。其中,由戒成就违犯的断除、恶行染污的断除;由定成就缠缚的断除、镇伏的断除、渴爱染污的断除;由慧成就邪见染污的断除、正断的断除、随眠的断除。因此,通过戒、定、慧这三法蕴,圆满止观的修习,成就三种断除——这便是归因的方式。显示巴利原文
Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatāvacanena khantisampadā dassitā hoti. ‘‘Appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādinā soraccasampadā, ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādinā ñāṇasampadā, ‘‘aparāmasato cassa paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā’’ti, ‘‘vedanānaṃ…pe… yathābhūtaṃ viditvā anupādāvimutto’’ti etehi samādhisampadāya saddhiṃ vijjāvimuttivasībhāvasampadā dassitā hoti. Tattha khantisampadā paṭisaṅkhānabalasiddhito soraccasampadāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Soraccasampadā pana atthato sīlameva, tathā pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanaṃ sīlassa pariyāyavibhāgadassanatthaṃ. Tattha sīlaṃ samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ, samādhi paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tesu sīlena vītikkamappahānaṃ duccaritasaṃkilesappahānañca sijjhati, samādhinā pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, taṇhāsaṃkilesappahānañca sijjhati. Paññāya diṭṭhisaṃkilesappahānaṃ, samucchedappahānaṃ, anusayappahānañca sijjhatīti sīlādīhi tīhi dhammakkhandhehi samathavipassanābhāvanāpāripūrī, pahānattayasiddhi cāti ayaṃ samāropano hāro.
「五类方式」的注释。显示巴利原文
Pañcavidhanayavaṇṇanā
「欢喜转起方式」的注释。显示巴利原文
Nandiyāvaṭṭanayavaṇṇanā
以宣说不应作瞋恚等,显示了渴爱与无明的收缩。因为,当对“我所”“我”等事物怀有爱著与失念时,便以“他对我作了不利之事”等方式生起瞋恚。同样,通过宣说“远离杀生”等,以及“各自证知寂灭,无取解脱,对于六触处……如实了知”等,显示了渴爱与无明的究竟断除。而这些渴爱与无明,通过“前际论者”等词及“不知、不见”等语,以其自相被显示出来;它们以色法和无色法为所依。止与观依次是它们的对治。心解脱与慧解脱是它们的果。其中,渴爱,或渴爱与无明,是集谛;作为其依处的色法与无色法是苦谛;它们的止息是灭谛;了知灭的止与观是道谛。应如此了知四谛的联结。在此,依渴爱可以统摄一切不善分:如谄、诳、慢、过慢、放逸、恶欲、恶友、无惭、无愧等。同样,依无明可以统摄一切不善分:如颠倒作意、忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、暴恶、恶口、有见、无有见等。与上述相反,依无谄、无诳、不颠倒作意,以及属于止分的信根等、属于观分的无常想等,可以统摄一切善分。这便是喜转起方式的基础。显示巴利原文
Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇavacanena taṇhāvijjāsaṅkoco dassito hoti. Sati hi attattaniyavatthūsu sinehe sammose ca ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1237, vibha. 909) āghāto jāyatīti, tathā ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādivacanehi , ‘‘paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā, anupādāvimutto, channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ…pe… yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’tiādīhi vacanehi ca taṇhāvijjānaṃ accantappahānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tāsaṃ pana pubbantakappikādipadehi ‘‘ajānataṃ apassata’’ntiādipadehi ca sarūpato dassitānaṃ taṇhāvijjānaṃ rūpadhammā arūpadhammā ca adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathākkamaṃ samatho ca vipassanā ca paṭipakkho. Tesaṃ cetovimutti paññāvimutti ca phalaṃ. Tattha taṇhā, taṇhāvijjā vā samudayasaccaṃ, tadadhiṭṭhānabhūtā rūpārūpadhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, tesaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā samathavipassanā maggasaccanti evaṃ catusaccayojanā veditabbā. Taṇhāggahaṇena cettha māyāsāṭheyyamānātimānamadappamādapāpicchatāpāpamittatāahirikānottappādivasena sabbo akusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā avijjāggahaṇena viparītamanasikārakodhupanāhamakkhapalāsaissāmacchariyasārambhadovacassatā- bhavadiṭṭhivibhavadiṭṭhādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo. Vuttavipariyāyena amāyāasāṭheyyādiaviparītamanasikārādivasena, tathā samathapakkhiyānaṃ saddhindriyādīnaṃ, vipassanāpakkhiyānañca aniccasaññādīnaṃ vasena kusalapakkho netabboti. Ayaṃ nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa bhūmi.
「三洞方式」的注释。显示巴利原文
Tipukkhalanayavaṇṇanā
通过宣说不应作嗔恚等语,成就无嗔;同样,通过远离杀生、粗恶语等,也成就无嗔。通过宣说不应作喜悦等语,成就无贪;同样,通过远离非梵行等,也成就无贪。而通过远离不与取等语,则同时成就两者。通过“诸比丘,如来了知此……”等语,成就无痴。如此,以三不善根统摄,从其对立面并由宣说不应作嗔恚等语,三善根自然成就。其中,依三不善根可展开一切不善分:如三种恶行、染污、垢秽、不平等、不善想、不善思惟、非正法等。同样,依三善根可显示一切善分:如三种善行、清净、平等、善想、善思惟、慧、正法、定、解脱门、解脱等。这里也应了知四谛的联结。如何了知?贪,或一切善与不善根,是集谛;由它们所生、作为它们依处与行境的取蕴,是苦谛……依此应如此了知四谛的联结。这就是“三聚理趣”的范围。显示巴利原文
Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇavacanena adosasiddhi, tathā pāṇātipātapharusavācāhi paṭivirativacanena. Ānandādīnaṃ akaraṇavacanena alobhasiddhi, tathā abrahmacariyato paṭivirativacanena. Adinnādānādīhi pana paṭivirativacanena ubhayasiddhi. ‘‘Tayidaṃ bhikkhave tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādinā amohasiddhi. Iti tīhi akusalamūlehi gahitehi tappaṭipakkhato, āghātādiakaraṇavacanena ca tīṇi kusalamūlāni siddhāniyeva honti. Tattha tīhi akusalamūlehi tividhaduccaritasaṃkilesamalavisamākusalasaññāvitakkāsaddhammādivasena sabbo akusalapakkho vitthāretabbo. Tathā tīhi kusalamūlehi tividhasucaritavodānasamakusalasaññāvitakkapaññāsaddhammasamādhi- vimokkhamukhavimokkhādivasena sabbo kusalapakkho vibhāvetabbo. Etthāpi ca saccayojanā veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Lobho sabbāni vā kusalākusalamūlāni samudayasaccaṃ, tehi pana nibbattā tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānagocarabhūtā upādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccantiādinā nayena saccayojanā veditabbāti ayaṃ tipukkhalassa nayassa bhūmi.
「狮子游戏方式」的注释。显示巴利原文
Sīhavikkīḷitanayavavaṇṇanā
通过宣说不应作嗔恚与喜悦等语,成就念。因为念正是在有罪过与无罪过之中,观察了过患与利益之后,舍断有罪过、持守无罪过而转起。同样,通过远离邪命等语,成就精进。因为精进驱除了欲寻、嗔寻与害寻,而精进所成办的就是活命遍净戒。通过远离杀生等语,也成就念。因为念正是在有罪过与无罪过之中,观察了过患与利益之后,舍断有罪过、持守无罪过而转起。也正因此,那个念也被表述为“现起为面向所缘的状态”。通过“诸比丘,如来了知此……”等语,成就定与慧。因为慧具有如实通达的作用,而定心的人则能如实了知。同样地,通过“常、恒”等语,在无常中生起“常”的颠倒;通过“无病、超越死亡、纯粹乐者、于现法证得涅槃的我”等语,在苦中生起“乐”的颠倒;通过“具足五欲功德”等语,在不净中生起“净”的颠倒;又通过一切明示邪见的语句,在无我中生起“我”的颠倒。如此,在此处便确立了四种颠倒。从这四种颠倒的对立面来说,四念处也就自然确立了。于此,应当用四种根性来说明那四种人。显示巴利原文
Āghātānandanādīnaṃ akaraṇavacanena satisiddhi. Satiyā hi sāvajjānavajje, tattha ca ādīnavānisaṃse sallakkhetvā sāvajjaṃ pahāya anavajjaṃ samādāya vattatīti. Tathā micchājīvā paṭivirativacanena vīriyasiddhi. Vīriyena hi kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāvitakke vinodeti, vīriyasādhanañca ājīvapārisuddhisīlanti. Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanena satisiddhi. Satiyā hi sāvajjānavajje, tattha ca ādīnavānisaṃse sallakkhetvā sāvajjaṃ pahāya anavajjaṃ samādāya vattati. Tathā hi sā ‘‘visayābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti ca vuccati. ‘‘Tayidaṃ bhikkhave tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādinā samādhipaññāsiddhi. Paññāya hi yathābhūtāvabodho, samāhito ca yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti. Tathā ‘‘nicco dhuvo’’tiādinā anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāso, ‘‘arogo paraṃ maraṇā, ekantasukhī attā diṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto’’ti ca evamādīhi asukhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallāso, ‘‘pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito’’tiādinā asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāso, sabbeheva ca diṭṭhidīpakapadehi anattani ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāsoti evamettha cattāro vipallāsā siddhā honti, tesaṃ paṭipakkhato cattāri satipaṭṭhānāni siddhāneva honti. Tattha catūhi indriyehi cattāro puggalā niddisitabbā.
如何说明?爱行者有两种:钝根与利根;见行者也是如此。其中,第一种——爱行的钝根者——对于“不净为净”的颠倒见,以念力如实观察身体的自性后,便进入正性决定。第二种——爱行的利根者——对于“苦为乐”的颠倒见,通过“已生起的欲寻,他不容忍……”等文中所说、名为精进防护的精进力,摧毁了那个颠倒。第三种——见行的钝根者——对于“无常为常”的非如实执取,以止力,由于心得定的状态,如实通达诸行的刹那性。第四种——见行的利根者——对于仅由触法等法聚合而成、原本无我之物错误地执著为“我”的邪执,通过四种空作意,摧毁了那个邪执。于此,通过这四种颠倒,可以归结由四漏、四暴流、四轭、四身系、四无去、四渴爱、四取、七识住、不遍知等所摄的一切不善分。同样,通过四念处,也可以归结由四种禅那、四种住、四种增上、能引乐法、四无量、四正勤、四神足等所摄的一切清净分。这就是狮子游戏理趣的范围。于此,也应该知道:以净想、乐想,或以四种颠倒,作为集谛;以作为它们所依所缘的五取蕴,作为苦谛……显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Duvidho hi taṇhācarito mudindriyo ca tikkhindriyo cāti, tathā diṭṭhicarito. Tesu paṭhamo asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti vipallattadiṭṭhi satibalena yathābhūtaṃ kāyasabhāvaṃ sallakkhetvā sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati. Dutiyo asukhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallattadiṭṭhi ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.14; 6.58) vuttena vīriyasaṃvarasaṅkhātena vīriyabalena taṃ vipallāsaṃ vidhamati. Tatiyo anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti ayāthāvagāhī samathabalena samāhitabhāvato saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikabhāvaṃ yathābhūtaṃ paṭivijjhati. Catuttho santatisamūhakiccārammaṇaghanavicittattā phassādidhammapuñjamatte anattani ‘‘attā’’ti micchābhinivesī catukoṭikasuññatāmanasikārena taṃ micchābhinivesaṃ viddhaṃseti. Catūhi cettha vipallāsehi caturāsavoghayogakāyaganthaagatitaṇhuppādupādānasattaviññāṇaṭṭhitiapariññādivasena sabbo akusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā catūhi satipaṭṭhānehi catubbidhajhānavihārādhiṭṭhānasukhabhāgiyadhammaappamaññāsammappadhānaiddhipādādivasena sabbo vodānapakkho netabboti ayaṃ sīhavikkīḷitassa nayassa bhūmi. Idhāpi subhasaññāsukhasaññāhi, catūhipi vā vipallāsehi samudayasaccaṃ , tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānārammaṇabhūtā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccantiādinā saccayojanā veditabbā.
方位观察与钩——两种理趣的解释显示巴利原文
Disālocanaaṅkusanayadvayavaṇṇanā
如此,当三种义趣成立时,两种言说理趣也就自然得以成立。正是:对作为义趣之方位的诸法进行观察,即名为“方位观察”;将它们归纳统一,即名为“钩”——由此,五种理趣便都得到了运用。显示巴利原文
Iti tiṇṇaṃ atthanayānaṃ siddhiyā vohāranayadvayampi siddhameva hoti. Tathā hi atthanayadisābhūtadhammānaṃ samālocanaṃ disālocanaṃ, tesaṃ samānayanaṃ aṅkusoti niyuttā pañca nayā.
教法发趣的解释显示巴利原文
Sāsanapaṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
在十六种经发趣中,此经属“杂染随眠的有学分”,或即只是“杂染通达的有学分”。而在二十八种经发趣中,当知此经被归为:世间与出世间、七法增上、智、所知、见、修习、自说他说、应解释不应解释、善与不善、允许与不允许。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ suttaṃ soḷasavidhe suttantapaṭṭhāne saṃkilesavāsanāsekkhabhāgiyaṃ, saṃkilesanibbedhāsekkhabhāgiyameva vā. Aṭṭhavīsatividhe pana suttantapaṭṭhāne lokiyalokuttaraṃ sattadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇañeyyadassanabhāvanaṃ sakavacanaparavacanaṃ vissajjanīyāvissajjanīyaṃ kusalākusalaṃ anuññātapaṭikkhittañcāti veditabbaṃ.